Sie sind auf Seite 1von 506

SERVICE MANUAL

Color Large Format Inkjet Printer

EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800


4880/4880C

SEIJ04008
Notice:
„ All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
„ The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
„ All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON
would greatly appreciate being informed of them.
„ The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences
thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.

Copyright © 2007 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.


Imaging Product CS,PL & Environmental Management
PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1)Personal injury and 2) damage to equipment.

DANGER Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in
performing procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.
WARNING Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.

The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.

DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE
OR REPAIR PROCEDURES.
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR
ALL ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL
INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON
POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.

WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING
PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT
TO THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR
REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-
STATIC WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF
SECOND-SOURCE ICs OR OTHER NON-APPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON
WARRANTY.
6. WHEN AIR DUSTRE IS USED ON THE REPAIR AND THE MAINTENANCE WORK, THE USE OF THE AIR DUSTER PRODUCTS
CONTAINING THE INFLAMMABLE GAS IS PROHIBITED.
About This Manual
This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of the printer. The instructions and
procedures included herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the preceding page.

Manual Configuration Symbols Used in this Manual


This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix. Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional
CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a
Provides a general overview and specifications of the product. procedure or an action. Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and
CHAPTER 2.OPERATING PRINCIPLES always read NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
Describes the theory of electrical and mechanical operations of
the product. Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
CHAPTER 3.TROUBLESHOOTING condition that is necessary to keep the product’s quality.
Describes the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 4.DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY
Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or
assembling the product.
condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to,
CHAPTER 5.ADJUSTMENT
or destruction of, equipment.
Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment.
CHAPTER 6.MAINTENANCE
Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
Epson-approved lubricants and adhesives required for servicing condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may
the product. also provide additional information that is related to a specific
APPENDIX Provides the following additional information for reference: subject, or comment on the results achieved through a previous
• Connector pin assignments action.
• Electrical circuit boards schematics
• Exploded diagram & Parts List Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss
of life.

Indicates that a particular task must be carried out according to a


certain standard after disassembly and before re-assembly,
otherwise the quality of the components in question may be
adversely affected.
Revision Status

Revision Date of Issue Description


A Jun. 2, 2005 First release
B May. 25, 2007 Revised contents:
[Chapter 3]
Recovery (p.163) was changed.
[Chapter 5]
• Procedures were partially changed in 5.1.4 Adjustment Items classified by Part/Unit (p.368).
• 5.8 Installing Firmware for SP 4400 (4-color model) after replacing Main Board with New one (p.445) was added.
C September. 12, 2007 Revised Contents:
[All chapters]
• Information on Stylus 4450/4880/4880C has been added.
EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Contents
Chapter 1 Product Description 1.6.2 IEEE1394 Interface .................................................................................. 107
1.6.3 Optional Interface ..................................................................................... 108
1.1 Product Description ............................................................................................. 10 1.6.4 Supplements.............................................................................................. 110
1.1.1 Comparison with Stylus Pro 4000 .............................................................. 10
1.7 Optional Units and Consumables ...................................................................... 111
1.1.2 Features....................................................................................................... 11
1.7.1 Ink Cartridge............................................................................................. 111
1.2 Basic Specifications............................................................................................. 13 1.7.2 Cleaning cartridge..................................................................................... 112
1.2.1 Print Specifications ..................................................................................... 13 1.7.3 Maintenance Tank .................................................................................... 112
1.2.2 Character Specification............................................................................... 14
1.2.3 Control Code............................................................................................... 14
1.2.4 Paper Feed Specification ............................................................................ 14
Chapter 2 Operating Principles
1.2.5 Paper Feeder Specification ......................................................................... 14 2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 114
1.2.6 Paper Specification ..................................................................................... 15 2.2 Printer Mechanism Components ....................................................................... 115
1.2.7 Mechanism Specifications .......................................................................... 19 2.2.1 Printing Mechanism (Print Head)............................................................. 116
1.2.8 Electrical Specification ............................................................................... 22 2.2.2 Ink Supply Mechanism ............................................................................. 118
1.2.9 Reliability ................................................................................................... 23 2.2.3 Cleaning Mechanism ................................................................................ 120
1.2.10 Environmental Conditions ........................................................................ 23 2.2.4 Carriage (CR) Mechanism........................................................................ 125
1.2.11 Quality Standards for Completed Products .............................................. 25 2.2.5 Paper Feed Mechanism............................................................................. 131
1.2.12 Overall Dimensions .................................................................................. 25 2.2.6 Paper Eject/Release Mechanism............................................................... 140
1.2.13 Accessories ............................................................................................... 26 2.2.7 Multi Sensor ............................................................................................. 145
1.3 External View and Parts Names .......................................................................... 28 2.2.8 Others........................................................................................................ 151
1.4 Operating Panel ................................................................................................... 30 2.3 Outline of Control Circuit Board....................................................................... 152
1.4.1 Buttons and Functions ................................................................................ 30 2.4 Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board ............................................................ 154
1.4.2 Panel Display .............................................................................................. 33
2.5 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) Overview................................................. 155
1.4.3 Job information ........................................................................................... 39
1.4.4 Panel Setting ............................................................................................... 40
1.4.5 Maintenance Mode 1 .................................................................................. 83
1.4.6 Maintenance Mode 2 .................................................................................. 90
1.4.7 MIB Function............................................................................................ 102
1.4.8 Function to Prevent Irregular Printing ...................................................... 103
1.4.9 Initialization .............................................................................................. 104
1.4.10 Default Setup Values .............................................................................. 104
1.5 Controller........................................................................................................... 105
1.6 Interface............................................................................................................. 106
1.6.1 USB interface............................................................................................ 106

6
EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Chapter 3 Troubleshooting Chapter 5 Adjustment


3.1 Outline ............................................................................................................... 157 5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 367
3.1.1 Check Before Troubleshooting................................................................. 157 5.1.1 Cautions .................................................................................................... 367
3.1.2 Narrow Down the Trouble........................................................................ 157 5.1.2 Advance of Adjustment ............................................................................ 367
3.2 Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages ...................................................... 158 5.1.3 The Part/Unit that Requires Adjustment .................................................. 367
3.2.1 Message Table .......................................................................................... 158 5.1.4 Adjustment Items classified by Part/Unit ................................................. 368
3.2.2 Corrective Actions for Displayed Warnings............................................. 162 5.1.5 Adjustment Item ....................................................................................... 371
3.2.3 Corrective Actions for Error Display ....................................................... 165 5.1.6 Adjustment Tools ..................................................................................... 374
3.2.4 Corrective Actions for Service Request Display ...................................... 175 5.1.7 Adjustment Program Basic Operation...................................................... 375
3.3 Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout.......................................................... 196 5.2 Mechanical Adjustment..................................................................................... 376
5.2.1 CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment....................................................... 376
5.2.2 PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment........................................................ 378
Chapter 4 Disassembly & Assembly
5.2.3 Paper Thickness Sensor Adjustment ........................................................ 380
4.1 Introductory Information ................................................................................... 201 5.2.4 CR Encoder Sensor Position Adjustment ................................................. 382
4.1.1 Cautions .................................................................................................... 201 5.2.5 PG Adjustment ......................................................................................... 383
4.1.2 Tools ......................................................................................................... 203 5.2.6 Multi Sensor Position Adjustment............................................................ 385
4.1.3 Screws....................................................................................................... 204 5.3 Basic Adjustment .............................................................................................. 387
4.1.4 Difference Between 8-color And 4-color Models In Disassembly/Assembly 5.3.1 RTC&USB ID&IEEE1394 ID ................................................................. 387
205 5.3.2 Head Rank ID ........................................................................................... 388
4.2 Disassembly Procedures.................................................................................... 206 5.3.3 Multi Sensor Level Adjustment................................................................ 389
4.2.1 Basic Operations....................................................................................... 207 5.3.4 T&B&S (Roll Paper) ................................................................................ 390
4.2.2 Consumable Parts/ASF Cassette Removal ............................................... 209 5.3.5 T&B&S (Cut Sheet) ................................................................................. 391
4.2.3 Panel Unit/Housing Removal ................................................................... 214 5.3.6 Cutter Pressure Adjustment ...................................................................... 392
4.2.4 Circuit Board Removal ............................................................................. 226 5.3.7 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment .......................................................................... 393
4.2.5 Printer Mechanism Disassembly .............................................................. 241 5.3.8 Print Head Slant Adjustment (PF) ............................................................ 394
4.2.6 ASF ........................................................................................................... 246 5.3.9 Print Head Slant Adjustment (CR) ........................................................... 397
4.2.7 Carriage Mechanism ................................................................................. 266 5.3.10 Auto Uni-d Adjustment .......................................................................... 401
4.2.8 Ink System ................................................................................................ 285 5.3.11 Multi Sensor Adjustment for Auto Nozzle Check.................................. 402
4.2.9 Paper Feed Mechanism............................................................................. 343 5.3.12 Skew Check ............................................................................................ 404
4.2.10 Harness Routing...................................................................................... 358 5.3.13 Platen Position Adjustment .................................................................... 405
4.2.11 Disassembly/Assembly Unique to 4-color Model (Stylus Pro 4000)..... 362 5.3.14 1000mm Feed Adjustment...................................................................... 407
5.3.15 Initial Ink charge flag ON/OFF .............................................................. 408
5.3.16 NVRAM Back Up and Write ................................................................. 409
5.3.17 Check Platen Gap ................................................................................... 410
5.3.18 Ink Discharge.......................................................................................... 411
5.3.19 Initial Ink Charge.................................................................................... 412
5.3.20 Cleaning.................................................................................................. 412
5.3.21 Rear Sensor Adjustment ......................................................................... 413
5.3.22 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID)....................................................... 414

7
EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.4 Advanced Adjustment ....................................................................................... 430 Chapter 6 Maintenance


5.4.1 Auto Bi-d Adjustment............................................................................... 430
5.4.2 Manual Bi-D Adjustment ......................................................................... 431 6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 449
5.4.3 Destination Setting.................................................................................... 434 6.1.1 Product Life Information .......................................................................... 450
5.4.4 PF Micro Feed Adjustment (Bi-D) (TBD) ............................................... 435 6.1.2 Important Maintenance Items During Service Operations ....................... 450
5.5 Check Results .................................................................................................... 436 6.2 Lubrication ........................................................................................................ 451
5.5.1 Check Nozzle............................................................................................ 436
5.5.2 Check Alignment ...................................................................................... 437 Chapter 7 Appendix
5.5.3 Print Adjustment Check Pattern ............................................................... 438
5.5.4 Image Printing .......................................................................................... 439 7.1 Connectors......................................................................................................... 458
5.5.5 Check Cutting ........................................................................................... 440 7.2 Exploded Diagrams ........................................................................................... 463
5.6 Reset Counters................................................................................................... 441 7.3 Parts List............................................................................................................ 481
5.6.1 Reset Paper Ejection Switching/PG Switching Counter .......................... 441
5.6.2 Reset PF Motor Counter ........................................................................... 441
5.6.3 Reset ASF Counter ................................................................................... 442
5.6.4 Reset When CR Unit Change ................................................................... 442
5.6.5 Reset When Cleaning Unit Change .......................................................... 443
5.6.6 Reset When Printhead Change ................................................................. 443
5.7 Installing Firmware ........................................................................................... 444
5.8 Installing Firmware for SP 4400 (4-color model) after replacing Main Board with
New one................................................................................................................... 445
5.9 Device ID Setting .............................................................................................. 446
5.10 Writing MAC Address .................................................................................... 447

8
1
CHAPTER

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.1 Product Description


The Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C is a large-format printer based on the Stylus Pro 4000.
The Stylus Pro 4800/4880/4880C is the exclusive model for 8-color inks and the Stylus Pro 4400/4450 is the exclusive model for 4-color inks.
The following table shows the major changes from the Stylus Pro 4000.
1.1.1 Comparison with Stylus Pro 4000
Table 1-1. Comparative Table
Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800
No. Comparative Point Stylus Pro 4000 Remark
/4880/4880C
1 Difference between Hardware The 4-color model is not equipped with Common ---
8-color model and an ink holder on the right side.
4-color model
2 Printer driver Differs between the 8-color model and Common ---
the 4-color model.
3 Ink set 8-color model † Stylus Pro 4800 MK,C,M,Y,PK,LC,LM,LK* ---
configuration K (PK/MK),C,M,Y,LK,LC,LM,LLK*
† Stylus Pro 4880/4880C
K (PK/MK),C,VM,Y,LK,LC,VLM,LLK*
4-color model MK,C,M,Y* MK,C,M,Y*
4 Calibration function Colorimetric Calibration: Head ID: Calibration accuracy is improved by taking electrical
Corrects the amount of dot generation Corrects the amount of dot variable factor into consideration.
based on the individual difference generation based on the individual
between the following parts: difference between the following
„ Printhead part:
„ MAIN Board „ Printhead
„ Power Supply Board
5 PG setting 5 levels: 4 levels: Added 1.5 mm of PG setting to prevent thin paper from
0.7mm/1.2mm/1.5mm/2.2mm/2.6mm 0.7mm/1.2mm/2.2mm/2.6mm being damaged. (Lock bush design is changed according
to the added PG setting.)
6 Harness connection for CR Motor Connected by connectors Connected by soldering Harnesses are made easier to connect/disconnect.
7 Connection between Printhead and Added a relay board between The Printhead is connected to the An additional relay board prevents head drive waveform
Main Board “Printhead, Harness”and the MAIN MAIN Board by “Head, Harness” being deteriorated when transmitting data form the MAIN
Board. only. Board to the Printhead.
8 Material for roll paper guide roller Rubber (elastomer) Plastic (POM) Reduce roller marks traced when roll paper passes
through the roller.
9 Cooling fan Added a cooling fan --- Cools the MAIN Board and the Power Supply Board, and
ventilates the board container.
Note *: PK=Photo Black, MK=Matte Black, LK=Light Black, LLK=Light Light Black, C=Cyan, M=Magenta, LC=Light Cyan, LM=Light Magenta, Y=Yellow, VM=Vivid Magenta,
VLM=Vivid Light Magenta
Product Description Product Description 10
EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.1.2 Features „ Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C


† Large Format Table 1-3. Throughput (Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C)
„ Max. paper width: 431.8 mm (17"), A2+ size supported Throughput
Ink EPSON Resolution
Quality Dot size (A2 printing
† High-Speed Throughput type media (dpi)
time *print only)
„ Stylus Pro 4400/4800 8-color Plain Economy VSD1 360 x 360 1.5 min.
Table 1-2. Throughput (Stylus Pro 4400/4800) Paper Speed VSD1 360 x 360 2.4 min.
Throughput Quality VSD2 720 x 360 2.8 min.
Ink EPSON Resolution
Quality Dot size (A2 printing High Quality VSD3 720 x 720 5.2 min.
type media (dpi)
time *print only)
Matte Speed VSD1 720 x 360 2.4 min.
8-color Plain Economy VSD1 360 x 360 1.3 min. Paper
Paper Quality VSD2 720 x 720 5.2 min.
Speed VSD1 360 x 360 2.3 min.
High Quality 1440 VSD3 1440 x 720 7.5 min.
Quality VSD2 720 x 360 2.7 min.
High Quality 2880 VSD3_HR 2880 x 1440 14.2 min.
High Quality VSD3 720 x 720 5.5 min.
Glossy Quality VSD2 720 x 720 5.5 min.
Matte Speed VSD1 360 x 720 2.3 min. Photo
Paper High Quality 1440 VSD3 1440 x 720 7.9 min.
Quality VSD2 720 x 720 5.5 min. Paper
High Quality 2880 VSD3_HR 2880 x 1440 14.9 min.
High Quality VSD3 1440 x 720 7.9 min.
4-color Plain Economy VSD1 360 x 360 1.2 min.
High Quality Super VSD3 1440 x 720 14.2 min. Paper
On Speed VSD1 360 x 360 1.5 min.

Glossy Quality VSD2 720 x 720 5.5 min. Quality VSD2 720 x 360 2.4 min.
Photo High Quality 1440 VSD3 1440 x 720 7.9 min. High Quality VSD2 720 x 720 3.7 min.
Paper Matte Speed VSD1 360 x 720 2.5 min.
High Quality 2880 VSD3_HR 2880 x 1440 14.9 min.
Paper POP Print VSD2 720 x 720 2.8 min.
4-color Plain Economy VSD1 360 x 360 0.9 min.
Paper Speed VSD1 360 x 360 1.3 min. Quality VSD2 720 x 720 3.7 min.

Quality VSD2 720 x 360 2.3 min. High Quality VSD3 1440 x 720 4.3 min.

High Quality VSD3 720 x 720 3.8 min. High Quality Super VSD3 1440 x 720 5.1 min.
On
Matte Speed VSD1 360 x 720 3.1 min.
Paper Glossy POP Print VSD2 720 x 720 3.9 min.
Quality VSD2 720 x 720 3.8 min. Photo Quality VSD2 720 x 720 5.3 min.
High Quality VSD3 1440 x 720 5.4 min. Paper
High Quality VSD3 1440 x 720 6.4 min.
High Quality Super VSD3 1440 x 720 7.3 min.
On High Quality Super On VSD3 1440 x 720 7.7 min.

Glossy Quality VSD2 720 x 720 5.0 min.


Photo High Quality VSD3 720 x 720 7.5 min.
Paper
High Quality Super On VSD3 1440 x 720 10.5 min.

Product Description Product Description 11


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Max Quality
High image quality made by various layers of 8-color ink, 2880 x 1440 dpi*,
and minimum of 3.5 pl.
Note *: Stylus Pro 4800/4880/4880C only. 1440 x 720 dpi for Stylus Pro 4400/4450.
† Low Running Cost
„ Independent for each color and 110ml ink cartridge
„ Optional ink cartridge with larger capacity of 220ml can be used
† Paper Handling
„ Support various media
„ Automatic roll paper cutter, manual cutter
„ Automatic cut sheet loading (ASF)
Rear manual feed/ Front manual feed (thick paper only)
„ Borderless print for 4 sides
„ ASF support
† Compatibility with Other LFPs
Commands are upper compatible with following models.
„ Stylus Pro 4400/4800
Stylus Pro 4000/7000/7500/7600/9000/9500/9600/10000/10000CF/
10000 Dye/10600CF/10600UC
„ Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C
Stylus Pro 4000/4400/4800/7000/7400/7500/7600/7800/9000/9400/
9500/9600/9800/10000/10000CF/10000 Dye/10600/
10600CF/10600UC
† The latest RIP technology
„ Stylus Rip Professional 3
„ Others: Various 3rd Party RIP

Product Description Product Description 12


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.2 Basic Specifications „ Nozzle pitch


0.141 mm (1/180 inch) for each color
† Ink Set Configuration
1.2.1 Print Specifications
† Printing Table 1-5. Ink Set Configuration*1
On-demand ink-jet Mode Name 1-row 2-row 3-row 4-row 5-row 6-row 7-row 8-row
† Nozzle configuration Stylus Pro 4800 K*2 C M Y LK LC LM LLK

Table 1-4. Nozzle configuration Stylus Pro 4880


K*2 C VM Y LK LC VLM LLK
Stylus Pro 4880C
Model Name Ink Nozzles
Stylus Pro 4400
Stylus Pro 4800 Black(MK or PK) 180 MK C M Y - - - -
Stylus Pro 4450
Light Black 180
Note *1: Rows below are counted from the front left side of the printer.
Light Light Black 180 *2: Ink change (MK<=>PK) is available to users.
Cyan 180 † Printing direction
Magenta 180 Bi-direction with logic seeking (high-speed return, high-speed skip only)

Light Cyan 180 † Printing speed and printable area


„ Alphanumeric characters
Light Magenta 180
• Character quality : High quality
Yellow 180 • Character pitch : 10 cpi
Stylus Pro 4880 Black(MK or PK) 180 • Printable area : 167 characters
Stylus Pro 4880C • Printing speed : 320 cps max.
Light Black 180
„ Graphic Mode
Light Light Black 180
Table 1-6. Graphics Modes
Cyan 180
Horizontal resolution Maximum number Printing
Vivid Magenta 180 Maximum printable area
(dpi) of printable dots speed
Light Cyan 180 360 439.8 mm (17.31") 6,233 320 cps
Vivid Light Magenta 180 720 439.8 mm (17.31") 12,466 240 cps
Yellow 180 1440 439.8 mm (17.31") 24,933 240 cps

Stylus Pro 4400 Matte Black 360 2880 439.8 mm (17.31") 49,867 240 cps
Stylus Pro 4450 Cyan 360 Note 1: Includes left margin of 5 mm (Maximum), right margin of 3 mm.
Magenta 360 2: Standard maximum printable area in normal mode is 425.8 mm (16.7 inch)
Yellow 360

Product Description Basic Specifications 13


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.2.2 Character Specification 1.2.5 Paper Feeder Specification


† Character tables † ASF
„ PC 437 (Alphanumeric characters extension graphics) Feeds paper automatically by Automatic Sheet Feeder.

† Font † Rear Manual Feed


Loads automatically from rear manual feed opening.
„ EPSON original font – Alphanumeric character Courier
† Front Manual Feed
Loads automatically from front manual feed opening.

1.2.3 Control Code † Roll Paper Feed


Sets spindle to rear roll-paper holder.
† Control code
ESC/P Raster

1.2.4 Paper Feed Specification


† Paper feeding
Friction feed
† Line spacing
1/6 inch or programmable at 1440 inch
Note: Paper feed resolution is 0.002936758 mm.
† Paper path
„ Roll paper
„ Manual (front/back)
„ Automatic sheet feeder
† Feed speed
6.35 mm paper feed: 215 ± 10 msec
(except front rush, back rush, and hold time)

Product Description Basic Specifications 14


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.2.6 Paper Specification BORDERLESS PRINT WIDTH

1.2.6.1 Roll Paper Borderless print for right and left is assured with following paper width roll
paper.
CONTAINABLE PAPER
† Borderless Print Width
The printer accepts following plain paper and EPSON special paper. It is not Table 1-7. Borderless Print Width
assured feeding and print quality with any other paper except them.
8" 8.25" 8.5" 10" 12" 13" 14" 16" 16.5” 17”
† Paper Size (A3)
203.2 210mm (LTR) (A3+) 355.6 (A2) 431.8
„ 2" core : 203 ~ 432 mm (W) x ~ 45 m (H) (within roll size) mm (A4) 216mm
257mm 297mm
329mm mm
400mm
420mm mm
300mm
„ 3" core : 203 ~ 432 mm (W) x ~ 202 m (H) (within roll size)
† Roll Size But following types are not recommended for borderless printing.
„ 2" core : Under 103 mm ext. diameter for 1 roll setting „ Single Weight Matte Paper
„ 3" core : Under 150 mm ext. diameter for 1 roll setting „ Enhanced Matte Paper
† Thickness : 0.08 mm ~ 0.50 mm „ Textured Fine Art Paper
„ Ultra Smooth Fine Art Paper

NOTE 1: Paper should have no wrinkles or tears, and the surface should be
PLAIN PAPER smooth.
It is assured feeding only with following specifications. 2: The force to remove the end of the roll paper from the core at the
beginning of rolling paper should be between 300gf and 2000gf.
† Paper Size
3: If 3" core is used, a product-exclusive option (roll paper spindle 3")
„ 2" core : 203 ~ 432 mm (W) x ~ 45m (H) (within roll size) is necessary.
„ 3" core : 203 ~ 432 mm (W) x ~ 202m (H) (within roll size) 4: It is used under normal condition (temperature 15°C ~ 25°C,
† Roll Size humidity 40% ~ 60%RH).
„ 2" core : Under 103 mm ext. diameter for 1 roll setting 5: Roll paper can be printed before paper comes out of the core.
(Reference: Remaining paper length is 300mm approx. when roll
„ 3" core : Under 150 mm ext. diameter for 1 roll setting
paper come out of the core.)
† Thickness : 0.08 ~ 0.15 mm 6: Mechanism clips print data out of over-printable area for
† Weight : 64 ~ 130 gf/m2 borderless print.
† Type : Plain paper, Recycle paper 7: For A2 size, spacer is specially needed.

Product Description Basic Specifications 15


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.2.6.2 Cut Sheet PLAIN PAPER

CONTAINABLE PAPER It is assured feeding only with following specifications.

The printer accepts following plain paper and special paper. It is not assured † Paper Size : Identical to Table 1-8 "Cut Sheet Size (Containable
feeding and print quality with any other paper except plain paper and special Paper)"(p16).
paper. † Thickness : 0.08 ~ 0.11 mm
† Paper Size † Weight : 64 ~ 130 gf/m2
Table 1-8. Cut Sheet Size (Containable Paper)
† Type : Plain paper, Recycle paper
Paper Size Size (H x W) Paper Size Size (H x W)
NOTE 1: Paper should be placed in portrait orientation.
B3 364 mm x 515 mm US-C Size 17 x 22 inch
2: Paper should have no wrinkles, tears, or stains and the surface
B4 257 mm x 364 mm 16 x 20 inch 16 x 20 inch should be smooth.
A2 420 mm x 594 mm 300 mm x 450 mm 300 mm x 450 mm 3: It is used under normal condition (temperature 15ºC ~ 25ºC,
Super A3/B 329 mm x 483 mm US-B Size 11 x 17 inch humidity 40% ~ 60%RH).
(A3 +) (Ledger)
A3 297 mm x 420 mm 11 x 14 inch 11 x 14 inch BORDERLESS PRINT WIDTH
A4 210 mm x 297 mm Quarter 10 x 12 inch Borderless print for right and left is assured with following paper width. But
Letter 8.5 x 11 inch following types are not recommended for borderless printing.
8 x 10 inch 8 x 10 inch NOTE: 300 mm, 400 mm are supported for Europe.

† Thickness † Borderless Print Width


„ 0.08 ~ 1.50 mm (paper length; 279 mm ~ 610 mm) Table 1-9. Borderless Print Width
NOTE 1: Paper should have no wrinkles, tears, or stains and 8.25”” 8.5" 10" 12" 13" 14" 16" 17"
the surface should be smooth. 210mm 216mm 257mm 297mm 329mm 355.6mm 400mm 431.8mm
2: Paper should be placed with its fibrous direction same A4 LTR B4 A3 A3+ – 16" x20" US-C
as the feed direction. (Basically portrait orientation)
3: 0.08 ~ 1.50mm paper thicknesses are supported for
NOTE 1: Mechanism clips print data out of over-printable area for
long-edge insertion.
borderless print.
4: A4, letter, or 8 x 10 inch papers should not be placed
2: Borderless printing is not available for A2 cut sheet.
in landscape orientation on rear manual feed path.
5: Auto nozzle check is not available for 8 x 10 inch or
smaller paper.
6: Front manual feed is not available for soft paper or
0.2mm or less thickness paper.

Product Description Basic Specifications 16


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.2.6.3 Special Paper


† Cut Sheet
Table 1-10. Availability with Cut Sheet
Media Size
Cut Sheet US-A Arch.A Arch.B Super
PG 8"x10" A4 B4 11"x14" A3 US-B 400x600 A2 US-C
LTR 9x12" 12x18" A3/B
(mm)
Name 203x279 210x297 216x279 229x305 254x364 279x356 297x420 279x432 305x457 329x483 400x600 420x594 432x559
Premium Ink Jet Plain Paper (Xerox 4024) 1.5 – @ @ @ @ – @ @ @ – – @ @
Premium Ink Jet Plain Paper (Genuine) 1.5 – @ – – – – – – – – – – –
Bright White Inkjet Paper 1.5 – @ – – – – – – – – – – –
EPSON Photo Quality Inkjet Paper 1.5 – § § – – – § – – § – – –
EPSON Enhanced (Archival) Matte Paper 1.2 – § § – – – § – – § – – §
Watercolor Paper-Radiant White 1.2 – – – – – – – – – § – – –
EPSON Premium Glossy Photo Paper 0.7 – § § – – – § – – § – – –
EPSON Premium Semigloss Photo Paper 0.7 – § § – – – § – – § – – –
Premium Semimatte/Luster Photo Paper<250> 1.2 – – – – – – – – – – – – §
Premium Luster Photo Paper 0.7 – – § – – – – – – § – – –
P;atinum Photo Paper 0.7 – § – – – – § – – § – – –
EPSON Velvet Fine Art 1.2 – – § – – – – – – § – – –
Single Weight Matte Paper 1.5 – – – – – – – – – § – § §
Ultra Smooth Fine Art Paper 1.5 – – – – – – – – – § – – §
Proofing Paper Semimatte 0.7 – – – – – – – – – § – – –
Velvet Fine Art Paper – – § – – – – – – § – – –

Note 1: Symbol ~: Assured, @: Assured for plain paper only


2: Assured range for image quality 15°C 40%RH ~ 25°C 60%RH
3: PG setting value of Velvet Fine Art Paper is accordance with the panel setting.

Product Description Basic Specifications 17


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Roll Paper
Table 1-11. Availability with Roll Sheet
Media Size
Roll Paper
Cutter A4 10" 30cm 12" A3+ 14" 40cm 16" A2 17"
Core" PG Auto
Name Spindle (mm) or 210 254 300 305 329 356 400 406 420 431.6
Manual
Bright White Inkjet Paper 2 1.5 A § – – – – – – – § –
Single Weight Matte Paper Roll 2 1.2 A – – – – – – – – § §
Enhanced Matte Paper Roll 3 1.2 A – – – – – – – – – §
Photo Glossy Paper Roll 2 0.7 A – – – – – – – – § –
Photo Semigloss Paper Roll 2 0.7 A – – – – – – – – § –
Premium Glossy Photo Paper<250>Roll 3 0.7 A – – – – – – – § – –
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper<250>Roll 3 0.7 A – – – – – – – § – –
Premium Semimatte Photo Paper <250 >Roll 3 0.7 A – – – – – – – § – –
Premium Luster Photo Paper <250 >Roll 3 0.7 A – § § – – – – § – –
Ultra Smooth Fine Art Paper 3 1.5 A – – – – – – – – – §
Textured Fine Art Paper 3 1.2 A – – – – – – – – – §
Proofing Paper Semimatte Roll 2 0.7 A – – – – § – – – – §
Photo Paper Gloss 250 3 0.7 A – – – – – – – – – §
Tracing Paper 2/3 1.2 A – – – – § – – – @ –

Note 1: Symbol ~: Assured, @: Assured for plain paper only


2: Assured range for image quality 15°C 40%RH ~ 25°C 60%RH

Product Description Basic Specifications 18


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.2.7 Mechanism Specifications † For borderless print, right and left surplus printable area is maximum 3mm
on the home position side and maximum 5mm on the other side distance
1.2.7.1 Printable Area from paper edge to platen (sponge width) is less than 3mm, the maximum
Table 1-12. Printable Area surplus print quantity not on platen (0mm~3mm) is printable area.
Item Roll paper / Cut Sheet Dimension † Conditions for separating into multiple pages for printing cut sheet.
1. For thick paper, print until the bottom edge reaches to 14mm.
Roll paper
PW (Paper width) 203mm~431.8mm (17") * Remaining data is invalid and not to be printed.
Cut Sheet 2. When error occurred such as releasing paper lever when printing, then
Roll paper Max. 202m print is separated to next page after down margin is printed.
PL (Paper length)
Cut Sheet 279mm~594mm † When printing on cut sheet at resolution of 2800 x 1440dpi and setting the
Roll paper 0mm/3mm/15mm/35mm
bottom margin to 3mm, the actual bottom margin will be 3.8mm.
TM (Top margin)
Cut Sheet 0mm/3mm PW

Roll paper 0mm/3mm/15mm(/35mm)


BM (Bottom margin) LM RM
Cut Sheet 0mm/3mm/14mm
Roll paper 0mm/3mm/15mm
LM (Left margin)
Cut Sheet 0mm/3mm
Roll paper 0mm/3mm/15mm
RM (Right margin)
Cut Sheet 0mm/3mm
TM

Paper Feed Direction


Note *: Max. value is roll paper 439.8mm(17.31"), and cut sheet 437.8mm (17.24") for
no margin print.
† The printer detects paper width when paper is set (print data is accepted
for ASF). (If set paper width detection is OFF, it doesn't detect paper
width.)
Printable Area
† It doesn't print the image beyond printable area specified with paper size PL
setting or detected paper width. (It may print on the platen if set paper
width detection is OFF.)
† Margins of roll paper can be changed with the panel as following;
„ Top/bottom 15mm, left/right 3mm
„ Top/bottom 25mm, left/right 3mm
BM
„ Top/bottom/left/right 3mm
„ Top/bottom/left/right 15mm
NOTE 1: Under special condition, it is possible to set right and
left margin (LM, RM) to 0.
2: When special internal pattern is printed on roll paper,
right and left side margin are fixed to 3mm. “1.4.4.8 Figure 1-1. Printable Area
Roll Paper Margin (p.52)” for details.

Product Description Basic Specifications 19


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.2.7.2 Borderless Print Specification † Borderless setting method


By driver's command transmission, supports the following borderless print Table 1-14. Borderless setting
mode. Supports the following 3 modes.
Right and left 4 sides borderless 4 sides borderless
Borderless mode
Table 1-13. Borderless Print Specification mode borderless (1 cut) (2 cut)

Mode Operation Printer operation

Right and left You can set only the right and left margins to zero. At this time,
borderless (default) up and down margins are set by roll paper margin setting.
4 sides borderless/1 cut You can set 4 sides margins to zero. Use the following
method for cutting.
† Starting of JOB, take minimum cut length for margin and
cut while printing.
† While JOB, new page has no margin, cut at image border
position in continuing print.
† End of JOB, cut at the bottom of the image.
4 sides borderless/2 cut You can set 4 sides margins to zero. Use the following
Driver setting Borderless print Borderless print Borderless print
method for cutting.
Single cut Double cut
† At the front edge page, take refresh margin length for
margin, cut while printing. Note Default setting † The upper edge † The upper edge
cut is performed cut is performed
† At the end of the page, cut at the bottom of the image.
by interrupting by interrupting
† To discard the remaining part of printing after cut, cut the
print operation; print operation;
paper after advancing the paper to minimum cut length. *
there is chance of there is chance of
color shading color shading
Note 1: For 4 sides borderless, after cutting, up and down size of the printing will be
according to data. according to data.
smaller by approximately 2mm than the actual printing size.
† By adjusting † To avoid
2: When the roll paper cutter is OFF and page line printing is ON, print the page cutter position, remaining of
line at each cutting position including front edge page. there is chance of margin, cut off the
data from top and bottom
3: In following media, if 1 cut is selected at borderless printing, it is cut as 2 cut to
continuous page part of the paper
prevent scraping top of paper.
remaining in top by going inside of
• Premium Glossy Photo Paper or bottom edge of image.
• Premium Semigloss Photo Paper the page. Therefore the
actual size will be
Note *: Recommended a borderless length for glossy paper is 60mm, for other paper about 2mm
is 100mm. smaller than the
specified print
area.

Product Description Basic Specifications 20


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Borderless Print Assurance Conditions 1.2.7.4 Cut Specification


Borderless print is assured under the following conditions. There are two types, auto cut and manual cut for roll paper cutting.
Temperature condition: 15 to 25 degrees C, 40 to 60% Making cutting action to paper which automatic cutting is
C A U T IO N
Media Type: Photo media prohibited will cause damage to the printhead.
POP/Poster media*1,*2
Note 1: Refer to “1.2.6 Paper Specification (p.15)” for details on assured media for
borderless print.
AUTOMATIC CUT FOR ROLL PAPER
2: Borderless printing is not assured if the surface of few rolls is extended due to
moisture absorbent. For paper that automatic cut is admitted, cut the paper using the following
method by setting panel setting to "roll paper automatic cut".
3: Medea types and sizes other than above assure borderless margins equal to or
† Mechanic condition
more than PX-10000 / PX-9000. However, margins may appear on the right and
left edges, if paper wrinkled due to conditions such as temperature is used. „ Distance between the cutting position and paper setting position
L0=205.43mm
† Right and Left Surplus Printable Area „ Distance between the cutting position and cutter mark
For right and left surplus printable area*1, the following settings are L1=27.6 mm
available: „ Minimum cut length
L2=130 mm (default value)
Left (opposite side of home position) = 1.5mm/ right (home position side) =
1.5mm Table 1-16. Cutting Conditions and Cutting Methods
Left (opposite side of home position) = 3.0mm/ right (home position side) = Cut condition Cutting method
3.0mm Initial cut Deliver size of L1 paper and cut by 2-step with
Left (opposite side of home position) = 5.0mm/ right (home position side) = (Pressing the lever down when there is roll paper holding Star Wheel. (100cps)*
3.0mm*2 paper and pushing the [Paper Source/
Paper Cut (<)] key for 3 sec.)
Note *1: Right and left surplus printable area can be selected on the driver.
Cut when driver ends print. Cutting method (include Star Wheel
*2: When the media is wrinkled, a selection of "Left (opposite side of home holding), cutting pressure, minimum cut
position) = 5.0mm/ right (home position side) = 3.0mm" is recommended to length follows to the media table.
prevent margins from appearing on the right and left edges. Initial cut when printing Cut while printing is prohibited in this
model. (Product specification)
1.2.7.3 Paper Set Lever
Initial cut in an original standby situation Deliver size of L1 paper and cut by 2-step
Table 1-15. Paper Set Lever with roll paper holding Star Wheel. (100cps)
Lever Position Description After printing in automatic cut OFF mode, Cut by 2-step with roll paper holding Star
start initial cut in automatic cut ON mode. Wheel reserving size of L2. (100cps)
Backward Position for paper setting
(Paper holding is released, and paper can be set.) Cut when paper width detection is OFF. Same as paper width detection is ON.
(Paper jam is not occurred for 2-step cut.)
Forward Ready-to-print position
(Paper is fixed, and it becomes ready to be printed.) Note *: User need to remove the strip of paper that remains between eject roller and
nip roller when executing this operation without L2 reservation.

Product Description Basic Specifications 21


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

MANUAL CUT FOR ROLL PAPER 1.2.8 Electrical Specification


When using paper for which automatic cutting is prohibited, use manual cut † Rated voltage: AC 100 ~ 240V
with the steps below. † Input voltage range: AC 90 ~ 264V
1. Use [Paper Source / Paper Cut] button to select Roll Paper Auto Cut OFF † Rated frequency range: 50 ~ 60Hz
(" ").
† Input frequency range: 49 ~ 61Hz
2. Press and hold the [Paper Source / Paper Cut] button for 3 seconds.
† Rated current: 100-240V ac, 50-60Hz, and 1.0-0.5A
3. The paper will be automatically fed to the manual cut position and the
printer will go offline, indicating “Pause”on the panel. † Power consumption
„ operation status
4. Cut off paper using own scissors.
• Stylus Pro 4400/4800: Less than 59 W
5. Then press the [Pause] button and the paper will be fed back, and the • Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C: Less than 55 W
printer will be online.
„ Less than 5 W for low power status (Shifting time: 15 minutes)
NOTE 1: Auto cutter supports all genuine roll paper. „ Less than 1 W for Power OFF
2: Paper of 3rd party media and generally auto cutter is prohibited. † Insulation resistance: More than 10M ohms
• Fiber-form paper such as cloth. (Between AC line and chassis is DC 500V)
• Rigidity is extremely high paper such as Vinyl (Outdoor type) or
† Dielectric strength: AC 1.0kV rms 1min. or AC1.2kV rms 1 sec.
Fine Art type.
(Between AC line and chassis)
† Leakage: Less than 0.25mA
[Adapts Japan National Electronics Development
Incorporated Association "Personal Computer
Industry Standard" (PC-11-1988)]
† Adapted standard regulation
Adapts International Star Program
(Adapts category: measure for harmonic
component suppression guideline)
Adapts VCCI class B

Product Description Basic Specifications 22


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.2.9 Reliability 1.2.10 Environmental Conditions


PRINTER LIFE 1.2.10.1 Temperature/Humidity
† Approx. 20,000 pages (A2, plain paper, quality, 720 x 360 FOL, Bi-D) Table 1-17. Temperature/Humidity
Condition Temperature*1 Humidity*2
AVERAGE CUTTER LIFE During operation 10 ~ 35°C 20 ~ 80%
„ Coated paper: Approx. 2,000 cut During storage -20 ~ 40°C 20 ~ 85%
„ Film: Approx. 1,000 cut During transport -20 ~ 60°C 5 ~ 85%

REPLACEMENT PARTS LIFE Note *1: Within one month for 40ºC, within 120 hours for 60ºC
*2: No condensation. These values are applicable only within the range as shown
† Maintenance Unit: Approx. 20,000 sheets below. Print quality is assured only within a temperature of 15 to 25 degrees C
(A2, plain paper, speed mode, continuous printing) and a humidity of 40 to 60%.
The maintenance unit reaches its end of life when
the number of the pump rotation exceeds 160,000 Humidity (%)
times.

Temperature (°C)

Figure 1-2. Environmental Conditions: Temperature/Humidity

Product Description Basic Specifications 23


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.2.10.2 Vibration 1.2.10.4 Surrounding Space


† During operation: 0.15G, 10-55Hz X, Y, Z directions Provide the printer with an enough surrounding space to ensure proper
installation of accessories and replacement of consumables and easy work for
† During storage: 0.50G, 10-55Hz X, Y, Z directions
daily maintenance.
† From the front of the printer: 35cm or more
1.2.10.3 Shock (When the paper tray is extended.)

† During operation: 1G, 1ms max. X, Y, Z directions † From the rear of the printer: 40cm or more
(When cut sheets are set by hand
† During storage: 2G, 2ms max. X, Y, Z directions insertion from the front.)
NOTE 1: Check that the printhead is capped during storage. † From the both sides of the printer: 15cm or more
2: Check that the printhead is capped, then remove ink cartridges
from the body, and make sure ink cartridge cover is closed during
transport.
3: If the printer head uncapped, and the ink cartridge is attached,
switch the power ON. Switch the power OFF when capping is
completed.
15cm or
4: Left out in condition of temperature under -15°C; the ink in the 40cm or more
printhead and ink cartridge freezes. It takes about 3 hours for the more
frozen ink to be usable under the condition of 25°C.

15cm or 35cm or more


more

Figure 1-3. Surrounding Space

Product Description Basic Specifications 24


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.2.11 Quality Standards for Completed Products 1.2.12 Overall Dimensions


NOISE
848
† Sound pressure level: Less than 50 dB
(4 direction average, compliant with ISO9296)
*Should be no impact, abnormal or harsh noise.

354

INITIALIZING TIME AT POWER ON


† Within 1 minute (* excluding waiting time such as Timer CL)

764

TIME FOR INITIAL INK CHARGE


1099
† Less than 8 minutes
(* until initial ink charge is finished after the ink lever is lowered)

MTBF (MEAN TIME BETWEEN FAILURES)


Figure 1-4. Overall Dimensions of Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C
† 20,000 hours with power on (except when electronic parts and fans have
any malfunction)
† Dimensions of Unit

Condition Width (W) x Depth (D) x Height (H) (mm)


When tray is stored 848 x 764 x 354
When tray is extended 848 x 1099 x 354

† Weight
8-color model: Approx. 40.2kg (ink cartridge and paper is not included)
4-color model: Approx. 39.0kg (ink cartridge and paper is not included)

Product Description Basic Specifications 25


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.2.13 Accessories † Special Consumables


„ Ink cartridge (8-color)
Stylus Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C accessories and options are
shown below. • Stylus Pro 4800

† Standard Accessories Table 1-18. Ink Cartridge (Stylus Pro 4800)


„ Manual set Model Number
Ink cartridge
„ Software CD-ROM 110 ml 220 ml
• Printer Driver
Photo Black C13T564100 C13T565100
• EPSON LFP Remote Panel
„ AC Cable Matte Black C13T543800 C13T544800
„ Spacer for borderless printing 8”/A2 roll paper Cyan C13T564200 C13T565200
„ 17 (2"/3") inch normal tension spindle (With 2 adapters for exclusive Magenta C13T564300 C13T565300
paper core use)
Yellow C13T564400 C13T565400
„ Ink cartridges 110ml 1 each
Light Cyan C13T564500 C13T565500
8-color model
• Stylus Pro 4800: PK,C,M,Y,LC,LM,LK,LLK Light Magenta C13T564600 C13T565600
• Stylus Pro 4880/4880C: PK,C,VM,Y,LC,VLM,LK,LLK Light Black C13T564700 C13T565700
4-color model Light Light Black C13T564900 C13T565900
• Stylus Pro 4400/4450: MK,C,M,Y
„ Maintenance Tank • Stylus Pro 4880/4880C
„ Guarantee Card Table 1-19. Ink Cartridge (Stylus Pro 4880/4880C)
„ Card holder Model Number
„ Individual Packaging Ink cartridge
110 ml 220 ml
† Special Options
Photo Black C13T605100 C13T606100
„ Maintenance Tank (C12C890191)
Matte Black C13T613800 C13T614800
Cyan C13T605200 C13T606200
Vivid Magenta C13T605300 C13T606300
Yellow C13T605400 C13T606400
Light Cyan C13T605500 C13T606500
Vivid Light Magenta C13T605600 C13T606600
Light Black C13T605700 C13T606700
Light Light Black C13T605900 C13T606900

Product Description Basic Specifications 26


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

„ Ink cartridge (4-color model) † Options Common to Other Printers


• Stylus Pro 4400 „ 2/3 inch Dual Roll Feed Spindle (C12C811171)
Table 1-20. Ink Cartridge (Stylus Pro 4400)
„ 2/3 inch Dual Roll Feed Spindle (High Tension) (C12C811191)
„ Roll Paper Belt (C12C890121)
Model Number
Ink cartridge „ EpsonNet 10/100 BASE RX High Speed Int. Print Server
110 ml 220 ml (C12C824052*) (Stylus Pro 4400/4800 only)
Matte Black C13T543800 C13T544800 „ Borderless Print Spacer for 420 mm and 8 inch Roll Paper
(C12C811201)
Cyan C13T543200 C13T544200
„ Auto Cutter Spare Blade (C12C815291)
Magenta C13T543300 C13T544300
Note *: The asterisk (*) is a substitute for the last digit of the product code, which
Yellow C13T543400 C13T544400 varies by location.

• Stylus Pro 4450

Table 1-21. Ink Cartridge (Stylus Pro 4450)


Model Number
Ink cartridge
110 ml 220 ml
Matte Black C13T613800 C13T614800
Cyan C13T613200 C13T614200
Magenta C13T613300 C13T614300
Yellow C13T613400 C13T614400

„ Special paper (Refer to "1.2.6 Paper Specification (p.15)" for paper


type and size)
„ Black ink conversion kit (ICCVK36)

Product Description Basic Specifications 27


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.3 External View and Parts Names


EXTERNAL VIEW
† Stylus Pro 4400/4800

Paper Cover Printer Cover Spindle Paper Set Lever Control Panel Type-B Interface Paper Guide Center Unit
(Rear cover)

Ink Cartridge Box


(Right side)

Ink Cartridge Box ASF Cassette Maintenance Tank


(Left side)
IEEE1394 Interface USB Interface AC Inlet

Figure 1-5. External View and Parts Names (Stylus Pro 4400/4800)

NOTE: 4-color model is equipped with a cover instead of the ink cartridge box (right).

Product Description External View and Parts Names 28


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C

Paper Cover Printer Cover Spindle Paper Set Lever Control Panel

Ink Cartridge Box


(Right side)

Ink Cartridge Box ASF Cassette Maintenance Tank


(Left side)
Network Interface USB Interface AC Inlet

Figure 1-6. External View and Parts Names (Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C)
† 4-color model is equipped with a cover instead of the ink cartridge box (right).

Product Description External View and Parts Names 29


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4 Operating Panel 1.4.1.1 LED


Panel LED types are the following 3 types. The LEDs indicate printer status as
follows.
1.4.1 Buttons and Functions
Table 1-22. LED
Pause LED Paper Source / Paper Cut LCD Paper check LED
LED Color Display Printer Status
On Indicates that the paper is not printable.
Paper check Red Indicates error that occurred when feeding / ejecting
Blink
paper.
On Indicates printer pauses operation.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pause Green
Blink Indicates printer is in operation.
Menu
On Indicates error regarding ink occurred.
Ink check Red
Blink Indicates warning status regarding ink.
3sec.

Power Ink check LED Menu / Cleaning


Pause Paper Feed / Eject Paper

Figure 1-7. Panel Design

Panel Display Remaining Ink Cartridge Shifts to Setting


(Refer to "1.4.2 Panel (Refer to "1.4.2.4 Ink Remaining Item Selection Menu
Display (p33)".) Indicator Display (p38)".)

Cut availability for Paper Available rate of Maintenance Tank


Type/Roll Paper selection (Refer to "1.4.2.4 Ink Remaining Indicator
Display (p38)".)

Figure 1-8. LCD Panel (8-color model)

Product Description Operating Panel 30


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.1.2 Switch
Table 1-23. Panel Functions and Switch Operation
Function Function Function
Switch
Single 3 sec. push (In panel setting) (+ Power ON)

Power Power ON/OFF *1 — — —


Pause † Pause / Switch Print Reset Appear from panel Maintenance mode1
† Paper feed operation by backside manual setting
insertion within 3 sec.
Menu / Cleaning [>/↵] † Printing † Paper thickness detection less than 0.8mm † Item shift (down)
Printer status menu shift All heads cleaning *2 † Operation
† Except above *3 † Paper thickness detection over 0.8mm execution
Panel setting mode shift/decision All heads cleaning after removing paper † Setting fixed
† Paper thickness detection over 0.8mm when † Memory
printing
Not in operation.
Select paper type / Paper Cut [<] † Paper type select *4 † Paper cut or paper feed *5 Item shift (up)
„ Not in operation when printing Not in operation when printing
„ Not in operation when the paper is picked „ Roll paper cut ON
up by ASF. Move to cut operation after 3 sec.
1. Roll paper cut ON „ Roll paper cut OFF
2. Roll paper cut OFF Not operated.
„ Cut sheet is not operated.
3. Cut sheet
Indicate 1, 2, 3, 1, … by turns.
Paper Feed / Eject Paper [∧] † Paper feed for roll paper (reverse) *6 † High speed paper feed (reverse) Increase setup value,
† If cut sheet is not set, paper is fed by ASF. Roll paper only. (Not in operation for cut switch over setting
sheet.)
Paper Feed / Eject Paper [∨] † Paper feed for roll paper (forward) *7 Decrease setup
† High speed paper feed (forward)
† If cut sheet is set, eject sheet Roll paper only. (Not in operation for cut value, switch over
† If cut sheet is not set, paper is fed by ASF. sheet.) setting
Continued on next page

Product Description Operating Panel 31


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 1-23. Panel Functions and Switch Operation


Function Function Function
Switch
Single 3 sec. push (In panel setting) (+ Power ON)

Pause
† Switches Stop ↔ Operation of remaining
+
paper detection during standby*8
Select paper type / Paper Cut [<]
Select paper type / Paper Cut [<] Maintenance mode 2
+
Paper Feed / Eject Paper [∧]
+
Paper Feed / Eject Paper [∨]
Select paper type / Paper Cut [<] F/W download
+
Paper Feed / Eject Paper [∧]
+
Paper Feed / Eject Paper [∨]
+
Menu / Cleaning [>/↵]

Note *1: Power OFF must be executed regardless of printer status.


*2: Following are the conditions for cleaning.
• Idling (In on-line: Inside the panel menu is not in on-line.)
• Printing
*3: LCD panel display only changes when key is not pressed during the shift from idling status to printer setting menu. Other than this, switch over of display is executed when
the key is pushed.
*4: When key is not pressed, LCD icon for paper type is switched over.
*5: During ink drying, ink drying is interrupted and runs the specified operation.
*6: 5cps paper feeding for 2 seconds after the button is pressed. 52cps paper feed if pressed for a further 2 seconds. Maximum reverse feeding is 37cm with one press of the
button.
*7: 5cps paper feeding for 2 seconds after the button is pressed. 52cps paper feed if pressed for a further 2 seconds.
*8: Can be switched when roll paper remaining detection is on or cut sheet remaining detection is on in Maintenance Mode 2. While the detection is stopped, the printer stops
the counter operation and blinks the counter value.

Product Description Operating Panel 32


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.2 Panel Display


1.4.2.1 Panel Display in Operation (LCD and LED Display)
Note : Explanation for signs in LCD display
YES : Function can be executed.
NO : Function cannot be executed.
Release : Release error and pause status
Start : Paper initialization start.
– : Follow LED display of printer status in operations
Table 1-24. Panel Display
LED Display Panel key Function
Priority

Printer Status LCD Display Paper Ink Paper Cut/Eject Menu M


Pause Pause Reset
Check Check Select Paper Shift Cleaning
Low Printable READY OFF OFF OFF YES YES*4 YES YES*1 YES YES
Printable*23 READY xx.xm OFF OFF OFF YES YES*4 YES YES*1 YES YES
Data processing/ Printing PRINTING OFF Blink — NO NO YES*6 YES*1 YES YES
Data processing/ Printing*23 PRINTING xx.xm OFF Blink — NO NO YES*6 YES*1 YES YES
Unable to print *14 UNABLE TO PRINT — ON — — — — —*2 — —
Unable to execute UNABLE TO — ON — — — — —*2 — —
EXECUTE
Maintenance tank near *7 MNT TK NEAR FULL — — Blink — — — —*2 — —
Ink low *8 INK LOW — — Blink — — — —*2 — —
Maintenance request MNT REQ nnnn *5 — — — — — — — —
Paper near end PAPER LOW Blink — — — — — —*2 — —
Ink drying PLEASE WAIT OFF Blink — NO YES YES*6 NO YES*19 YES
nnnnSEC
Panel setting menu "1.4.4 Panel Setting (p.40)" OFF ON — NO NO NO*3 NO NO*3 NO*3
(Refer to panel setting)
Paper initialization PLEASE WAIT OFF OFF — NO NO NO NO NO YES
Pause PAUSE — ON — — NO NO YES Release YES
In hexadecimal dump mode PRINTING OFF Blink — NO NO NO YES YES NO
Inner printing PRINTING OFF Blink — NO NO NO YES YES YES
Cutter replacing "1.4.4.34 Cutter Blade OFF ON — NO NO NO NO NO NO
Replacement (p.79)"

Continued on next page

Product Description Operating Panel 33


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 1-24. Panel Display


Priority LED Display Panel key Function
Printer Status LCD Display Paper Ink Paper Cut/Eject Menu M
Pause Pause Reset
Check Check Select Paper Shift Cleaning
Initial cutting CUTTING OFF Blink — NO NO NO NO NO NO
Waiting for paper initializing PRESS PAUSE OFF ON — YES YES NO NO START YES
trigger BUTTON
Cleaning unavailable REMOVE PAPER ON OFF — NO NO NO NO NO YES
Initializing operation PLEASE WAIT OFF Blink — NO NO NO NO NO YES
Cleaning failure NOZZLES STILL Blink ON Blink NO NO*18 NO NO Release YES
CLOGGED
Multi sensor gain error CHANGE Blink OFF — — NO*18 NO NO NO YES
Multi sensor paper recognition PAPER TYPE
error
Cut sheet size error WRONG PAPER SIZE Blink ON — — YES*17 NO NO Release YES*10
Paper eject error/ Front manual REMOVE PAPER Blink ON — — NO NO NO NO YES
feed unavailable error
Paper out/roll paper out PAPER OUT ON OFF — — NO NO YES NO YES
ASF paper out PAPER OUT ON OFF — — YES*17 NO YES NO YES*11
Disable to borderless printing RELOAD PAPER Blink OFF — NO YES*17 NO NO NO YES*15
error NO BORDERLESS
WITH THIS SIZE
Paper recognition error RELOAD PAPER Blink OFF — — NO NO NO NO YES
Cut sheet set by manual RELOAD PAPER Blink ON — — NO NO NO NO YES
insertion error INSERT DEEPLY
Cut sheet loading error*10 NOT STRAIGHT Blink ON — — NO NO NO YES YES
RELOAD
Paper skew error PAPER NOT Blink OFF — — NO NO NO NO YES
STRAIGHT
Paper cut failure PAPER NOT CUT Blink OFF — — NO NO NO NO YES
Command error COMMAND ERROR Blink Blink Blink NO NO NO NO NO YES*10
Wrong ink error*21,*22 MISMATCH ERROR Blink Blink Blink NO NO NO NO YES YES*10
Wrong ink error*21,*22 DRIVER INK SET Blink Blink Blink NO NO NO NO YES YES*10
SETTING IS WRONG
Continued on next page

Product Description Operating Panel 34


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 1-24. Panel Display


Priority LED Display Panel key Function
Printer Status LCD Display Paper Ink Paper Cut/Eject Menu M
Pause Pause Reset
Check Check Select Paper Shift Cleaning
Wrong roll paper path LOAD ROLL PAPER ON ON — NO NO NO NO YES YES*10
Wrong ASF paper path LOAD SHEET PAPER ON ON — NO NO NO NO NO YES*10
IN P. TRAY
Wrong manual paper path FEED SHEET PAPER ON ON — YES NO NO NO NO YES*10
ASF prohibitions*13 FORBIDDEN MEDIA ON OFF — YES NO NO NO NO YES*10
FROM P. TRAY
FEED SHEET PAPER ON OFF — YES NO NO NO NO YES*10
MANUARY
Cleaning CLEANING — Blink — NO NO NO NO NO YES
Executing ink sequence PLEASE WAIT OFF Blink — NO NO NO NO NO YES
Executing power cleaning PLEASE WAIT OFF Blink — NO NO NO NO NO YES
mm%
Initial charging CHARGING INK OFF Blink — NO NO NO NO NO YES
mm%
Cutting by cut key CUTTING OFF Blink — NO NO NO NO NO YES
Pause while cut *16 PLEASE WAIT OFF Blink — NO YES YES*6 NO YES*19 YES
nnnnSEC
Conversion cartridge life near TIMES REMAINING OFF ON ON — NO NO NO Release YES
end*8
Conversion cartridge life error*8 REPLACE CNVRSION OFF OFF ON — NO NO NO NO YES
CRTG
Wrong PK/ MK*8 INVALID INK CRTG OFF ON ON — NO NO NO Release YES
K ink replacement BK INK CHANGE OFF OFF ON NO*3 NO NO*3 NO NO YES
conformation*25 ←N EXEC Y→
Ink out*8 INK OUT OFF OFF ON — NO YES*12 NO NO YES
Wrong Ink cartridge*8 INVALID INK CRTG OFF ON ON — NO NO NO Release YES
Wrong destination*8 WRONG INK CRTG OFF ON ON — NO NO NO Release YES
Unavailable Ink cartridge*8 WRONG INK CRTG OFF OFF ON — NO NO NO NO YES
Wrong logo error*8 INVALID INK CRTG OFF ON ON — NO NO NO Release YES
Wrong jig cartridge*8,*24 WRONG INK CRTG# OFF OFF ON — NO NO NO NO YES
Ink cartridge failure/CSIC SET INK CRTG OFF OFF ON — NO YES NO NO YES
contact error*8
Continued on next page

Product Description Operating Panel 35


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 1-24. Panel Display


Priority LED Display Panel key Function
Printer Status LCD Display Paper Ink Paper Cut/Eject Menu M
Pause Pause Reset
Check Check Select Paper Shift Cleaning
No ink cartridge*8 NO INK CRTG OFF OFF ON — NO YES NO NO YES
Maintenance tank full MNT TNK FULL OFF OFF ON — NO NO NO NO YES
Releasing left and right ink LOWER INK LEVERS OFF OFF — — NO NO NO NO YES
lever*26
Releasing left ink lever LOWER L INK LVR OFF OFF — — NO NO NO NO YES
Releasing right ink lever LOWER R INK LVR OFF OFF — — NO NO NO NO YES
Printer cover open TOP COVER OPEN OFF OFF — — NO NO NO NO YES
Releasing paper lever LOAD PAPER ON OFF — — NO NO NO NO YES
SUCTION
Releasing paper lever in SET PAPER LEVER ON OFF — — NO NO NO NO YES
operation
Replacing ink cartridge*8 SET INK CRTG OFF OFF ON — NO NO NO NO YES
Paper jam(ASF) RELEASE LEVER Blink OFF — NO NO NO NO NO YES
REMOVE PAPER JAM
Paper jam(CR)*9 RELEASE LEVER Blink OFF — NO NO NO NO NO YES
REMOVE PAPER JAM
Reboot request*9 TURN PRINTER PWR — — — NO NO NO NO NO NO
OFF AND THEN ON
No maintenance tank NO MNT TNK OFF OFF ON — NO NO NO NO YES
Rear cover open REAR COVER OPEN OFF OFF — — NO NO NO NO YES
Reset RESET ON ON ON NO NO NO NO NO NO
F/W updating F/W UPDATING OFF OFF OFF NO NO NO NO NO NO
F/W update completed UPDATE COMPLETE OFF OFF OFF NO NO NO NO NO NO
F/W update failure UPDATE FAILED Blink Blink Blink NO NO NO NO NO NO
Executing power off sequence POWER OFF OFF OFF — NO NO NO NO NO NO
Type-B option I/F error OPTION I/F ERROR Blink Blink Blink NO NO NO NO NO NO
CR lock unlocked error UNLOCK Blink Blink Blink NO NO NO NO NO NO
PRINTHEAD
High Service call SERVICE REQ. Blink Blink Blink NO NO NO NO NO NO
nnnnnnnnn

Product Description Operating Panel 36


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Note *1: Thick paper is not available. *21: displayed if remote ink commands differ from the ink type of this printer (8
*2: The status becomes no ink or maintenance tank full according to the color/ 4 color)
remaining amount of ink when cleaning is executed. *22: Wrong ink error message is switched at 3 second-intervals.
*3: It is assigned to key function in panel setting. *23: The remaining paper counter value is displayed when the remaining paper
*4: Only available when the roll paper is loaded. detection is on. While the counter is suspended, it blinks.

*5: It is lit for 100ms at 5 sec. intervals. *24: This is not occurred on the usual market, but added as another status for
maintenance work.
*6: Only shifting to printer status menu is available. (Pause LED blinks when
displaying menu) *25: The message indicating K ink replacement conformation is displayed after
Wrong PK/ MK is forcibly released.
*7: Blink indicator of maintenance tank.
*26: For 4-color model, [LOWER INK LEVER] is displayed because it is not
*8: Blinks corresponding indicator. iequipped with the right and left levers.
*9: The message of reboot request is displayed when the rear sensor detects the
absence of paper after the user removes the paper.
*10: Initialization of mechanism (includes compulsory quit of cleaning) will not be
executed after panel reset execution but initialization of received data will be
executed.
*11: Initialization of mechanism (includes compulsory quit of cleaning) will not be
executed after panel reset execution but initialization of received data will be
executed only in no paper for ASF situation.
*12: Panel setting menu can be shifted in order to execute ink replace sequence
during ink out.
*13: Display by switching at 3-second intervals.
*14: It is displayed when printer cannot print the adjustment pattern, etc. It returns
to the display before performing after 3 seconds.
*15: Only using ASF, paper eject operation is performed by reset.
*16: A displayed unit is the [second]. It is displayed while counting down each 1
second from maximum time.
*17: After cut sheet error occurred, paper eject operation would be performed by
pressing down the Paper Feed Switch [⁄], and then it will occur ASF paper out
error after ejecting paper. When paper eject operation is completed, paper is
loaded from ASF by pressing down the Paper Feed Switch [Ÿ] / [⁄].
*18: Cut sheet is ejected automatically.
*19: In this case, printer status shifts pause status (LCD display too) and count
down is continued by releasing pause.
*20: To reduce nonsense calls when the carriage lock is unreleased, this message
is displayed for CR servo system service calls when initial ink charge FLG is
set.

Product Description Operating Panel 37


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.2.2 Paper Type Icon Display † Ink remaining display


The paper type which is recognized automatically when setting the paper and
Remaining Ink*1 LCD
is set by paper select switch are displayed on LCD.
100 ~ 81% remained
Paper type LCD 80 ~ 61% remained
Roll paper auto cut ON 60 ~ 41% remained

Roll paper auto cut OFF 40 ~ 21% remained


20% remained ~ just before near end*2
Cut sheet
Near end*2
Ink out
1.4.2.3 PG Setting Display Cartridge error and no cartridge*2

Display panel PG setting status on 5th character counting from left of lower Note *1: Available quantity is displayed for the maintenance tank.
line.
*2: Blinks only for corresponding cartridge(s).
† When PG setting = WIDE or WIDER or WIDEST, "H" is displayed.
† When PG setting = NARROW, "S" is displayed. 1.4.2.5 Suction Adjustment and Indicator Display
Users can adjust paper suction to set paper easily, only when paper set lever is
released, and paper is detected with paper sensor (rear) or PE sensor. At that
1.4.2.4 Ink Remaining Indicator Display time, followings are displayed on the LCD panel.
Ink remaining indicator is displayed at the lower line of LCD panel. † LCD Display
† LCD display item and LCD panel display position „ Suction indicator (3 levels): 14th character counting from left of lower
line.
„ Up/down mark ( ): 15th character counting from left of lower
line.

Suction LCD
High 100%
Matte Black
Cyan Maintenance tank Middle 60%
Vivid Magenta or Magenta
Low 0%
Yellow
Photo Black or Matte Black
Light Cyan or Cyan
C H E C K Rewinding paper until it reaches to horizontal guideline of
Vivid Light Magenta or Light Magenta or Magenta
P O IN T roll paper pull up when setting roll paper, making vacuum
Light Black or Matte Black
intensity to maximum value will make paper set properly.
Note *: A 4-color model displays 4 types of cartridges only, blanking form 7 to 10 rows.

Product Description Operating Panel 38


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.3 Job information Table 1-25. Job information


Parameter Information notes
† Definition of Job
The minimum unit of printer operation is defined as "Job" (*) in this printer. xx6 Job status 01: Pending
The job print information with character/image can be saved as a record. 02: Printing
03: Complete
Basic print job functions are followings;
04: Cancel
Note *: Cleaning can be executed during printing; it is not defined as a Job. 05: Abort
xx7-xx8 Character strings code *2
Information saving Information saving
Printable xx9-xx24 User name (16byte) If each user name does not reach
the maximum length, the rest of the
length is filled with <SP>(20).
xx25-xx26 Document name (32byte) *2
Normal end Count Start Cancel
JS xx57-xx72 Host name Stores the first 16 of 32 bytes that
are transmitted from the driver.
xx73 Media ID Specified by the driver.
xx74 Number of impression 01-02 (02 is specified when DP=on
Printing during executing a job.)
Count End Count End
JE (Complete) JE (Cancel) xx75-xx90 Ink used *3
Figure 1-9. Printing Job Transition xx91-xx94 Paper used H:xxxx mm W:xxxx mm
† Job information xx95-xx100 Print start time YY MMDDhhmmss Time at JS
This printer saves following job information (68byte x 10job) in NVRAM. xx101-xx106 Print end time YYMMDDhhmmss Time at JE
Following are the details. xx107 Ink set information Same as ink
Table 1-25. Job information xx108 Paper path
Parameter Information notes xx109-xx110 Number of pages
xx1 The quantity of saved job 0 ~ 10
information Note *1: Parallel I/F is not equipped to this printer; therefore 01h is treated as Reserve.

xx2 Saving No. 0~9 *2: Currently the code is fixed as 00h 00h, treated as Reserve.

xx3-xx4 ID No. 0 ~ 65535 (0 is not available.) *3: Returned for each ink cartridge in the sorting order. For Stylus Pro 4400/4450,
*1
Null is returned to slot 5 to 8.
xx5 Using I/F 01: Parallel
02: USB
03: Option I/F1
04: Option I/F 2
05: IEEE1394
FF: When I/F is not used

Product Description Operating Panel 39


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4 Panel Setting † Termination


„ The printer enters the menu shift available status when the [Pause]
1.4.4.1 Outline button is pushed once in the Panel setting mode.
† Startup „ The printer enters the menu shift available status when the [Select
The printer mode is selected by pressing the [Menu / Cleaning] button paper type] button is pushed once in setting menu select mode.
during print ready, warning, or maintenance call status. The printer is then „ The printer enters the menu shift available status when executing
automatically incapable of printing. initialization.
† Operation „ The printer enters the print ready status after the nozzle check pattern
1. The Printer setting menu can be entered by pushing the [Menu / or the status sheet is printed.
Cleaning] button once during menu shift available state (Print ready, „ The printer enters the menu shift available status after black ink is
no paper). It is shifted to setting menu select mode, and the setting replaced.
menu is displayed on the left side of the LCD upper line. „ The printer enters the menu shift available status after the cutter is
2. Each setting menu is displayed one after another by pushing [Paper replaced.
Feed] buttons in the setting menu select mode. It is shifted to setting „ The printer returns to the menu shift available status when [Pause]
item select menu by pushing [Menu / Cleaning] button. "Setting menu" button is pressed in any modes.
is displayed on the upper line, and "Setting item" is displayed on the
lower line. NOTE: Under special condition, there are times when returning to the
3. The setting menu is displayed one after another by pushing [Paper above status is impossible.
Feed] buttons in the setting item select mode. It is shifted to setting
value select mode of the setting item by pushing [Menu / Cleaning]
button. "Setting item" is displayed on the upper line, and "Setting
value" is displayed on the lower line. The "*" displayed at left side of
the setting value represents the current setup value.
4. Setting value is displayed on the lower line one after another by
pushing [Paper Feed] buttons in the setting value select mode if the
setting value can be changed. The "*" at left side of the setting value
represents the current setup value.
5. When the [Menu / Cleaning] button is pushed at the setting value
select mode, the displayed setting value is entered and registered as
the current setting value. If it has a corresponded operation, execution
starts. No operation occurs if "*" is already displayed.
6. It returns to the setting item select menu by pushing [Select paper
type] button in the setting value select mode. It returns to the setting
menu select mode by pushing [Select paper type] button in the setting
item select menu.

Product Description Operating Panel 40


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Panel display „ Level structure of Printer setting menu


[< / >]
„ Level structure of Setting menu PRINTER SETUP
*
PRINTER SETUP PRINTER SETUP
ROLL COUNTER TIME OUT
READY [< / >] [<]
[∧ / ∨]]
PRINTER SETUP [< / >] PRINTER SETUP
PRINTER SETUP SHEET COUNTER PRINTER SETUP
CUTTER ADJ
[∧ / ∨] PLATEN GAP
[∧ / ∨]
[<]
[∧ / ∨]
[<] TEST PRINT [< / >] PRINTER SETUP
TEST PRINT [<]
PLATEN GAP PRINTER SETUP
[∧ / ∨] NOZZLE CHECK
[∧ / ∨] REFRESH MRGN

[<]
PRINTER STATUS [< / >] PRINTER SETUP
[<] [∧ / ∨]
PRINTER STATUS [<]
PAGE LINE
VERSION PRINTER SETUP
[∧ / ∨]
[∧ / ∨] SHEET SIZE CK

[<]
CUSTOM PAPER [< / >] [<] [∧ / ∨]
PRINTER SETUP
CUSTOM PAPER [<]
PAPER NUMBER INTERFACE
[∧ / ∨] PRINTER SETUP
[∧ / ∨] AUTO NZL CK
[<]
MAINTENANCE [< / >] [<]
[∧ / ∨]
MAINTENANCE PRINTER SETUP
CUTTER REPL
[<]
[∧ / ∨] CODE PAGE
PRINTER SETUP
HEAD ALIGNMENT [< / >] [∧ / ∨] AUTO CLEANING
[<]
[<]
HEAD ALIGNMENT
PRINTER SETUP
[∧ / ∨]
PAPER THKNS [<]
[∧ / ∨] PAPER MARGIN
PRINTER SETUP
CUTTER REPLACE [< / >] [∧ / ∨] QUIET CUT
[<]
CUTTER REPLACE [<]
EXEC
PRINTER SETUP [∧ / ∨]
[<]
PPR SIZE CHK
PRINTER SETUP
[∧ / ∨] [∧ / ∨] INIT SETTINGS

[<]
PRINTER SETUP [<] [∧ / ∨]
PPR ALIGN CHK
[∧ / ∨]

Note *: For the menus inside the doted lines, remaining roll paper menu is displayed
when remaining paper display setting is set to roll paper in Maintenance Mode,
and remaining cut sheet menu is displayed when it is set to cut sheet. When
remaining paper display setting is off, these menus do not appear.

Product Description Operating Panel 41


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

„ Level structure of Test print menu „ Level structure of Printer status menu

TEST PRINT [< / >] PRINTER STATUS [< / >]


TEST PRINT PRINTER STATUS
NOZZLE CHECK VERSION

[∧ / ∨] [∧ / ∨]

TEST PRINT PRINTER STATUS


[<] [<]
STATUS CHECK PRINTABLE PG

[∧ / ∨] [∧ / ∨]

TEST PRINT PRINTER STATUS


[<] [<]
JOB INFO INK LEFT

[∧ / ∨] [∧ / ∨]

TEST PRINT PRINTER STATUS


[<] [<]
CUSTOM PAPER MAINT TANK

[∧ / ∨] [∧ / ∨]

PRINTER STATUS
[<]
USAGE COUNT

[∧ / ∨]

PRINTER STATUS
[<]
USE COUNT CLR

[∧ / ∨]

PRINTER STATUS
[<]
JOB HISTORY
[∧ / ∨]

PRINTER STATUS
[<]
JOB HSTRY CLR
[∧ / ∨]

PRINTER STATUS
<]
TOTAL PRINTS
[∧ / ∨]

PRINTER STATUS
[<]
SERVICE LIFE

[∧ / ∨]

Product Description Operating Panel 42


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

„ Level structure of User Paper Setup Menu „ Level structure of Maintenance menu

CUSTOM PAPER [< / >] MAINTENANCE [< / >]


CUSTOM PAPER MAINTENANCE
PAPER NUMBER CUTTER REPL
[∧ / ∨] [∧ / ∨]

CUSTOM PAPER MAINTENANCE


[<] [<]
PLATEN GAP BK INK CHANGE

[∧ / ∨] [∧ / ∨]

CUSTOM PAPER MAINTENANCE


[<] [<]
THICKNESS PAT PWR CLEANING

[∧ / ∨] [∧ / ∨]
CUSTOM PAPER MAINTENANCE
[<] [<]
THICKNESS NUM CLOCK SETTING

[∧ / ∨] [∧ / ∨]

CUSTOM PAPER
[<]
CUT METHOD

[∧ / ∨]

[<]
CUSTOM PAPER
„ Level structure of Gap adjustment menu
PPR FEED ADJ

[∧ / ∨]
HEAD ALIGNMENT [< / >]
CUSTOM PAPER HEAD ALIGNMENT
[<]
EJECT ROLLER PAPER THKNS
[∧ / ∨] [∧ / ∨]
CUSTOM PAPER HEAD ALIGNMENT
[<] [<]
DRYING TIME ALIGNMENT
[∧ / ∨] [∧ / ∨]
CUSTOM PAPER
[<]
SUCTION
[∧ / ∨]

CUSTOM PAPER
[<]
M/W ADJ

[∧ / ∨]

Product Description Operating Panel 43


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.2 Panel Setting Menu Item


Table 1-26. Panel Setting Menu Item
Top menu
Item menu Panel display Setup value (Underline: Default) Ref.
(Panel display)
SET ROLL LENGTH --,15~60~300ft
Roll Paper ROLL COUNTER
Remaining paper SET ROLL ALERT 3~7~50ft
p.48
detection SET SHEET PAGES --,10~100~250PG
Cut Sheet SHEET COUNTER
SET SHEET ALERT 5~10~50PG
PG Setting PLATEN GAP NARROW, STANDARD, WIDE, WIDER, WIDEST p.49
Page lines PAGE LINE ON, OFF p.50
† Stylus Pro 4400/4800
AUTO, USB, IEEE1394, OPTION
Interface Select INTERFACE p.51
† Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C
AUTO, USB, OPTION
Code Page Switching CODE PAGE PC437, PC850 p.51
Printer setting menu
(PRINTER SETUP) Roll Paper Margin PAPER MARGN DEFAULT, T/B 15mm, T/B 25mm, 15mm, 3mm p.52
Detect Paper Width PPR SIZE CHK ON, OFF p.53
Detect Skew Error PPR ALIGN CHK ON, OFF p.54
Job Time-out Setting TIME OUT OFF, 30sec, 60sec, 180sec, 300sec p.54
Cutter Position Adjustment CUTTER ADJ EXEC p.55
Auto Margin Refresh REFRESH MRGN ON, OFF p.55
Cut Sheet Size Error SHEET SIZE CK ON, OFF p.56
Auto Nozzle Check for Each Job AUTO NZL CK OFF, ON p.56
Cleaning Setting for Nozzle Check AUTO CLEANING ON, OFF p.57
Super Low Speed Cut Mode setting QUIET CUT OFF, ON
Printer Setup Value Initialization INIT SETTINGS EXEC p.58
Nozzle Check Pattern Printing NOZZLE CHECK PRINT p.59
Test print menu Status Printing STATUS CHECK PRINT p.60
(TEST PRINT) Job Information Print JOB INFO PRINT p.63
User Paper Setting Print CUSTOM PAPER PRINT p.65
† Stylus Pro 4400/4800
Printer status menu A0xxxx
Firmware Version VERSION p.66
(PRINTER STATUS) † Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C
B0xxxx.XXXX
Continued on next page

Product Description Operating Panel 44


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 1-26. Panel Setting Menu Item


Top menu
Item menu Panel display Setup value (Underline: Default) Ref.
(Panel display)
1st row MK xxxxxxxPG * PK xxxxxxPG *
2nd row C xxxxxxxPG *
3rd row M xxxxxxxPG *
Printable Pages per 4th row Y xxxxxxxPG *
PRINTABLE PG p.67
Ink Cartridge 5th row LK xxxxxxxPG *
6th row LC xxxxxxxPG *
7th row LM xxxxxxxPG *
8th row LLK xxxxxxxPG *
MK XXXXXXX PK XXXXXXX
1st row
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
C XXXXXXX
2nd row
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
M XXXXXXX
3rd row
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
Y XXXXXXX
4th row
Printer status menu (0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
Ink Remaining INK LEFT p.68
(PRINTER STATUS) LK XXXXXXX
5th row
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
LC XXXXXXX
6th row
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
LM XXXXXXX
7th row
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
LLK XXXXXXX
8th row
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
Maintenance Tank Count MAINT TANK 0%, nn% E* F, E* * F, E*** F, E****F, E***** F p.69
Ink counter INK xxxxx.x ml
Consumption Counter USAGE COUNT p.69
Paper counter PPR xxxxx.x cm
Clear consumption Ink counter clear INK EXEC
USE COUNT CLR p.69
counter Paper counter clear PAPER EXEC
Job History Display (10 jobs) JOB HISTORY No.0 ~ No.9 p.69
Job History Clear JOB HSTRY CLR EXEC p.69
Total Print Pages TOTAL PRINTS nnnnnn (Max. 6 figures) p.69
Continued on next page

Product Description Operating Panel 45


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 1-26. Panel Setting Menu Item


Top menu
Item menu Panel display Setup value (Underline: Default) Ref.
(Panel display)
CUTTER XXXXXXX
Cutter life p.70
(E* F, E** F, E*** F, E****F, E*****F)
CR MOTOR XXXXXXX
CR motor life p.70
(0%, nn%, E* F, E** F, E*** F, E****F, E*****F))
Printer status menu PF MOTOR XXXXXXX
Consumable Life PF motor life SERVICE LIFE p.71
(PRINTER STATUS) (E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
HEAD UNIT XXXXXXX
Head unit life p.71
(E* F, E** F, E*** F, E****F, E*****F)
CLEANING UNIT XXXXXXX
Cleaning unit life p.72
(E* F, E** F, E*** F, E**** F, E*****F)
Paper Type Selection PAPER NUMBER STANDARD, 1 ~ 10 p.72
PG setting PLATEN GAP NARROW, STANDARD, WIDE, WIDER, WIDEST p.74
Paper Thickness Detection Pattern THICKNESS PAT PRINT
Select paper thickness number THICKNESS NUM 1 ~ 16
STANDARD
THIN PAPER
User Paper Setup Menu Cutting method CUT METHOD p.74
THICK, FAST
(CUSTOM PAPER) THICK, SLOW
Paper feed adjustment PPR FEED ADJ -0.70% ~ 0% ~ 0.70% p.74
Eject paper roller setting EJECT ROLLER AUTO, SHEET, ROLL CURLED, ROLL NORMAL p.74
Ink drying time (Pass delay) DRYING TIME 0.0sec ~ 10.0sec p.74
Paper suction SUCTION STANDARD, -1, -2, -3, -4 p.74
MW print adjustment M/W ADJ STANDARD, 1, 2 p.74
Execute sequence CUTTER REPL EXEC
Cutter Blade Cover open OPEN TOP COVER –
p.79
Replacement Cutter replacement REPLACE CUTTER –
Maintenance menu
Cover close CLOSE TOP COVER –
(MAINTENANCE)
K INK CHANGE Execute sequence BK INK CHANGE EXEC p.79
Power Cleaning POWER CLEANING EXEC p.79
Date Setting CLOCK SETTING MM/DD/YY HH:MM p.79
Paper thickness (in 0.1mm units) *1 PAPER THKNS STD, 0.1mm ~ 1.5mm p.79
UNI-D
BI-D 2-COLOR
Gap Adjustment menu
BI-D ALL
(HEAD ALIGNMENT) Select and print adjustment pattern ALIGNMENT AUTO p.79
BI-D #1 *1
BI-D #2 *1
BI-D #3 *1
Continued on next page

Product Description Operating Panel 46


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 1-26. Panel Setting Menu Item


Top menu
Item menu Panel display Setup value (Underline: Default) Ref.
(Panel display)
#1 C 1∼5∼9 p.79
: :

#1 LLK 1∼5∼9
UNI-D *2 #2 C 1∼5∼9
Select and print adjustment pattern
4 color model prints : :
C-2 through MK-2
Note *1: Supports record mode #2 LLK 1∼5∼9
#1 = VSD1 (320CPS)
#2 = VSD2 (240CPS) #3 C 1∼5∼9
#3 = VSD3 (240CPS) : :
*2: Color orders and names for 8-color and 4-color
#3 LLK 1∼5∼9
mode are following.
8-color 4-color #1 MK 1∼5∼9
BI-D BLACK
Gap adjustment menu Basic row Stylus Pro Stylus Pro Stylus Pro ALIGNMENT MANUAL BI-D Cyan is used #2 MK 1∼5∼9
(HEAD ALIGNMENT) 4800 4880/4880C 4400/4450C
1∼5∼9
for 4 color model
#3 MK
1st row MK or PK MK or PK C
2nd row C C C-2 #1 MK 1∼5∼9
3rd row M VM Y : :
4th row Y Y Y-2
5th row LK LK M #1 LK 1∼5∼9
6th row LC LC M-2 #2 MK 1∼5∼9
7th row LM VLM MK
8th row LLK LLK MK-2 BI-D ALL : :

#2 LK 1∼5∼9

#3 MK 1∼5∼9

: :

#3 LK 1∼5∼9

Product Description Operating Panel 47


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.3 Remaining paper detection † Level structure of remaining cut sheet menu
This mode displays remaining counter of roll paper length / number of cut sheet
which is set by a user, and can display a warning message when it reaches the
near end setting value which is also set by the user. [>] SET SHEET PAGES
---
However, remaining roll paper menu is displayed when remaining paper
display setting is set to roll paper in Maintenance Mode, and remaining cut [∧ / ∨] SET SHEET ALERT

sheet menu is displayed when it is set to cut sheet. When remaining paper 5PG
[>] SET SHEET PAGES
display setting is off, these menus do not appear. 10PG [∧ / ∨]

[∧ / ∨]
NOTE: Remaining roll paper detection and remaining cut sheet detection cannot [< / >] SET SHEET ALERT
[>]
be set to ON simultaneously. 10PG
PRINTER SETUP SET SHEET PAGES
† Level structure of remaining roll paper menu CUT SHEET COUNTER 100PG [∧ / ∨]

[∧ / ∨] SET SHEET ALERT


[>]
50PG
SET SHEET PAGES
[>] SET ROLL LENGTH
---
250PG [>] [∧ / ∨]
"∗" is displayed on SET ROLL ALERT "*" is displayed on
[∧ / ∨] the left side of the
the left side of the [∧ / ∨] screen after setting
screen for two 1m
[>] SET ROLL LENGTH seconds and then
5.0m shifts to near-end [∧ / ∨]
setting Note : The number of cut sheet can be set on 10 sheets basis within 10 to 250 sheets.
[∧ / ∨] automatically
[< / >] SET ROLL ALERT The near end value can be set on 1 sheet basis within 5 to 50 sheets.
[>]
2m
PRINTER SETUP SET ROLL LENGTH
ROLL COUNTER 20.0m [∧ / ∨]

[∧ / ∨] SET ROLL ALERT


[>]
15m
SET ROLL LENGTH
99.5m
[>] [∧ / ∨]
"∗" is displayed on
[∧ / ∨] the left side of the
screen after setting

Note 1: Roll paper length can be set on 0.5m basis within 5.0 to 99.5m.In addition, the
unit length can be changed on 10m basis by holding down the up/down key.The
near end value can be set on 1m basis within 1 to15m.
2: If the unit length is changed in Maintenance Mode, all the value of roll paper
length, near end, and remaining paper display are returned to the initial
settings.

Product Description Operating Panel 48


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.4 PG Setting The relationship between panel setting, command setting (SN command), and
actual platen gap position
Executing this mode allows the user to set the width of platen gap.
If paper type other than standard is selected in user paper setting menu, PG Table 1-28. Relationships of PG Setting Values
specified in user paper setting has the priority. However if the paper thickness Paper
PH Actual PG
sensor detects the paper as over 0.81mm, PG position will be Muximum. thickness Panel SN command
command position
sensor
The following 5 positions are available in the actual platen gap setting.
Less than 01H-08H* Narrow Minimum Minimum
Table 1-27. The actual platen gap 0.3mm Small Minimum
Position Gap width Use Middle Small

Muximum 2.6mm For thick paper Big Middle


Muximum Big
Big 2.1mm Reduce the smearing on the printed image of thin paper.
Standard Minimum Minimum
Middle 1.5mm For certain easy-rubbed thin paper Small Small
Small 1.2mm For thin paper (Default) Middle Middle
Minimum 0.7mm For thin film (Film, glossy media) Big Big
Muximum Muximum
† Level structure of PG setting menu Wide Minimum Small
Small Middle
PRINTER SETUP [< / >]
Middle Big
PLATEN GAP PLATEN GAP
Big Muximum
NARROW
Muximum Muximum
[∧ / ∨]
Wider Minimum Middle
PLATEN GAP
[<] Small Big
STANDARD

[∧ / ∨]
Middle Muximum
Big Muximum
PLATEN GAP
[<] Muximum Muximum
WIDE

[∧ / ∨] Widest Minimum Big


Small Muximum
PLATEN GAP
WIDER
Middle Muximum
[∧ / ∨] Big Muximum
Muximum Muximum
09H-10H - - Muximum

Product Description Operating Panel 49


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 1-28. Relationships of PG Setting Values 1.4.4.5 Page Lines


Paper
PH Actual PG
Selecting this mode allows the user to set the page line print mode. Setup is
thickness Panel SN command the same as horizontal lines ON command (AC 02H 00H 00H 02H) in
command position
sensor automatic cutting setup. The page line is a black solid line with 1 dot width.
More than 00H-08H Narrow Minimum Small
0.3mm Less
† Level structure of page line menu
Small Small
than 0.8mm
Middle Small [< / >]
PRINTER SETUP
Big Middle PAGE LINE PAGE LINE
Muximum Big ON
Standard Muximum Small [∧ / ∨]
Small Small PAGE LINE
[<]
Middle Middle OFF

Big Big [∧ / ∨]
Muximum Muximum
Wider Minimum Small
Small Middle
Middle Big
Big Muximum
Muximum Muximum
Widest Minimum Middle
Small Big
Middle Muximum
Big Muximum
Muximum Muximum
09H-12H - - Muximum
More than - - - Muximum
0.81mm

Note *: Only in this case, SN command is ignored. When paper thickness is 0.15mm,
it is operated with minimum Bi-D value and minimum SN (PG).

Product Description Operating Panel 50


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.6 Interface Select 1.4.4.7 Code Page Switching


Selecting this mode allows selection of the automatic interface selection, USB, Selecting this mode allows the code page switch between PC437 and PC850.
1394, or optional interface.
† Level structure of Code Page switching
† Level structure of I/F switching
„ Stylus Pro 4400/4800 PRINTER SETUP [< / >]
CODE PAGE CODE PAGE
PC437
PRINTER SETUP [< / >]
INTERFACE INTERFACE [∧ / ∨]
AUTO CODE PAGE
[<]
[∧ / ∨] PC850

INTERFACE [∧ / ∨]
[<]
USB

[∧ / ∨]

INTERFACE
[<]
IEEE1394

[∧ / ∨]
INTERFACE
[<]
OPTION

[∧ / ∨]

„ Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C

PRINTER SETUP [< / >]


INTERFACE INTERFACE
AUTO
[∧ / ∨]

INTERFACE
[<]
USB

[∧ / ∨]

INTERFACE
[<]
OPTION

[∧ / ∨]

Product Description Operating Panel 51


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.8 Roll Paper Margin


Roll Paper Width X
Setting this panel allows switching roll paper margin, all sides 3mm / all sides
15mm / top and bottom 15mm, right and left 3mm / top and bottom 25mm, right
and left 3mm. This setting is only valid for roll paper. It's not valid for cut sheet. X (*)
Vertical
This setting changes only margin, and doesn't change image size. Line

† Level structure for roll paper margin setting


X
Printable Area
X
PRINTER SETUP [< / >]
PAPER MARGIN PAPER MARGIN
DEFAULT
[∧ / ∨] X

PAPER MARGIN
[<]
T/B15mm
Cut Position or Border
[∧ / ∨]
Figure 1-10. Roll Paper Margin (1)
PAPER MARGIN
[<]
T/B25mm

[∧ / ∨] If printable area is more than X=15mm from right edge of paper, the portion is
PAPER MARGIN clipped.
[<]
15mm Vertical line is not printed. (Refer to Figure 1-11)
[∧ / ∨]
Roll Paper Width X
PAPER MARGIN
[<]
3mm Clipped Area
X (*)
[∧ / ∨]

† If margin=3mm is set
Printing positions of vertical line and horizontal line are same as paper X
size. Printable Area X

† If margin=15mm, or Top/Bottom15mm is set


Printing positions of vertical line and horizontal line are positions widened
12mm from all sides or top and bottom.
X
† If margin=25mm is set
Printing positions of vertical line and horizontal line are positions widened
22mm from top and bottom. (Refer to Figure 1-10)
Figure 1-11. Roll Paper Margin (2)

Product Description Operating Panel 52


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

NOTE 1: The top margin is also set with "Set the paper top margin" (SN 1.4.4.9 Paper Width Detection
command). Actual top margin is decided as following;
When paper width detection is set to OFF or prints bigger image than set paper
• Panel setup value (top margin) > Paper top margin
(more than borderless print area), the image will be printed on the platen.
(Panel setup value is used as the top margin)
Users have to change the setting at their own responsibility.
• Panel setup value (top margin) < Paper top margin When paper initializing or print starting, for distance between grid roller and #1
(Paper top margin is used as the top margin) nozzle, paper is fed unconditionally. The print starts from the position. (No
2: Under special condition (Right/left no margin print), right / left back-feed with other sequences) Although the paper that is under grid roller will
margin can be set to 0. be wasteful, place emphasis on printing even for low reflection paper.
3: When following pattern is printed, right and left side margin are
Cut sheets and auto loading have same specification.
fixed to 3mm.
The above paper width detection OFF sequence is just for the first page in
Print Pattern Menu Command case of roll paper.
Nozzle Check Pattern Test Printing Menu NC Command
Paper auto cutting is not checked whether it cuts off or not.
Auto Nozzle Check Pattern
Status Print SS Command
† Level structure for detect paper width menu
Job Information Print
PRINTER SETUP [< / >]
User Paper Print
PPR SIZE CHK PPR SIZE CHK
Paper Thickness Detection Pattern User Paper Setting Menu ON
Cutter Position Adjustment PRINTER SETUP --- [∧ / ∨]
Auto Nozzle Check for each job ---
PPR SIZE CHK
[<]
Manual Uni-D GAP Adjustment Menu DT/DC Command OFF
Manual Bi-D K [∧ / ∨]
Manual Bi-D
F/W ROM Version Print VI Command

Product Description Operating Panel 53


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.10 Skew Error Detection 1.4.4.11 Job Time-out Setting


When this setting is set to “OFF”, a paper skew error is not occurred and When print data is interrupted more than setting time although data receiving is
printing operation is continued. Even if this setting is set to “ON”, cut paper available, the print job is regarded as an end, and the printer runs paper
skew is not detected after printing. feeding operation.
Even if the printing image is outside the paper because of the paper not If an I/F is fixed by remote command “DP” in duplex print setting in the driver,
straight by the setting, the printer doesn't inform the error, so users have to set job time-out setting is unable to function.
up at their own responsibility.
† Level structure of job timeout setting menu
Skew error detection is only enabled when roll paper is selected in the printer
setting menu. Paper width detection is carried out when paper width detection PRINTER SETUP [< / >]
is ON even if Skew error is set to OFF. TIME OUT TIME OUT
† Level structure of detect skew error menu OFF
[∧ / ∨]

PRINTER SETUP [< / >] TIME OUT


[<]
PPR ALIGN CHK PPR ALIGN CHK 30sec
ON [∧ / ∨]
[∧ / ∨]
TIME OUT
[<]
PPR ALIGN CHK 60sec
[<]
OFF [∧ / ∨]
[∧ / ∨]
TIME OUT
[<]
180sec

[∧ / ∨]

TIME OUT
[<]
300sec

[∧ / ∨]

Product Description Operating Panel 54


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.12 Cutter Position Adjustment † Level structure of cutter position adjustment menu
Cutter position can be adjusted by this mode. Cutter position adjustment
pattern is printed, and users entering the cutter position number to adjust the PRINTER SETUP [< / >]
cutter position. CUTTER ADJ CUTTER ADJ
EXEC
NOTE: This adjustment is effective for top/bottom no margin print.
PRINTING
[>]
This mode only operates when paper type is roll paper and setting is roll paper
cut ON. Other than this, the printer displays "UNABLE TO PRINT" and stops CUTTER ADJ
printing. 3 seconds later, this mode is canceled automatically and the printer [>]
1
returns to standby condition.
[∧ / ∨]
† Setting procedure CUTTER ADJ
[>]
1. Set paper. 17
2. Enter Cutter position adjustment menu in the panel. [∧ / ∨]
3. Print cutter position adjustment pattern.
4. Select the best adjustment pattern number and enter the number.

NOTE: When "1 cut" is selected in panel, it will not operate.


1.4.4.13 Auto Margin Refresh
† Cutter position adjustment pattern
When this setting is ON, paper edge is automatically cut and refreshed to
„ Output paper size: A4 prevent print dirt in the situation after 4 sides no margin print in first JOB and
„ Font: Built-in font (Print all in alphanumeric characters) with margin print in next JOB. The cutting length depends on the minimum cut
„ Print sample: See following picture. length at this time.
† Level structure of auto margin refresh

PRINTER SETUP [< / >]


REFRESH MRGN REFRESH MRGN
ON
[∧ / ∨]

REFRESH MRGN
[<]
OFF

[∧ / ∨]

Figure 1-12. Cutter position adjustment pattern


NOTE: The shift amount among the pattern numbers is 1/360dpi
approx. 0.7mm.

Product Description Operating Panel 55


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.14 Cut Sheet Size Error 1.4.4.15 Auto Nozzle Check for Each Job
When this setting is OFF, it will prevent the occurrence of size error and keeps This setting is valid only when "Cleaning setting at nozzle check" is ON. By
printing. It will not work for roll paper. turning this setting on, auto nozzle check can be performed before printing
If the print image is bigger than the paper set by this setting, printer prints by upon receiving data from PC. Trigger for receiving data from PC is when
clipping the data that is out of paper. If this setting is ON, paper size in receiving remote command "JS". If JS command is not send, auto nozzle
horizontal direction and value read from detect paper width sensor set by paper check is not performed. Also when paper is out during continuous print, display
size setting command (ESC "(S") during receiving data are over +/-3mm, cut "Paper out" and wait for paper set.
sheet size error occurs. If paper size setting command does not exist during
When user cannot check the nozzle clogging visually at day and night
receiving data, cut sheet size error never occurs.
automatic operation, the setting will be ON.
† Level structure of cut sheet size error menu
† Level structure of auto nozzle check for each job menu

PRINTER SETUP [< / >]


PRINTER SETUP [< / >]
PAPER SIZE CK PAPER SIZE CK
AUTO NZL CK AUTO NZL CK
ON
ON
[∧ / ∨]
[∧ / ∨]
PAPER SIZE CK
[<] AUTO NZL CK
OFF [<]
OFF
[∧ / ∨]
[∧ / ∨]

Product Description Operating Panel 56


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.16 Cleaning Setting for Nozzle Check 1.4.4.17 Super Low Speed Cut Mode
Nozzle check method is switched to either auto or manual. When this setting is set to “ON”, normal cut operation is performed at 20CPS to
When “Cleaning setting at nozzle check“ (=printer setting menu/auto cleaning) reduce a noise and paper dust. The default is set to OFF.
is set to ON, auto nozzle check pattern printing is performed. When the However when top edge is cut at Top/Bottom borderless printing
cleaning setting is set to OFF, manual nozzle check pattern printing is setting,(including top margin at 1 cut setting.)this setting is not reflected to
executed. prevent irregular color by reducing cut speed.
The following shows the operations performed by each setting in "Cleaning
† Level structure of super low speed cut mode menu
setting for nozzle check" and "Auto cleaning for each job".

Table 1-29. Operation setting PRINTER SETUP [< / >]


QUIET CUT QUIET CUT
Auto nozzle Nozzle check
Cleaning Nozzle check OFF
Auto cleaning check operation
setting for operation by [∧ / ∨]
for each job operation when sending
nozzle check panel
before Job "NC" m1 = 80h* QUIET CUT
[<]
OFF OFF Manual None Manual ON

[∧ / ∨]
ON OFF Auto None Auto
OFF ON Manual None Manual
ON ON Auto Execute Auto

Note *: The command that is sent from the printer driver to the printer in order to
control the nozzle check.
† Level structure of cleaning setting for nozzle check menu

PRINTER SETUP [< / >]


AUTO CLEANING AUTO CLEANING
ON
[∧ / ∨]

AUTO CLEANING
[<]
OFF

[∧ / ∨]

Product Description Operating Panel 57


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.18 Printer Setup Value Initialization


Selecting this mode allows the user to return all printer-setting values to the
default values.
Initializing items are following;

Table 1-30. Printer Setup Value Initialization


Setting item After initialization
Remaining Paper detection Remaining roll 20m
paper
Remaining roll 2Çç
paper warning
Remaining cut 100PG
sheet
Remaining cut 10PG
sheet warning
PG setting STANDARD
Page line ON
I/F switching AUTO
Code page switching PC437
Roll paper margin setting T/B 15mm
Paper width detection ON
Paper skew detection ON
Job timeout setting OFF
Cutter position adjustment Manufacture setting
Auto margin refresh ON
Cut sheet size error ON
Auto nozzle check for each Job OFF
Super low speed cut mode OFF
Cleaning at nozzle check ON

Product Description Operating Panel 58


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.19 Nozzle Check Pattern Printing † Order of colors from left


Selecting this mode allows the user to print the nozzle check pattern, firmware „ 8-color (Stylus Pro 4800):
version, used paper/ink, and maintenance tank counter. Photo Black / Matte Black → Cyan → Magenta → Yellow →
Light Black → Light Cyan → Light Magenta → Light Light Black
Nozzle checks method in nozzle check pattern print is switched to either auto
„ 8-color (Stylus Pro 4880/4880C):
or manual by cleaning setting ON/OFF at nozzle check.
Photo Black / Matte Black → Cyan → Vivid Magenta → Yellow
† When setting is ON: Perform auto nozzle check pattern printing. → Light Black → Light Cyan → Vivid Light Magenta → Light
Light Black
† When setting is OFF: Perform nozzle check pattern printing as usual.
„ 4-color (Stylus Pro 4400/4450):
Matte Black 1 → Matte Black 2 → Cyan 1 → Cyan 2 →
Magenta 1 → Magenta 2 → Yellow 1 → Yellow 2
† Each parameter indicates the following;
Version : A<Z><xxxx> „ <Z>: 0
Maintenance Tank : <zzz>% „ <xxxx>: Firmware version
„ <y.yy>: Network Firmware version
Cur. Ink Count : <aaaaa.a>ml Prev.Ink Count :<bbbbb.b>ml C - P:<ccccc.c>ml
(Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C only)
Cur. Paper Count : <ddddd.d>cm Prev.Paper Count:<eeeee.e>cm C - P:<fffff.f>cm „ I: Number of colors (four or eight) used for printing
„ B: Business system setting
Figure 1-13. Nozzle Check Pattern Printing (Stylus Pro 4800) „ C: Custom version setting
„ <zzz>: Maintenance tank available quantity
„ <aaaaa.a>: Total ink counter just before print the last nozzle check
pattern (5.1 figures)
„ <bbbbb.b>: Total ink counter just before print the nozzle check pattern
(5.1 figures)
Version : A<Z><XXXX>-<y.yy>.IBC „ <ccccc.c>: Value of <aaaaa.a>-<bbbbb.b> (5.1 figures)
Maintenance Tank : <zzz>% „ <ddddd.d>: Total paper counter just before print the last nozzle check
pattern (5.1 figures)
Cur. Ink Count : <aaaaa.a>ml Prev.Ink Count :<bbbbb.b>ml C - P:<ccccc.c>ml
„ <eeeee.e>: Total paper counter just before print the nozzle check
Cur. Paper Count : <ddddd.d>cm Prev.Paper Count:<eeeee.e>cm C - P:<fffff.f>cm pattern (5.1 figures)
„ <fffff.f>: Value of <ddddd.d>-<eeeee.e> (5.1 figures)
Figure 1-14. Nozzle Check Pattern Printing (Stylus Pro 4880/4880C)
NOTE: When printing a nozzle check pattern, the printer ignores the top
margin specified from the panel setting it to 20mm to prevent top
margin being rubbed in PGPP AND PSPP.

Product Description Operating Panel 59


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.20 Status Printing Type B : Installed


Selecting this mode allows the user to print the current panel settings content. -Current Setting-+-----------------+-Printer Status--+-----------------
Platen Gap :Standard |Version :A0xxxx P
Print status sheet with the following specifications. Page Line :On |Total Prints :xxxxxx PG
Interface :Auto |Use Ink :xxxxxx.xml
„ Print paper size: A4 Code Page
Margin
:PC437
:T/B15mm
|Use Paper
|Mainte Tank
:xxxxxx.xcm
:E*****F
„ Font: Built-in font (Print all in alphanumeric characters) Paper Size Chk :On |Cutter Life :E*****F
Paper Align Chk :On |CR Motor :E*****F
„ Print sample: Refer to Figure 1-15. "Status Sheet Print Pattern (8- Time Out :30sec |PF Motor :E*****F
color Stylus Pro 4800)" and Figure 1-17. "Status Refresh Margin :On |Head :E*****F
Sheet Print Pattern (4-color Stylus Pro 4400)" Sheet Size Chk :On |Cleaner :E*****F
Auto Nozzle Chk :Off | :
† Output procedure: Auto Cleaning :On | :
Quiet Cut :Off | :
1. Press the [Menu / Cleaning] button on the control panel to enter the -Ink Cartridge---+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------
panel setting menu. Manufacture :EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK
Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Pigment
2. Press the [Paper Feed (∧/∨)] button to display "TEST PRINT". Ink Color : Matte Black Cyan Magenta
3. Press the [Menu / Cleaning] button to enter the item menu select Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml 110ml
status and then press the [Paper Feed (∧/∨)] again to display [STATUS Ink Left : E*****F E*****F E*****F
Production Date : `02/03 `02/03 `02/03
CHECK]. Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10 `03/10
4. Select the item by pressing the [Menu / Cleaning] button again. Ink Life : 06 months 06 months 06 months
Passed : 02 months 02 months 02 months
5. Press the [Menu / Cleaning] button to execute status sheet printing. Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages 120 pages
-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------
Manufacture :EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK
Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Pigment
Ink Color : Yellow Light Black Light Cyan
Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml 110ml
Ink Left : E*****F E*****F E*****F
Production Date : `02/03 `02/03 `02/03
Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10 `03/10
Ink Life : 06 months 06 months 06 months
Passed : 02 months 02 months 02 months
Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages 120 pages
-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------
Manufacture :EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK
Ink Type : Pigment Pigment
Ink Color : Light Magenta Light Light Black
Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml
Ink Left : E*****F E*****F
Production Date : `02/03 `02/03
Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10
Ink Life : 06 months 06 months
Passed : 02 months 02 months
Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages
-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------

Figure 1-15. Status Sheet Print Pattern (8-color Stylus Pro 4800)

Product Description Operating Panel 60


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Type B : Installed Type B : Installed


-Current Setting-+-----------------+-Printer Status--+----------------- -Current Setting-+-----------------+-Printer Status--+-----------------
Platen Gap :Standard |Version :A0xxxx-y.yy.IBC Platen Gap :Standard |Version :A0xxxx
Page Line :On |Total Prints :xxxxxx PG Page Line :On |Total Prints :xxxxxx PG
Interface :Auto |Use Ink :xxxxxx.xml Interface :Auto |Use Ink :xxxxxx.xml
Code Page :PC437 |Use Paper :xxxxxx.xcm Code Page :PC437 |Use Paper :xxxxxx.xcm
Margin :T/B15mm |Mainte Tank :E*****F Margin :T/B15mm |Mainte Tank :E*****F
Paper Size Chk :On |Cutter Life :E*****F Paper Size Chk :On |Cutter Life :E*****F
Paper Align Chk :On |CR Motor :E*****F Paper Align Chk :On |CR Motor :E*****F
Time Out :30sec |PF Motor :E*****F Time Out :30sec |PF Motor :E*****F
Refresh Margin :On |Head :E*****F Refresh Margin :On |Head :E*****F
Sheet Size Chk :On |Cleaner :E*****F Sheet Size Chk :On |Cleaner :E*****F
Auto Nozzle Chk :Off | : Auto Nozzle Chk :Off | :
Auto Cleaning :On | : Auto Cleaning :On | :
Quiet Cut :Off | : Quiet Cut :Off | :
-Ink Cartridge---+-----------------+-----------------+----------------- -Ink Cartridge---+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------
Manufacture :EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK Manufacture :EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK
Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Pigment Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Pigment
Ink Color : Matte Black Cyan Vivid Magenta Ink Color : Matte Black Cyan Magenta
Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml 110ml Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml 110ml
Ink Left : E*****F E*****F E*****F Ink Left : E*****F E*****F E*****F
Production Date : `02/03 `02/03 `02/03 Production Date : `02/03 `02/03 `02/03
Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10 `03/10 Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10 `03/10
Ink Life : 06 months 06 months 06 months Ink Life : 06 months 06 months 06 months
Passed : 02 months 02 months 02 months Passed : 02 months 02 months 02 months
Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages 120 pages Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages 120 pages
-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+----------------- -----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------
Manufacture :EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK Manufacture :EPSON GENUINE INK
Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Pigment Ink Type : Pigment
Ink Color : Yellow Light Black Light Cyan Ink Color : Yellow
Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml 110ml Ink Capacity : 110ml
Ink Left : E*****F E*****F E*****F Ink Left : E*****F
Production Date : `02/03 `02/03 `02/03 Production Date : `02/03
Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10 `03/10 Expire Date : `03/10
Ink Life : 06 months 06 months 06 months Ink Life : 06 months
Passed : 02 months 02 months 02 months Passed : 02 months
Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages 120 pages Printable Sheet : 120 pages
-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+----------------- -----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------
Manufacture :EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK
Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Figure 1-17. Status Sheet Print Pattern (4-color Stylus Pro 4400)
Ink Color :Vivid Light Magenta Light Light Black
Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml
Ink Left : E*****F E*****F
Production Date : `02/03 `02/03
Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10
Ink Life : 06 months 06 months
Passed : 02 months 02 months
Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages
-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------

Figure 1-16. Status Sheet Print Pattern (8-color Stylus Pro 4880/4880C)

Product Description Operating Panel 61


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Type B : Installed
† Explanation of contents:
-Current Setting-+-----------------+-Printer Status--+-----------------
Platen Gap :Standard |Version :A0xxxx-y.yy.IBC Type-B Whether optional Type-B I/F is mounted or not
Page Line :On |Total Prints :xxxxxx PG Setting content of "PRINTER SETUP" menu in Panel
Interface :Auto |Use Ink :xxxxxx.xml Current Setting
Code Page :PC437 |Use Paper :xxxxxx.xcm Setting mode.
Margin :T/B15mm |Mainte Tank :E*****F † Stylus Pro 4400/4800
Paper Size Chk :On |Cutter Life :E*****F Installed firmware version
Paper Align Chk :On |CR Motor :E*****F Version † Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C
Time Out :30sec |PF Motor :E*****F
Refresh Margin :On |Head :E*****F Installed firmware version and network
Sheet Size Chk :On |Cleaner :E*****F firmware version
Auto Nozzle Chk :Off | : Total Print Total number of printed sheets
Auto Cleaning :On | :
Quiet Cut :Off | : Ink consumption counter value
-Ink Cartridge---+-----------------+-----------------+----------------- Use Ink (total cumulative consumption by printing,
Manufacture :EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK flushing and cleaning)
Ink Type : Pigment Pigment Pigment Printer Status
Paper consumption counter value (total
Ink Color : Matte Black Cyan Magenta Use Paper
cumulative paper feed amount by printing)
Ink Capacity : 110ml 110ml 110ml
Ink Left : E*****F E*****F E*****F Remaining ink volume in Maintenance Tank
Mainte Tank
Production Date : `02/03 `02/03 `02/03 *1
Expire Date : `03/10 `03/10 `03/10 Cutter Life Remainder of cutter life *2
Ink Life : 06 months 06 months 06 months CR Motor Remainder of CR motor life *2
Passed : 02 months 02 months 02 months
Printable Sheet : 120 pages 120 pages 120 pages PF Motor Remainder of PF motor life *2
-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+----------------- Head Remainder of Printhead life *2
Manufacture :EPSON GENUINE INK Cleaner Remainder of Cleaning Unit life *2
Ink Type : Pigment
Ink Color : Yellow Manufacture Display of manufacturer
Ink Capacity : 110ml Ink Type Display of ink kind
Ink Left : E*****F Ink Color Display of ink color
Production Date : `02/03
Expire Date : `03/10 Ink Capacity Display of capacity to contain ink
Ink Life : 06 months Ink Left Display of volume of remaining ink *1
Passed : 02 months Ink Cartridge *3 Production Date Year and month of manufacture
Printable Sheet : 120 pages
-----------------+-----------------+-----------------+----------------- Expire Date Expiration of guaranteed period for use
Ink Life Guaranteed period for use after unpacking
Figure 1-18. Status Sheet Print Pattern (4-color Stylus Pro 4450) Passed Time having elapsed after unpacking
Number of sheets which can be printed with
Printable Sheet
the remaining ink (calculated value)

Product Description Operating Panel 62


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Note *1: Display details for Maintenance Tank remaining ink. 1.4.4.21 Job Information Print
100 ~ 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F With this mode, users can print job information saved in the printer.
(Max. 10 Job)
80 ~ 61% E∗∗∗∗ F
60 ~ 41% E∗∗∗ F Definition of job is followings;
40 ~ 21% E∗∗ F † Adjustment patterns and test patterns
20% ~ 10% E∗ F (Gap adjustment, Nozzle check pattern, Status print, Cutter position, Paper
thickness detection)
Less than 10% nn%
0% (End) 0% † Print data from host
† Job information print
*2: Details of display of remainder of cutter life, CR motor life, PF motor life,
Printhead life or Cleaning Unit life
It prints job information print pattern with following specifications;
100 ~ 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F
80 ~ 61% E∗∗∗∗ F † Print paper size: A4
60 ~ 41% E∗∗∗ F † Font: Built-in font (Print all in alphanumeric characters)
40 ~ 21% E∗∗ F
NOTE: 2-byte characters in user name and document name is "?".
20% ~ 1% E∗ F
Less than 1% E F † Print sample: Refer to Figure 1-19. "Job information print pattern (8-
color)" and Figure 1-20. "Job information print pattern
*3: The ink cartridge information is displayed based on the information inside the (4-color)"
CSIC on the ink cartridge.
*4: This Color Adjust ID information (ID1) is the same as can be checked through NOTE: For details of Job Information, refer to "1.4.3 Job information
the printer driver. (p39)".

Product Description Operating Panel 63


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

- Job No.0 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX - Job No.0 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown
Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00 Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00
Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx
Ink Used : PK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml Ink Used : MK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml
LK xxx.xxml LC xxx.xxml LM xxx.xxml LLK xxx.xxml - Job No.1 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
- Job No.1 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown
Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00
Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00 Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx
Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx Ink Used : MK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml
Ink Used : PK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml - Job No.2 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
LK xxx.xxml LC xxx.xxml LM xxx.xxml LLK xxx.xxml Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown
- Job No.2 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00
Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx
Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00 Ink Used : MK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml
Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx - Job No.3 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Ink Used : PK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown
LK xxx.xxml LC xxx.xxml LM xxx.xxml LLK xxx.xxml Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00
- Job No.3 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx
Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown Ink Used : MK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml
Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00 - Job No.4 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown
Ink Used : PK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00
LK xxx.xxml LC xxx.xxml LM xxx.xxml LLK xxx.xxml Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx
- Job No.4 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Ink Used : MK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml
Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown - Job No.5 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00 Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown
Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00
Ink Used : PK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx
LK xxx.xxml LC xxx.xxml LM xxx.xxml LLK xxx.xxml Ink Used : MK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml
- Job No.5 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX - Job No.6 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown
Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00 Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00
Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx
Ink Used : PK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml Ink Used : MK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml
LK xxx.xxml LC xxx.xxml LM xxx.xxml LLK xxx.xxml - Job No.7 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
- Job No.6 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown
Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00
Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00 Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx
Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx Ink Used : MK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml
Ink Used : PK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml - Job No.8 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
LK xxx.xxml LC xxx.xxml LM xxx.xxml LLK xxx.xxml Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown
- Job No.7 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00
Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx
Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00 Ink Used : MK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml
Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx - Job No.9 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Ink Used : PK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown
LK xxx.xxml LC xxx.xxml LM xxx.xxml LLK xxx.xxml Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00
- Job No.8 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx
Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown Ink Used : MK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml
Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00
Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx
Ink Used : PK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml Figure 1-20. Job information print pattern (4-color)
LK xxx.xxml LC xxx.xxml LM xxx.xxml LLK xxx.xxml
- Job No.9 - User Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Host Name: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Doc Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX I/F Type: Unknown
Job State : Processing Start: 00/00/00 00:00:00 End: 00/00/00 00:00:00
Paper Used: W xxxxxmm * H xxxxxmm Page Count: xxxxx
Ink Used : PK xxx.xxml C xxx.xxml M xxx.xxml Y xxx.xxml
LK xxx.xxml LC xxx.xxml LM xxx.xxml LLK xxx.xxml

Figure 1-19. Job information print pattern (8-color)

Product Description Operating Panel 64


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.22 User Paper Setting Printing Paper No.1


Custom Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
With this mode, users print information registered in user paper setting menu. Platen Gap : Standard Drying Time : 10.0 sec Suction : Standard
Cut Method : ThickPaperFast Eject Roller : RollCurled M/W Adj. :
It prints User Paper Setting Printing with following specifications; Standard
Ppr Thick. : 0.2mm Ppr Feed Adj. : -0.70 %
Paper No.2
† Print paper size: A4 Custom Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Platen Gap : Standard Drying Time : 10.0 sec Suction : Standard
† Font: Built-in font (Print all in alphanumeric characters) Cut Method
Standard
: ThickPaperFast Eject Roller : RollCurled M/W Adj. :
Ppr Thick. : 0.2mm Ppr Feed Adj. : -0.70 %
† Print sample: Refer to right column figure. Paper No.3
Custom Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Platen Gap : Standard Drying Time : 10.0 sec Suction : Standard
Cut Method : ThickPaperFast Eject Roller : RollCurled M/W Adj. :
Standard
Ppr Thick. : 0.2mm Ppr Feed Adj. : -0.70 %
Paper No.4
Custom Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Platen Gap : Standard Drying Time : 10.0 sec Suction : Standard
Cut Method : ThickPaperFast Eject Roller : RollCurled M/W Adj. :
Standard
Ppr Thick. : 0.2mm Ppr Feed Adj. : -0.70 %
Paper No.5
Custom Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Platen Gap : Standard Drying Time : 10.0 sec Suction : Standard
Cut Method : ThickPaperFast Eject Roller : RollCurled M/W Adj. :
Standard
Ppr Thick. : 0.2mm Ppr Feed Adj. : -0.70 %
Paper No.6
Custom Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Platen Gap : Standard Drying Time : 10.0 sec Suction : Standard
Cut Method : ThickPaperFast Eject Roller : RollCurled M/W Adj. :
Standard
Ppr Thick. : 0.2mm Ppr Feed Adj. : -0.70 %
Paper No.7
Custom Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Platen Gap : Standard Drying Time : 10.0 sec Suction : Standard
Cut Method : ThickPaperFast Eject Roller : RollCurled M/W Adj. :
Standard
Ppr Thick. : 0.2mm Ppr Feed Adj. : -0.70 %
Paper No.8
Custom Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Platen Gap : Standard Drying Time : 10.0 sec Suction : Standard
Cut Method : ThickPaperFast Eject Roller : RollCurled M/W Adj. :
Standard
Ppr Thick. : 0.2mm Ppr Feed Adj. : -0.70 %
Paper No.9
Custom Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Platen Gap : Standard Drying Time : 10.0 sec Suction : Standard
Cut Method : ThickPaperFast Eject Roller : RollCurled M/W Adj. :
Standard
Ppr Thick. : 0.2mm Ppr Feed Adj. : -0.70 %
Paper No.10
Custom Name : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Platen Gap : Standard Drying Time : 10.0 sec Suction : Standard
Cut Method : ThickPaperFast Eject Roller : RollCurled M/W Adj. :
Standard
Ppr Thick. : 0.2mm Ppr Feed Adj. : -0.70 %

Figure 1-21. User Paper Setting Printing

Product Description Operating Panel 65


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.23 Firmware Version † Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C


Firmware version is displayed as following;
† Stylus Pro 4400/4800

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5
No. Description
1 Assigns special specification version. "A0" is normally displayed.

No. Description 2 Firmware version (4 letters)

1 Assigns special specification version. "A0" is normally displayed. 3 Network firmware version

2 Firmware version (4 letters) 4 Displays the following;


When the printer is Stylus Pro 4880/4880C: 8
3 Displays the following;
When the printer is Stylus Pro 4450: 4
When the printer is Stylus Pro 4800: 8
When the printer is Stylus Pro 4400: 4 5 When the function is effective for business systems, "1" to "F" are displayed
according to the calculation result obtained form the following printer conditions.
4 When the function is effective for business systems, "1" to "F" are displayed „ bit0: Graphic printing control function status
according to the calculation result obtained form the following printer conditions. 0: When Graphic printing control function is invalid
„ bit0: Graphic printing control function status 1: When Graphic printing control function is effective
0: When Graphic printing control function is invalid
„ bit1: Credit function status
1: When Graphic printing control function is effective
0: When Credit function is invalid
„ bit1: Credit function status 1: When Credit function is effective
0: When Credit function is invalid
„ bit2: Credit counter status
1: When Credit function is effective 0: When the number of Credit is 0 or Credit function is OFF
„ bit2: Credit counter status 1: When the number of Credit is 1 or more with Credit function ON
0: When the number of Credit is 0 or Credit function is OFF
„ bit3: Reserved
1: When the number of Credit is 1 or more with Credit function ON
„ bit3: Reserved 6 Displays a custom number when custom action is specified in special setting,
and displays "0" when custom action is not specified.
5 Displays a custom number when custom action is specified in special setting,
and displays "0" when custom action is not specified.

Product Description Operating Panel 66


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.24 Printable Pages per Ink Cartridge † Level structure of printable pages per ink cartridge menu
Printable sheets (estimation) of current installed ink cartridges are displayed PRINTER STATUS [< / >]
per ink cartridge. PRINTERBLE PG PRINTABLE PG
The formula is following; MK xxxxxxPG
[∧ / ∨] [>]
Printable sheets = ink remain after print / ink used
[<] PRINTABLE PG
Note 1: Printable pages within IR command range are calculated and displayed. C xxxxxxPG
2: When there is no value to be displayed, the panel displays "---". [∧ / ∨] [>]

[<] PRINTABLE PG
M xxxxxxPG
[∧ / ∨] [>]

[<] PRINTABLE PG
Y xxxxxxPG
[∧ / ∨] [>]

[<] PRINTABLE PG
LK xxxxxxPG
[∧ / ∨] [>]

[<] PRINTABLE PG
LC xxxxxxPG
[∧ / ∨] [>]
[<] PRINTABLE PG
LM xxxxxxPG
[∧ / ∨] [>]
[<] PRINTABLE PG
LLK xxxxxxPG
[>]

[∧ / ∨]

Note : Displays only for 4 cartridges (MK/CM/Y) for 4-color model.

Product Description Operating Panel 67


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.25 Ink Remaining † Level structure of remaining ink display


Table 1-31. Ink Remaining
Ink remaining Panel display Ink check LED PRINTER STATUS [< / >]
100 ~ 81% remaining E∗∗∗∗∗F OFF INK LEFT INK LEFT
MK E∗∗∗∗∗F
80 ~ 61% remaining E∗∗∗∗ F OFF
[∧ / ∨] [>]
60 ~ 41% remaining E∗∗∗ F OFF
[<] INK LEFT
40 ~ 21% remaining E∗∗ F OFF
C E∗∗∗∗∗F
20% ~ just before near end E∗ F OFF
[∧ / ∨] [>]
After near end ~ just before ink out nn% Blink
[<] INK LEFT
Ink out 0% ON M E∗∗∗∗∗F
[∧ / ∨] [>]
Note 1: After ink remaining is near end, the ink remaining is displayed with % on the
panel. 0% is displayed on the panel for ink out. [<] INK LEFT
Y E∗∗∗∗∗F
2: When initial filling is done by user after the package opened, ink consumption
for initial filling is subtracted, and ink remaining of each ink cartridge is [∧ / ∨] [>]
displayed as 100%. Ink use count is started at that time. [<] INK LEFT
LK E∗∗∗∗∗F
[∧ / ∨] [>]

[<] INK LEFT


LC E∗∗∗∗∗F
[∧ / ∨] [>]

[<] INK LEFT


LM E∗∗∗∗∗F
[∧ / ∨] [>]

[<] INK LEFT


LLK E∗∗∗∗∗F
[>]

[∧ / ∨]

Note : 4Displays only for 4 cartridges (MK/CM/Y) for 4-color model.

Product Description Operating Panel 68


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.26 Maintenance Tank Count 1.4.4.28 Clear consumption counter


† Calculate method † Clear ink usage counter
Current available rate of maintenance tank is displayed. Reset "Ink usage counter" to 0.
(Total capacity 1300g)
† Clear paper usage counter
† Display Reset "Paper usage counter" to 0.
Table 1-32.
Available rate Panel display Ink check LED
1.4.4.29 Job History Display
100~81% E*****F OFF
† Job No.
80~61% E**** F OFF
It is a Job number saved in the printer. The latest job is No.0.
60~41% E*** F OFF
† Paper usage
40~21% E** F OFF Paper usage (vertical x horizontal = m2) of each job is displayed.
20~10% E* F OFF
NOTE: Paper usage is counted and displayed within JS command to JE
10%or less nn% Blink command.
0% 0% OFF
† Ink usage
† Counter clear Ink usage of each job is displayed.
It is cleared by replacing maintenance tank.
NOTE 1: Ink usage is counted and displayed within IR command range or it
is counted and displayed within JS command to JE command.
1.4.4.27 Consumption Counter
2: When IR command or JS/JE command is not set, ink usage is not
† Ink usage counter counted, and displayed value is not changed.
Ink used with following operations is accumulated and displayed in ml.
3: When there is no value to display, "---" is displayed.
„ Print operation (whether print completed/interrupted or not)
„ All flushing operation
„ All cleaning operation 1.4.4.30 Clear Job History
NOTE 1: Ink used within IR command range is accumulated. With this menu, job history saved in the printer is cleared.
2: When there is no value to be displayed, the panel displays "---". Ink usage and paper usage of job history are displayed "---".

† Paper usage counter


Paper used (paper fed) with print operation is accumulated and displayed
in centimeter. 1.4.4.31 Total Print Pages
Manual paper feeding is not counted. Total prints are displayed in decimal. (Max. 6 figures)

NOTE 1: Paper used within JS ~ JE command range is accumulated and


displayed.
2: When there is no value to be displayed, the panel displays "---".

Product Description Operating Panel 69


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.32 Consumable Life † CR motor life


† Cutter life „ Calculate method
CR motor life is almost same as supply tube life (for A2 width) and is
„ Calculate method
severely impacted by abrasion and failure of supply tube. Therefore it
Counter that is calculated by accumulating total of cutter used is
is indicated by supply tube life. Supply tube life is defined by amount of
initialized by cutter replacement operation.
to and fro, so it is calculated by accumulation of CR to and fro times.
„ Display (Life)
„ Display (Life)
100 ~ 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F
100 ~ 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F
80 ~ 61% E∗∗∗∗ F
80 ~ 61% E∗∗∗∗ F
60 ~ 41% E∗∗∗ F
60 ~ 41% E∗∗∗ F
40 ~ 21% E∗∗ F
40 ~ 21% E∗∗ F
20% ~ 1% E∗ F
20% ~ 1% E∗ F
Less than 1% remaining E F
Less than 1% remaining E F

„ Maintenance call
„ Maintenance call
Does not occur to following reasons.
Life is less than 4%.
• Progression of wear-out is figured out by cut result.
„ Fatal error
• Serious failure does not occur.
Considering tube damage, when life reaches to 0, service call occurs.
• User can easily replace.
„ Counter clear
„ Fatal error
It is cleared by executing "CR Motor life accumulation counter ""CR
Does not occur.
Motor initialization" in special setting "Counter initialization menu".
„ Counter clear
Cleared by cutter replacement. These values are intended to assist service personnel only.
C H E C K
P O IN T Do not explain the meaning of the display to users.
C H E C K According to the status of user usage, this value will not be
P O IN T the correct value. Specify this value should be used as
target.

Product Description Operating Panel 70


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† PF motor life † Head unit life


„ Calculate method „ Calculate method
There are no parts that need to be replaced within product life period of It is calculated by accumulating amount of injection shots of each color,
PF motor and paper feed mechanical drive system. Therefore it is used amount of assured injection shots per nozzle x 180 nozzles, and finally
as failure diagnosis when used over product life. Display life by calculated as amount of maximum accumulative shots within each
accumulating distance of PF operation when printing. color. Accumulate value of 220 shots per page print.
„ Display (Life) „ Display (Life)
100 ~ 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F 100 ~ 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F
80 ~ 61% E∗∗∗∗ F 80 ~ 61% E∗∗∗∗ F
60 ~ 41% E∗∗∗ F 60 ~ 41% E∗∗∗ F
40 ~ 21% E∗∗ F 40 ~ 21% E∗∗ F
20% ~ 1% E∗ F 20% ~ 1% E∗ F
Less than 1% remaining E F Less than 1% remaining E F

„ Maintenance call „ Maintenance call


It does not occur for it is not the target of service in product life. Does not occur.
„ Fatal error „ Fatal error
It does not occur for failure mode is not fatal. Does not occur as head unit.
„ Counter clear „ Counter clear
It is cleared by executing "PF Motor life accumulation counter""PF Motor It is cleared by executing "Head unit life accumulation counter ""Head
initialization" in special setting "Counter initialization menu". unit initialization" in special setting "Counter initialization menu".
„ Continuity of counter „ Continuity of counter
If the life reaches to 0%, counter continues to count amount of full figure If the life reaches to 0%, counter continues to count amount of full figure
as register of 32 bits and stop count up at maximum positive number. as register of 32 bits and stop count up at maximum positive number.

C H E C K These values are intended to assist service personnel only. C H E C K These values are intended to assist service personnel only.
P O IN T Do not explain the meaning of the display to users. P O IN T Do not explain the meaning of the display to users.

Product Description Operating Panel 71


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Cleaning unit life 1.4.4.33 User Paper Setting


„ Calculate method Selecting this mode allows detection or input of the thickness of the available
Cleaning unit life is judged by pomp motor life. When in service, paper, and registration of the following setting item as up to ten user-defined
replace cap assembly, pomp assembly, flashing box, and wiper at the paper.
same time. Also this function is able to refer to, register, delete, and set at "EPSON LFP
„ Display (Life) Remote Panel".
100 ~ 81% E∗∗∗∗∗F
† Setting
80 ~ 61% E∗∗∗∗ F
1. Select user paper setting menu from the panel.
60 ~ 41% E∗∗∗ F 2. Select the paper number ("STD", "1" ~ "10")
40 ~ 21% E∗∗ F 3. Enter PG position.
20% ~ 1% E∗ F 4. Print the paper thickness detection pattern
Less than 1% remaining E F (Does not print when STD is selected.)
5. Check the printed patterns and select the number of the pattern with
the least displacement.
„ Maintenance call
6. Select cutting method.
Life is less than 4%.
7. Enter paper feed adjustment value.
„ Fatal error
8. Select eject paper roller.
When life reaches to 0, service call occurs.
9. Enter the ink drying time for each pass.
„ Counter clear
10. Select paper suction.
It is cleared by executing "Cleaning unit accumulation counter
""Cleaning unit initialization" in special setting "Counter initialization 11. Select MW print quality adjustment.
menu".
NOTE 1: In despite of paper number, it is possible to set paper related
„ Count continuance setting independently.
If the life reaches to 0%, counter continues to count amount of full
2: For details of patterns, refer to "Paper Thickness Detection Pattern
figure as register of 32 bits and stop count up at maximum positive
(p. 78)".
number.
3: When “STD” is selected for paper number, above 3.-11. are not
These values are intended to assist service personnel only. displayed on the panel.
C H E C K
P O IN T Do not explain the meaning of the display to users. 4: When “STD” is selected for paper type, it cannot input to each
setting items.
5: “PRINTING” is displayed during printing adjustment pattern.
6: The PG setting (“S” or “H” ) depends on the result of detection set
paper by paper thickness sensor.

Product Description Operating Panel 72


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Paper setting and corresponding operation

Paper setup Operation


Standard When each setting item values are set by commands, it follows
the command settings.
1 ~ 10 User defined paper is used and even if settings are set by
commands, user setting value is used.

NOTE: When the paper setup is set to 1 to 10 , the setting (PG position) is
prioritized and PG settings made using commands or printer
setting menu are ignored. At this time, the PG settings are not
displayed on the panel.

Product Description Operating Panel 73


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Details of each setting items


Table 1-33. Details of each setting items
Setting Operation Setting value
PG setting Enter any PG position. • SN m1 = 01h • Widestm2 = 05h (PG Maximum: 2.6mm)
• Wider m2 = 01h (PG Big: 2.1mm) • Wide m2 = 02h (PG Middle: 1.5mm)
• Standardm2 = 03h (PG Little: 1.2mm) • Narrowm2 = 04h (PG Minimum: 0.7mm)
Cutting method Cutting method is selected when cutting paper. • SN m1 = 80h • SN m1 = 81h
• Standardm2 = 03h*1m2 = 65h • Thin paperm2 = 02hm2 = 49h
• Thick paper, Fastm2 = 01hm2 = 7Eh • Thick paper, Slowm2 = 06hm2 = 65h
Paper feed Paper feeding is adjusted. The setting value is operated • -0.7% <= ±0% <= 0.7%SN m1 = 04h • If 0% SN m2 = 65h
adjustment as an absolute value. • If -0.7%SN m2 = 1Fh • If 0.7%SN m2 = ABh
Eject paper Select eject paper roller. If auto is selected, it is operated • SN m1 = 85h • AUTO m2 = 00h
roller set as cut sheet: sheet Star Wheel, roll paper: none • SHEETm2 = 01h • ROLL CURLEDm2 = 02h
• ROLL NOMALm2 = 03h (None)
Ink drying time Ink drying time for each pass is set. The carriage stops at 0 sec. ~ 10000 mm/sec (unit 100mm/sec)*2
the right/left sides of paper for setting time. (DR m1 = 40h) 0000h ~ 01F4h
Paper suction Paper suction is set to make paper stable on the platen. • SN m1 = 05h • Standardm2 = 33h (100%)
Select "-1" for thin paper (film etc.), which is difficult to • -1 m2 = 1Ah (50%) • -2 m2 = 10h (30%)
feed and lower the suction according to thickness rate. • -3 m2 = 06h (10%) • -4 m2 = 04h (6%)
MW print Micro weave mode is adjusted. Refer to Table 1-34 "MW print adjustmen List"(p75) for MW modes that can be selected by MW
adjustment When print speed has priority, lower the setting value. print adjustment.
When quality has priority, raise the setting value.

Note *1: Cutting Method setting items in the driver are slightly different from that of the panel default setting. The driver settings are as follows.
“Cut Method” :SN m1=80h(Cut Method) SN m1=81h(Cut Pressure)
Standard :m2=00h(Printer Table) m2=00h(Printer Table)
Thin Paper :m2=02h(Half-speed star wheel)m2=49h (Duty:70%300gf)
Thick Paper,Fast :m2=01h(Standard 2 levels)m2=7Eh (Duty:125% 700gf)
Thick Paper,Slow :m2=06h(Low-speed star wheel)m2=65h (Duty:100% 500gf)
*2: EX1B command is transmitted and registered in the media table in increments of 1msec. Inputting in increments of 100 msec is available when using the panel or utility. The
setting value is displayed in increments of 100 msec rounding off fractions.
Note 1: Value set by EX 1B command is similar to the above parameters.
2: If value other than parameters above or value out of range is set by EX 1B command, set by replacing with values below.
• PG setting : Standard: m2=03h (PG Little – 1.2mm) • Ink drying time : 0 sec.
• Cutting method : Standard m2=03h m2=49h • Paper suction : Standard m2=33h (100%)
• Paper feed adjustment : 0% SN m2=65h • MW print adjustment: n2:00h
• Eject paper roller set : AUTO m2=00h

Product Description Operating Panel 74


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Print quality setup values set by MW print adjustment.


Table 1-34. MW print adjustmen List
Raster
ESC(i Dot size Mode ID
resolution Print DS UNIT Restriced
Mode bit/pixel OL remarks Panel setting
resolution range No Horizontal Vertical functions
n1 n2 ESC(D ESC ( e Colors
resolution resolution No
VSD1/VSD2/
00h - 360x180 2 DMW 360x180 - Standard/1/2 10 8 360 180 0
VSD3_N
00h - 720x180 VSD3_HR 1 DMW 720x180 - Standard/1/2 20 8 720 180 0
This setting is
recommended for
01h 10h 360x360 VSD1(ECO) 1 M/F 360x360 - Standard/1/2 30 8 360 360 1
360 x 360 M/F
setting.
Provided for
supporting drivers
00h 00h 360x360 VSD1(ECO) 1 M/F 360x360 - Standard/1/2 30 8 360 360 1
of conventional
models.
01h 00h 360x360 VSD1 2 FD+36POL 360x360 - Standard/1/2 40 8 360 360 0
01h 00h 360x720 VSD1 2 FD+21POL 360x720 - Standard/1/2 50 8 360 720 0
01h 00h 720x360 VSD1 2 FOL+36POL 720x360 - Standard/1/2 60 8 720 360 0
01h 00h 720x360 VSD2 2 FOL+36POL 720x360 - Standard/1/2 70 8 720 360 0
01h 10h 720x720 VSD2 2 FOL+21POL 720x720 - 1 80 8 720 720 0
01h 00h 720x720 VSD2 2 FOL+48POL 720x720 0±3 Standard 81 8 720 720 1
8colors 01h 20h 720x720 VSD2 2 FOL+46POL 720x720 0±5 2 82 8 720 720 2
01h 00h 1440x720 VSD3_N 2 FOL+11POL 1440x720 - Standard 90 8 1440 720 0
01h 10h 1440x720 VSD3_N 2 FOL+28POL 1440x720 - 1 91 8 1440 720 1
01h 20h 1440x720 VSD3_N 2 FOL+11POL 1440x720 - 2 92 8 1440 720 2
01h 30h 1440x720 VSD3_N 2 FOL+90POL 1440x720 - Equivalent to 8pass - 93 8 1440 720 3
01h 00h 2880x1440 VSD3_HR 1 FOL+6POL 2880x1440 - Standard/1/2 A0 8 2880 1440 0
The standard driver
Borderless is
01h 00h 1440x1440 VSD3_N 2 FOL+6POL 1440x1440 - does not support Standard/1/2 B0 8 1440 1440 0
not available
this setting.
Borderless is
The standard driver not available
01h 00h 2880x2880 VSD3_HR 1 FOL 2880x2880 - does not support Standard/1/2 C0 8 2880 2880 0 Top & bottom
this setting. margins are
extended
The standard driver Borderless is
does not support not available
01h 10h 2880x2880 VSD3_HR 1 FOL 2880x2880 - this setting. Standard/1/2 C1 8 2880 2880 1 Top & bottom
For monochrome margins are
only extended

Product Description Operating Panel 75


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 1-34. MW print adjustmen List


Raster
ESC(i Dot size Mode ID
resolution Print DS UNIT Restriced
Mode bit/pixel OL remarks Panel setting
resolution range No Horizontal Vertical functions
n1 n2 ESC(D ESC ( e Colors
resolution resolution No
VSD1/VSD2/
00h - 360x180 2 DMW 360x180 - Standard/1/2 10 4 360 180 0
VSD3_N
00h - 720x180 VSD3_HR 1 DMW 720x180 - Standard/1/2 20 4 720 180 0
This setting is
recommended for
01h 10h 360x360 VSD1(ECO) 1 BAND 360x360 - Standard/1/2 30 4 360 360 1
360 x 360 M/F
setting.
The standard driver
00h 00h 360x360 VSD1(ECO) 1 BAND 360x360 - does not support Standard/1/2 30 4 360 360 1
this setting.
01h 00h 360x360 VSD1 2 FD 360x360 - Standard/1/2 40 4 360 360 0
01h 00h 360x720 VSD1 2 FD+72POL 360x720 - H720 shift Standard/1/2 50 4 360 720 0
For CAD lineal
01h 10h 360x720 VSD1 2 FD+72POL 360x720 - Standard/1/2 51 4 360 720 1
drawing
4colors 01h 10h 720x360 VSD2 2 FOL+117POL 720x360 - 1 70 4 720 360 0
Default setting for
01h 00h 720x360 VSD2 2 FD 720x360 - recovering from Standard 71 4 720 360 1
color banding
Setting for
01h 20h 720x360 VSD2 2 FD+72POL 720x360 - responding to 2 72 4 720 360 2
claims.
01h 10h 720x720 VSD2 2 FOL+72POL 720x720 - 1 80 4 720 720 0
01h 20h 720x720 VSD2 2 FOL+146POL 720x720 0±4 2 81 4 720 720 1
01h 00h 720x720 VSD2 2 FOL+148POL 720x720 0±4 Standard 82 4 720 720 2
01h 10h 1440x720 VSD3_N 2 FOL+41POL 1440x720 - 1 90 4 1440 720 0
01h 00h 1440x720 VSD3_N 2 FOL+99POL 1440x720 - Standard 91 4 1440 720 1
01h 20h 1440x720 VSD3_N 2 FOL+100POL 1440x720 - 2 92 4 1440 720 2
01h 30h 1440x720 VSD3_N 2 FOL+178POL 1440x720 - Equivalent 8 pass - 93 4 1440 720 3

Note 1: If there is no appropriate setting listed in the table, use M/F or VSD1 of BAND setting.
2: About dot control specification: When specifying any one of the following dot settings, specify raster data in binary.

Dot Name Displacement Dot


MicroDot VSD2-M
NormalDot VSD2-L
NormalDot2 VSD1-L
VSD1(ECO)

Product Description Operating Panel 76


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Level structure of user paper menu

CUSTOM PAPER
CUSTOM PAPER [< / >]
PAPER NUMBER PAPER NUMBER
STANDARD
[∧ / ∨]
[<] CUSTOM PAPER [< / >] [∧ / ∨]
NARROW NARROW
PLATEN GAP PLATEN GAP PLATEN GAP
STANDARD STANDARD
STANDARD WIDE STANDARD WIDE
[∧ / ∨] [<] PAPER NUMBER
WIDER WIDER
No. 1
[<] CUSTOM PAPER [< / >]
THICKNESS PAT THICKNESS PAT THICKNESS PAT
PRINT [∧ / ∨] PRINT
[∧ / ∨]

[<] CUSTOM PAPER [< / >]


1~15 [<] PAPER NUMBER 1~15
THICKNESS NUM THICKNESS NUM THICKNESS NUM
No. 10
1 1
[∧ / ∨]
[<] CUSTOM PAPER [< / >] [∧ / ∨]
CUT METHOD CUT METHOD STANDARD CUT METHOD STANDARD
THIN PAPER THIN PAPER
STANDARD THICK,FAST STANDARD THICK,FAST
[∧ / ∨]
THICK,SLOW THICK,SLOW
[<] CUSTOM PAPER [< / >] Set each item after
-0.70~0~0.70 setting paper number -0.70~0~0.70
PPR FEED ADJ PPR FEED ADJ PPR FEED ADJ
0% 0%
[∧ / ∨]
[<] CUSTOM PAPER [< / >]
EJECT ROLLER EJECT ROLLER AUTO EJECT ROLLER AUTO
SHEET SHEET
AUTO ROLL CURLED AUTO ROLL CURLED
[∧ / ∨]
ROLL NORMAL ROLL NORMAL
[<] CUSTOM PAPER [< / >]
DRYING TIME DRYING TIME 0.0sec~10.0sec DRYING TIME 0.0sec~10.0sec

0.0sec 0.0sec
[∧ / ∨]

[<] CUSTOM PAPER [< / >]


SUCTION SUCTION STANDARD SUCTION STANDARD
-1, -2, -3, -4 -1~-4
[∧ / ∨] STANDARD STANDARD

[<] CUSTOM PAPER [< / >]


M/W ADJ M/W ADJ STANDARD M/W ADJ STANDARD
1 1
STANDARD 2 STANDARD 2
[∧ / ∨]

Product Description Operating Panel 77


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Paper Thickness Detection Pattern „ Displacement of lower pattern


„ Print Specification If the displacement in the gap adjustment value with a change of
0.1mm in paper thickness is assumed to be xx microns, the following
Head speed 240 cps
applies.
Pattern height 64 dots
Dot size VSD2 Large
Head
Color Black
Print direction Uni-D
Pattern interval Upper patterns: Equal intervals If paper thickness is +0.1mm for
Lower patterns: Centered on base position for gap gap adjustment.
adjustment value, and displaced by an
Paper thickness for gap
equal distance left and right. Details are adjustment.
described in next clause.
If paper thickness is -0.1mm for
Others When printing starts from the edge of a media, media is gap adjustment.
forwarded 90 mm for roll paper and 50 mm for sheets
before printing. A B C D

Figure 1-23. Displacement of Paper Thickness Detection Pattern


„ Relations between numbers in print pattern and paper thickness
Note: AB : Gap adjustment value with paper thickness +0.1mm
Numbers in print pattern 1 2 3 ... ... 15 AC: Current gap adjustment value
Paper thickness (mm) 0.1 0.2 0.3 ... ... 1.5 AD: Gap adjustment value with paper thickness -0.1mm
A fixed displacement is assumed with changes in paper thickness.
X = AC – AB = AD – AC
X reference value is 14.40 µm with 240CPS, VSD2.
This adjustment value is saved into NVRAM and can be changed.
Example: If paper thickness is 0.2mm for gap adjustment.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Pattern Displacement of bottom Pattern Displacement of bottom


A4 width
number pattern relative to top pattern number pattern relative to top pattern
1 +2X 9 –6X
13.5mm(96dot)

13.5mm(96dot)

2 +1X 10 –7X
3 ±0 11 –8X
4 –1X 12 –9X
5 –2X 13 –10X
9.0mm (64dot) 6 –3X 14 –11X
10mm feeding
7 –4X 15 –12X
8 –5X
Figure 1-22. Paper Thickness Detection Pattern

Product Description Operating Panel 78


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.4.34 Cutter Blade Replacement 1.4.4.38 Gap Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment, Uni-D
Selecting this mode allows the user to replace the cutter blade. Adjustment)
The procedure for cutter blade replacement is as follows: Selecting this mode allows the user to adjust Bi-D and Uni-D depending on
paper thickness.
1. Select the cutter replacement menu from the panel.
If it is performed auto by the menu, after pattern is printed and detected,
2. Open the cover by following cover open guide. adjustment setting is set automatically.
3. Replace the cutter blade by following cutter replacement guide. † Setting
4. Close the cover by following cover close guide. 1. Set the paper.
2. Select the gap adjustment menu from the panel.
NOTE: Replacing the cutter is not available when the printer condition falls 3. Set to "STD" for paper thickness of EPSON paper is 0.2mm or 1.2mm.
under any one of the following conditions. An error When setting other paper individually, set thickness in units of 0.1mm.
message”UNABLE TO EXECUTE”will be displayed. 4. Select auto or manual.
• Ink end 5. Select the adjustment pattern to be printed (Bi-D Black*, Bi-D all or uni-
• The model number of the installed ink cartridge is different. between 6-row), and print. ("PRINTING" is displayed.)
• CSIC contact error 6. Check the printed adjustment patterns and enters the number of the
• Ink cartridge failure pattern with the least displacement for each adjustment item.
• No ink cartridge 7. Repeat (5) ~ (6) until adjustment of all items is completed.
• Thick paper is loaded.
Note *: The 8-color model displays Bi-D Black but the 4-color model displays Bi-D
1.4.4.35 K Ink Replacement Cyan. When executing the automatic adjustment, the pattern is printed in Bi-D
2 colors.
This menu is provided only for the 8-color model to replace PhotoBlack and
MatteBlack cartridges interchangeably. The 4-color model does not display the NOTE: For details of patterns, refer to "Gap Adjustment Print Pattern (p.
menu, however, replacing the MatteBlack with PhotoBlack is available and a 82)".
replacement confirmation message is displayed.

1.4.4.36 Power Cleaning


With this mode, the printer has more powerful cleaning than normal cleaning.
When executing power cleaning, ink lever operation is accompanied in order to
execute chalk cleaning.

1.4.4.37 Date Setting


Selecting this mode allows setting the current time. Absolute control time
offered by RTC power source in inner printer controls time difference set here
relatively. It is a function that covers time differences of each destination.
This time set by this setting will be shown by Job Information Print.

Product Description Operating Panel 79


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Adjustment Note *1: For the other PG settings (for 0.7/2.1/2.6), overwrite the values adding a
The adjustment values set above are saved in NVRAM as 4 types of offset value if the set value in the user area and the default values are the
adjustment value depending on PG height (0.7mm/1.2mm/1.5mm/2.1mm/ completely same with each other. If the PG setting differs in any one of eight
2.6mm). To calculate adjustment value, PG height and paper thickness are colors, do not overwrite the current settings because the difference means
that the user has changed the setting.
necessary. Saving place of adjustment value is selected as following list.
Adjustment value saved in NVRAM is updated when the value is adjusted *2: Even when paper thickness sensor detects thin paper (less than 0.8mm), PG
again. is set as 2.6mm if paper thickness setting is more than 0.7mm.
*3: When paper thickness sensor detects thick paper (more than 0.8mm), PG is
Paper set as 2.6mm regardless of PG setting and paper thickness setting.
Paper thickness
thickness PG setting Saving place Notes
setting Note 1: It is saved into saving place for paper thickness 0.0mm.
sensor
2: It is saved into saving place for paper thickness 0.3mm.
Less than -- For PG 1.2mm *1
0.8mm 3: Paper thickness is saved to adjust paper thickness by 0.1mm unit for paper
STD thickness setting command PH.
More than -- For PG 2.6mm
0.8mm 4: Paper thickness is firstly entered to print the closest pattern print of adjustment
value saved in the printer from the first time and reduce operation.
Narrow For PG 0.7mm
Standard For PG 1.2mm

Less than 0.1~0.8mm Wide For PG 1.5mm


0.3mm Wider For PG 2.1mm
Widest For PG 2.6mm
0.9~1.5mm -- For PG 2.6mm *2
Narrow For PG 1.2mm
Standard For PG 1.2mm
More than
0.3mm 0.1~0.8mm Wide For PG 1.5mm
Less than Wider For PG 2.1mm
0.8mm
Widest For PG 2.6mm
0.9~1.5mm -- For PG 2.6mm *2
More -- For PG 2.6mm *3
0.0~1.5mm
than0.8mm

Product Description Operating Panel 80


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

„ Level structure of gap adjustment menu


HEAD ALIGNMENT
HEAD ALIGNMENT [< / >]
STD
PAPER THKNS PAPER THKNS
0.1mm ~ 1.5mm
[∧ / ∨] STD
[<]
HEAD ALIGNMENT [< / >]
AUTO
ALIGNMENT ALIGNMENT MANUAL [>]
AUTO ALIGNMENT AUTO
[< / >] UNI-D

[∧ / ∨]
[<] [>]
ALIGNMENT AUTO
BI-D BLACK
[∧ / ∨]
[∧ / ∨]
[<] [>]
ALIGNMENT AUTO
[<] ALIGNMENT [< / >] BI-D ALL
MANUAL ALIGNMENT MANUAL [>]
[∧ / ∨] PRINTING
UNI-D
[<] [>]
ALIGNMENT AUTO
[∧ / ∨]
#1
[<] ALIGNMENT MANUAL [>] PRINTING [∧ / ∨]
BI-D 2COLOR
[<] [>]
ALIGNMENT AUTO
[∧ / ∨] Shifts to item for
corresponding #2
[<] ALIGNMENT MANUAL [>] adjustment value [∧ / ∨]
BI-D ALL after adjustment [>]
[<]
pattern print. ALIGNMENT AUTO
[∧ / ∨] #3

[∧ / ∨]

Adjustment Value Items


Adjustment Value Up Adjustment Value Up Adjustment Value Up

[∧] [∧] [∧] [∧] [∧] [∧]


UNI-D [>] UNI-D BI-D 2COLOR [>] BI-D 2COLOR BI-D ALL [>] BI-D ALL
#1 C 5 #4 LLK 5 #1 MK 5 #4 LLK 5 #1 MK 5 #4 LLK 5
[∨] [∨] [∨] [∨] [∨] [∨]

Adjustment Value Down Adjustment Value Down Adjustment Value Down

Product Description Operating Panel 81


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Gap Adjustment Print Pattern „ Adjustment pattern printing of each adjustment item
„ Print specifications
Print specifications of gap adjustment print pattern Print pattern 9 patterns (per 1 set)
Print direction Bar Going back and forth every 4dot
Adjustment pattern Bi-D Black (#1, #2, #3)
Block Upper patterns: Leftward
height Bi-D All (#1, #2, #3) Lower patterns: Rightward
Uni-D All (#1, #2, #3) Pattern interval Leftward : equal interval
AUTO Bi-D BLACK(#1, #2, #3) Rightward : Print No.5 to be always current setup value.
AUTO Bi-D ALL(#1, #2, #3) Position is shifted in fixed quantities, with No. 5
AUTO Uni-D ALL(#1, #2, #3) as the standard.

Others When it prints from paper edge, it feeds 100mm for roll
paper, 50mm for sheet, and starts printing.
„ The relationship between print pattern and adjustment gap is shown
below.
„ Each adjustment item Print pattern number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Table 1-35. Each adjustment item Adjustment gap –4 –3 –2 –1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4
Parameter N/1440 inch (VSD1, VSD2)
Adjusting Adjusting
item type Head speed
Dot size
(CPS)
#1 320 VSD1 (Bar Large/Block Small)
Bi-D #2 240 VSD2 (Bar Large/Block Large)
#3 240 VSD3 (Bar Large/Block Large)
#1 320 VSD1 (Large)
Uni-D #2 240 VSD2 (Large)
#3 240 VSD3 (Large)

Product Description Operating Panel 82


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.5 Maintenance Mode 1 † Panel display


Character strings on the second line in "Panel display" are displayed on the
OUTLINE second line of LCD panel. Setup values are displayed in the second line of
LCD panel.
† Startup
The maintenance mode 1 is displayed by switching power ON while
pushing the [Pause] button. [< / >]
HEX DUMP
† Operation PRINT

1. The setting menu select mode is selected after power ON. [∧ / ∨] EXEC

2. Each setting menu is displayed one after another by pushing [Paper LANGUAGE [< / >]
Feed] buttons in the setting menu select mode. It is shifted to setting LANGUAGE (French, Italian, German,
item select menu by pushing [Menu / Cleaning] button. [∧ / ∨] ENGLISH Spanish, and Portugue,
"Setting menu" is displayed on the upper line, and "Setting item" is Dutch)
PAPER COUNTER [< / >]
displayed on the lower line.
PAPER COUNTER
3. The setting menu is displayed one after another by pushing [Paper (Roll,Sheet)
[∧ / ∨] OFF
Feed] buttons in the setting item select mode. It is shifted to setting
value select mode of the setting item by pushing [Menu / Cleaning] UNIT [< / >]
button. UNIT
[∧ / ∨] (Feet/Inch)
"Setting item" is displayed on the upper line, and "Setting value" is [∧ / ∨] METER

displayed on the lower line. The "*" represents the current setup value. CUT PRESSURE [< / >]
4. Setting value is displayed on the lower line one after another by CUT PRESSURE
pushing [Paper Feed] buttons in the setting value select mode if the [∧ / ∨] 100% (0%~100%~150%)
setting value can be changed. The "*" represents the current setup [< / >]
SSCL
value.
SSCL
5. When the [Menu / Cleaning] button is pushed in the setting value
[∧ / ∨] EXEC
select mode, the displayed setting value is entered as the current
[< / >]
setting value and registered. If it has a corresponded operation, it is ROLL PPR FEED
started. No operation occurs if "*" is already displayed. ROLL PPR FEED
[∧ / ∨] ON (OFF)
6. It returns to the setting item select menu by pushing [Paper Source]
button in the setting value select mode. It returns to the setting menu DEFAULT PANEL [< / >]
select mode by pushing [Paper Source] button in the setting item DEFAULT PANEL
select menu. [∧ / ∨] EXEC

† Termination CRTG INFO MENU [< / >]


(MK CARTRIDGE)
1. The printer is ready for printing following reset after selecting the panel CRTG INFO MENU


MK CARTRIDGE
display language setting. (LLK CARTRIDGE)
2. Switch power OFF → ON.
Note *1: The 4-color model does not display LK, LC, LM, and LLK.

Product Description Operating Panel 83


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

AINTENANCE MODE 1 SETUP ITEMS Table 1-36. Maintenance Mode 1 Setup Items
Item menu 1 Item menu 2
Top menu Panel display Setup value
Table 1-36. Maintenance Mode 1 Setup Items (Panel display) (Panel display)
Manufacture logo
Item menu 1 Item menu 2 EPSON
Top menu Panel display Setup value (MANUFACT MK)
(Panel display) (Panel display)
Ink color
Print Matte Black
- - (CARTRIDGE MK)
hexadecimal HEX DUMP EXEC *1
(-) (PRINT) Ink type
dump PIGMENT, DYE
(INK TYPE MK)
English, French,
Panel display Ink capacity
- - Italian, German, 110ml/220ml
language LANGUAGE Ink information (INK CAP MK)
(-) (-) Spanish, Portuguese,
select Ink (MK E*****F, E**** F,
and Dutch CRTG INFO Ink remaining
information CARTRIDGE) or E*** F, E** F,
REMAINING MENU (INK LEFT-MK)
menu (PK E* F, E F
PAPER PAPER - - OFF,
CARTRIDGE) Product date
DISPLAY COUNTER (-) (-) Roll,Sheet <YY>/<MM>
SETTING (PROD DATE MK)
- - Expire date
Unit switching UNIT METER, FEET/INCH <YY>/<MM>
(-) (-) (EXPIR DATE MK)
CUT - - Ink life after open
Cut pressure 0% ~ 100% ~ 150% <MM> Month
PRESSURE (-) (-) (INK LIFE MK)
- - Passed time after open
SSCL SSCL EXEC <MM> Month
(-) (-) (AGE MK)
PAPER FEED ROLL PPR - -
ON,OFF
SETTING FEED (-) (-)
Panel Setting DEFAULT - -
EXEC
Initialization PANEL (-) (-)

Product Description Operating Panel 84


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 1-36. Maintenance Mode 1 Setup Items Table 1-36. Maintenance Mode 1 Setup Items
Item menu 1 Item menu 2 Item menu 1 Item menu 2
Top menu Panel display Setup value Top menu Panel display Setup value
(Panel display) (Panel display) (Panel display) (Panel display)
Manufacture logo Manufacture logo
EPSON EPSON
(MANUFACT C) (MANUFACT Y)
Ink color Ink color
Cyan Yellow
(CARTRIDGE C) (CARTRIDGE Y)
Ink type Ink type
PIGMENT, DYE PIGMENT, DYE
(INK TYPE C) (INK TYPE Y)
Ink capacity Ink capacity
110ml/220ml 110ml/220ml
(INK CAP C) (INK CAP Y)
E*****F, E**** F, E*****F, E**** F,
Ink information Ink remaining Ink information (Y Ink remaining
E*** F, E** F, E*** F, E** F,
(C CARTRIDGE) (INK LEFT-C) CARTRIDGE) (INK LEFT-Y)
E* F, E F E* F, E F
Product date Product date
<YY>/<MM> <YY>/<MM>
(PROD DATE C) (PROD DATE Y)
Expire date Expire date
<YY>/<MM> <YY>/<MM>
(EXPIR DATE C) (EXPIR DATE Y)
Ink life after open Ink life after open
<MM> Month <MM> Month
(INK LIFE C) (INK LIFE Y)
Passed time after open Passed time after open
Ink <MM> Month Ink <MM> Month
CRTG INFO (AGE C) CRTG INFO (AGE Y)
information information
MENU Manufacture logo MENU Manufacture logo
menu EPSON menu EPSON
(MANUFACT M) (MANUFACT LK)
Ink color Ink color
Magenta Light Black
(CARTRIDGE M) (CARTRIDGE LK)
Ink type Ink type
PIGMENT, DYE PIGMENT, DYE
(INK TYPE M) (INK TYPE LK)
Ink capacity Ink capacity
110ml/220ml 110ml/220ml
(INK CAP M) (INK CAP LK)
E*****F, E**** F, Ink information E*****F, E**** F,
Ink information Ink remaining Ink remaining
E*** F, E** F, (LK E*** F, E** F,
(M CARTRIDGE) (INK LEFT-M) (INK LEFT-LK)
E* F, E F CARTRIDGE) E* F, E F
Product date Product date
<YY>/<MM> <YY>/<MM>
(PROD DATE M) (PROD DATE LK)
Expire date Expire date
<YY>/<MM> <YY>/<MM>
(EXPIR DATE M) (EXPIR DATE LK)
Ink life after open Ink life after open
<MM> Month <MM> Month
(INK LIFE M) (INK LIFE LK)
Passed time after open Passed time after open
<MM> Month <MM> Month
(AGE M) (AGE LK)

Product Description Operating Panel 85


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 1-36. Maintenance Mode 1 Setup Items Table 1-36. Maintenance Mode 1 Setup Items
Item menu 1 Item menu 2 Item menu 1 Item menu 2
Top menu Panel display Setup value Top menu Panel display Setup value
(Panel display) (Panel display) (Panel display) (Panel display)
Manufacture logo Manufacture logo
EPSON EPSON
(MANUFACT Lc) (MANUFACT LLK)
Ink color Ink color
Light Cyan Light Light Black
(CARTRIDGE Lc) (CARTRIDGE LLK)
Ink type Ink type
PIGMENT, DYE PIGMENT, DYE
(INK TYPE Lc) (INK TYPE LLK)
Ink capacity Ink capacity
110ml/220ml 110ml/220ml
(INK CAP Lc) (INK CAP LLK)
Ink information E*****F, E**** F, Ink Ink information E*****F, E**** F,
Ink remaining CRTG INFO Ink remaining
(LC E*** F, E** F, information (LLK E*** F, E** F,
(INK LEFT-Lc) MENU (INK LEFT-LLK)
CARTRIDGE) E* F, E F menu CARTRIDGE) E* F, E F
Product date Product date
<YY>/<MM> <YY>/<MM>
(PROD DATE Lc) (PROD DATE LLK)
Expire date Expire date
<YY>/<MM> <YY>/<MM>
(EXPIR DATE Lc) (EXPIR DATE LLK)
Ink life after open Ink life after open
<MM> Month <MM> Month
(INK LIFE Lc) (INK LIFE LLK)
Passed time after open Passed time after open
Ink <MM> Month <MM> Month
CRTG INFO (AGE Lc) (AGE LLK)
information
MENU Manufacture logo
menu EPSON
(MANUFACT Lm) Note *1: When hexadecimal dump mode is executed, "PRINT" is displayed.
Ink color *2: For the 4-color model, ink infomation menu is displayed only for the 4
Light Magenta
(CARTRIDGE Lm)
cartridges
Ink type
PIGMENT, DYE
(INK TYPE Lm)
Ink capacity HEXADECIMAL DUMP
110ml/220ml
(INK CAP Lm)
Ink information E*****F, E**** F,
The hex dump function allows data sent to the printer to be printed and
Ink remaining displayed in hexadecimal format.
(LM E*** F, E** F,
(INK LEFT-Lm)
CARTRIDGE) E* F, E F One line contains 16 data items in hexadecimal format, with the equivalent
Product date
<YY>/<MM>
characters printed at the right of each line.
(PROD DATE Lm) If no equipment characters exist (control codes, etc.), a period is printed.
Expire date It prints every 16 data.
<YY>/<MM>
(EXPIR DATE Lm)
It prints the last data by pressing the [Pause] button, when it is less than 16.
Ink life after open
(INK LIFE Lm)
<MM> Month Panel setting is not available in the hex dump mode.
Passed time after open
Using this function, users can check that data has been sent correctly from the
<MM> Month computer to the printer.
(AGE Lm)
To terminate this mode, stop printing by pressing [Pause] button and shut the
power off.

Product Description Operating Panel 86


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

PANEL DISPLAY LANGUAGE SELECTION CUTTING PRESSURE

Users can select English, French, Italian, German, Spanish, and Portuguese Changes cutting pressure, which is set in the printer.
for display on the LCD with this mode. Adjustment value (calculated by spring balance / input value) in the process is
set to 100% (printer default), input / setting range by the user is set to between
REMAINING PAPER DISPLAY SETTING 0% ~ 150%.
The value entered by this function is worked as absolute value of printer,
This mode allows users to set the remaining paper detection to OFF/ roll paper • Remote SN m1 = 81h
ON/ cut sheet ON. When the remaining paper detection is set to OFF, it is not • Panel setting "User paper setting"
displayed in the printer setting menu. When the remaining paper detection is multiplied to the value specified above.
set to roll paper ON/ cut sheet OFF, it is displayed.
NOTE: Roll paper and cut sheet cannot be set to ON simultaneously. SUPERSONIC CLEANING (SSCL)

UNIT SWITCHING Users can execute supersonic cleaning using this mode. If the number of times
that this cleaning is performed exceedes 250 times*, however, the printer runs
Users can change length unit of LCD panel / pattern print with this mode. CL3 instead.
„ METER : meter (m) Note *: This number will be reset by executing “Reset when printhead change“ after
„ FEET/INCH : Feet (ft)/Inch (in) replacing printhead.

Unit of following messages can be changed;


PAPER FEED SETTING
Table 1-37. Swithable Messages This mode allows users to set a certain amount of paper not to be fed when
Message turning the printer on with cutter setting OFF, and this reduces waste of paper.
Item
Meter Feet/Inch NOTE: When paper feed setting is set to on, the image will be printed on
the platen. Users have to change the setting at their own
Panel LCD display Paper counter xxm xxft
responsibility.
Remainig paper menu xx.xm xxxft
Job information display (Paper xxxxx.xcm xxxxft xxin PANEL SETTING INITIALIZATION
used)
Users can change all setting values of panel setting mode to the default values
Nozzle check Job information display (Paper xxxxxxxcm2 xxxxxx.xsqft or the factory setting values.
pattern used)
„ Printer Setting Menu :Turns default setting back
Current Paper Count xxxxx.xcm xxxxft xxin
„ User Paper Setting :Deletes the setting record
Prev Paper Count xxxxx.xcm xxxxft xxin „ Gap Adjustment Menu :Turns default setting back
Status sheet Use Paper xxxxxx.xcm xxxxft xxin „ Maintenance Menu :Date setting is set back to absolute time
Job information controlled by RTC power
Paper Used (vertical) xxxxxx.xcm xxxxft xxin
print
„ Printer Status Menu :Deletes all information
Note : This function is available only for English.

Product Description Operating Panel 87


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

INK INFORMATION MENU

It displays ink information recorded in CSIC.

Table 1-38. Ink Information Menu


Item Explanation
Manufacture logo Manufacture information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is
displayed.
Ink color Ink color information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is
displayed.
Ink type Ink type information (dye/pigment) saved in CSIC of each ink
cartridge is displayed.
Ink capacity Ink capacity information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is
displayed.
Ink remaining Ink remaining of each ink cartridge is displayed.
Product date Product date information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is
displayed with <YY>/<MM> form.
Expire date Ink expire date information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge
is displayed.
Ink life after open Ink life information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is
displayed.
Passed time after Passed time after opened of each ink cartridge is displayed.
open

Note : These are displayed every color (Matte Black ~ Light Black).

Product Description Operating Panel 88


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Level structure of ink information menu

Ink Information Items


CRTG INFO MENU [< / >]
CRTG INFO MENU [< / >]
MK CARTRIDGE MANUFACT MK
[∧ / ∨] EPSON

CRTG INFO MENU [∧ / ∨] [>]


[<] [< / >]
C CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE MK
[<]
[∧ / ∨] MATTE BLACK

CRTG INFO MENU [∧ / ∨] [>]


[<] [< / >]
M CARTRIDGE INK TYPE MK
[<]
[∧ / ∨] PIGMENT

CRTG INFO MENU [∧ / ∨] [>]


[<] [< / >]
Y CARTRIDGE INK CAP MK
[<]
[∧ / ∨] 110ml

CRTG INFO MENU [∧ / ∨] [>]


[<] [< / >] Shifts to each Ink
LK CARTRIDGE INK LEFT-MK
Information Item [<]
[∧ / ∨] E∗∗∗∗∗F

CRTG INFO MENU


[∧ / ∨] [>]
[<] [< / >]
LC CARTRIDGE PROD DATE MK
[<]
[∧ / ∨] xx/xx

CRTG INFO MENU


[∧ / ∨] [>]
[<] [< / >]
LM CARTRIDGE [<] EXPIR DATE MK
[∧ / ∨] xx/xx

CRTG INFO MENU


[∧ / ∨] [>]
[<] [< / >]
LLK CARTRIDGE [<] INK LIFE MK
xx MONTH
[∧ / ∨] [>]
[∧ / ∨]

Product Description Operating Panel 89


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.6 Maintenance Mode 2 STARTUP


This mode includes the following menus and is intended for use by a service The maintenance mode 2 is selected by switching power ON while pushing the
engineer in maintaining the printer. [Paper Source (<)], [Paper Feed (∧)], [Paper Feed (∨)] and buttons.
† Self Testing Menu (SELF TESTING) (p91)
OPERATION
† Counter Display Menu (VIEW COUNTERS) (p101)
1. The setting menu select mode is selected after power ON.
NOTE: Special remote commands and factory setting commands can be
receied, set or responded only when the printer is in the 2. Each setting menu is displayed one after another by pushing [Paper
Maintenance Mode 2 displaying the mode’s initial screen. Source (<)], [Paper Feed (∧)], [Paper Feed (∨)] buttons in the setting menu
Only special commands supported by the process adjustment tool select mode. It is shifted to setting item select menu by pushing [Menu /
are available. The operation print data, or firmware files. Cleaning] button. "Setting menu" is displayed in the upper line, and
"Setting item" is displayed in the lower line.
C H E C K Maintenance Mode 2 is intended to assist service personnel
3. The setting menu is displayed one after another by pushing [Paper Feed]
P O IN T only.
buttons once in the setting item select mode. It is shifted to setting value
Do not let the users to know about the mode. select mode of the setting item by pushing [Menu / Cleaning] button.
"Setting item" is displayed in the upper line, and "Setting value" is
displayed in the lower line. The "*" represents the current setup value.
4. Setting value is displayed in the lower line one after another by pushing
[Paper Feed] buttons in the setting value select mode if the setting value
can be changed. The "*" represents the current setup value.
5. When the [Menu / Cleaning] button is pushed in the setting value select
mode, the displayed setting value is entered and registered as the current
setting value. If it has a corresponded operation, it is started. No operation
occurs if "*" is already displayed.
6. It returns to the setting item select menu by pushing [Paper Source] button
in the setting value select mode. It returns to the setting menu select mode
by pushing [Paper Source] button in the setting item select menu.

TERMINATION

Switch power OFF → ON.

PANEL DISPLAY

Character strings on the second line in "Panel display" are displayed in the
second line of LCD panel. Setup values are displayed in the second line of
LCD panel.

Product Description Operating Panel 90


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF TESTING)


This self testing menu is mainly intended to adjustment the printer mechanism and determination any adjustment parameters in the firmware.

C H E C K „ It is possible the adjustment program to perform the same functions.


P O IN T „ Ink cartridge and maintenance tank remaining are not detected while executing this menu. So check if the ink cartridge and
maintenance tank remaining before the operation that is included discharging many ink.
„ Reason for this menu is as common as other products, all displayed items include unusable items.

Table 1-39. Self Testing Menu List


Top Menu 1st hierarchy 2nd hierarchy 3rd hierarchy
Panel Display Item Panel Display Item Panel Display Item Panel Display Item
TEST Test Version Version F/W Firmware version
--- ---
display
8K Main NVRAMversion 8k Main --- ---
8K Mecha NVRAMversion 8k --- ---
Mecha
32K Main NVRAMversion 32k --- ---
Main
32K Mecha NVRAM version 32k --- ---
Mecha
DipSW Dip switch status --- ---
Panel Panel Key Confirm key operation --- ---
LCD Confirm LCD --- ---
LED Confirm LED --- ---
Sensor Sensor CR Origin CR origin sensor --- ---
Paper Paper sensor --- ---
Lever Paper lever sensor --- ---
HeadSlide Head slide sensor --- ---
Roll Rol 1 sensor --- ---
Roll2 Roll 2 sensor --- ---
Pump Pump sensor --- ---

Product Description Operating Panel 91


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 1-39. Self Testing Menu List


Top Menu 1st hierarchy 2nd hierarchy 3rd hierarchy
Panel Display Item Panel Display Item Panel Display Item Panel Display Item
TEST Test Sensor Sensor InkLvr Left and right ink lever --- ---
Cover Front cover --- ---
RearGuide Rear cover --- ---
Rear Det Rear det --- ---
POUT Det Paper out --- ---
P Det P det --- ---
MainteTank Maintenance tank --- ---
K/C/M/Y/k/c/m/y Cartridge status --- ---
EdgeAD Edge AD --- ---
Edge2AD Edge AD2 --- ---
RearAD Rear AD --- ---
Head Temp Head temperature --- ---
Drv. Temp Driver temperature --- ---
Encoder Encoder CR CR encoder --- ---
PF PF encoder --- ---
Fan Fan Paper (ALL) All paper suction fan --- ---
Paper1 Paper suction fan1 --- ---
Paper2 Paper suction fan2 --- ---
Head Drv. Head driver --- ---
Elec. Electric Maintenance Counter display WasteInk: Waste ink
Wiper: Wiper
Rubing: Rubbing
Lever: Paper lever
Cover: Paper cover
InkLever: Ink lever

Product Description Operating Panel 92


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 1-39. Self Testing Menu List


Top Menu 1st hierarchy 2nd hierarchy 3rd hierarchy
Panel Display Item Panel Display Item Panel Display Item Panel Display Item
TEST Test Elec. Electric Maintenance Counter display CR Motor: CR motor reciprocating
times
PF Motor: PF motor
PrintNumber: Number of printouts
Cleaning: Cleaning times
Fire A: A row discharging times
Fire B: B row discharging times
Fire C: C row discharging times
Fire D: D row discharging times
Fire E: E row discharging times
Fire F: F row discharging times
Fire G: G row discharging times
Fire H: H row discharging times
Cut: Cutting times
Cut Sole.: Cutter solenoid
Error Register occurred error Error0: Error0
Error1: Error1
Error2: Error2
Error3: Error3
Error4: Error4
Error5: Error5
Error6: Error6

Product Description Operating Panel 93


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 1-39. Self Testing Menu List


Top Menu 1st hierarchy 2nd hierarchy 3rd hierarchy
Panel Display Item Panel Display Item Panel Display Item Panel Display Item
TEST Test CSIC CSIC SLOT1 Slot1 --- ---
SLOT2 Slot2 --- ---
SLOT3 Slot3 --- ---
SLOT4 Slot4 --- ---
SLOT5 Slot5 --- ---
SLOT6 Slot6 --- ---
SLOT7 Slot7 --- ---
SLOT8 Slot8 --- ---
MntTank Maintenance tank --- ---
Actuator Actuator Cutter Cutter --- ---
Actuator2 Actuator2 Cutter Sol. Cutter solenoid --- ---
Pump Motor Pump motor --- ---
Adjustment Adjustment Cut Adj. Cutter adjustment --- --- --- ---
PG Adj PG adjustment --- --- --- ---
RearAD Rear AD adjustment --- --- --- ---
Edge Sns Lv1 Edge sensor level --- --- --- ---
Check Nozzle Nozzle check pattern
--- --- --- ---
print
Check Skew Confirm paper skew --- --- --- ---
Print Print Check Ptn. Check pattern --- --- --- ---
Adj. Varable Adjustment parameter --- --- --- ---

Product Description Operating Panel 94


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

TEST MENU † LCD check


The LCD lights all over for dot missing check.
Version
† LED check
The versions of the following items can be checked.
Lights pause (green), Ink check (red), paper check (red) in that order, and
† Firmware version displays the lighted LED name (Printable/ Ink/ Paper) on the LCD.
Refer to “1.4.4.23 Firmware Version (p.66)” for the display.
† NVRAM version
Displays versions of 8K area main, 8K area mechanical controller, 32K
area main, and 32K area mechanical controller respectively.
† DIP switch
Displays the DIP switch status.
Panel
The following panel operation can be checked.To exit the panel key check,
press the [Pause] key twice.
† Key operation check
Displays question marks as shown below in the initial condition. While
holding down a key, the key name is displayed.

Panel [Pause] Panel


Key ???????? Key Printable

Panel
[∨]
Key Paper

[∨] Panel
Key PaperRoad+

Panel
[∨]
Key PaperRoad-

Panel
[∨]
Key PanelSet

Product Description Operating Panel 95


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Sensor Encoder
The status of the following sensors can be checked. The travel of each motor for CR shaft (Carriage) and PF shaft (Paper Feed)
can be confirmed by the slid (encoder) value which is displayed in encoder
Table 1-40. Sensor pulse.
Sensor Name Remark
Fan
CR home position ---
The operation of each fan is can be checked. [“Printable” End] is displayed in
Paper thickness sensor ---
the second row on the panel during execution. This menu is ended by pressing
Paper slide sensor --- the [Pause] key.
Head slide sensor ---
NOTE: Facing the printer, Fan1 is on the home position side and fan2 is
Roll 1 sensor --- on the other side.
Roll 2 sensor ---
Pump sensor ---
Left and right ink lever ---
Front cover ---
Rear cover ---
Rear det ---
Paper out ---
P det ---
Maintenance tank ---
Cartridge status
Edge AD For edge AD and rear AD, the
value near the center is ON-OFF
Edge AD 2
difference, and the value on the
Rear AD right edge is ON level.*
Head temperature
Driver temperature

Note *: Each AD is qualified as OK by the following condition.


•Front AD/ Rear AD : Difference is 40 or more. ON level is less than 95.
•Edge AD : Difference is 40 or more. ON level is E0 to E8.

Product Description Operating Panel 96


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Electric † Occurred error display


Fatal errors of up to 7 maintenance items recorded as history can be checked. Displays error codes of fatal errors. The latest error is 0 and 7 errors are
(CPU error is not recorded.) recoreded in 0 to 6.
† Counter display CSIC
The counters shown in the table below are displayed. The number is
displayed in hexadecimal. Fatal errors of up to 7 maintenance items recorded as history can be checked.
(CPU error is not recorded.)
Table 1-41. Counter Display Items and Units
Actuator
Maintenance Unit
Waste ink*1 0.02g Fatal errors of up to 7 maintenance items recorded as history can be checked.
(CPU error is not recorded.)
Wiper Number of times
Fatal errors of up to 7 maintenance items recorded as history can be checked.
Rubing Number of times (CPU error is not recorded.)
Paper lever UP Number of times
Actuator2
Front cover open Number of times
Fatal errors of up to 7 maintenance items recorded as history can be checked.
Ink lever UP Number of times (CPU error is not recorded.)
CR Motor reciprocating Number of times Fatal errors of up to 7 maintenance items recorded as history can be checked.
PF Motor travel distance 3079.413957mm unit (CPU error is not recorded.)

Printouts (cut sheet/ roll paper) Number of print*3


Head cleaning Number of times
A to H row ink eject Mega dot
Cut*2 Number of times
Cutter solenoid operation Number of times

Note *: The items except the following are set to 0 when performing counter
initialization.
Note *1: When replacing the old maintenance tank with a new one, the old value is
changed to the new one.
*2: The counter is reset when the cutter replacement sequence is performed
successfully.
*3: Counts 1 when any print start request is received.

Product Description Operating Panel 97


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

ADJUSTMENT MENU Nozzle check pattern print


The ink eject from the head nozzle can be checked from the printed pattern.If
Cut adjustment
the ink is not ejected properly, a cleaning is performed. The items printed on
Adjusts the cutter pressure of the cutter. The cutter pressure can be set by 1%. the pattern are as follows.

PG adjustment • Nozzle ink eject check pattern


Each color is printed in the order below from the home position side.
Adjusts the PG. 8 color: MK/PK, C, M, C, Y, LK, LC, LM, LLK
Rear AD adjustment 4 color: C, C, Y, Y, M, M, MK, MK
• Firmware version
Detects and set the best resistance value of the rear sensor.
After the detection, The D/A adjustment value, ON-OFF difference, and ON Prints the installed firmware version.
level are displayed in that order from the left. When a detection error occurs • Remaining maintenance tank capacity
including sensor defect, circuit defect, and adjustment with paper unloaded, the Prints the remaining maintenance tank capacity (unit: %).
error is displayed. 0% means that the maintenance tank is full.
Edge sensor level • Head ID

Measures the platen level (reflecting amount) by the paper edge sensor. Prints the registered head ID value.
If paper is on the rear sensor, the sensor detects the paper width and obtains • Colorimetric calibration ID
information for each paper type. If paper is not on the rear sensor, the sensor Prints the registered colorimetric calibration ID
obtains information for each paper type at previous paper width detection.
• Vertical nozzle alignment check pattern (3 rows)
The panel keys are invalid during executing and the measured values are
Prints in the order of VSD1, VSD2, VSD3 from the top. Large and
displayed in the order below.
Middle sized dots are printed iteratively for the VSD3 to prevent
• No measurement paper satellite droplets from occurring in MK.
• Minimum measurement value • Horizontal nozzle alignment check pattern (6 rows)
• Minimum value detection position
• Maximum measurement value Prints in the order of VSD1, VSD2, VSD3 from the top row.
• Maximum value detection position Refer to “1.4.4.19 Nozzle Check Pattern Printing (p.59)” for a printed pattern.
• Threshold value at paper detection
• Paper presence at paper detection
• Paper absence at paper detection
• D/A value used at paper detection
• OK/NG

Product Description Operating Panel 98


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Paper skew check


Feeds a specified amount of paper for checking the skew level, and detects the
Position paper edge before and after feeding with the sensor to check the
error.
Version : A<Z><xxxx> When the paper feed amount is entered after the paper initialization, the edge
Maintenance Tank : <yyy>% sensor detects the left edge of the paper (home position side) after feeding
operation and the printer displays the difference with that of before feeding on
Head Rank ID :xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
the panel.
Color ID : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx The first paper edge detection determines the paper skew judging standard
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx position in the firmware.
Vertical Alignment [VSD1] NOTE 1: If the paper check LED blinks/lights, the paper detection error
currently occurs. In this case, perform the paper skew check again
after releasing the lever once.
2: If the skew result indicates [99.999mm], it could be caused by the
Vertical Alignment [VSD2]
following reason(s). In this case, perform the paper skew check
again after removing the cause(s).
• The paper width has been changed by 3mm at one of the
Vertical Alignment [VSD3]
paper edges compared with the previous paper width detection.
• The paper is loaded too close to the home position side.
• The lever is pulled up or the cover is opened during paper feed.
3: The panel keys are invalid during paper skew check.
Horizontal Alignment [VSD1]
4: For the indicated value, "+" indicates the home position side and "-
"indicates the other side.

PRINT MENU
Horizontal Alignment [VSD2]
This menu is intended to print test patterns and adjustment values. An
adjustment parameter pattern is printed followed by a test pattern.
The following table shows the printable patterns.
Horizontal Alignment [VSD3]

Table 1-42. Nozzle Check Pattern

Product Description Operating Panel 99


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 1-43. Print Menu Item [R4CD400 xColoros] Adjust Parameter


Serial No. : _______________ , Mecha No. : ---------- , Tool Version : xxxxxxx
Print menu Item Belt No. : xxx , PC No. : xx
xx-xx-xxxx xx:xx:xx
Test pattern Nozzle ink eject check pattern Uni-D adjustment F/W Version : A0xxxx.xxxx
NVRAM Version : Main xxxx xxxx ,Mecha xxxx xxxx
Vertical nozzle arraignment Bi-D adjustment (PG1.2mm
check pattern VSD1 to 3) Type-B : Uninstalled
Horizontal nozzle arraignment Bi-D adjustment (PG0.7mm Head Rank ID : xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
ColorID:xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
check pattern VSD1 to 3) xx xx xx
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
xx xx xx
Adjustment The adjusted parameters are printed. (Refer to Figure 1-22.) Gap Parameter 4Colors ---------- User Area ---------- ---------- Backup Area -------------
parameter VSD1 C C2 Y Y2 M M2 MK MK2 C C2 Y Y2 M M2 MK MK2
Bi-D PG 0.7mm : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Bi-D PG 1.2mm : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Bi-D PG 1.5mm : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Bi-D PG 2.1mm : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Bi-D PG 2.6mm : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Uni-D : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
VSD2 C C2 Y Y2 M M2 MK MK2 C C2 Y Y2 M M2 MK MK2
Bi-D PG 0.7mm : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Bi-D PG 1.2mm : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Bi-D PG 1.5mm : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Bi-D PG 2.1mm : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Bi-D PG 2.6mm : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Uni-D : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
VSD3 C C2 Y Y2 M M2 MK MK2 C C2 Y Y2 M M2 MK MK2
Bi-D PG 0.7mm : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Bi-D PG 1.2mm : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Bi-D PG 1.5mm : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Bi-D PG 2.1mm : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Bi-D PG 2.6mm : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
Uni-D : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
PF Adjust : 1002.349 mm Bi-D PF Adjust : -1
Top Margin Adjust : 8.903 mm Rear Sensor Position Adjust : 13.099 mm Multi Sensor Left : 0.000 mm
Bottom Margin Adjust: 13.602 mm ASF Top Margin : 10.300 mm Multi Sensor Right : 0.000 mm
Side Margin Adjust : 9.895 mm ASF Side Margin : 8.696 mm
PG Adjust = 45 Pump Counter = 11390 Cut Paper Pre. = 100 % Cut Pressure = 70 % Rear AD =C6
Platen Position 1:0 / 2:0 / 3:0 / 4:0 / 5:0 / 6:0 / 7:0 / 8:0 / 9:0 / 10:0
Multi-Sensor Position Adjust PG 0.7mm PG 1.2mm PG 1.5mm PG 2.1mm PG 2.6mm
Horizontal [mm] : 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Vertical [mm] : 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Error 1 : xxxxxxxx xx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx Error 6 : xxxxxxxx xx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx
Error 2 : xxxxxxxx xx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx Error 7 : xxxxxxxx xx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx
Error 3 : xxxxxxxx xx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx Error 8 : xxxxxxxx xx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx
Error 4 : xxxxxxxx xx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx Error 9 : xxxxxxxx xx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx
Error 5 : xxxxxxxx xx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx Error 10 : xxxxxxxx xx-xx-xx xx:xx:xx
Serial No. : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
USB Serial No. : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
IEEE1394 ID : xx xx xx xx xx
Factory Flag : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx

Figure 1-24. Adjustment Parameter Print Sample

Product Description Operating Panel 100


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.6.2 Counter Display Menu (VIEW COUNTERS) CUTTER LIFE COUNTER VALUE DISPLAY
This menu displays the counter value of each unit/part.
Display cutter life counter value. Cutter life counter is counted every cut
Table 1-44. Counter Display Menu operation. Cutter life counter value is initialized (initial value 0) when replacing
cutter.
Top menu Panel display Item menu 1 Panel display
Counter display VIEW COUNTERS Cutter life counter value CUTTER CUTTER LIFE CUMULATIVE COUNTER VALUE DISPLAY
menu display
Display cutter life cumulative counter value. Cutter life cumulative counter
Cutter life cumulative counter CUTTER TOTAL
value display value is counted every cut operation. Cutter life cumulative counter value is not
initialized.
Total printouts counter value TOTAL PAGES
display
TOTAL PRINTOUTS COUNTER VALUE DISPLAY
Maintenance tank value MAINT TANK
display Display total printouts counter value. Total printouts counter value is counted
every paper eject operation.
CR motor life counter value CR MOTOR
display
MAINTENANCE TANK VALUE DISPLAY
CR motor cumulative counter CR TOTAL
value display Display maintenance tank value.
PF motor life counter value PF MOTOR
display CR MOTOR LIFE COUNTER VALUE DISPLAY
Head unit life counter value NOZZLE A Display CR motor cumulative counter value. CR motor life cumulative counter value is
display counted every CR reciprocating.


(A row ~ H row)
NOZZLE H CR MOTOR CUMULATIVE COUNTER VALUE DISPLAY
Flashing box counter value FL BOX
Display CR motor life cumulative counter display. CR motor life cumulative
display
counter value is counted every CR reciprocating. It is not initialized by carriage
Cleaning unit life counter CLEANER related information counter clear.
value display
Sponge counter value display SPONGE PF MOTOR LIFE COUNTER VALUE DISPLAY
for left and right borderless
Display PF motor life counter value. PF motor counter life counter value counts
ASF paper feed counter value ASF PF feed amount.
display
Paper ejection switching FEED ROLLER HEAD UNIT LIFE COUNTER VALUE DISPLAY
counter value display
Display life counter of each nozzle from A row to H row. Head unit life counter
PG switching counter value PG
is counted every ink discharging.
display

Product Description Operating Panel 101


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

FLASHING BOX COUNTER VALUE DISPLAY 1.4.7 MIB Function


Display flashing box counter value. The Flushing Box Counter counts each The printer corresponds to the following MIB; you can receive printer
time of flushing. information (specification/status/commodity/job information etc.) from Global
MIB via N/W. Also according to Type-B Level 3 Packet Mode support,
corresponds to the following Local MIB.
CLEANING UNIT LIFE COUNTER VALUE DISPLAY
† Corresponding MIB
Display cleaning unit life counter value. The Cleaning unit life counter counts Following are the corresponding MIB.
each time of cleaning.
Table 1-45. Global MIB
SPONGE COUNTER VALUE DISPLAY FOR LEFT AND RIGHT BORDERLESS Name Contents
Display sponge count value for left and right borderless. Host Resource MIB Device information etc.
Printer MIB Printer information (function/commodity/status)
ASF PAPER FEED COUNTER VALUE DISPLAY
EPSON Printer Private MIB Printer information (DeviceID/StatusReply letter strings
Display ASF paper feed counter value. ASF paper feed counter value is etc.)
counted every paper feed operation from the ASF.

PAPER EJECTION SWITCHING COUNTER VALUE DISPLAY Table 1-46. Local MIB
Display paper ejection switching counter value. The Paper Eject Switching Name Contents
Counter counts each time the paper eject switching movement occurs.
Type-B Local MIB Type-B I/F setting /information

PG SWITCHING COUNTER VALUE DISPLAY EMAP Local MIB Corresponding MIB information

Display PG switching counter value. The PG Switching Counter counts each


time the PG switching movement occurs.

Product Description Operating Panel 102


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.8 Function to Prevent Irregular Printing „ Job time out


Refer to "1.4.4.11 Job Time-out Setting (p.54)".
† Strong cancel data „ Preventing the remaining data from being printed on the second cut
When 16KB DC1 is sent to the head of each job, the printer performs a
sheet
special initialization operation.
If the print data size is larger than the maximum data size that can be
Refer to "1.4.9 Initialization (p.104)" for this initialization operation.
printed on a single sheet (manual feed/ ASF), the remaining data that
† Skip reading of irregular data cannot be printed on the first sheet is not printed on the second sheet.
„ Unprintable characters The remaining print data (graphic data) is ignored, and the next new
It doesn't print characters including ASCII code with text print mode. print data is printed from the top of the second paper.

Table 1-47. Unprintable hexadecimal code (Control character code)


Code Character Code Character Code Character
00h NULL 10h DLE 7Fh DEL
01h SOH 11h DC1
02h STX 12h DC2
03h ETX 13h DC3
04h EOT 14h DC4
05h ENQ 15h NAK
06h ACK 16h SYN
07h BEL 17h ETB
08h BS 18h CAN
09h HT 19h EM
0Ah NL (LF) 1Ah SUB
0Bh VT 1Bh ESC
0Ch NP (FF) 1Ch FS
0Dh CR 1Dh GS
0Eh SO 1Eh RS
0Fh SI 1Fh US

NOTE: 0Ah, 0Ch, 0Dh, 11h, and 1Bh are ESCP command supported by
the printer. The printer judges the command at the same time and
decides whether to print it.

Product Description Operating Panel 103


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.4.9 Initialization 1.4.10 Default Setup Values


The printer performs initialization operation by the following method. 1.4.10.1 Operation Default Setting
1.4.9.1 Hardware Initialization † Default Status
Default setup values in initialization operation are as follows. The
This printer is initialized when power to the printer is turned on. parameters for items that may be saved for panel setup, default setup, and
† The following are the initialization operation performed when turning the remote commands are used as default values.
power on. „ Page position: Set current paper position as page start position
„ Initialization operation „ Line feed: 1/6"
• Initializes printer mechanism. „ Right margin: 1st character
• Clears input data buffer. „ Left margin: 3mm
• Clears print buffer.
„ Character pitch: 10 CPI
• Sets default values.
„ Print mode: Text mode (non-raster graphics mode)
1.4.9.2 Software Initialization † Cut Sheet Eject
† The default command (ESC @) also initializes the printer. When the following conditions are met, the printer ejects the paper and
turns to [Ready] mode.
„ Initialization operation
„ At power-on
• Clears print buffer.
• Sets default values. „ The printer is in the cut sheet setting
„ Paper(s) is remaining in the paper path
† Cancel enhancement data (DC1x16kbyte) initializes the printer.
„ Initialization operation
• Clears print buffer.
• Sets default values.
• Immediate cut only when some printing remains on the paper.

1.4.9.3 Panel Initialization


This printer is initialized when pushing the [Pause] button for more than 3
seconds, or printer recognized the *INIT signal.
„ Initialization operation
• Eject a paper. (For roll paper, paper is cut by skipping print part when
Paper Source = Auto Cut in panel setting, paper is not cut when
Paper Source = Cutter Off)
• Cap the printhead.
• Clears input data buffer.
• Clears print buffer.
• Sets default values.

Product Description Operating Panel 104


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.5 Controller
† CPU: SH7709S, 100MHz
† Code ROM: 2MB
† Font ROM: None
† RAM: 64MB
† Interface
„ Stylus Pro 4400/4800
• USB (HS, FS)
• IEEE 1394
• Type-B interface
„ Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C
• USB (HS, FS)
• Network Interface
† Operating System: Hitachi HI7700 (µITRON 3.0 compatible)

Product Description Controller 105


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.6 Interface SIGNAL ASSIGNMENT AND SIGNAL DEFINITION OF INPUT CONNECTOR PIN

Table 1-48. Signal assignment and signal definition of input connector pin
1.6.1 USB interface
Pin No Signal name In/Out Function description
SPECIFICATION 1 VCC - Cable power. Maximum power
consumption is 100mA
† Standard 2 -Data Bi-directional Data
„ Universal Serial Bus Specifications Revision 2.0 3 +Data Bi-directional Data, pull up to +3.3V via 1.5K ohm resistor
„ Universal Serial Bus Specifications Revision 1.1 4 Ground - Cable ground
„ Universal Serial Bus Device Class Definition for Printing Devices
Version 1.1
† Bit rate: 480Mbps (High Speed Mode)
12Mbps (Full Speed Device)
† Data format: NRZI
† Adaptable connector: USB Series B
† Acceptable cable length: 5m
† Device ID
„ <xx><xx> (Character strings may vary by Model Name.)
„ MFG: EPSON;
„ CMD: ESCPL2, BDC;
„ MDL: (8-color model);
Figure 1-25. Pin Assignment
<Stylus Pro 4800> or <Stylus Pro 4880> or <Stylus Pro 4880C>
(4-color model);
<Stylus Pro 4400> or <Stylus Pro 4450>
„ CLS: PRINTER;
„ DES: EPSON<SP>T<Stylus Pro 4800>; (8-color model)
EPSON<SP>T<Stylus Pro 4880>; (8-color model)
EPSON<SP>T<Stylus Pro 4880C>; (8-color model)
EPSON<SP>T<Stylus Pro 4400>; (4-color model)
EPSON<SP>T<Stylus Pro 4450>; (4-color model)
(<SP>: space code)

Product Description Interface 106


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.6.2 IEEE1394 Interface Table 1-49. Signal assignment and signal definition of input connector pin
Contact number Signal name Comment
C H E C K Stylus Pro 4400/4800 only
3 TPB*
P O IN T Strobe on receive, data on transmit
4 TPB (differential pair)

5 TPA* Data on receive, strobe on transmit


6 TPA (differential pair)

FEATURES
PROTOCOL
† IEEE Std.1394-1995, 1394a-2000 compliant
† 400Mbps † SB-2 (ANSI NCITS 325-1998) compliant
† 1port (Standard 6-pin receptacle) † EP-PPDT (Based on IEEE 1394.3 specification)
† Power Class: POWER_CLASS=000
„ Node does not need power and does not repeat power.
„ Bi-directional data communication between the IEEE 1394 equipped
host and the printer.

SPECIFICATIONS
† Data transmission: Half-duplex, Data/Strobe differential
† Synchronization: DS-Link bit level encoding
† Encode/Decode: DS-Link bit level encoding
† Connector: IEEE 1394-1995 compliant plug (6 contacts)

SIGNAL ASSIGNMENT AND SIGNAL DEFINITION OF INPUT CONNECTOR PIN

Table 1-49. Signal assignment and signal definition of input connector pin
Contact number Signal name Comment
1 VP Cable power
2 VG Cable ground

Product Description Interface 107


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.6.3 Optional Interface REPLY FOR OPTION COMMAND


Type-B interface (level 3, MIB, 1200mA type) is supported.
Table 1-50. Reply List
REPLY MESSAGE Option command
Command name Reply-A Reply-B
number
† Main-Type 00h No-operation Accept None
„ MT48p, PW170cl10cpi, PRG (A0xxxx) rev, AP800ma, 01h Start Hardware Reset Accept Execute OK
SPD0fast , D4, GDI
02h Start Software Reset Reject
NOTE: xxxx is F/W version. 03h Send Main System Type Accept
In the case of Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C, (B0xxxx) is used 04h Send Name Data Reject
instead of (A0xxxx).As for the main board of Stylus Pro 4450/4880/
05h Inquire Name Data Accept
4880C supplied as ASP, the firmware for 4-color is preintalled on
it. 06h Send Product Name Accept
07h Send Software Emulation Type Accept
† Product-Name: 08h Complete Buffered Data Accept Check Condition
„ 8-color model 09h Stop Procedure Reject Execute OK
<Stylus Pro 4800> or <Stylus Pro 4880> or <Stylus Pro 4880C>
0Ah Return Buffered Data Reject
„ 4-color model
<Stylus Pro 4400> or <Stylus Pro 4450> 0Bh Send Entity Type Accept
0Ch Send Status Accept
† Emulation-Type: ESCPL2-00
0Dh Quit Procedure Reject
† Entity-Type: EPSONLQ2J
0Eh Inquire ASCII Message Reject
0Fh Send ASCII Message Accept None
10h-13h Unknown None
14h Inquire Emergency Message Accept Execute OK
15h Send Emergency Reply Accept
16h-1Fh Unknown None
20h-FFh Reserved None

Product Description Interface 108


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SUPPORTED MAIN COMMAND AND SENDING TIMING TYPE-B LEVEL 3 PACKET MODE

Table 1-51. Supported Main Command and Sending Timing Communication between Type-B I/F card and Printer corresponds to Type-B
Level 3 (Packet Mode) Communication Specification. (IEEE P1284.4 (Draft
Main command
Command name Sending timing 1.50) compliant)
number
01h Start Software Reset † Init signal on the std. parallel
† Packet Mode Shifting
To shift to Type-B Level 3 Packet Mode, Option Card needs to correspond
† Type B I/F Option command: 01h
to Type-B Level 3 ("D4" character string need to be added to Option Type
† Panel Reset
character string). If Option Card that is non-Type B Level 3
† Cold start
correspondence is inserted, Type-B sends error.
04h Send Name Data Type B I/F Option command: 05h
† Supported Channel
07h Inquire Software Emulation Changing Software Emulation type Assigning Service and Channel applies the chart below.
Type
Table 1-52. Supported Channel
0Eh Inquire ASCII Message Writing to DBIN-register
Socket Max Data
14h Inquire Emergency Reply Reply for Emergency command Service Use Initiator Credit
ID Size
15h Send Emergency Message Receive Emergency command
1284.4CTRL 00h 1284.4 — 64byte 1 (Limited Mode)
control
EPSON-MIB 04h SNMP/MIB I/F Card 556byte 1 (Limited Mode)
SENDING BDC-ST CHARACTER STRINGS VIA DBIN-REGISTER setting
EPSON-TRAP 05h SNMP/ Printer 556byte 1 (Limited Mode)
When ST of Type-B I/F sets "ON" State-Reply, BDC-ST is sent through DBIN- Trap
register. When State Reply is started, "Start" and "End" of BDC-ST characters notification
are announced by sending the Main command (0Eh).
EPSON DATA 40h — 32kbyte Depends on
Send print
NOTE: The BDC-ST is only sent when Type-B Lv2 is used. (Include Out of (1 Packet) received buffer
data
Band) (Unlimited Mode)

Product Description Interface 109


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Supported Packet 1.6.4 Supplements


Apply the following communication packet.

Table 1-53. RECEIVED BUFFER FULL OPERATION

Packet Description Channel If the available buffer becomes less than 32Kbyte while receiving data via USB
I/F or 1394 I/F with no error occurring (including Standby), the printer limits its
EPSON Packing Packet Mode shifting Ch00
receivable data size to 40 bytes/sec until the available buffer becomes 36kbyte
Command/Reply
or more to avoid the timeout of the host computer.
Init/Reply Initialization Ch00
NOTE: This status is not occurred in Type-B Level 3 Packet Mode for
Exit/Reply Exit from Packet Mode Ch00
Credit administration.
Get Socket ID/Reply Acquisition of Socket ID Ch00
Get Service Name/Reply Acquisition of Service Name Ch00 INTERFACE SELECTION
OPEN Channel/Reply Open Channel Ch00 The printer has IEEE1394 interface, USB 2.0 interface, and optional interface.
Close Channel/Reply Close Channel Ch00 These interfaces are selected manually by the default setting mode or selected
automatically.
Credit/Reply Send Credit Ch40
† Manual Selection
Data Packet Printing data / reverse data Ch40
One of 3 interfaces can be selected; IEEE1394 interface, USB 2.0
Message Packet MIB PDU/Trap PDU etc. Ch04/05 interface, optional interface.
Out of Band Packet Job control information etc. Ch40
NOTE: As for Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C, the IEEE1394 interface is not
mounted and the network interface is assigned as the optional
interface.
† Local MIB
According to Type-B Level 3 Packet Mode correspondence, it corresponds † Automatic Selection
to Local MIB (Type-B/EMAP). Select an interface that the printer first received data after power was ON.
Refer to "1.4.7 MIB Function (p.102)". If it passes period of time (10 seconds) after interruption of data receiving,
it will be in idle status (any interface is not selected) and will select an
interface which the printer next receives data first.
NOTE: This status is not implemented in Type-B Level 3 Packet Mode
for Channel administration.To move to idle status, close the
DataChannel.
† Interface Selection and Interface State
When the printer is initialized or returned to the idle status (any interface is
not selected), the USB interface becomes non-NACK reply status, and the
option interface resets OFF-LINE bit of Main Status Register (MNSTS).

Product Description Interface 110


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.7 Optional Units and Consumables † Operation environment condition


Temperature: 10°C ~ 40°C
Relative temperature: 5% ~ 85% (without freezing)
1.7.1 Ink Cartridge † Storage temperature
Selection of ink types, detection of cartridges and the amount of remaining ink
are controlled by CSIC. Condition temperature Remarks
During packed storage -30°C ~ 40°C Within 1 month for 40°C
C H E C K „ When installing the pigment ink cartridges, shake them
Loading printer -20°C ~ 40°C Within 1 month for 40°C
P O IN T horizontally after unpacking them for about five seconds
beforehand to ensure the designed print quality. During transportation -30°C ~ 60°C Within 1 month for 40°C
Within 120 hours for 60°C
„ To avoid wrong insertion, the shapes of ink cartridges of
Stylus Pro 4400/4800 and Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C
differ. If you remove an ink cartridge before it reaches the ink out
C A U T IO N
state, you should store it under the same ambient conditions
as for the printer body in such a way that the ink discharge
SPECIFICATION opening is protected from dust intrusion. The ink cartridge
† Type: Pigment stored as such and installed again can be used if it is within
the term of availability.
† Form: Special ink cartridge
† Ink capacity
† Life: 2 years
„ 110ml
(Total time of before and after of
† Dimension installing printer.)
„ 110ml: 25.1 mm (W) x 165.8 mm (D) x 105.3 mm (H) † Insured date of printing quality: Pigment 6 month
† Total weight (After printer is installed.)
„ 110ml: Approx. 200g
† Color:
„ Stylus Pro 4800 (8-color HCD2 Ink Set)
Photo black, magenta, light magenta, cyan, light cyan, yellow, light
black, matte black, light light black
„ Stylus Pro 4880/4880C (8-color HCD2 Ink Set)
Photo black, Vivid magenta, Vivid light magenta, cyan, light cyan,
yellow, light black, matte black, light light black
„ Stylus Pro 4400/4450 (4-color HCD Ink Set)
Matte black, magenta, cyan, yellow

Product Description Optional Units and Consumables 111


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1.7.2 Cleaning cartridge 1.7.3 Maintenance Tank


The maintenance tank is located in the lower space at the right side of the
C H E C K The cleaning cartridge is the same as the 110ml ink cartridge
printer body and constructed in such a way that the user can replace it when
P O IN T in shape except that it does not have the projection for a
"Maintenance tank full" is detected.
color block.
The cleaning cartridge is used for maintenance work only. † Type: Special maintenance tank for waste ink
† Dimension: 102.5mm(W) x 235mm(D) x 79.5mm(H)
† Type: Exclusive cleaning cartridge † Capacity: Approx. 1000ml
† Dimension: Same as 110ml exclusive ink cartridge † Waste ink permitted limit: 650ml (excluding amount of evaporation)
† Capacity: Same as above † Operation environment: Operating : 10-35°C / 20-80%
Storing : -20-40°C / 20-80%
† Total weight: Same as above
Transporting : -20-60°C / 5-85%
† Effective cleaning solution: Same as above (Time limit of storing or transporting at 40°C
† Environment condition: Same as above is one month. At 60°C, it is within 120 hours.)

† Storage temperature: Same as above


† Life: Same as above

C H E C K The transfer cleaning solution of the cleaning cartridge will


P O IN T freeze if left in an environment of -10°C or lower. Transfer
cleaning solution that has been frozen will require
approximately 3 hours of warming before it can be used, in
the case where it is moved from a -20°C location to a 25°C
location.

Product Description Optional Units and Consumables 112


2
CHAPTER

OPERATING PRINCIPLES
EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2.1 Overview
This chapter explains the printer mechanism and operating principles for the
EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C.
The explanation is composed as follows:
† 2.2 Printer Mechanism Components (p.115)
„ 2.2.1 Printing Mechanism (Print Head) (p.116)
„ 2.2.2 Ink Supply Mechanism (p.118)
„ 2.2.4 Carriage (CR) Mechanism (p.125)
„ 2.2.5 Paper Feed Mechanism (p.131)
„ 2.2.6 Paper Eject/Release Mechanism (p.140)
„ 2.2.7 Multi Sensor (p.145)
„ 2.2.8 Others (p.151)
† 2.3 Outline of Control Circuit Board (p.152)
† 2.4 Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board (p.154)

Operating Principles Overview 114


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2.2 Printer Mechanism Components Table 2-1. Printer Mechanism Components


Drive
Part Description Reference
The major electrical parts used in the Printer Mechanism of this printer are as voltage
shown below. Hereafter, we will explain each Printer Mechanism focusing on P_THICK Sensor +3.3V/+5V Transmission type photo-interrupter p.133
these parts. (Paper thickness/
pressure lever)
Table 2-1. Printer Mechanism Components
Rear Hand Insertion +3.3V Reverse tension switch p.134
Drive Sensor (mechanical contact)
Part Description Reference
voltage
ASF/Pump Motor +42V Stepping motor p.137
Printing Mechanism (Print Head) (p.116)
ASF Paper Sensor +3.3V Reverse tension switch p.137
Print Head The number of nozzles: p.116 (mechanical contact)
180 nozzles x 8 rows
ASF Phase Sensor +3.3V Transmission type photo-interrupter p.137
Head Thermistor +3.3V Incorporated in the Print Head –
Paper Eject/Release Mechanism (p.140)
Ink Supply Mechanism (p.118)
PG/PO Motor +42V Stepping motor p.142
Release Sensor +3.3V Reverse tension switch p.119
(I/H lever) (mechanical contact) Paper Eject Phase +3.3V Reverse tension switch p.142
Sensor (mechanical contact)
ASF/Pump Motor +42V Stepping motor p.123
Paper Eject Release +3.3V Reverse tension switch p.142
Maintenance Tank +3.3V/+5V CSIC p.123 Sensor (mechanical contact)
Pump Phase Sensor +3.3V Transmission type photo-interrupter p.123 Others (p.151)
Carriage (CR) Mechanism (p.125) P-Cover Open Sensor +3.3V Reverse tension switch p.151
CR Motor +42V DC motor p.127 (mechanical contact)
CR_HP Sensor +3.3V Transmission type photo-interrupter p.127 Rear Cover Sensor +3.3V Interlock SW (mechanical contact) p.151
CR Encoder Sensor +5V Linear encoder (180LPI) p.127 MAIN Board – Printer control/drive circuit board p.152
Multi Sensor +3.3V Reflection type photo-interrupter p.127 Power Supply Board – Power supply PCB p.154
PG/PO Motor +42V Stepping motor p.130
PG Phase Sensor +3.3V Transmission type photo-interrupter p.130
Cutter Solenoid +24V DC solenoid p.131
Paper Feed Mechanism (p.131)
PF Motor +42V DC motor p.133
Suction Fan +24V DC blower fan p.133
PF Encoder Sensor +5V Linear encoder (360LPI) p.133
PE sensor +3.3V Reflection type photo-interrupter p.133
P_THICK_0.3 Sensor +3.3V Transmission type photo-interrupter p.133
(Paper thickness/
pressure lever)

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 115


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2.2.1 Printing Mechanism (Print Head) † Nozzle pitch : 0.141mm (1/180 inch) for each color

The printing method uses the unique EPSON MACH method of previous Table 2-3. Relationship between Nozzle Rows and Colors
models. 8 Color Mode 4 Color Mode
The Print Head incorporates a thermistor. According to the temperature around Nozzle Row Stylus Pro 4880 Stylus Pro 4400
Stylus Pro 4800
the head detected by the thermistor, the CPU on the Main Board controls the Stylus Pro 4800C Stylus Pro 4450
ink discharge speed and the amount of ink to be discharged. A Light Light Black Light Light Black Matte Black
† Printing method: On-demand ink-jet B Light Magenta Vivid Light Magenta Matte Black
† Nozzle configuration: 180 nozzles x 8 rows = 1440 nozzles C Light Cyan Light Cyan Magenta
(Refer to Figure 2-1 for nozzle arrangement.) D Light Black Light Black Magenta
E Photo Black / Photo Black / Cyan
Table 2-2. Relationships of Colors to Nozzles by Mode
Matte Black Matte Black
Number of
F Cyan Cyan Cyan
Mode Model Color Nozzles for
Each Color G Magenta Vivid Magenta Yellow
Stylus Pro 4400 • Matte Black x 2 H Yellow Yellow Yellow
Stylus Pro 4450 • Cyan x 2
4 Colors 360
• Magenta x 2
• Yellow x 2

Paper Feed Direction


Stylus Pro 4800 • Matte Black / • Yellow
Photo Black • Light Cyan
• Light Black • Light Magenta 180
• Cyan • Light Light Black
• Magenta
8 Colors
Stylus Pro 4880 • Matte Black / • Yellow
Stylus Pro 4880C Photo Black • Light Cyan
• Light Black A row B row C row D row E row F row G row H row
• Vivid Light 180
• Cyan Magenta
• Vivid Magenta • Light Light Black

Carriage Moving Direction


Figure 2-1. Nozzle Arrangement

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 116


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Drive Waveforms
Drive waveforms are shown below for six printing modes.

Table 2-4. Printing Modes (Drive Waveforms)


Waveform
Drive Frequency Print Resolution CR Speed
Name
VSD1 11.52 KHz ± 7% H360 x V360 320 CPS
H360 x V720
H720 x V360
VSD1d 11.52 KHz ± 7% H360 x V360 320 CPS
H360 x V720
H720 x V360
VSD2 8.64 KHz ± 7% H720 x V360 240 CPS
H720 x V720
VSD2d 8.64 KHz ± 7% H720 x V360 240 CPS
H720 x V720
VSD3 8.64 KHz ± 7% H720 x V720 240 CPS
H1440 x V720
VSD3_HR 8.64 KHz ± 7% H2880 x V1440 240 CPS

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 117


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2.2.2 Ink Supply Mechanism The ink flow is as shown below.


Each color's ink cartridge → Each color's I/H (Ink Holder) →
This printer has ink cartridges for 8 colors held by Ink holders (I/H) located on Each color's ink tube → Each color's head dumper (Carriage) → Print Head
the left and right sides of the printer. There are protruding tabs and markings
on the top of each color ink cartridge to prevent mistaken installation. NOTE: Below is a drawing of Stylus Pro 4800/4880/4880C. Stylus Pro
4400/4450 has no ink holder on the left.
NOTE: The 4-color model is equipped with the Ink Holder (I/H) on the left
side only.
Ink tube
† Explanation of valve mechanism mounted on the cartridge Ink Holder
The valve automatically opens and closes when the ink cartridge is
installed and removed.

Ink cartridge holder


(Opening/closing)
Ink cartridge

Ink Cartridge

Ink Holder (x4)

To Print Head
Figure 2-3. Ink Supply Mechanism
Figure 2-2. Valve Mechanism

† CSIC
Memory chip information for each color ink cartridge passes through the
CSIC relay circuit board on each Ink holder and is stored in the EEPROM
on the BOARD ASSY., MAIN.
Various information such as installed ink color and remaining quantity is
stored in the EEPROM. (Refer to "Ink Information Menu" (p.88).)

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 118


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Dumper † I/H lever sensor


The dumper is equipped with a valve to prevent reverse flow of ink, and The left I/H and right I/H each have 1 I/H Lever Sensor located on the side.
when this valve opens the ink inside the ink storage space within the This sensor uses a reverse tension switch (mechanical contact) to detect
dumper flows and is supplied to the Print Head. Numbers though in whether the ink cartridge is set or released by the ink lever.
the figure explain the ink flow sequence inside the dumper.
I/H Lever Sensor (Left)

I/H Lever Sensor (Right)

Front Back
1

2
3

4
5

Figure 2-4. Ink Route inside of Dumper (1)

Figure 2-6. I/H Lever Sensor

Valve Close Valve Open


Figure 2-5. Ink Route inside of Dumper (2)

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 119


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2.2.3 Cleaning Mechanism


Cleaning mechanism components are located at the right side of the printer.
Waste ink from the cleaning components is sent through a tube to the Waste
Ink Absorber (Maintenance Tank) at the bottom right.
Main cleaning mechanism components and their functions are explained in the
following sections.

Flushing Box Head Cleaner

Pump Unit

Cap Assembly

Maintenance Tank

Figure 2-7. Cleaning Mechanism Components

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 120


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

CLEANING MECHANISM DRIVE


ASF/Pump Motor Planetary Lever Spur Gear, 19.2
(Spur Gear, 15.2)
ASF/Pump Motor

Planetary Lever (Spur Gear, 15.2)

Combination Gear, 15.2, 25.6

Spur Gear, 19.2

Combination Gear,
Combination Gear, 13.6, 28.8 15.2, 25.6

Pump Unit Combination Gear,


13.6, 28.8
Figure 2-8. Drive Transmission Path Pump Unit

Planetary Lever Combination Gear,


ASF/Pump Motor (Spur Gear, 15.2) Spur Gear, 19.2 13.6, 28.8 Figure 2-10. Cleaning Mechanism Drive Components

Combination Gear,
15.2, 25.6

Pump Unit

Figure 2-9. Cleaning Mechanism Drive Layout

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 121


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

DRIVE TRANSMISSION TO PUMP UNIT 4. The DE Lock Lever fixes the Planetary Lever in place when the Carriage
Unit moves the required step number to the left from the Carriage Shaft
1. The DE Lock Lever is moved to the right end by moving the Carriage Unit right end.
to the right end of the Carriage Shaft.

1
DE Lock Lever

Fixing Location

Combination Gear, 15.2, 25.6

Planetary Lever

Figure 2-11. Switching Drive Transmission Path (1)

2. The ASF/Pump Motor rotates by the required step number in the clockwise
direction as seen from the Motor Pinion Gear side.
3. When the ASF/Pump Motor rotates in the clockwise direction, the
Planetary Lever inside the DE mechanism descends toward the
Combination Gear, 15.2, 25.6, and the Planetary Lever's Spur Gear, 15.2,
engages with the Combination Gear, 15.2, 25.6.

Figure 2-12. Switching Drive Transmission Path (2)

5. When the drive transmission path is switched by Step 1 through Step 4,


drive power of ASF/Pump Motor is transferred to the Pump Unit by the path
shown in Figure 2-8.

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 122


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† ASF/Pump Motor (Stepping motor) † Pump Phase Sensor


When the transmission path is switched to the Pump Unit side by Carriage A transmissive photosensor is used, which is installed inside the Pump
Unit movement and the DE Lock Lever, the ASF/Pump Motor can drive the Unit. This uses the interrupting plate in the Pump Unit to detect the rotation
ink maintenance system such as pump and wiper, etc. angle of the pump.
Movements of the ASF/Pump Motor drive transmission to the Pump Unit side
are shown below. Pump Phase Sensor

Table 2-5. ASF/Pump Motor Rotation Directions and Functions


ASF/Pump Motor Rotation
Function
Direction
• Pump suction
Clockwise
• Wiper set
• Pump release
Counterclockwise
• Wiper reset
Interrupting Plate
Note : Rotation of the motor in the clockwise direction as seen from the Motor Pinion
Gear is considered "clockwise".
† Pump Unit
Ink is sucked from head nozzles by having the pump driven through the
cap (closed). This performs normal ink absorption, initial ink charge,
cleaning, etc. Waste ink from the pump is sent to the Maintenance Tank
through 2 small pipes.
Figure 2-13. Pump Phase Sensor
† Head Cleaner
A structure of offsetting rubber and felt is used. By wiping/rubbing, ink and
dirt adhering to the head nozzle surface is brushed off.
† Cap Assembly
When not printing, the Print Head (should) rest on the Cap Assembly to
ensure that the nozzles don't clog. Also, the Print Head is in the capped
position during ink charging, cleaning, and so on.
† Flushing Box
This receives ink ejected during flushing (dummy printing). The flushed ink
flows through the pipe to the Maintenance Tank.
† Maintenance Tank (Waste Ink Absorber)
This receives waste ink discharged from the Pump Unit and Flushing Box.
Waste ink is accumulated in a sponge in the Maintenance Tank.

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 123


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

NOTE: The table below explains Ink System terminology.

Table 2-6. Explanation of Operation


Operation Explanation
Initial Ink Charge • This is the operation where the head is filled with ink for the
first time. When the first ink cartridge is inserted (after all 8
colors have been inserted), the initial ink charge operation is
performed automatically.
• The initial charge flag is set when the printer is shipped from
the factory, then after this operation, the initial filling flag is
reset. The initial charge flag is also set after the "Input Rank" is
run.
Flushing • In order to prevent the viscosity of the ink inside the head
nozzles from increasing, the ink inside the Flushing Box is
flushed out.
• Flushing is done when paper is set, when printing from the
standby state, during continuous printing, during paper Eject,
during paper cutting, etc.
Wiping Operation The Carriage Unit is moved from right to left along the rubber side
of the wiper (the right half of the Wiper Blade) incorporated in the
Pump Unit so that the head surface is rubbed with the rubber of
the wiper.
Purpose:
• Before ink suction, removes the ink and other substances
adhering to the head surface.
• Ensures close contact of the cap.
Rubbing The Carriage Unit is moved from left to right along the felt side of
Operation the wiper (the left half of the Wiper Plate) incorporated in the
Pump Unit so that the head surface is rubbed with the felt of the
wiper. For easy removal of adhering substances, the nozzle
surface is wetted before rubbing operation by suction of a small
amount of ink.
Purpose:
• Removes ink and other substances adhering strongly to the
head surface.
• Ensures close contact of the cap.
Capping In order to prevent the ink viscosity from increasing while the
printhead nozzles are not used, a rubber cap is placed over the
Print Head nozzles when entering a shutdown operation.

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 124


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2.2.4 Carriage (CR) Mechanism


Carriage Shafts
This printer has a unique carriage mechanism for stable and high precision
CR Encoder Sensor
movement/printing of the on-carriage head for the print area of A2 paper width.
PG Phase Sensor CR_HP Sensor
The Carriage mechanism is formed of the following components.
CR Motor
† Carriage Unit
† Carriage Shaft (front and rear)
† CR Motor
† PG/PO Motor
† CR_HP Sensor
† CR Encoder Sensor
Multi Sensor
† Multi Sensor
† PG Phase Sensor
† Cutter Solenoid
† CR Lock
PG/PO Motor

Cutter Solenoid
This section describes the following items.
CR Lock Carriage Unit
† Carriage Unit movement components
Figure 2-14. Carriage Mechanism Components
† Platen Gap adjustment components
† Cutter Solenoid/CR Lock Mechanism

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 125


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2.2.4.1 Carriage Unit Movement Components


Two Carriage Shafts, each covered with a linear plate, and eight rollers
(bearings) form the structure supporting the carriage.

C A U T IO N Do not remove the screws securing the Carriage Shafts.


They are adjusted/assembled at the factory in 1/100mm
increments.

The main structural components of the carriage movement mechanism and the
functions of these components are described below.
Timing Belt

CARRIAGE MECHANISM DRIVE

CR Motor

CR Motor
Timing Belt

Carriage Unit
Carriage Unit
Figure 2-16. Carriage Mechanism Drive Components
Figure 2-15. Drive Transmission Path

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 126


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† CR Motor (DC motor) † Multi Sensor


The Carriage Unit moves left/right by the CR Motor drive. The Encoder This is a reflective sensor installed at the Carriage Unit lower left side, and
Sensor installed in the Carriage Unit reads (linear encoder system) the slits it has multiple functions. For details on the Multi Sensor, refer to "2.2.7
of the CR Scale, and this signal is compared to the logic control value by Multi Sensor" (p.145).
the Main Board control circuit to perform feedback speed control. The
control maintains high printing speed.
Drive transmission from the CR Motor to the Carriage Unit uses a durable
timing belt that is easy to maintain. CR Encoder Sensor

CR Scale
CR Motor
The sensors used in the carriage movement components are described below.
† CR_HP Sensor (Carriage home position)
This is a transmissive photosensor installed at the printer right side.
Insertion of the flag (a protrusion) on the Carriage Unit is detected as the
carriage movement origin (home position). Sensor outputs are "OFF" in the
HP range and "ON" outside the HP range.
† CR Encoder Sensor (Linear encoder)
Installed on the back of the Carriage Unit, this is uses pulse output (2 Flag
channels) corresponding to the slit position on the CR Scale for CR Motor
servo control and PTS (Print Timing Signal) formation. The resolution is 1/ CR_HP Sensor
180 inch. Multi Sensor

Figure 2-17. Carriage Mechanism Detection Components

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 127


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2.2.4.2 Platen Gap Adjustment Components CR Shaft Pulley (front) Spur Gear, 36 CR Shaft Pulley (rear)
The Carriage Unit (= Print Head) installation position must always maintain a
fixed distance from the paper surface in order to preserve printing precision.
The Carriage Unit is supported by 2 Carriage Shafts. The Carriage Unit moves
up and down with the rotation of the Carriage Shafts because of the eccentric
bushings attached to both ends of each Carriage Shaft. This movement
changes the gap between the Print Head surface and the Platen surface.
Carriage Shaft Carriage Shaft
Main platen gap adjustment mechanism components and their functions are (rear)
(front)
explained in the following sections.
Timing Belt PG/PO
Motor
PLATEN GAP MECHANISM DRIVE
Combination Gear, 40, 20

PG/PO Motor

Combination Gear, 56, 8.8 Planetary Holder Planetary Holder Spur Gear, 16
Spur Gear, 16
(Spur Gear, 16, (Spur Gear, 20,
Planetary) Planetary)
Planetary Holder (Spur Gear, 20, Planetary) Figure 2-19. Platen Gap Mechanism Drive Layout

Carriage Shaft
Planetary Holder (Spur Gear, 16, Planetary) CR Shaft Pulley (rear)
(rear)

Combination Gear, 56, 8.8


Spur Gear, 36

Combination Gear, 40, 20 Timing Belt

Spur Gear, 36 Carriage Shaft


(front)
PG/PO Motor
CR Shaft Pulley (rear)
CR Shaft Pulley (front)

Carriage Shaft (rear) Timing Belt Combination Gear, 40, 20


Spur Gear, 16

CR Shaft Pulley (front) Combination Gear, 56, 8.8 Planetary Holder Planetary Holder
(Spur Gear, 16, (Spur Gear, 20,
Planetary) Planetary)
Carriage Shaft (front)
Figure 2-18. Drive Transmission Path Figure 2-20. Platen Gap Mechanism Drive Components

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 128


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

DRIVE TRANSMISSION TO CARRIAGE SHAFT 4. The planetary Lock Lever fixes the Planetary Holder in place when the
Carriage Unit moves the required step number to the left from the Carriage
1. The Planetary Lock Lever (along with the DE Lock Lever) are moved to the Shaft right end.
right end by moving the Carriage Unit to the right end of the Carriage Shaft.

1 DE Lock Lever

Fixing Location

Figure 2-22. Switching Drive Transmission Path (2)


Figure 2-21. Switching Drive Transmission Path (1)
5. When the drive transmission path is switched by Step 1 through Step 4,
2. The PG/PO Motor rotates by the required step number in the clockwise
PG/PO Motor drive is transferred to the Carriage Shaft by the path shown
direction as seen from the Motor Pinion Gear side.
in Figure 2-18.
3. When the PG/PO Motor rotates in the clockwise direction, the Planetary
Holder raises up in the direction of the Combination gear, 56, 8.8, and the
Planetary Holder Spur gear, 16, engages with the Combination gear, 56,
8.8.

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 129


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† PG/PO Motor (Stepping motor) The sensors used in the platen gap adjustment components are described
When the transmission path is switched to the platen gap adjustment side below.
by the Carriage unit movement and DE Lock Lever, the PG/PO Motor can
† PG Phase Sensor
automatically shift (rotation movement of Carriage Shafts, both front and
This is a transmissive sensor installed on the left side of the printer that
rear) the PG position up or down.
detects the PG position (height of head from paper surface) and machine
Movements of the PG/PO Motor drive transmission to the Platen Gap home position (home) at the time of adjustment movements. A reflective
adjustment side are shown below. sensor is used to detect the flag position of the shield plate attached to the
right side of the front Carriage Shaft. With machine home position as the
Table 2-7. PG/PO Motor Rotation Directions and Functions standard, 4 head positions can be obtained.
PG/PO Motor Rotation Direction Function
Table 2-8. PG Setting
Clockwise PG small side → PG large side
Pulse Count from Origin
Counterclockwise PG large side → PG small side Gap
Position Application (Converted to 2-2 Phase
Width
Note : Rotation of the motor in the clockwise direction as seen from the Motor Pinion Excitation)
Gear is considered "clockwise". Macimum 2.6mm Platen gap for thick paper 244
The Adjustment Lock Bushing rotates with the rotation of the Carriage Shaft. Large 2.1mm Platen gap for paper which can be 176
When Carriage Shaft rotation stops, the PG Lock Lever locks the Adjustment soiled if setting is for thin paper
Lock Bushing. Securing the Adjustment Lock Bushing suppresses rotation of Medium 1.5mm Platen gap fot specified thin paper 96
the Carriage Shaft and prevents fluctuation in platen gap. which has frictional force more
The locking position has 4 levels to match PG. than the other thin paper.
Small 1.2mm Platen gap for thin paper 60
PG Lock Lever Minimum 0.7mm Platen gap for film 0

Adjustment Lock Bushing

PG large side PG minimum side

Figure 2-23. PG Setting Positions

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 130


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2.2.4.3 Cutter Solenoid/CR Lock Mechanism 2.2.5 Paper Feed Mechanism


Installed on the front of the Carriage Unit, this is a DC solenoid for controlling This printer uses friction feed to carry out highly precise feeding of roll paper
cutter pressure of the cutter used for roll paper cutting. and cut sheets, and comprises a unique paper feed mechanism.
In addition, the CR Lock Mechanism is used jointly so that when the Carriage
Unit moves from the printing area further to the right of the capping position The paper feed mechanism is formed of the PF Motor, PF Roller, Sub Roller
(CR_Home), the lock activates to prevent Carriage Unit movement. When the Unit, Driven Roller Unit and Paper Eject Roller.
Cutter Solenoid turns ON with the Carriage Unit at capping position, the Cutter Paper feed mechanism main components and their functions are described
Solenoid attracts the Actuating Plate of the CR Lock releasing Kicker, the below.
Kicker kicks the CR Lock, and then the CR Lock is released. The printer is also
equipped with the mechanism to lock the Carriage Lock to prevent the Kicker
Driven Roller Unit
from moving vertically during transportation to release the CR Lock.
PF Roller
NOTE: Refer to "1.2.7.4 Cut Specification" (p.21).
Sub Roller Unit

Actuating Plate

Kicker
Cutter

PF Motor
Cutter Solenoid
Lock Lever for Transportation Paper Eject Roller

CR Lock Figure 2-25. Paper Feed Mechanism

Figure 2-24. Carriage Components: Cutter Solenoid

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 131


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

PAPER FEED MECHANISM DRIVE Paper Eject


Sub Roller Sub Roller Sub Roller Unit PF Roller Roller
Drive Pulley Drive Belt
PF Motor

PF Timing Belt

Speed-Reduction Pulley
PF Timing
PF Roller Sub Roller Drive PF Pulley Belt

Sub Roller Drive Belt Paper Eject Roller Belt

Sub Roller Drive Pulley Paper Eject Roller Pulley

Sub Roller Unit Paper Eject Roller Speed-Reduction Paper Eject Paper Eject Roller Pulley
Pulley Roller Belt
Figure 2-26. Drive Transmission Path PF Motor Sub Roller
Drive PF Pulley

Sub Roller Sub Roller Speed-Reduction PF Roller Paper Eject Roller Belt
Drive Belt Drive PF Pulley Pulley Figure 2-28. Paper Feed Mechanism Drive Components
Paper Eject
Roller

Paper Eject Roller Pulley

PF Motor PF Timing Belt

Sub Roller Sub Roller Unit


Drive Pulley

Figure 2-27. Paper Feed Mechanism Drive Layout

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 132


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† PF Motor (DC motor) The sensors used in the paper feed mechanism are described below.
With drive from the PF Motor, the grid of the loop scale installed above
† PF Encoder Sensor
both PF Rollers is read by the Encoder Sensor, and feedback control is
Mounted at the left side of the printer, the sensor's pulse output (2
based on the output pulse. This control maintains high printing precision.
channels) corresponds to the slit position on the PF Scale and is used for
† Suction Fans servo control of the PF Motor and for formation of the PTS (Print Timing
Suction Fans are mounted in the center inside the printer. This is designed Signal). Resolution is 1/360 inch.
to provide smooth paper feeding (prevents floating) by pulling the paper
† PE Sensor
onto the platen surface by drawing air through multiple punched holes in
This reflective photosensor is mounted at the right side rear surface of the
the platen on the underside of the paper path and directing it toward the
printer. This triggers the no paper condition when the paper trailing edge is
bottom of the printer body. Control of blowing force (rotation Duty control)
detected and triggers paper setting start operations (start of suction fans,
for the fans is based on the printer operating condition (at paper set, during
etc.) when the leading edge is detected during paper setting.
printing, etc.) and paper type.
† Paper Lever/P_THICK Sensor (P_THICK, P_THICK_0.3)
This transmissive photosensor is mounted at the right side rear surface of
the printer. Paper thickness is detected during paper setting by the change
in movement of the paper thickness detection lever of the Driven Roller
Unit.
Threshold values for paper thickness is set for 0.3~0.4mm (P_THICK0.3
Sensor) and 0.8~0.9mm (P_THICK Sensor), and the sensor operates
when the Paper Lever goes down.
Set detection values for the sensors are 0.3mm and 0.8mm, corresponding to
the up/down position of the Paper Lever. Combined detection of both sensors
detects the paper lever as up.

Table 2-9. Modes


Shield Plate Sensor Output
Paper Thickness
P_THICK_0.3 P_THICK P_THICK_0.3 P_THICK
Less than 0.3mm No (open) No (open) L L
Suction Fans
0.4mm or more
No (open) Yes (closed) L H
0.8mm or less

Figure 2-29. Suction Fans 0.9mm or more


Yes (closed) Yes (closed) H H
1.8mm or less
Connector not
– – H H
connected
Cancel increased
Yes (closed) No (open) H L
pressure (Hi-Up)

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 133


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Rear Manual Insertion Sensor 2.2.5.1 ASF Paper Feed Mechanism


This reverse tension switch sensor (mechanical contact) is mounted at the
This printer is equipped with an ASF Unit for feeding cut sheet paper.
rear surface of the printer. The sensor detects paper being fed from the
Operating principles of the ASF Unit are described below.
manual insertion slot.
ASF Phase Sensor ASF Paper Sensor
P_THICK_0.3 Sensor P_THICK_0.8 Sensor

Rear Manual Insertion Sensor

LD Roller LD Roller

Detector
Wheel

ASF Unit

Figure 2-31. ASF Paper Feed Mechanism

PF Encoder Sensor
PE Sensor

Figure 2-30. Paper Feed Mechanism Sensors

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 134


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

ASF PAPER FEED MECHANISM DRIVE Planetary Lever (Spur Gear, 15.2)
Combination Gear, 12, 22.4
ASF/Pump Motor
ASF/Pump Motor Spur Gear, 25.6

Combination Gear, 12.8, 36


Planetary Lever (Spur Gear, 15.2) Combination Gear,
16.8, 24
Spur Gear, 33.6
Combination Gear, 12, 22.4
ASF Unit
(Spur Gear, 44.8)
Spur Gear, 25.6

Combination Gear, 12.8, 36

Spur Gear, 33.6

Combination Gear, 16.8, 24

ASF Unit (Spur Gear, 44.8)

Figure 2-32. Drive Transmission Path


Figure 2-34. ASF Paper Feed Mechanism Drive Components

Combination Gear, 12, 22.4 Planetary Lever (Spur Gear, 15.2)

Spur Gear, 25.6 ASF/Pump Motor

Combination Gear,
12.8, 36
Combination Gear, 16.8, 24
Spur Gear, 33.6

ASF Unit
(Spur Gear, 44.8)

Figure 2-33. ASF Paper Feed Mechanism Drive Layout

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 135


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

TRANSMISSION OF DRIVE TO ASF UNIT 4. The DE Lock Lever fixes the Planetary Lever in place when the Carriage
Unit moves the required step number to the left from the Carriage Shaft
1. The DE Lock Lever is moved to the right end by moving the Carriage Unit right.
to the right end of the Carriage Shaft.

DE Lock Lever

Fixing Location

Figure 2-36. Switching Drive Transmission Path (2)


Figure 2-35. Switching Drive Transmission Path (1)
5. When the drive transmission path is switched by Step 1 through Step 4,
2. The ASF/Pump Motor rotates by the required step number in the drive power of ASF/Pump Motor is transferred to the ASF Unit by the path
counterclockwise direction as seen from the Motor Pinion Gear side. shown in Figure 2-32.
3. By rotation of the ASF/Pump Motor in the counterclockwise direction, the
Planetary Lever inside the DE mechanism raises in the direction of the
Combination Gear, 12, 22.4, and the Spur Gear, 15.2, of the Planetary
Lever engages with the Combination Gear, 12, 22.4.

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 136


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† ASF/Pump Motor (Stepping motor) † ASF Phase Sensor


When the transmission path is switched to the ASF Unit side by the This transmissive photosensor is mounted at the right lower side of the
Carriage Unit movement and DE Lock Lever, the ASF/Pump Motor can printer. The Detector Wheel at the left side of the LD Roller and LD Roller
drive the LD Roller. Shaft is rotated by paper feed movement from the ASF Unit. There is a
notch on the Detector Wheel, and the LD Roller position is detected by this
Movements of the ASF/Pump Motor drive transmission to the ASF Unit side
sensor and the Detector Wheel notch.
are shown below.

Table 2-10. ASF/Pump Motor Rotation Directions and Functions


ASF/Pump Motor Rotation Direction Function ASF Phase Sensor
Clockwise LD Roller Reverse Rotation
Counterclockwise LD Roller Normal Rotation

Note : Rotation of the motor in the clockwise direction as seen from the Motor Pinion
Gear is considered "clockwise".
Notch

The sensors used in the ASF paper feed mechanism are described below.
† ASF Paper Sensor Detector Wheel
This reverse tension switch sensor (mechanical contact) is mounted at the
center lower side of the printer. The sensor detects paper being fed from Figure 2-37. ASF Phase Sensor
the ASF Unit.
Table 2-11. LD Roller and Detector Wheel
LD Roller Position Detector Wheel Notch
Outside home position No (closed)
Home Position Yes (open)

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 137


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

LIFTER MOVEMENT (RAISING THE HOPPER) 3. The LD Roller rotates in the counterclockwise direction and picks up paper.
„ Skew Correction Mode 1
1. When a print command is received from the PC, the LD Roller which has 1. Feeds the paper leading edge by 3.5mm between the Sub Roller
been in standby condition first rotates to the paper feed side and Gate Roller.
(counterclockwise) by the required step number and then rotates in the
opposite direction from the paper feed side (clockwise) by the required Sub Roller
step number to return any paper remaining between the LD Roller and the
Separation Pad to the tray.

Flag LD Roller
Standby Position

3.5mm
Phase Detection
Position
Gate Roller

Paper
2. The LD Roller stops, and reverse rotation of the Gate Roller and
Sub Roller corrects the skew by pushing back the paper being fed.

Stops
2. After completion of the paper return movement, the Release Hopper Lever
rotates counterclockwise with the LD Roller. When the Edge Guide Fixing
Lever releases the hook being pressed by the Release Hopper Lever, the
tension of the Compression Spring is released and raises the Hopper.

Release
Hopper Lever
Hopper

Compression
Spring
Edge Guide Fixing Lever

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 138


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

„ Skew Correction Mode 2


1. The paper hits against the Gate Roller and Sub Roller. The Gate
Roller and Sub Roller are stopped at this time.

Stops

Contact Location

2. Skew is corrected by the LD Roller pushing forward the unfed


paper.

4. After feeding the paper, the LD Roller rotates in the counterclockwise


direction and returns to the standby position.
5. The LD Roller in standby position then rotates in the clockwise direction by
the required step number to return paper remaining between the LD Roller
and Separation Pad to the tray. Then the roller returns to the standby
position again.

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 139


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2.2.6 Paper Eject/Release Mechanism Eject Switch Lever, R Switching Rib Planetary Holder
(Spur Gear, 44.8, Eject) (Spur Gear, 15.2) (Spur Gear, 20, Planetary)
This printer has a paper eject mechanism that switches eject according to the
Planetary Holder Spur Gear, 16
paper feed device and media used and has a release mechanism that applies (Spur Gear, 16, Planetary)
pressure/release by the driven roller.
Spur Gear, 20
Operating principles of the eject mechanism and release mechanism are PG/PO Motor
described below.
Paper Eject Unit Combination
2.2.6.1 Paper Eject Mechanism (Paper Eject Frame Gear, 13.6, 20.8
Holder (right)) Combination
PAPER MECHANISM DRIVE Spur gear, 32.8 Gear, 11.2, 24
Eject Planetary Unit
Spur Gear, 21.6,
(Spur Gear, 17.6, Planetary)
Release
PG/PO Motor Spur Gear, 28
Combination Transmission Frame
Spur Gear, 16 Combination Gear, 24, 36 Gear, 19.2, 33.6 Shaft (Spur Gear, 16,
Spur Gear, 33.6, B Spur Gear, 20 Frame, Transmission)
Spur Gear, 33.6, B Combination
Planetary Holder Combination
Gear, 36, 8.8
(Spur Gear, 20, Planetary) Gear, 24, 36
Combination Gear, 19.2, 33.6
Figure 2-39. Paper Eject Mechanism Drive Layout
Planetary Holder
(Spur Gear, 16, Planetary) Spur Gear, 20
Spur Gear, 33.6, B
Switching Rib
Combination Gear, 36, 8.8 Spur Gear, 28 (Spur Gear, 15.2) Spur Gear, 20 Combination Gear, 24, 36
Spur Gear, 28 Planetary Holder
(Spur Gear, 20, Planetary)
Spur Gear, 20 Eject Planetary Unit
Spur Gear, 16 PG/PO
(Spur Gear, 17.6, planetary)
Motor
Combination Gear, 13.6, 20.8
Combination
Spur Gear, 32.8 Paper Eject Unit Gear, 13.6,
(Paper Eject Frame 20.8
Combination Gear, 11.2, 24 Holder (right))
Spur Gear,
Eject Switch Lever, R Switching Rib Eject Switch Lever, R 20
Spur Gear, 21.6, Release (Spur Gear, 44.8, Eject) (Spur Gear, 15.2) (Spur Gear, 44.8, Eject)
Combination
Spur gear, 32.8 Gear, 11.2,
Transmission Frame Shaft Paper Eject Unit Transmission Frame 24
(Spur Gear, 16, Frame, Eject Planetary Unit Shaft (Spur Gear, 16,
(Paper Eject Frame Holder
Transmission) (Spur Gear, 17.6, Planetary) Frame, Transmission) Spur Gear, 21.6,
(right))
Combination Release
Gear, 19.2, 33.6 Planetary Holder Combination
(Spur Gear, 16, Planetary) Gear, 36, 8.8
Figure 2-38. Drive Transmission Path
Figure 2-40. Paper Eject Mechanism Drive Components

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 140


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

TRANSMISSION OF DRIVE TO PAPER EJECT UNIT 4. The Planetary Lock Lever fixes the Planetary Holder in place when the
Carriage Unit moves the required step number to the left from the Carriage
1. The Planetary Lock Lever (along with the DE Lock Lever) is moved to the Shaft right end.
right end by moving the Carriage Unit to the right end of the Carriage Shaft.

1 DE Lock Lever

Fixing Location

Figure 2-42. Switching Drive Transmission Path (2)


Figure 2-41. Switching Drive Transmission Path (1)
5. When the drive transmission path is switched by Step 1 through Step 4,
2. The PG/PO Motor rotates by the required step number in the drive power of PG/PO Motor is transferred to the Paper Eject Unit by the
counterclockwise direction as seen from the Motor Pinion Gear side. path shown in Figure 2-38.
3. By rotation of the PG/PO Motor in the counterclockwise direction, the
Planetary Holder descends in the direction of the Combination Gear, 36,
8.8, and the Spur Gear, 16, of the Planetary Holder engages with the
Combination Gear, 36, 8.8.

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 141


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† PG/PO Motor (Stepping motor) The sensors used in the paper eject mechanism are described below.
When the transmission path is switched to the Paper Eject Unit side by the
† Paper Eject Phase Sensor
Carriage Unit movement and DE Lock Lever, counterclockwise rotation of
This reverse tension switch sensor (mechanical contact) is mounted at the
the PG/PO Motor performs eject switching movement as shown below.
inner side of the right frame storing the I/H Holder (left). The sensor detects
(Clockwise rotation does not occur.)
the condition of the Paper Eject Unit.
Note : Rotation of the motor in the clockwise direction as seen from the Motor Pinion
† Paper Eject Release Sensor
Gear is considered "clockwise".
This reverse tension switch sensor (mechanical contact) is mounted at the
Table 2-12. Paper Eject Switching Movement inner side of the left frame storing the I/H Holder (right). When foreign
Phase objects enter the paper path under the Paper Eject Unit and lift the Paper
Supported Star Wheel Description Supported Media Eject Unit, the sensor detects this condition and stops printing.
Detection
None – Universal roll paper ON (HP) Paper Eject Phase Sensor
PM roll paper for
Star Wheel weight (10gf)
Roll Paper Star Wheel photographs, other OFF
No ribs
specified paper
Star Wheel weight (20gf)
Cut Paper Star Wheel Universal cut paper OFF
Ribs

Star Wheels

Ribs

Star Wheels

Paper Eject Release Sensor


Figure 2-44. Paper Eject Mechanism Sensors

Figure 2-43. Paper Eject Unit

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 142


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2.2.6.2 Release Mechanism Planetary Holder Spur Gear, 16 PG/PO Motor


(Spur Gear, 20, Planetary)
RELEASE MECHANISM DRIVE Combination Gear, 13.6, 20.8
Planetary Holder Combination Gear, 11.2, 24
(Spur Gear, 16, Planetary)
PG/PO Motor Combination Gear, 22, 16.8
Spur Gear, 16, Release
Spur Gear, 16 Combination Gear, 22, 16.8 Intermittent Gear,
Spur Gear, 20 Transmission, Release

Planetary Holder Release Planetary Unit


(Spur Gear, 20, Planetary) (Spur Gear, 22, Release) Combination Gear,
36, 8.8

Spur Gear, 21.6,


Planetary Holder Release Planetary Unit Release
(Spur Gear, 16, Planetary) (Spur Gear, 16, Release)
Transmission Frame Shaft
(Spur Gear, 16, Frame,
Combination Gear, 36, 8.8 Intermittent Gear, Transmission) Release Planetary Unit Gate Roller Release Shaft, Under
Transmission, Release (Spur Gear, 22, Release)
Spur Gear, 20 Figure 2-46. Release Mechanism Drive Layout
Release Shaft, Under
Combination Gear, 13.6, 20.8
Roller Holder, Under Release Shaft, Under Spur Gear, 16, Release
(Gate Roller) Intermittent Gear,
Combination Gear, 11.2, 24
Combination Gear, Transmission, Release
22, 16.8
Spur Gear, 21.6, Release Planetary Holder
(Spur Gear, 20, Planetary)

Transmission Frame Shaft Spur Gear, 16


(Spur Gear, 16, Frame,
Transmission) PG/PO Motor
Combination Gear,
Gate Roller 13.6, 20.8
Transmission Frame Shaft
Figure 2-45. Drive Transmission Path (Spur Gear, 16, Frame,
Transmission) Combination
Gear, 11.2, 24
Release Planetary Unit
(Spur Gear, 22, Release)
Spur Gear, 21.6,
Planetary Holder Release
(Spur Gear, 16, Planetary) Spur Gear, 20
Combination Gear,
36, 8.8

Figure 2-47. Release Mechanism Drive Components

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 143


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

RELEASE MECHANISM MOVEMENT

When the drive transmission path of the PG/PO Motor is switched by carriage
movement, the driving force of the PG/PO Motor is transmitted to the Gate
Roller by the path shown in Figure 2-45. (Refer to " Transmission of Drive to
Paper Eject Unit" (p.141) for information on switching the drive transmission
path.)
Movement for PG/PO Motor drive switched to the release mechanism side is
shown below.
Table 2-13. PG/PO Motor Rotation Direction and Function
PG/PO Motor Rotation Direction Function
Clockwise Paper release
Counterclockwise Paper pressure

Note : Rotation of the motor in the clockwise direction as seen from the Motor Pinion
Gear is considered "clockwise".
† Paper Release
When the PG/PO Motor rotates in the clockwise direction, the Intermediate
Roller (Shaft, Release, Lower) rotates in the clockwise direction. The Gate
Roller is lowered by the rotation of the Intermediate Roller and the Gate
Roller and Sub Roller are separated.
† Paper Pressure
When the PG/PO Motor rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the
Intermediate Roller rotates in the counterclockwise direction. The Gate
Roller is raised by the rotation of the Intermediate Roller and the Gate
Roller and Sub Roller have pressure contact.

Paper Release Paper Pressure


Sub Roller

Paper
Location of
Pressure
Contact

Intermediate
Roller
Gate Roller

Figure 2-48. Release Mechanism Movement

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 144


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2.2.7 Multi Sensor † Light Receivers


The light receiver side has the following 2 elements for corresponding uses.
2.2.7.1 Overview
„ PW1 (direct reflection light receiver)
This printer is equipped with a Multi Sensor that provides multiple sensor
functions with a single sensor unit. The Multi Sensor is a photosensor with 1 Detects paper (white) or platen (black), specifying the edge of the
light emitter and 2 light receivers and is mounted on the Carriage Unit. Light paper.
emitted from the white light LED is projected onto the paper or special pattern „ PW2 (diffused light receiver)
printed on the paper, and reading of the reflected light by the sensor receivers Prints a special pattern and detects differences in concentration for
enables the printer to automatically perform suitable correction processing. paper (white) and ink (8 colors).
The 2 light sensor elements are identical, with the difference being the light
Multi Sensor
reception angle for reflected light. In order to determine small differences in
concentration, PW2 is particularly arranged in a position that will not receive
the effects of erratic reflections of light reflected from the paper (especially from
LED PW2 PW1 glossy media).

Paper

Platen
Sub Platen

Figure 2-49. Multi Sensor


† Multi Sensor Functions
„ Paper Edge Position Detection
(Top Edge Detection/Checking Paper Cutting)
„ Paper Width Detection
„ Paper Edge (L/R) Detection
„ Dot Missing Detection
„ Auto Uni-D Adjustment
„ Auto Bi-D Adjustment

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 145


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2.2.7.2 Operations/Functions

SENSOR SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT


Feed
Before performing any function/adjustment, the sensor sensitivity level must be Direction
set for use as a standard. Paper
Specifically, paper gets fed and the LED light emission quantity should be
adjusted to 3V that refers to the difference of the sensor output voltages that Detection
Position
have been received between over the paper and over the no paper position Detection
(over the platen position). If the required light quantity is not obtained during Position
adjustment of PW1 and PW2, a printer error occurs.
Detected as the paper top edge
PAPER TOP EDGE DETECTION
† Top Edge Detection Figure 2-50. Top Edge Detection
When paper is fed, the paper and platen are continuously scanned and the
† Checking Paper Cut
point at which the obtained reflection light level changes is detected as the top
edge of the paper. As a detection operation, this detects the approximate top Detects cut condition of paper.
edge of the paper and confirms that it is within the range of required After paper is cut, the paper top edge is continuously scanned from the paper
specifications when the paper is fed. If the paper top edge is not within the right edge to the paper center, the entire scanned area is passed over, and if
required range at this time, a paper feed error occurs. After that, the top edge platen surface level output is detected it is determined that the paper has been
of the paper is detected. The same type of detection operation is performed on cut. If paper is detected at any part, a paper cut error occurs.
both the column 1 side and the column 80 side.
Feed
When paper is fed, the Carriage Unit moves to the specified position at the Direction
column 1 side and goes to standby over the paper. The sensor LED emits light,
the paper is reverse fed at 40CPS from the condition being detected for the Paper
paper, and then the position at which the platen is detected is set as the
approximate top edge of the paper. Next, the paper is forward fed at 5CPS Detection
Position
from the condition at which the sensor is detecting the platen, and this detects
the paper top edge.
The process continues by detecting the top edge of the paper in the same way
at the column 80 side. The top edge position detected at column 1 is compared
with the top edge position detected at column 80, and the top edge detected at
the rear (as seen from the eject direction) is set as the paper top edge in order
to prevent printing to platen. For this reason, after the paper top edge is
detected at column 1 side, if paper is detected at the position when the
Carriage Unit moves to column 80 side, the position detected at the column 1
side is set as the top edge of the paper without performing the detection
operation at the column 80 side. Figure 2-51. Checking Paper Cut

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 146


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

PAPER WIDTH DETECTION PAPER LEFT/RIGHT EDGE DETECTION DURING PRINTING

When paper is fed, the paper and platen are scanned and the change points of This is performed during borderless printing. For borderless printing of the
the detected reflective light levels (paper present level <=> paper absent level) conventional printers, the data have been enlarged so that the data would run
are confirmed as the paper edges. The diagrams below show scan/detection out of the left/right edges by 3mm in printing. This printer detects the paper
timing. edges with every pass, and by making immediate adjustments, the amount
forced out is reduced to 1.1mm from the paper edge and the quantity of
scattered ink is reduced. By executing every pass detection, printing can be
At paper set performed while following skew of the paper when the paper has skewed
At paper feed (within the manufacturer's permitted range for skew), and the amount forced
At printing complete out is maintained at a fixed level. However, in order to prevent forcing out from
absorption materials used for borderless printing, the printing is performed by
maintaining a fixed quantity for one side.

2nd job

1.1mm 1.1mm

Absorption Material

Figure 2-53. Paper Left/Right Edge Detection During Printing


1st job

ASF ASF Roll Paper Manual insertion


Borderless Print Borderless Print Borderless Print
ON OFF ON/OFF

Figure 2-52. Paper Width Detection Timing

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 147


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

DOT MISSING DETECTION AUTOMATIC UNI-D ADJUSTMENT

A pattern for dot missing detection is printed and dot missing is detected by A pattern for adjustment is printed, the pattern is scanned and acceptable
scanning the pattern. The pattern is printed by all the nozzles, with 1 nozzle values are calculated from the collected values, and then adjustment is
printing 1 block, and a block for a abnormal nozzle will not print. If dot missing automatically executed.
is detected, the printer will execute cleaning automatically. The pattern first prints the matte black vertical line row (standard lines) and
then prints an overlapping vertical line row in a different color (adjustment lines)
that has been shifted by 1/1440 block unit in the main scan direction. If the
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 standard lines and adjustment lines overlap, the collected A/D value (light
#10 #11 #12 #13 #14 #15 #16 #17 #18
28 dot / (28/360 inch)

#19 #20 #21 #22 #23 #24 #25 #26 #27


quantity) becomes higher because the width detecting the paper is wide. The
#28

#37
#29

#38
#30

#39
#31

#40
#32

#41
#33

#42
#34

#43
#35

#44
#36

#45
location detected with the most raised A/D values is determined to be the
#46 #47 #48 #49 #50 #51 #52 #53 #54 acceptable level of Uni-D alignment.
#55 #56 #57 #58 #59 #60 #61 #62 #63
#64 #65 #66 #67 #68 #69 #70 #71 #72 18 dot / (18/360 inch)
#73 #74 #75 #76 #77 #78 #79 #80 #81 Standard lines
#82 #83 #84 #85 #86 #87 #88 #89 #90
Adjustment lines (Matte Black)
#91 #92 #93 #94 #95 #96 #97 #98 #99

#100 #101 #102 #103 #104 #105 #106 #107 #108

#109 #110 #111 #112 #113 #114 #115 #116 #117


#118 #119 #120 #121 #122 #123 #124 #125 #126
#127 #128 #129 #130 #131 #132 #133 #134 #135
#136 #137 #138 #139 #140 #141 #142 #143 #144
#145 #146 #147 #148 #149 #150 #151 #152 #153
#154 #155 #156 #157 #158 #159 #160 #161 #162
#163 #164 #165 #166 #167 #168 #169 #170 #171

#172 #173 #174 #175 #176 #177 #178 #179 #180

A/D Most A/D values are high


Value = Uni-D acceptable

O.K. Pattern N.G. Pattern

Figure 2-54. Dot Missing Detection Pattern


Scan Position

Figure 2-55. Automatic Uni-D Adjustment

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 148


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

AUTOMATIC BI-D ADJUSTMENT 1 Pass


Printing direction
A pattern for adjustment is printed, the pattern is scanned and acceptable
values are calculated from the collected values, and then adjustment is
automatically executed. Two types of patterns are printed during adjustment: a
rough adjustment pattern for detecting the approximate correction position and Standard Lines
Block Pattern
a fine adjustment pattern for detecting the exact adjustment position.

Rough Adjustment Pattern


2 Pass
Printing direction
Fine
Adjustment
Pattern Adjustment Lines
Block Pattern
Figure 2-56. Bi-D Adjustment Patterns
† Rough Adjustment Pattern
This is a pattern for calculating the approximate correction position before
scanning the fine adjustment pattern to be explained later. This pattern uses
only matte black and is printed in a 51 block adjustment pattern shifted by
Rough
1/720 in the main scan direction as a standard for ruled line blocks. Detection Adjustment
light quantity is also maximized to further increase the paper margin area Pattern
where sections have the most overlapping standard line blocks and adjustment
line blocks. The maximized position for this detection light quantity becomes Figure 2-57. Rough Adjustment Pattern_1
the set adjustment position for the rough adjustment pattern.

NOTE: About the Diagram


In the explanation above uses color classifications for standard
line blocks and the adjustment line blocks, but actuality this is only
1 color, matte black.

Matching Overlap: Medium Overlap: Small

Standard Lines Block Adjustment Lines Block

Figure 2-58. Rough Adjustment Pattern_2

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 149


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Fine Adjustment Pattern


This is a pattern for calculating the exact correction value. It uses all nozzles
and 3 Bi-D patterns are printed after being shifted by 1/1440 step for each
color. The location detected with the most raised A/D values and the 2
locations detected with the most lowered A/D values are averaged, and the
averaged values of the 3 patterns are calculated again, with the resulting value
set as the correction value.
Correction Value = {(A1+B2+C3/3) + (A2+B2+C2/3) + (A3+B3+C3/3)} / 3

Adjustment Lines Standard Lines

A/D
Most A/D values
Value
are high

Most A/D values


are low

Scanning Position

Figure 2-59. Fine Adjustment Pattern Detection

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 150


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2.2.8 Others Rear Cover Sensor

P-COVER OPEN SENSOR P-Cover Open Sensor

This sensor is mounted at the Printer Cover right side open/close components
to detect the open or closed condition of the Printer Cover.
Dtecting open/closed status of the cover causes the CR Motor and PF Motor
circuits to stop/operate the motors.

REAR COVER SENSOR

This sensor is mounted at the printer right rear side to detect the removed/
installed condition of the Paper Guide Unit.
Detecting installed/uninstalled status of the unit causes the CR Motor and PF
Motor circuits to stop/operate the motors.

Panel Unit
CIRCUIT BOARD LAYOUT

A Panel Unit is mounted to the printer front right surface, and an AC Inlet, Figure 2-60. Cover Sensor/Panel Unit
Power Supply Circuit Board and MAIN Circuit Board are mounted in a rear
surface compartment.

AC Inlet

Power Supply MAIN Circuit


Circuit Board Board

Figure 2-61. Circuit Board Layout

Operating Principles Printer Mechanism Components 151


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2.3 Outline of Control Circuit Board Table 2-14. Major Elements


Model No. Location Function
This section describes the operation of BOARD ASSY., MAIN, which controls A3958SLBTR-T IC5 CR Motor driver
and drives the Printer Mechanism of Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C. • PWM current control method
† C593 MAIN Board: Stylus Pro 4400/4800 A3958SLBTR IC6 PF Motor driver
• PWM current control method
† CA00 MAIN Board: Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C
AA6628SEDTR-T IC7 • ASF/Pump Motor driver
NOTE: For circuit board details, refer to "Chapter 7: Appendix (p.457) • PG/PO Motor driver
at the end of this volume.

† Explanation of major elements


CR motor driver
Table 2-14. Major Elements A3958SLBTR-T
(IC5)
Model No. Location Function (IC15) CR motor
PF motor driver
SDRAM IC2/23 System memory 64MB (256Mbit x 2) A3958SLBTR
(IC6)
Flash ROM IC12 Flash Memory 2MB (1Mbit x 16bit) PF motor
• For storage of control program
(firmware) Custom ASF/pump motor
• Saving of various setting parameters ASIC PG/PO motor ASF/pump
(IC12) (IC2) (IC23)
E05C25BB driver motor
and control information (IC19) A6628SEDTR-T
(IC7)
SH-3 IC15 32bit RISC-CPU
SH-7709S • Operational frequency: Internal 96MHz PG/PO motor
Real-Time Clock
External 48MHz BAT1 RTC9824SA
(IC16)
E09A54RA IC17/18 Custom ASIC Lithium battery
• Head drive voltage waveform generation
Custom ASIC
control E09A54RA
(IC17)
RTC9824SA IC16 Real-Time Clock Head FFC
• Sets year/month/day by F/W Custom ASIC ASIC
E09A54RA TSB43AA82A
• MAIN PCB reset signal formation (IC18) (IC4)

E05C25BB IC19 Custom ASIC


1. Print data processing
Figure 2-62. C593 MAIN Board – Circuit Block Diagram
• Rasterizer
• Head drive control
2. Mechanism control
(motors and solenoids)
3. Sensor control
TSB43AA82A IC4 ASIC
• IEEE1394-I/F control

Operating Principles Outline of Control Circuit Board 152


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

CR motor driver
A3958SLBTR-T
(IC5)
(IC15) CR motor
PF motor driver
A3958SLBTR
(IC6)
PF motor

Custom ASF/pump motor


ASIC PG/PO motor ASF/pump
(IC12) (IC2) (IC23)
E05C25BB driver motor
(IC19) A6628SEDTR-T
(IC7)

PG/PO motor
Real-Time Clock
BAT1 RTC9824SA
(IC16)
Lithium battery

Custom ASIC
E09A54RA
(IC17)
Head FFC
Custom ASIC
E09A54RA
(IC18)

Figure 2-63. CA00 MAIN Board - Circuit Block Diagram

Operating Principles Outline of Control Circuit Board 153


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2.4 Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board There are three control signals between the BOARD ASSY., MAIN and the
Power Supply Circuit Board. Table below describes details of the control
100VAC from electric outlet is supplied to Power Supply Circuit Board through signals:
a Power Cable and AC Inlet. Table 2-15. Operational Descriptions
The power switch constitutes a secondary power switch system. Signal Name Function
The secondary power switch system operates as follows: even with the power REM_ON Operating Turned ON/OFF by BOARD ASSY., MAIN.
switch turned off, the Power Supply Circuit Board is operating by a slight power (MAIN → Power • When these terminals are shorted, the drive
as long as the Power Cable is connected. Supply) system power supplies 28 VDC and 42 VDC
are active.
OFF • When these terminals are open (= L), the
C A U T IO N Even after the power switch is turned off, the Power Supply drive system power supplies 28 VDC and 42
Circuit Board does not stop operating immediately, but VDC are 0 VDC.
power is kept on until the ink system ending sequence is • The 5 VDC power is not controlled with these
completed. terminals.
Do not disconnect the Power Cable or do not shut off power
AC_OFF Operating When each output from the Power Supply
by turning off any power switch other than that on the (MAIN ← Power (=H) Circuit Board has become inactive because of
printer. Supply) turning off of the power switch or when the input
voltage has dropped below the rated voltage
value, "H" signal is sent to the BOARD ASSY.,
MAIN.
OFF The power switch is turned on and the Power
(=L) Supply Circuit Board Unit starts operating so
that each output becomes active.
"L" signal is sent to the BOARD ASSY., MAIN.
POWER_SW Operating Connected to the power switch on the Panel
(Panel/MAIN → Unit.
Power Supply) • These terminals are shorted when the switch
is ON. The Power Supply Circuit Board
becomes active.
Not These terminals are open when the switch is
operating OFF. The Power Supply Unit keeps operating
for about ten and several seconds to a few
minutes and then turns off.

Operating Principles Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board 154


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2.5 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) Overview


Main Unit
This printer employs "Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID)" to correct unit-to-unit
variations in color.
"Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID)" corrects not only the weight of ink droplets Prinhead Main Board Supply Board
which differs according to the characteristic of individual printhead but variable
factors such as drive circuit and voltage, which provides a higher-accuracy
calibration.

OVERVIEW Characteristic of Variation of elements Variation of


individual printhead in the drive control reference
1. Printing/ Mesuring the color of a correction pattern. circuit for printhead voltage for
The calibration is performed by printing a correction pattern with a individual
printhead
completed product and mesuring the color of the pattern using a calibrator.
2. Writing the correction value. Colorimetric Calibration
Write the correction value that was calculated from the value obtained by Drive Control (Color ID)
color mesurement to the NVRAM on the main board. Circuit for
Printhead
3. Reflecting the correction value.
The printer driver reads the correction value stored in the NVRAM during
Correction of dot generation amount
printing, and correct the dot generation amount for each dot size in the
print data.
Correction of weight of
ink droplets

Printing
Result

Figure 2-64. Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) Image

Operating Principles Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) Overview 155


3
CHAPTER

TROUBLESHOOTING
EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

3.1 Outline 9. As necessary, initialize the NVRAM on the BOARD ASSY., MAIN (return
the individual settings and panel settings to the factory settings).
This section explains procedures for rapid and efficient troubleshooting if Carry out initialization by executing "Panel Initialization" in "Maintenance
trouble occurs in the printer. Mode 1".

3.1.1 Check Before Troubleshooting W A R N IN G Be sure to refer to "4.1.1 Cautions" (p.201) for the detailed
description when handling a lithium battery that is installed
First of all, when performing troubleshooting, the following basic parts should for RTC backup on the MAIN Board.
be checked.
1. Look in the printer for any foreign matter and make sure there is nothing
there to hinder normal operation. C A U T IO N „ When disassembling/assembling, turn the printer power
switch OFF. After confirming that panel display
2. With the printer in "READY" condition, press the [Menu] key one time, and
disappears, unplug the power cable from the electric
then press the [Paper Feed (∧ / ∨)] keys to select "TEST PRINT". Press the
outlet and then continue operations.
[Menu] key again one time, press the [Paper Feed (∧ / ∨)] keys to select
"STATUS CHECK". After these have been selected, press the [Menu] key „ Only the specified printer tools should be used so as to
two times to print. maintain the printer's quality.
From the status sheet, you can check to see if the cause of the trouble is „ Only the specified lubricants and adhesives should be
that the printer (either the printer unit itself or some major unit) is at the end used.
of its service life, and check the user inherent panel settings, etc. „ The specified adjustments should definitely be carried
(Refer to "Step 9" when in properties panel settings.) out.
3. There should be no market soiling of the outside or the inside of the printer.
If it is extremely soiled, carry out cleaning. 3.1.2 Narrow Down the Trouble
4. Each of the units and parts in the printer should not be missing or To increase the troubleshooting efficiency, follow the flow chart below and
damaged, and should have the normal shape and configuration. narrow down the trouble.
5. Each of the harnesses should be undamaged, and should be correctly
connected to the relevant connector (perpendicularly and in the correct Trouble Occurs
direction).
6. Each cam and gear in the printer mechanism should have no uneven wear
or be overly worn, and the combinations should be correct.
"Troubleshooting Based on Panel "Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout
7. Each type of rubber roller in the printer mechanism should be cleaned and
Messages (p.158)" (p.196)"
it should be ascertained whether the cause of the trouble is because of dirt
or due to some other cause.
8. Each type of rubber roller in the printer mechanism should not be unevenly
worn or excessively worn, and their combinations should be correct. "Corrective Actions for "Corrective Actions for "Corrective Actions for
Displayed Warnings Error Display (p.165)" Service Request Display
(p.162)" (p.175)"

Troubleshooting Outline 157


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

3.2 Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages


This printer conducts self testing based on output conditions of each sensor. Any error detected by self testing is displayed by an LCD message and LED indicators.
This section explains corrective actions for errors and error messages.

3.2.1 Message Table


Messages displayed by the printer and message priorities are shown below.
NOTE: "Warnings" are shown with blue shading and "Service Requests" are shown with yellow shading
Table 3-1. Displayed Error Messages
LED
Priority LCD Panel Message Displayed Error Reference Page
Paper Check Pause Ink Check
Low MNT TK NEAR FULL Maintenance tank near – – Blink p.162
INK LOW Ink low*1 – – Blink p.162
MNT REQ nnnn Maintenance request *2 – – p.162
PAPER LOW Paper near end*3 Blink – – p.164
REMOVE PAPER Cleaning unavailable ON – – p.165
NOZZLES STILL Cleaning failure
Blink ON Blink p.165
CLOGGED
CHANGE Multi Sensor SN gain error Blink – – p.165
PAPER TYPE Multi Sensor paper recognition error Blink – – p.165
WRONG PAPER SIZE Cut sheet size error Blink ON – p.165
REMOVE PAPER Paper eject error/ Front manual feed unavailable error Blink ON – p.166
PAPER OUT Paper end/ roll paper end ON – – p.166
RELOAD PAPER Borderless printing unavailable error*4
NO BORDERLESS Blink – – p.166
WITH THIS SIZE
RELOAD PAPER Paper recognition error Blink – – p.167
RELOAD PAPER Manual cut paper set error
Blink ON – p.167
INSERT DEEPLY
NOT STRAIGHT Cut sheet loading error*6
Blink ON – p.167
RELOAD
PAPER NOT Paper skew error
Blink – – p.167
STRAIGHT
PAPER NOT CUT Paper cut error Blink – – p.168
COMMAND ERROR Command error Blink Blink Blink p.168

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 158


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 3-1. Displayed Error Messages


LED
Priority LCD Panel Message Displayed Error Reference Page
Paper Check Pause Ink Check
MISMATCH ERROR Wrong ink error*4
DRIVER INK SET Blink Blink Blink p.168
SETTING IS WRONG
LOAD ROLL PAPER Wrong roll paper path ON ON – p.168
LOAD SHEET PAPER Wrong ASF paper path
ON ON – p.168
IN P.TRAY
FEED SHEET PAPER Wrong manual paper path ON ON – p.168
FORBIDDEN MEDIA ASF prohibitions*4
FROM P.TRAY
ON – – p.168
FEED SHEET PAPER
MANUARY
TIMES REMAINING Conversion cartridge life near end*1 – ON ON p.164
REPLACE CNVRSION Conversion cartridge life error*1
– – ON p.164
CRTG
INVALID INK CRTG Wrong PK/ MK*1 – ON ON p.169
INK OUT Ink out *1 – – ON p.162
INVALID INK CRTG Wrong Ink cartridge – ON ON p.169
INVALID INK CRTG Wrong destination*1 – – ON p.170
WRONG INK CRTG Unavailable Ink cartridge*1 – – ON p.169
INVALID INK CRTG Wrong logo error*1 – – ON p.170
SET INK CRTG Ink Cartridge failure/ CSIC contact error*1 – – ON p.170
NO INK CRTG No Ink Cartridge*1 – – ON p.170
MNT TNK FULL Maintenance Tank full – – ON p.170
LOWER INK LEVERS Releasing left and right ink lever – – – p.170
LOWER L INK LVR Releasing left ink lever – – – p.170
LOWER R INK LVR Releasing right ink lever – – – p.170
TOP COVER OPEN Printer Cover open – – – p.171
LOAD PAPER Releasing Paper Lever (Except roll paper) ON – – p.171
LOAD PAPER Releasing Paper Lever (Roll paper only)
ON – – p.171
SUCTION
SET PAPER LEVER Releasing Paper Lever in operation ON – – p.172
REREASE LEVER Paper jam (ASF)
Blink – – p.172
REMOVE PAPER JAM
REREASE LEVER Paper jam (CR)*7
Blink – – p.172
REMOVE PAPER JAM
NO MNT TNK No Maintenance Tank – – ON p.173

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 159


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 3-1. Displayed Error Messages


LED
Priority LCD Panel Message Displayed Error Reference Page
Paper Check Pause Ink Check
REAR COVER OPEN Rear Cover open – – – p.173
OPTION I/ F ERROR Type-B Option I/ F Card Error Blink Blink Blink p.173
UNLOCK CR lock unlocked error
Blink Blink Blink p.173
PRINT HEAD
SERVICE REQ. Service request, CR servo error (fatal error)
High Blink Blink Blink Refer to Table3-2
nnnnnnnnn

Note *1: Blink correspond ink indicator.


.

*2: Paper check LED flashes at 5-second intervals.


*3: Occurs only when the remaining paper detection is on with roll paper or cut paper loaded.
*4: Display by switching at 3-second intervals.
*5: To promote that release is available by [Pause] key, display the following display by turns at 1 sec., intervals.
"PRESS PAUSE BUTTON"
*6: Received data is initialized without initializing mechanisms (including completion of forced cleaning) even if panel reset has been done.
*7: Displalys the request below when the rear sensor detects no paper after the paper is removed.
“TURN PRINTER PWR OFF AND THEN ON”

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 160


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 3-2. Service request error list(continued) Table 3-2. Service request error list(continued)
Reference Reference
Error Code Description Error Code Description
Page Page
00000101 CR Motor life p.175 00010032 ASF drive switch error p.189
00010000 PF Motor Encoder check error p.177 00010033 Eject phase detection error p.190
00010001 PF Motor out of step p.178 00010034 Eject movement error p.190
00010002 PF Motor over current p.178 00010035 Pump phase detection error p.190
00010003 PF Motor in-position time-out p.179 00010036 Type-B board installation error p.190
00010004 CR Motor Encoder check error p.179 00010037 Head thermistor error p.190
00010005 CR Motor out of step p.180 00010038 Transistor thermistor error p.190
00010006 CR Motor over current p.180 00010039 PG adjustment value incorrect overwrite error p.191
00010007 CR Motor in-position time-out p.181 0001003A PG adjustment value outside range error p.191
00010008 Servo interrupt watchdog time-out p.181 0001003B Cutter installation error 1 p.191
00010009 System interrupt watchdog time-out p.181 0001003C Cutter installation error 2 p.191
0001000A CR axis detection error p.182 0001003D Cutter installation error 3 p.191
0001000C PG axis detection error p.182 00020000 NVRAM error p.192
0001000F CR Motor PWM output faulty p.183 00020002 SDRAM error p.192
00010010 PF Motor PWM output faulty p.183 00020003 BOOT program SUM error p.192
00010012 CR overload (high sensitivity) error p.184 00020009 Flash memory SUM error p.192
00010013 PR overload (high sensitivity) error p.184 0002000A Program load error p.193
0001001B Head driver (TG) temperature error p.185 0002000B Internal memory shortage error p.193
0001001D CR servo parameter error p.185 100000E0 CPU address error (load misalignment) p.193
0001001E PF servo parameter error p.186 10000100 CPU address error (storage misalignment) p.193
00010020 CSIC reed/right error p.186 10000180 CPU reserve command code exception error p.194
00010022 Ink type error (setting on printer body side) p.186 100001A0 CPU slot illegal command exception error p.194
00010023 RTC analysis error p.187 100001C0 AC disruption p.194
00010025 CSIC ROM communication error p.187 100005C0 CPU DMA address error p.194
00010026 RTC communication error p.188 10000xxx CPU error p.195
00010028 Head error p.188 0003xxxx Debug error code p.195
00010029 Unidentified NMI p.188 0Dxxxxxx Debug error code p.195
0001002A CR ASIC ECU error p.188 0Exxxxxx RTC timer off error p.195
0001002B PF ASIC ECU error p.188
0001002D Cleaning Unit work life error p.189
0001002F 360 DPI writing time out error p.189
00010030 Multi Sensor failure p.189
00010031 ASF phase detection error p.189

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 161


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

3.2.2 Corrective Actions for Displayed Warnings MAINTENANCE REQUEST


Warnings replace the "READY"/"PRINTING" message in the LCD to notify the † LCD Panel message
user of the condition, but printing may continue because printer operations are
not affected. MNT REQ nnnn
A warning message cannot be cleared until the cause of the warning has been ("nnnn" shows the code for the target replacement part.)
resolved. † LED display
The following explains corrective actions for when the warnings are displayed. Paper check LED: Flashes at 5-second intervals.
† Display code
MAINTENANCE TANK NEAR
Displays bit values assigned in Table 3-3 as "nnnn" in hexadecimal.
Item Description Table 3-3. Bit Assignment
LCD Panel message MNT TK NEAR FULL
Bit Request object Cause
LED display Ink check LED: Blink
0 No occurrence in this
Explanation Generated when capacity of the Maintenance Tank has ---
product
reached less than 5%.
1 CR life The number of CR movement cycles has
Recovery Replace the Ink Cartridge with new one. reached predetermined value.
2 No occurrence in this
---
product
INK LOW 3 Battery shut off RTC backup battery is shut off
4 No occurrence in this
Item Description ---
product
LCD Panel message INK LOW 5 No occurrence in this
---
LED display Ink check LED: Blink product
Explanation Caused when remaining ink quantity falls below 5%. 6 Cleaning Unit Pump counter has reached predetermined
Recovery Replace the Maintenance Tank with new one. value.
7 Date not set Date is not set
8 Battery pressure RTC backup battery pressure is temporally
low.
9 Paper feed roller life The number of ASF paper feeding has reached
predetermined value.
10 Reserved ---
:
31 Reserved ---

† Explanation
Generated when the life of maintenance- required part expires shortly or
an error related to a lithium battery for RTC backup has occurred.

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 162


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Recovery
Remedy
nnnn Cause Replacement part/unit
(how to recover errors)
The number of CR movement cycles has Refer to "SERVICE REQ. 00000101 (p.175)." Refer to "SERVICE REQ. 00000101 (p.175)."
0002
reached predetermined value.
RTC backup battery shut off / uninstalled RTC backup battery Replace RTC backup battery, turn on the printer in Maintenance Mode 2, and execute
0008
"RTC&USB ID&IEEE1394 ID" to set the date using basic adjustment in adjustment program.
Pump counter has reached predetermined † Box Assy., Flushing Replace parts/ units listed in the left column, and execute “Reset When Cleaning Unit Change”
amount. † Pump Unit using Reset Counters in adjustment program.
0040 † Cleaner, Head, A, ASP
† Porous Pad, Box, FL, Upper
† Porous Pad, Box, FL, Lower
Date is not set Turn on the printer in Maintenance Mode 2, and execute “RTC&USB ID&IEEE1394 ID” to set
0080 ---
the date using basic adjustment in adjustment program.
RTC backup battery is not installed. Install RTC battery, turn on the printer in Maintenance Mode 2, and execute “RTC&USB
0088 ---
ID&IEEE1394 ID” to set the date using basic adjustment in adjustment program.
RTC backup battery pressure is temporally Wait for a while.
0100 ---
low.
The number of ASF paper feeding has † Roller Assy, LD, Right Replace parts/ units listed in the left column, and execute “Reset ASF Counter” and “Reset
0200 reached predetermined value. † Roller Assy, LD, Left Paper ejection switching / PG switching counter” using Reset Counters in adjustment program.
† Mount Assy., Plate, Motor, ASF, SP

C H E C K Replace the following parts when replacing the Cleaning Unit.


P O IN T
CLEANER, HEAD, A, ASP
POROUS PAD, BOX, FL, UPPER

POROUS PAD,
BOX, FL, LOWER
BOX ASSY.,
FLUSHING

PUMP CAP ASSY

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 163


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

PAPER NEAR END

Item Description
LCD Panel message PAPER LOW
LED display Paper check LED: Blink
Explanation Occurs when the current remaining paper counter value is
less than the near end setting value while the remaining
paper detection is on with roll paper or cut paper loaded.
Execute one of the following:
• Set the near end setting value so that it is more than the
current remaining paper counter value, using roll or cut
Recovery paper menu of the remaining paper detection in the
printer setting menu.See "Remaining paper detection
(p.48)"
• Reload paper.

CONVERSION CARTRIDGE LIFE NEAR END

Item Description
LCD Panel message TIMES REMAINING
Ink check LED: On
LED display
Pause LED: On
Explanation The number of usable time of the conversion cartridge is
less than ten.
Recovery Press the [Pause] key.

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 164


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

3.2.3 Corrective Actions for Error Display


Error messages replace the "READY"/"PRINTING" message in the LCD to notify the user of the condition.
The following explains corrective actions for when the errors are displayed.

CLEANING FAILURE

LCD Explanation Recovery


NOZZLES STILL CLOGGED Dot missing is still detected even after the applicable number of auto Compulsory return to Ready by pressing [Pause] key. (However, there
cleanings were performed as Multi Sensor had detected the dot is still dot missing.)
missing.

CLEANING UNAVAILABLE

LCD Explanation Recovery


REMOVE PAPER Paper with thickness greater than 0.9mm is set at power ON or Release Paper Lever, remove paper, and pull down the lever.
execution of cleaning.

MULTI SENSOR SN GAIN ERROR

LCD Explanation Recovery


CHANGE PAPER TYPE Required amount of reflection not obtained after automatic adjustment Release Paper Lever, reload the paper, and pull down the lever.
pattern print. (Generated with blurred paper.)

MULTI SENSOR PAPER RECOGNITION ERROR

LCD Explanation Recovery


CHANGE PAPER TYPE Gain for Multi Sensor not obtained at 0.5V or more or 3V or less. Can Release Paper Lever, reload the paper, and pull down the lever.
also be generated when there is no paper or low reflection paper is
used.

CUT SHEET SIZE ERROR

LCD Explanation Recovery


WRONG PAPER SIZE After paper width detection, set paper width and print data paper width Correct by setting to designated paper size with the driver.
are different. Resume printing by pressing the [Pause] key.
When resuming printing, printing will clip to paper width.
Stop printing by pressing and holding [Pause] key for 3 seconds.
(It will be necessary to delete the print job at the PC.)

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 165


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

PAPER EJECT ERROR

LCD Explanation Recovery


REMOVE PAPER After paper eject, paper is left in paper route and ASF Paper Sensor Release Paper Lever, remove paper, and pull down the lever.
has turned ON.
After paper eject, paper is left in paper route and PE Sensor has Release Paper Lever, remove paper, and pull down the lever.
turned ON. Or paper eject was done without the Paper Eject Roller (for Clear by pressing the [Pause] key. (A message will be displayed in the
thick paper, etc.). LCD.)
After paper eject, paper (with thickness 0.4mm or more) is left in paper Release Paper Lever, remove paper, and pull down the lever.
route and P_THICK Sensor has turned ON.
ASF Paper Sensor for turned ON while Transfer Roller was not ON.
(Except during ASF printing.)
The [Paper Cut] key was pressed during thick paper set.
Rear manual Insertion Sensor turned ON while in ASF or front loading Remove paper from the rear manual feed opening.
condition.

PAPER END/ROLL PAPER END

LCD Explanation Recovery


PAPER OUT No paper is set with panel settings in condition other than ASF. Release Paper Lever, reload the paper, and pull down the lever.
Press [Paper Source] key to switch to "Cut Sheet".
Trailing end of cut sheet or roll paper is detected and printing was Release Paper Lever, reload the paper, and pull down the lever.
terminated midway through job. Reset panel by pressing [Pause] key.
Paper is fed from ASF but ASF Paper Sensor does not turn ON. Release Paper Lever, reload the paper, and pull down the lever.
Set paper in ASF cassette and press [∧] / [∨] key.
If feed from ASF has failed, press [Paper Source] key to temporarily
switch to "Roll Paper" and then return to "Cut Sheet".
Reset panel by pressing [Pause] key.

BORDERLESS PRINTING UNAVAILABLE ERROR

LCD Explanation Recovery


RELOAD PAPER Occurs when the paper whose width does not support borderless When manual cut paper or roll paper is loaded, release Paper Lever
printing is loaded or when the paper that supports borderless printing and place the paper in the correct position.
NO BORDERLESS is loaded incorrectly. Reload the paper whose width supports borderless printing.
WITH THIS SIZE When ASF paper feed is selected, feed the paper with [∧] / [∨] key
after ejecting the paper with [∨] key, or feed the paper manually.

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 166


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

PAPER RECOGNITION ERROR

LCD Explanation Recovery


RELOAD PAPER Paper is not loaded in the correct position. Release Paper Lever, reload the paper, and pull down the lever.
Paper was not ejected because its length was more than the limit for
cut paper.
When printing on roll paper was finished, the right- and left end of the
paper was exceeds the printable area due to paper skew.
Paper whose width is less than 179mm was loaded.

MANUAL CUT PAPER SET ERROR

LCD Explanation Recovery


RELOAD PAPER INSERT After setting paper by rear manual insertion, PE Sensor did not turn Release Paper Lever, remove paper, and pull down the lever.
DEEPLY ON even though the front feed limit was exceeded at paper leading
edge detection.

CUT SHEET LOADING ERROR

LCD Explanation Recovery


NOT STRAIGHT RELOAD Generated when skew of 0.43mm or more is detected during cut sheet Release Paper Lever, remove paper, and pull down the lever.
paper loading. However, error generation occurs after cut sheet paper When the [Pause] key is pressed, the error will be forcibly cancelled
loading sequence is complete. Because this error can occur frequently and printing will start.
when using manual insertion printing, it is possible to resume printing
by allowing the Pause LED to turn light and then cancelling the pause
when the error occurs.

PAPER SKEW ERROR

LCD Explanation Recovery


PAPER NOT STRAIGHT Generated when position of left/right edges changes more than 3mm Release Paper Lever, reload the paper, and pull down the lever.
between start and finish of print. When this error is generated, it is † Reset the paper with correct procedures.
necessary to check print results because it is possible that print area † If roll paper has become disordered, reset the paper after properly
was not completely printed due to skew of previous page. Also, ink arranging the edges.
may have adhered to the platen and could smear onto the backs of
succeeding pages.

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 167


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

PAPER CUT ERROR

LCD Explanation Recovery


PAPER NOT CUT It is occurred when top of roll paper cannot be detected by Multi Release Paper Lever, remove paper, and pull down the lever.
Sensor, after paper cut operation.

COMMAND ERROR

LCD Explanation Recovery


COMMAND ERROR This error occurs when ink type (dye / pigment / black ink type) Press [Pause] key after stopping data transmission from the host.
designated with IK command is different from Ink Cartridge installed in
the printer.

WRONG INK ERROR

LCD Explanation Recovery


MISMATCH ERROR This error occurs when ink type (4 color/ 8 color) designated with IK Install the correct Ink Cartridge displayed on the Panel LCD, and pull
DRIVER INK SET command is different from Ink Cartridge installed in the printer. down the Ink Lever.
SETTING IS WRONG

WRONG ROLL PAPER PATH / WRONG ASF PAPER PATH / WRONG MANUAL PAPER PATH

LCD Explanation Recovery


LOAD ROLL PAPER Different paper source is selected on panel from the paper source that If the panel setting differs to the actual paper, change the select paper
is selected by Remote command. in the panel.
LOAD SHEET PAPER The path sent by command takes priority, and a message based on If the actually set paper differs, reset paper selected by PP command.
IN P. TRAY the command designated path is displayed in the LCD if the printer
path is different.
FEED SHEET PAPER Reset the panel by pressing the [Pause] key. In this case, the
mechanical parameters will follow the paper type default settings set in
the printer.

Note : Remote commands always have priority.

ASF PROHIBITIONS

LCD Explanation Recovery


FORBIDDEN MEDIA ASF is designated paper tray when command is received for printing Reset panel by pressing [Pause] key.
FROM P. TRAY of media that is prohibited from being supplied by ASF, such as Water
FEED SHEET PAPER MANUARY Color Paper.

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 168


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

CONVERSION CARTRIDGE LIFE ERROR

LCD Explanation Recovery


REPLACE CNVRSION CRTG This error occurs when the conversion cartridge has been used more Replace the conversion cartridge with a new one.
than its life times (100 times). Press the [Pause] key to end K ink replacement.

WRONG MK / PK

LCD Explanation Recovery


INVALID INK CRTG This error occurs when a K Ink Cartridge whose information is different Install the same type of K Ink Cartridge as stored in the printer.
form K ink information stored in the printer is inserted. Press the [Pause] key, perform K ink replacement, and change the
type of K ink stored in the printer.

INK END

LCD Explanation Recovery


INK OUT Ink is over consumed within Ink Cartridge. The error is cleared by inserting Ink Cartridge (new Ink Cartridge),
which the panel LCD displays and pulling down the Ink Lever.

WRONG INK CARTRIDGE

LCD Explanation Recovery


INVALID INK CRTG This error occurs when a Ink Cartridge whose information is different Replace the Ink Cartridge with an appropriate one, and pull down the
form CSIC information is inserted. (except when WRONG PK/ MK Ink Lever.
occurs.) Recover from the error forcibly by pressing the [Pause] key. In this
case, color mixture of ink may be caused.

WRONG DESTINATION

LCD Explanation Recovery


WRONG INK CRTG When Ink Cartridge is stated as wrong destination. Replace the Ink Cartridge with an appropriate one.
Recover from the error forcibly by pressing the [Pause] key.

UNAVAILABLE INK CARTRIDGE

LCD Explanation Recovery


WRONG INK CRTG This error occurs when an unavailable ink cartridge is inserted. Replace the ink cartridge with an available one.

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 169


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

WRONG LOGO ERROR

LCD Explanation Recovery


INVALID INK CRTG This error occurs when an ink cartridge other than genuine one is Replace the ink cartridge with a genuine one.
inserted. Recover from the error forcibly by pressing the [Pause] key.

INK CARTRIDGE FAILURE

LCD Explanation Recovery


SET INK CRTG Ink Cartridge problem or failure of reading/writing to CSIC. It is cleared by inserting proper Ink Cartridge, which the panel
displays, and pulling down the Ink Lever.
Check CSIC contact terminals of Ink Cartridge Holder for damage,
deformity. If CSIC contact terminals are not normal, replace I/H Left
Unit (or I/H Right Unit).

NO INK CARTRIDGE

LCD Explanation Recovery


NO INK CRTG There is no Ink Cartridge installed. Open I/H Cover and properly install the Ink Cartridge indicated by the
There detected any Ink Cartridge slot without cartridge. LCD panel. Or insert a new Ink Cartridge and pull down the Ink Lever
to clear the error.

MAINTENANCE TANK FULL

LCD Explanation Recovery


MNT TNK FULL This error occurs when Maintenance Tank is full. Install usable Maintenance Tank.

RELEASING LEFT AND RIGHT (LEFT OR RIGHT) INK LEVER

LCD Explanation Recovery


LOWER INK LEVERS The Ink Lever is raised (released) during one of the movements. Pull down the Ink Lever.
LOWER L INK LVR
LOWER R INK LVR

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 170


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

PRINTER COVER OPEN

LCD Explanation Recovery


TOP COVER OPEN Generated when Printer Cover is open during one of the movements. Close the Printer Cover.
Under this error, all of CR motion and ink sequences are halted. † When cover was open during flushing before paper feed
Therefore it may give damages to printing head if this situation movement, the flushing operation is interrupted, but after closing
continues very long time. the cover, the flushing and paper feed movement are completed.
† When cover was open during paper eject, "Paper eject error
(p.166)" occurs after clearing this error.
† When cover was open during paper feed movement, "Paper
recognition error (p.167)" occurs after clearing this error.
† When cover was open during paper cut movement, "Paper cut error
(p.168)" occurs after clearing this error.
† When cover was open while power was OFF, power will turn OFF
after capping printhead.
If error is not cleared after cover is closed, check operation of Self
Testing Menu Cover Sensor p.90 and perform steps below if not
normal.
† Check that the cover is closed properly.
† Replace the P Cover Open Sensor.(p.224)

RELEASING PAPER LEVER

LCD Explanation Recovery


LOAD PAPER (Except roll paper) Paper Lever was released during standby. Pull down the Paper Lever.
LOAD PAPER SUCTION
(Roll paper only)

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 171


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

RELEASING PAPER LEVER IN OPERATION

LCD Explanation Recovery


SET PAPER LEVER Paper Lever was released during one of the movements. Pull down the Paper Lever.
† After lowering the lever, the paper set sequence will begin, and the
paper type will be automatically determined by paper detection
sensors (PE Sensor, Rear Manual Insertion Sensor, ASF Paper
Sensor). In this case, the paper initialization start trigger wait period
will execute continuously, so the paper set sequence is resumed by
pressing the [Pause] key. (However, when the Paper Lever has
been lowered after removing paper without cancelling the job
(pressing the [Pause] key) while the Paper Lever was raised,
"Paper end/roll paper end (p.166)" occurs after clearing this error.
† When only the PE Sensor turns ON with the Paper Lever lowered,
front paper supply is determined by the paper set sequence, and
because a paper jam can be caused by back feeding, a message is
displayed on the printer about removing paper and operation is
stopped. In this case, release the Paper Lever again and remove
the paper, and then lower the lever to clear the error.
† When only the PE Sensor turns ON at paper feed/print/eject
movements of ASF or rear manual insertion, "Paper eject error
(p.166)" occurs after clearing this error.

PAPER JAM(ASF)

LCD Explanation Recovery


RELEASE LEVER The ASF Paper Sensor is ON at ASF paper feed movement but the Release Paper Lever, remove paper, and pull down the lever.
REMOVE PAPER JAM PE Sensor does not turn ON. Or the ASF Paper Sensor and PE However, if this was generated during printing, when the paper is
Sensor are both ON, but the paper top edge cannot be detected. removed by the above method and the Paper Lever is lowered, "Paper
The Rear Manual Insertion Sensor turned ON at paper feed end/roll paper end (p.166)" occurs after clearing this error.
movement by ASF. When only the PE Sensor turns ON at paper feed/eject movements of
ASF, "Paper eject error (p.166)" occurs after clearing this error.
ASF Paper Sensor or PE Sensor does not turn OFF at paper eject
movement after printing by ASF feed.

PAPER JAM(CR)

LCD Explanation Recovery


RELEASE LEVER This error occurs when CR Motor step-out is detected due to paper Release the Paper Lever to remove the paper, pull down the lever,
REMOVE PAPER JAM jam while CR Motor is operating. and then turn the printer off and back on.

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 172


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

NO MAINTENANCE TANK

LCD Explanation Recovery


NO MNT TNK The Maintenance Tank is not set during one of the movements. Set the Maintenance Tank.

REAR COVER OPEN

LCD Explanation Recovery


REAR COVER OPEN Generated when Paper Guide Unit is not installed. Under this error, all Properly install Paper Guide Unit.
of CR motion and ink sequences are halted. Therefore it may give † If generated during paper feed movement by ASF, when ASF is
damages to printing head if this situation continues very long time. initialized (including paper eject movement) after installation of the
Paper Guide Unit, "Paper end/roll paper end (p.166)" occurs.
† When Paper Guide Unit is removed during paper feeding, "Paper
jam(ASF) (p.172)" occurs.
† When Paper Guide Unit is removed during roll paper cutting, "Paper
cut error (p.168)" occurs.
If error is not cleared after installation of the Paper Guide Unit, check
the cover sensor operation p.91 by Self Testing Menu and perform
steps below if not normal.
1. Check removal/installation of Paper Guide Unit.
2. Replace the Rear Cover Sensor. (p.225)

TYPE-B OPTION I/F CARD ERROR

LCD Explanation Recovery


OPTION I/F ERROR A non-supported I/F Card is installed into the printer. Turn off the printer, remove the Type-B I/F Card, and then turn on
again.

CR LOCK UNLOCKED ERROR

LCD Explanation Recovery


UNLOCK PRINT HEAD Print head (Carriage Unit) may be locked. Turn off the printer, release the lock of print head (Carriage Unit), and
turn the printer back on p.207.

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 173


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

FATAL ERROR

The printer has failed. Because this cannot be recovered by the user, resolve by following "3.2.4 Corrective Actions for Service Request Display" (p.175).

LCD Explanation Recovery


SERVICE REQ. nnnnnnnnn Occurrence of any error from which the user can not recover the If cleared by turning power OFF and then ON again, continue using
("nnnnnnnnn" shows type of fatal printer. printer intermittently in that condition. If the same code for the fatal
error.) Life expiration of a long-life part which can cause secondary problems error is generated again, specify the cause of the problem and replace
if the part is further used. corresponding failed part causing the problem.
The printer has been brought into malfunction by unexpected
operation or by receiving an unexpected command.

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 174


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

3.2.4 Corrective Actions for Service Request Display † Remedy


1. Check the number of times that the CR Motor has shuttled at “VIEW
Service request errors are displayed in the LCD panel with the intention of
COUNTER“ from Maintenance Mode 2, look for the measured number
notifying the user of the need for a service engineer to check/replace
on the chart, and replace the corresponding parts. (Refer to "1.4.6
corresponding parts.
Maintenance Mode 2" (p.90).)
This section describes service request errors and explains corrective actions
for when they occur. Accumulated number of shuttle movements
Stylus Pro 4800/4880/
Stylus Pro 4400/4450
C A U T IO N If service request error other than "CR, PF servo related 4880C
error", "CR axis detection error", "CPU related error" occurs, Less 5,200k Less 5,200K
2,600k 1,300K 2,600K 3,900K
return the carriage to the home position. Part name than and than and
∼ ∼ ∼ ∼
2,600K above 1,300K above
Motor Assy.,
Χ Ο Ο Χ Ο Ο Ο Ο
CR
SERVICE REQ. 00000101
Pulley,
† Error meaning: Driven/ Shaft, Χ Ο Ο Χ Ο Ο Ο Ο
CR Motor life Pulley
Tube, Supply,
† Explanation Χ Δ Ο Χ Δ Δ Δ Ο
Ink
Indicates that the number of CR Motor passes has reached the specified
Scale, CR Χ Ο Ο Χ Ο Ο Ο Ο
value. The printer will develop the following problems and stop operation if
BOARD
printing is continued in this condition. Ο Χ Χ Ο Χ Χ Χ Χ
ASSY., MAIN
„ Ink leakage through cracks in Ink Tube.
„ Poor movement of Carriage Unit due to CR Motor internal wear. Ο : Replacement required/ Δ : Check the part/ Χ : No arrangement requried

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 175


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2. The product-life cycle is the same as CR Motor-life cycle, so check and


maintain all over the printer mechanism. Specially check points are
shown below.
„ Check for bending or damage to the Head FFC.
„ Check for damage to the CR timing belt and PF timing belt.
„ Check for abnormal noise when carriage unit moves (bearings are
worn).
„ Check for accumulation of paper dust or dust to paper feed route.
If there is paper dust or dirt, refer to 6.1.2 Important Maintenance
Items During Service Operations (p.450) and carry out a cleaning.
„ Refer to Chapter6 "Maintenance" (p.448), check the lubrication points,
and lubricate them if they are dry.
3. Clear the CR Motor Life Counter. (Refer to "5.6.4 Reset When CR Unit
Change" (p.442).)

C H E C K Refer to Chapter 5 " Adjustment" (p.366) and perform


P O IN T specified adjustments (including COUNTER CLEARS) after
replacing the "Motor Assy., CR."

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 176


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 00010000 † Points to be checked


1. The PF Encoder Sensor and the PF Loop Scale must be free from dust
† Error meaning: and dirt or any other foreign matters.
PF Motor Encoder check error 2. Execute encoder checking by the "1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF
† Explanation TESTING)" (p.91) in "Maintenance Mode 2".
During initial operation at power on or during PF Motor operation, there 3. The PF Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be
may be a case where the encoder pulse signal can not be recognized at in proper tension.
specified intervals. In such a case, this message is displayed and the 4. The PF Roller must rotate smoothly, free from undue load.
printer stops operating. 5. Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (17.9 ± 15% [Ω]).
† Cause of trouble If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the BOARD ASSY.,
MAIN at the same time.
„ Disconnected connector for the PF Encoder Sensor.
6. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit
„ Disconnected connector for the PF Motor. or broken wire.
„ Broken wire for the PF Motor Encoder.
† Remedy
„ Inverted wiring for A and B pulses.
1. Check for dirt, paper dust or damage to the Loop Scale
„ Inverted wiring for the PF Motor.
2. Connect the PF Encoder Sensor connector or PF Motor connector.
„ PF Motor short
3. PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.378)
„ PF Motor continuous excitation (voltage applied continuously, motor
4. Replace the PF Encoder Sensor (p.357)
revolutions unusual)
5. Replace the Motor Assy., PF (p.349)
„ Broken power supply fuse for the PF motor driver (on the Main Board )
6. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 177


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 00010001 SERVICE REQ. 00010002


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
PF Motor out of step PF Motor over current
† Explanation † Explanation
During PF Motor operation, there may be a case where the encoder pulse During PF Motor operation, there may be a case where an abnormal
signal within the specified range is not input within a specified period of current out of the specified limits is detected in the PF Motor drive circuit on
time or the pulse width is extremely long or short. In such a case, the PF the BOARD ASSY., MAIN or a current exceeding the specified value is
Motor is judged to be out-of-step, so that this message is displayed and the required. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops
printer stops operating. operating.
† Points to be checked † Points to be checked
1. The PF Encoder Sensor and the PF Loop Scale must be free from dust 1. The PF Loop Scale must be free from dust and dirt or any other foreign
and dirt or any other foreign matters. matters.
2. Execute encoder checking by the "1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF 2. Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (17.9 ± 15% [Ω]).
TESTING)" (p.91) in "Maintenance Mode 2". If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the BOARD ASSY.,
3. The PF Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be MAIN at the same time
in proper tension. 3. By visual inspection, check the harness of the PF Motor for any
4. The PF Roller must rotate smoothly, free from undue load. problem causing a short circuit to the frame.
5. Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (17.9 ± 15% [Ω]). † Remedy
If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the BOARD ASSY.,
1. Check for dirt, paper dust or damage to the Loop Scale.
MAIN at the same time.
2. Replace the Motor Assy., PF (p.349)
6. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit
or broken wire. 3. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)

† Remedy
1. Check for dirt, paper dust or damage to the Loop Scale.
2. Perform the PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.378)
3. Replace the PF Encoder Sensor (p.357)
4. Replace the Motor Assy., PF (p.349)
5. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 178


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 00010003 SERVICE REQ. 00010004


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
PF Motor in-position time-out CR Motor Encoder check error
† Explanation
† Explanation During initial operation at power on or during CR Motor operation, there
At PF stop processing in PF Motor control, there may be a case where the may be a case where the encoder pulse signal is not input at specified
paper can not move to the final target position within a specified period of intervals. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops
time. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.
operating.
† Cause of trouble
† Points to be checked „ Disconnected FFC for the CR Encoder Sensor.
1. The PF Encoder Sensor and the PF Loop Scale must be free from dust „ Disconnected connector for the CR Motor.
and dirt or any other foreign matters. „ Broken wire for the CR Motor Encoder Sensor.
2. Execute encoder checking by the "1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF „ Inverted wiring for A and B pulses.
TESTING)" (p.91) in "Maintenance Mode 2". „ Inverted wiring for the CR Motor.
3. The PF Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be „ CR Motor short
in proper tension. „ Broken power supply fuse for the PF motor driver (on the Main Board )
4. The PF Roller must rotate smoothly, free from undue load. † Points to be checked
5. Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (17.9 ± 15% [Ω]). 1. CR Scale is disconnected from CR Encoder Sensor.
If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the BOARD ASSY., 2. The CR Encoder Sensor and the CR Scale must be free from dust and
MAIN at the same time. dirt or any other foreign matters.
6. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit 3. Execute encoder checking by the "1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF
or broken wire. TESTING)" (p.91) in "Maintenance Mode 2".
† Remedy 4. The CR Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must
be in proper tension.
1. Check for dirt, paper dust or damage to the Loop Scale.
5. The Carriage Unit must slide smoothly, free from undue load.
2. Perform the PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.378)
6. Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor. (17.9 ± 10% [Ω])
3. Replace the PF Encoder Sensor (p.357) 7. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit
4. Replace the Motor Assy., PF (p.349) or broken wire.
5. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226) † Remedy
1. Check to see if the CR Scale for detection of the encoder pulse is
removed.
2. Check for dirt, paper dust or damage to the CR Scale.
3. Check if connection of the CR Encoder Sensor connector or Motor
Assy., CR connector.
4. Perform the CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.376)
5. Replace the CR Encoder Sensor (p.280)
6. Replace the Motor Assy., CR (p.270)
7. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 179


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 00010005 SERVICE REQ. 00010006


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
CR Motor out of step CR Motor over current
† Explanation † Explanation
During CR Motor operation, there may be a case where the encoder pulse During CR Motor operation, there may be a case where an abnormal
signal within the specified range is not input within a specified period of current out of the specified limits is detected in the CR Motor drive circuit
time or the pulse width is extremely long or short. In such a case, the CR on the BOARD ASSY., MAIN or a current exceeding the specified value is
Motor is judged to be out-of-step, so that this message is displayed and the required. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops
printer stops operating. operating.
† Cause of trouble † Points to be checked
„ Defective CR Motor. 1. The CR Scale must be free from dust and dirt or any other foreign
„ CR Motor driver damage (42V system short) matters.
„ Broken temperature fuse for Cutter Solenoid. 2. Execute the CR_HP Sensor checking by the "1.4.6.1 Self Testing
† Points to be checked Menu (SELF TESTING)" (p.91) in "Maintenance Mode 2".
3. Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor. (19.3± 10% [Ω])
1. CR Scale is disconnected from CR Encoder Sensor.
If the CR Motor is found in short mode, replace the BOARD ASSY.,
2. The CR Encoder and the CR scale must be free from dust and dirt or
MAIN at the same time.
any other foreign matters.
3. Execute encoder checking by the "1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF 4. By visual inspection, check the harness of the CR Motor for any
TESTING)" (p.91) in "Maintenance Mode 2". problem causing a short circuit to the frame.
4. The CR Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must † Remedy
be in proper tension. 1. Check for dirt, paper dust or damage to the CR Scale.
5. Execute the CR_HP Sensor checking by the "1.4.6.1 Self Testing 2. Perform the CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.376)
Menu (SELF TESTING)" (p.91) in "Maintenance Mode 2".
3. Replace the CR_HP Sensor (p.276)
6. The Carriage Unit must slide smoothly, free from undue load.
4. Replace the Motor Assy., CR (p.270)
7. Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor. (17.9 ± 10% [Ω])
5. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
8. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit
or broken wire.
† Remedy
1. Check to see if the CR Scale for detection of the encoder pulse is
removed
2. Check for dirt, paper dust or damage to the CR Scale.
3. Perform the CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.376)
4. Replace the CR Encoder Sensor (p.280)
5. Replace the CR_HP Sensor (p.276)
6. Replace the Motor Assy., CR (p.270)
7. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
8. Replace the Cutter Solenoid.

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 180


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 00010007 SERVICE REQ. 00010008


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
CR Motor in-position time-out Servo interrupt watchdog time-out
† Explanation † Explanation
At Carriage Unit stop processing in CR Motor control, there may be a case During the CR Motor or PF Motor operation, there may be a case where
where the Carriage Unit can not move to the final target position within a watch dog time-out is detected in the DC motor control circuit or on the
specified period of time (as per pulse detection). In such a case, this ASIC. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops
message is displayed and the printer stops operating. operating.
† Cause of trouble † Remedy
There are pulses smaller than out-of-step pulse remaining without Since the cause is deemed to be a defective CPU or ASIC, replace the
completing paper feed. C593 MAIN Board (p.226).
† Points to be checked
1. CR Scale is not removed from CR Encoder Sensor.
2. The CR Encoder Sensor and the CR Scale must be free from dust and SERVICE REQ. 00010009
dirt or any other foreign matters.
† Error meaning:
3. Execute encoder checking by the "1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF
System interrupt watchdog time-out
TESTING)" (p.91) in "Maintenance Mode 2".
4. The CR Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must † Explanation
be in proper tension. In the data processing stage on the BOARD ASSY., MAIN, there may be a
5. The Carriage Unit must slide smoothly, free from undue load. case where runaway or defective cash occurs on CPU or ASIC. In such a
6. Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor. (19.3 ± 10% [Ω]) case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.
7. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit † Remedy
or broken wire. If not cleared by turning the power OFF and back ON, the CPU or ASIC is
deemed defective, so replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226).
† Remedy
1. Check to see if the CR Scale for detection of the encoder pulse is
removed.
2. Check for dirt, paper dust or damage to the CR Scale.
3. Perform the CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.376)
4. Replace the CR Encoder Sensor (p.280)
5. Replace the CR_HP Sensor (p.276)
6. Replace the Motor Assy., CR (p.270)
7. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 181


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 0001000A SERVICE REQ. 0001000C


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
CR home position sensor error PG phase sensor error
† Explanation † Explanation
During initial operation at power on or during printing operation, there may During initial operation at power on or during platen gap fluctuation
be a case where the home position can not be detected at the home (change) operation after paper setting, there may be a case where the PG
position detection timing or within a specified period of time. In such a home position can not be detected. In such a case, this message is
case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. displayed and the printer stops operating.
† Points to be checked † Cause of trouble
1. Check if the CR_HP Sensor is free from adhesion of any foreign „ Disconnected connector for the PG Phase Sensor.
matters. „ Disconnected connector for the PG Motor.
2. Execute CR_HP Sensor checking by the "1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu „ Broken wire for the PG Motor.
(SELF TESTING)" (p.91) in "Maintenance Mode 2". „ Defective PG Phase Sensor.
† Remedy „ Defective PG Motor.
1. Check for dirt, paper dust or damage to the CR_HP Sensor. „ Damage to wheel linkage of PG drive gears
2. Replace the CR_HP Sensor (p.276) „ Power supply fuse for PG/PO Motor driver is broken on the MAIN
3. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226) Board.
† Points to be checked
C A U T IO N If the above steps do not result in recovery, this message 1. Check that the PG Phase Sensor and the PG drive gears are free from
will be displayed due to malfunctioning CR system (CR obstruction by adhesion of foreign matters or soiling.
Encoder Sensor/CR Motor, etc.), so check by widening the 2. Measure the resistance value of the PG Motor. (7.0 ± 10% [Ω])
range of investigation. If the PG Motor is found in short mode, replace the BOARD ASSY.,
MAIN at the same time.
3. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit
or broken wire.
4. There should be no damage to wheel linkage such as between PG
Motor pinion gear and PG drive gears.
† Remedy
1. Connect PG Phase Sensor or PG Motor connector correctly.
2. Replace the PG Phase Sensor (p.278)
3. Replace the Motor Assy., PG (p.274)
4. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 182


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 0001000F SERVICE REQ. 00010010


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
CR Motor PWM output faulty PF Motor PWM output faulty
† Explanation † Explanation
There may be a case where a current exceeding the specified value flows There may be a case where a current exceeding the specified value flows
during CR Motor operation. In such a case, this message is displayed and during PF Motor operation. In such a case, this message is displayed and
the printer stops operating. the printer stops operating.
This error can be displayed in the following case: an abnormal load which This error can be displayed in the following case: an abnormal load which
does not reach the level causing an out-of-step phenomenon "00010005" does not reach the level causing an out-of-step phenomenon "00010001"
in the carriage drive system has occurred and the running speed of the in the paper feed drive system has occurred and the running speed of the
motor has been detected to be too low (by the encoder), so that the current motor has been detected to be too low (by the encoder), so that the current
is increased to raise the running speed of the motor. is increased to raise the running speed of the motor.
Thus, this message appears to prevent the CR Motor from being Thus, this message appears to prevent the PF Motor from being
overheated. overheated.
† Remedy / Points to be checked † Remedy / Points to be checked
1. Check the load on the CR Motor. 1. Check the load on the PF Motor.
• Running load of CR Motor (check by manual operation) • Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor. (17.9 ± 15% [Ω])
• Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor. (19.3 ± 10% [Ω]) If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the BOARD ASSY.,
If the CR Motor is found in short mode, replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN Board at the same time.
MAIN at the same time. • Running load of PF Motor (check by manual operation)
• Damage to or wear in the CR Driven Pulley • Rotation load of PF Roller
• Damaged or worn bearing of the Carriage Unit 2. Replace the Motor Assy., PF (p.349)
• Flaws in the CR Rail caused by roller running 3. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
• Tension of the CR timing belt
2. Replace the Motor Assy., CR (p.270)
If the CR Motor is found in short mode, replace the C593 MAIN Board
at the same time.
3. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 183


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 00010012 SERVICE REQ. 00010013


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
CR overload (high sensitivity) error PF overload (high sensitivity) error
† Explanation † Explanation
PWM has been being output for a certain period of time. This can be made PWM has been being output for a certain period of time. This can be made
when load on the CR Motor is slightly increased. when load on the PF Motor is slightly increased.
† Remedy / Points to be checked † Remedy / Points to be checked
1. Check the load on the CR Motor. 1. Check the load on the PF Motor.
• Running load of CR Motor (check by manual operation) • Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor.
• Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor. If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the BOARD ASSY.,
If the CR Motor is found in short mode, replace the BOARD ASSY., MAIN at the same time.
MAIN at the same time. • Running load of PF Motor (check by manual operation)
• Damage to or wear in the CR Driven Pulley • Rotation load of PF Motor
• Damaged or worn bearing of the Carriage Unit 2. Replace the Motor Assy., PF (p.349)
• Flaws in the CR Rail caused by roller running 3. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
• Tension of the CR timing belt
2. Replace the Motor Assy., CR (p.270)
3. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 184


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 0001001B SERVICE REQ. 0001001D


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
Head driver (TG) temperature error CR servo parameter error
† Explanation † Explanation
During printing operation (empty jetting of ink), there may be a case where There may be a case where a voltage exceeding the specified value is
the temperature inside the Print Head has risen above the specified value about to be applied to the CR Motor. In such a case, this message is
and the thermistor in the Print Head detects it as abnormal temperature. In displayed and the printer stops operating.
such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.
† Points to be checked
† Cause of trouble 1. The CR Encoder Sensor and the CR Scale must be free from dust and
„ Print Heat increase due to empty jetting of ink dirt or any other foreign matters.
„ Faulty contact of Head FFC, broken Head FFC or disconnected Head 2. Execute encoder checking by the "1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF
FFC. TESTING)" (p.91) in "Maintenance Mode 2".
„ Print Head broken down. 3. The CR Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must
be in proper tension.
† Remedy
4. The Carriage Unit must slide smoothly, free from undue load.
1. Turn off the power to the printer once and turn it on again and check for 5. Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor. (19.3 ± 10% [Ω])
recovery. If the CR Motor is found in short mode, replace the BOARD ASSY.,
2. If the same error occurs immediately, replace the Printhead (p.285) MAIN at the same time.
6. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit
or broken wire.
† Remedy
1. Check for dirt, paper dust or damage to the CR Scale
2. Perform the CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.376)
3. Replace the CR Encoder Sensor (p.280)
4. Replace the Motor Assy., CR (p.270)
5. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 185


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 0001001E SERVICE REQ. 00010020


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
PF servo parameter error CSIC reed/write error
† Explanation † Explanation
There may be a case where a voltage exceeding the specified value is This message is displayed and the printer is stopped when information
about to be applied to the PF Motor. In such a case, this message is from the Ink Cartridge CSIC cannot be obtained or the latest ink
displayed and the printer stops operating. information for the CSIC cannot be written when turning the power ON/
OFF, opening/closing the I/C Cover or at completion of printing 1 page.
† Points to be checked
1. The PF Encoder Sensor and the PF Loop Scale must be free from dust † Remedy
and dirt or any other foreign matters. 1. Connect CR_FFC
2. Execute encoder checking by the "1.4.6.1 Self Testing Menu (SELF 2. Defective CSIC Board (Replace the Ink Cartridge.)
TESTING)" (p.91) in "Maintenance Mode 2". 3. Faulty contact with the CSIC
3. The PF Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be Replace the "I/H Left Unit" or "I/H Right Unit".
in proper tension. (Refer to I/H Left Unit / I/H Lever Sensor (Left) (p.296), or I/H Right Unit
4. The PF Roller must rotate smoothly, free from undue load. / I/H Lever Sensor (Right) (p.305))
5. Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (17.9 ± 10% [Ω]). 4. Replace the C511_SUB-B Board (p.236), Replace the C593_SUB-C
If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the BOARD ASSY., Board (p.238)
MAIN at the same time. 5. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
6. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit
or broken wire.
† Remedy SERVICE REQ. 00010022
1. Check for dirt, paper dust or damage to the Loop Scale.
† Error meaning:
2. Perform the CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment. (p.304)
Ink type error (setting on printer body side)
3. Replace the PF Encoder Sensor. (p.290)
4. Replace the Motor Assy., PF (p.349) † Explanation
5. "Ink type: neutral" is set even though an ink type other than dye/pigment or
Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
"CSIC detection: OFF" has been set.
† Remedy
1. Install the correct Ink Cartridge.
2. Raise the Ink Lever and set the Ink type (NPD) by SERVICE CONFIG
of Maintenance Mode 2 (p.90).
NOTE: If setting is performed with the Ink Lever in the set
position, initialization will start and the service request
error will occur again.

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 186


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 00010023 SERVICE REQ. 00010025


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
RTC analysis error CSIC ROM communication error
† Explanation † Explanation
There may be a case where the absolute time data stored on NVRAM There may be a case where an error occurs in communication with the
indicates an impossible date or hour. In such a case, this message is CSIC and BOARD ASSY., MAIN. In such a case, this message is
displayed and the printer stops operating. displayed and the printer stops operating.
† Remedy † Cause of trouble
„ Execute one of the followings: „ Faulty contact of Ink Cartridge
• Turn on the printer in Maintenance Mode 2 (p.90), and execute † Remedy
"RTC&USB ID&IEEE1394 ID” to set the date using basic adjustment
1. Install the correct Ink Cartridge.
in adjustment program.
2. Defective CSIC Board (Replace the Ink Cartridge.)
„ Remove the lithium battery once and install it again.
3. Faulty contact with the CSIC
„ Replace the lithium battery with a new one. (After replacement, be sure Replace the "I/H Left Unit" or "I/H Right Unit".
to execute RTC setting in one of the methods above.) (Refer to I/H Left Unit / I/H Lever Sensor (Left) (p.296), or I/H Right Unit
„ Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226) / I/H Lever Sensor (Right) (p.305))
4. Replace the C511_SUB-B Board (p.236) and the C593_SUB-C Board
(p.238)
5. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 187


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 00010026 SERVICE REQ. 00010029


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
RTC communication error Unidentified NMI
† Explanation † Explanation
There may be a case where the RTC circuit on the BOARD ASSY., MAIN CPU has detected undefined NMI.
operates incorrectly (is operated as test mode). In such a case, this
† Remedy
message is displayed and the printer stops operating.
If this error is not cleared even when the power is turned off once and on
† Remedy again, replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
1. Remove the battery once with the power turned off and after waiting for
a while, install the battery again and turn the power on. SERVICE REQ. 0001002A
2. Repeat Step1 above until this error does not occur at power-on.
† Error meaning:
„ Start up the printer in Maintenance Mode 2 (p.90), execute CR ASIC ECU error
"RTC&USBID&IEEE1394ID" to set the date using basic adjustment in
the the adjustment program. † Cause of trouble
„ Faulty firmware (irregular overwriting of register, etc.)
„ Damaged drive circuit board (break in pattern, etc.)
SERVICE REQ. 00010028 † Remedy
1. Installing Firmware (p.444)
† Error meaning:
2. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
Head error
† Explanation SERVICE REQ. 0001002B
Print Head has been damaged or undefined NMI was detected at CPU.
† Error meaning:
† Remedy
PF ASIC ECU error
Replace the Printhead (p.285)
† Cause of trouble
„ Faulty firmware (irregular overwriting of register, etc.)
„ Damaged drive circuit board (break in pattern, etc.)
† Remedy
1. Installing Firmware (p.444)
2. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 188


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 0001002D SERVICE REQ. 00010031


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
Cleaning Unit work life error ASF phase detection error
† Cause of trouble † Cause of trouble
Pump counter (8P x 1000 = 8,000P) has reached its regulated value. „ ASF home position cannot be detected even though Pump Motor turns
† Remedy at designated amount.
Replace the Cleaning Unit and reset the Cleaning Unit work life counter. „ ASF Phase Sensor is damaged.
(Reset When Cleaning Unit Change (p.443).) „ Power supply fuse for ASF/Pump Motor driver is broken on the MAIN
Board.
NOTE: Refer to Table 3-4 "Corrective Actions for Displayed Warnings
(p.162)" about the Cleaning Unit components. † Remedy
1. Check if the ASF phase detection wheel rotates smoothly, and correct
SERVICE REQ. 0001002F it if abnormal.
2. Replace the ASF Phase Sensor (p.263)
† Error meaning: 3. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
360 DPI writing time out error
† Explanation SERVICE REQ. 00010032
At ASIC reset, cannot restore position held before reset or carriage
interference, etc. C H E C K This error is for clarification only and does not actually occur.
† Remedy P O IN T
Recover by turning power OFF and back ON.

SERVICE REQ. 00010030


† Error meaning:
Multi Sensor Failure
† Cause of trouble
Multi Sensor is damaged
† Remedy
1. Check if the connection between the Multi Sensor and BOARD
ASSY., MAIN, and correct it if abnormal.
2. Replace the Multi Sensor (p.277)

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 189


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 00010033 SERVICE REQ. 00010036


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
Paper eject phase detection error Type-B Board installation error
† Cause of trouble † Cause of trouble
Home position for paper eject switching cannot be detected even though Type-B Board lower than Level 2 is installed.
PG Motor turns at designated amount, or Paper eject phase sensor is
† Remedy
damaged.Or power supply fuse for PG/PO Motor driver is broken on the
Remove installed Type-B Board.
MAIN Board.
† Remedy SERVICE REQ. 00010037
1. Check if the Paper Eject Unit rotates correctly and correct it if
† Error meaning:
abnormal.
Head thermistor error
2. Replace the Paper Eject Phase Sensor (p.356)
3. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226) † Cause of trouble
„ The head thermistor is failing.
SERVICE REQ. 00010034 „ Thermistor temperature is at -20°C or less or at 100°C or more.
† Error meaning: „ The Head FFC is disconnected or has poor contact.
Paper eject movement error † Remedy
† Cause of trouble 1. Check if the "Harness, Head" is connected correctly, and correct it if
Floating of paper eject roller (Paper Eject Unit) due to paper jam or foreign abnormal.
object. 2. Replace the Printhead (p.285)
† Remedy
Recover by turning power OFF and back ON after removing paper or SERVICE REQ. 00010038
foreign object. † Error meaning:
Transistor thermistor error
SERVICE REQ. 00010035
† Cause of trouble
† Error meaning: „ The transistor thermistor* is failing.
Pump phase detection error „ Thermistor temperature is at -20°C or less or at 100°C or more.
† Cause of trouble † Remedy
Pump position cannot be detected even though Pump Motor turns at Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
designated amount, or Pump Phase Sensor is damaged.Or power supply
fuse for ASF/Pump Motor driver is broken on the MAIN Board. Note * : A temperature detection part that is attached to the heatsink (address
numbers: Q12, Q13, Q14, Q15), which controls ON/OFF status of the head
† Remedy driving voltage, with screws. This part is located at the address “TH1“ on the
Check whether or not recovery can be done by turning power OFF and Main Board.
back ON. If error recurs, replace the Pump Phase Sensor (p.323).Or
replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226).

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 190


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 00010039 SERVICE REQ. 0001003B


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
PG adjustment value incorrect overwrite error Cutter installation error 1
† Explanation † Cause of trouble
Writing to the PG adjustment value area of NVRAM was done improperly, CR lock cannot be released by PG2.6 after cutter replacement. The cutter
or an improper value was read. or cutter pusher is not properly set.
† Cause of trouble † Remedy
„ Defective circuit board 1. Turn off the printer power.
„ Faulty CPU soldering 2. Check the cutter installation condition and correct it if abnormal.
„ Program trouble.
SERVICE REQ. 0001003C
† Remedy
† Error meaning:
1. Installing Firmware (p.444)
Cutter installation error 2
2. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
† Cause of trouble
CR lock cannot be released by PG1.2 even after 3 attempts with the cutter
replacement problem detection movement. The cutter or cutter pusher is
SERVICE REQ. 0001003A not properly set.
† Error meaning: † Remedy
PG adjustment value outside range error 1. Turn off the printer power.
† Explanation 2. Check the cutter installation condition and correct it if abnormal.
A value outside the correction range was written to the PG adjustment
value area of NVRAM, or an improper value was read. SERVICE REQ. 0001003D
† Cause of trouble † Error meaning:
„ Defective circuit board Cutter installation error 3
„ Faulty CPU soldering † Cause of trouble
„ Program trouble CR lock cannot be released by PG1.2 the next time the power is turned on
„ An unsuitable F/W is installed if power was turned off during cutter replacement. The cutter or cutter
pusher is not properly set.
† Remedy
1. Installing Firmware (p.444) † Remedy
2. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226) 1. Turn off the printer power.
2. Check the cutter installation condition and correct it if abnormal.

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 191


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 00020000 SERVICE REQ. 00020003


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
NVRAM error BOOT program SUM error
† Explanation † Explanation
There may be a case where the parameter data in NVRAM is broken. In There may be a case where the boot program of firmware is broken. In
such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating.
(Only at power on)
† Cause of trouble
„ NVRAM erase error † Cause of trouble
„ Write error (Check in 2 bytes) „ Faulty installation
† Remedy „ Defective flash memory
Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226) † Remedy
1. Installing Firmware (p.444)
2. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
SERVICE REQ. 00020002
SERVICE REQ. 00020009
† Error meaning:
SDRAM error † Error meaning:
Flash memory SUM error
† Explanation
In memory check of SDRAM executed at power on, there may be a case † Cause of trouble
where a bit error is detected. In such a case, this message is displayed and „ Firmware has not been installed in flash memory.
the printer stops operating. „ Flash memory is faulty.
† Cause of trouble † Remedy
SDRAM Read/Write error
1. Installing Firmware (p.444)
† Remedy 2. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 192


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 0002000A SERVICE REQ. 100000E0


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
Program load error CPU address error (load misalignment)
† Explanation † Cause of trouble
SUM check error for program area on RAM. „ Defective circuit board
† Cause of trouble „ Faulty CPU soldering
„ Program problem „ Program trouble
„ SDRAM failure „ Generation error
† Remedy † Remedy
1. Installing Firmware (p.444) 1. Installing Firmware (p.444)
2. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226) 2. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)

SERVICE REQ. 0002000B


† Error meaning: SERVICE REQ. 10000100
Internal memory shortage error
† Error meaning:
† Explanation CPU address error (storage misalignment)
This error appears when the cash area is insufficient. There may be a case
† Cause of trouble
where the assigned work area varies with the I/F mode and I/F mode
setting does not agree or decoding of a command is impossible. Then the „ Defective circuit board
work area is consumed up, thus memory runs short. In such a case, this „ Faulty CPU soldering
message is displayed and the printer stops operating. „ Program trouble
† Cause of trouble „ Generation error
„ Program problem † Remedy
† Remedy 1. Installing Firmware (p.444)
2. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
1. Check I/F mode.
2. Installing Firmware (p.444)
3. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 193


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 10000180 SERVICE REQ. 100001C0


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
CPU reserve command code exception error AC disruption
† Cause of trouble † Cause of trouble
„ Defective circuit board „ Power outage (=Instant blackout)
„ Faulty CPU soldering „ Unplugged from electric outlet
„ Program trouble „ Power Supply Board failure
„ Generation error „ MAIN Board failure.
† Remedy † Remedy
1. Installing Firmware (p.444) 1. Turn the power OFF, remove and insert the grounded electrical outlet
2. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226) firmly, and turn the power back ON again.
2. Replace the Power Supply Board (p233)
3. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
SERVICE REQ. 100001A0
† Error meaning:
SERVICE REQ. 100005C0
CPU slot illegal command exception error
† Cause of trouble † Error meaning:
CPU DMA address error
„ Faulty CPU soldering
„ Program trouble † Cause of trouble
„ Generation error „ Defective circuit board
„ Faulty CPU soldering
† Remedy
„ Program trouble
1. Installing Firmware (p.444)
„ Generation error
2. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
† Remedy
1. Installing Firmware (p.444)
2. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 194


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SERVICE REQ. 10000XXX SERVICE REQ. 0EXXXXXX


† Error meaning: † Error meaning:
CPU error RTC timer off error
† Cause of trouble † Explanation
„ Defective circuit board This error occurs when attempting unsuccessfully to communicate with
RTC chip on the MAIN Board.
„ Faulty CPU soldering
„ Program trouble 0Exxyyzz :
„ Generation error xx: Compare error location
† Remedy (00=LTMR1, 01=LTMR0, 02=MIN counter)
yy: Setting value (writing value)
1. Installing Firmware (p.444)
zz: setting result (value read during comparing)
2. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
† Remedy
SERVICE REQ. 0003XXXX 1. Turn the printer off and back on.
SERVICE REQ. 0DXXXXXX 2. Turn on the printer in Maintenance Mode 2 (p.90), and execute
† Error meaning: "RTC&USB ID&IEEE1394 ID” to set the date using basic adjustment
Error code for debug in adjustment program.

† Cause of trouble
„ Defective circuit board.
„ Defective SDRAM.
„ Defective Flash memory.
„ Faulty ASIC soldering.
„ Faulty CPU soldering.
„ Program trouble
„ Generation error.
† Remedy
1. Installing Firmware (p.444)
2. Replace the C593 MAIN Board (p.226)

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Panel Messages 195


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

3.3 Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout C H E C K „ In Initial Ink Charge, a large amount of ink will be
P O IN T discharged into the Maintenance Tank. Therefore, check
This section describes conceivable print quality problems that may occur with the counter indication (remaining value) beforehand. (If
this printer and the troubleshooting points for those errors. deemed necessary, prepare another Maintenance Tank
as a spare.)
Table 3-4. Diagnosing trouble based on printout „ Check the amount of ink remaining before starting Initial
Item Description Reference Page Ink Charge. If the remaining ink is less than 50%, replace
1 Dot missing p.196
the ink cartridge with a new one and then start the
procedure.
2 Uneven printing/poor resolution p.197
3 Smudged or marred printout on front side p.197 † If the power cleaning does not recover the printer, check the following
points.
4 Smudged or marred print out on reverse side p.198
5 White/black banding p.198 „ If trouble occurs in all the ink colors.
6 Banding p.199 •
Are the Print Head and Cap Unit sealed during Ink Charge?

If the Cap Unit / Pump Tubes have come off.
DOT MISSING •
If the life of the Cleaning Unit has expired.

If the Cap Unit has failed.
Auto cleaning is performed by dot missing inspection of the Multi Sensor, but (The cap rubber is damaged, etc.)
dot missing can be generated by increased congealing of ink on Print Head • If the Pump Unit has failed.
nozzle surfaces or in nozzles due to drying when dot missing inspection is OFF (The tubes are crushed, etc.)
or printer has not been used for a long period. Check the following particulars. • If the Printhead has failed.
† Execute head cleaning or initial ink charge. • If the fuse on the Main Board has blew.
• Head FFC contact failure.
1. Execute head cleaning or initial ink charge by one of the following
methods.
„ If the trouble occurs with a specific ink color.
• Head Cleaner is dirty.
Cleaning Execution Method • Abnormal connections between the Ink Cartridge, Ink Holder, Tube,
Cleaning Maintenance Mode 1: SSCL Damper, Print Head.
Adjustment Program: CL3
(Fastening nuts loose, or the O-ring deformed or damaged, causing
ink to leak, etc. could occur.)
Power cleaning Panel Setting menu/Maintenance Menu: Power
• Print Head failure
Cleaning
• Execute power cleaning again.
Adjustment Program: CL4
Initial ink charge Adjustment Program: Initial Ink Charge † If the trouble still occur even after checking the items listed above, replace
the following parts and check again.
2. Nozzle Check Pattern Printing (p.59) • Printhead (p.285)
Execute Nozzle Check Pattern Printing in the Panel Setting menu. • C593 MAIN Board (p.226)
("Panel Setting" → "TEST PRINT" → "NOZZLE CHECK")

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout 196


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

UNEVEN PRINTING/POOR RESOLUTION SMUDGED OR MARRED PRINTOUT (FRONT SIDE)

If the print quality is abnormal (uneven printing, diffused image, etc.), the If smudging or marring occurs due to rubbing by the head, etc. on the paper's
following items should be checked. printed surface, check the following items.
1. Perform the adjustment below with Adjustment Program. 1. If smudging is occurring at the front end of the roll paper or at the rear end,
widen the margins at the front end and rear end. (Set the "PAPER
1. Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment (p.393)
MARGIN" front end and rear end on "15mm".)
2. Auto Bi-d Adjustment (p.430)
(If high duty printing was done close to the front end and rear end (margin
3. Auto Uni-d Adjustment (p.401)
= 3mm), the paper will contain a large amount of ink and deformation of the
4. Check Platen Gap (p.410) paper will be accelerated, and depending on the case, the paper will touch
Execute Nozzle Check (p.436) and Alignment Check (p.437) above the head.)
adjustment. If print quality is still abnormal, go to next step. 2. If paper with weak edges which cannot move smoothly along the paper
2. If the trouble occurs only when the user is using a specific type of paper path is being used, Select "-4" for "SUCTION" in the "CUSTOM PAPER",
(thick paper), carry out "User Paper Setting" using the panel setting which is in the "Panel Setting".
procedure. (By setting the information concerning the thickness of the 3. If there is rubbing and smudging due to slow drying in printing of user
paper the user is using and correcting the print position (correction of paper.
changes in the position where ink hits the paper surface due to differences In the item "DRYING TIME" in the "CUSTOM PAPER", in "Panel Setting"
in paper thickness), avoid influencing the print position.) set the drying time (the time until auto paper cutting is carried out after
3. If this problem occurs after replacing the BOARD ASSY., MAIN with a new printing is finished. (Default: 0 second; Maximum: 10 seconds)
one: 4. If the trouble cannot be resolved by the above methods, check the
„ Transfer the parameters on the old Main Board to the new board. following.
(p.409) „ Pump Unit failure
4. If the printer's condition is not improved by the above items (adjustments), „ Check to see if dust containing ink, foreign matters or paper is
replace the following parts. adhering to the side surface of the head.
„ Printhead (p.285) 5. Extend platen gap.
„ Printer Mechanism (SP) (p.242) NOTE: Be careful to decreasing image quality, if the platen gap is
extended.

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout 197


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

SMUDGED OR MARRED PRINTOUT (REVERSE SIDE) WHITE OR BLACK BANDING IN THE CARRIAGE RUNNING DIRECTION

If smudging or marring of the paper back surface with ink occurs, the following If white or black banding (uneven density) in parallel with the Carriage Unit
items should be checked. running direction appears on your printout, check the following points:
1. Check if the paper is bent or curled, and replace the paper with new one if 1. Nozzle Check Pattern Printing (p.59)
abnormal. Execute Nozzle Check Pattern printing in the panel setting menu. If dot
missing is found, perform the head cleaning or initial ink charge by
2. Check to see if there isn't ink adhering to the paper feed path. If there is ink
adhering, it should be wiped off. following method

„ PF Roller surface „ "Cleaning" (p.412) of adjustment program.


„ Front Eject Paper Guide surface
„ "Power Cleaning" (p.79) in Panel Setting Mode.
„ Rear Paper Guide surface (including switching ribs) „ "Initial Ink Charge" (p.412) of adjustment program.
„ Paper Eject Roller surface 2. Adjustment
If dot missing is not found, perform the following adjustment and check for
improvement.
C A U T IO N If the user's paper size setting is not correct when "PPR SIZE
CHK" / "PPR ALIGN CHK" of panel setting menu has been „ Check Alignment (p.437)
set to OFF, then printing will be done onto platen surface. If it has trouble, execute "Power Cleaning" (p.79) or "Initial Ink
Charge" (p.412).
„ 1000mm Feed Adjustment (p.407)
3. Check if ink absorbing sponge for borderless printing, and correct if it is
abnormal.
„ Deformation
„ Embossment (installation failure)
„ Accumulation of ink

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout 198


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

BANDING IN THE PAPER FEED DIRECTION

If banding (uneven density, rough image) in parallel with the paper feed
direction is found on the print, perform the following adjustment:
† Bi-D adjustment
The Bi-D adjustment can be executed by any of the following methods.
„ "HEAD ALIGNMENT" in the Panel setting menu
„ Printer Driver
„ Adjustment Program
If the adjustment above does not work to improve the print quality, you may
improve it by adjusting the "THICKNESS NUM" setting value (± 0.1 ~ 0.2mm)
in "CUSTOM PAPER" of the panel setting menu.

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout 199


4
CHAPTER

DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.1 Introductory Information 4.1.1 Cautions


The precautions in the two lists below, WARNING and CAUTION, must always
This chapter describes disassembly/reassembly steps for the Stylus Pro 4400/
be followed during disassembly and assembly. Before starting the disassembly
4450/4800/4880/4880C.
work on this product, read and follow these precautions.
When no special instructions are given, reassembly is done by reversing the
order for disassembly steps.
W A R N IN G „ CR and PF motors are stopped by the cover sensor when
C H E C K For disassembly/assembly that is common to 8-color model the "Cover, Printer" or "Paper Guide, Inner Unit" is open
P O IN T (Stylus Pro 4800/4880/4880C) and 4-color model (Stylus Pro (removed). For safety reasons, do not disable this
4400/4450), instructions are given based on 8-color model. switch.
For disassembly/assembly that is unique to 4-color model, „ This printer is equipped with a lithium battery. Be sure to
instructions are given as CHECK POINT. When observe the following precautions when handling the
disassembling/assembling the 4-color model, refer to battery.
“ Difference Between 8-color And 4-color Models In • Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly
Disassembly/Assembly (p205)” to make sure the difference replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent
between them. type recommended by the manufacture.
• Dispose of used batteries according to manufacture’s
† WARNING instructions and in compliance with all applicable
Dangers that could cause injury or death are described after the laws. Contact your local government agency for
"WARNING" symbol. information about battery disposal and recycling.
• Be sure to securely cover the (+) end of each battery
† CAUTION with tape to prevent combustion or explosion when
Items that need prior attention during disassembly/reassembly steps are disposing.
described after the "CAUTION" symbol.
• Do not recharge the battery.
† CHECK POINT • Do not use the battery if it is discolored or damaged,
Hints regarding disassembly steps are described after the "CHECK as well as if any leakage of electrolyte is observed.
POINT" symbol. • Do not dismantle, solder or heat the battery. By doing
† REASSEMBLY so could result in explosion, leakage or generating
Reassembly steps that differ from reverse procedures for disassembly heat.
steps are described after the "REASSEMBLY" symbol. • Do not heat the battery or put it into fire.
• If the electrolyte leaked from the battery gets into
† ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED
contact with skin or eyes, rince it with clean water and
Adjustments required following disassembly/reassembly are described
see a doctor immediately.
after the "ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED" symbol. Refer to "Chapter 5:
Adjustments" and be sure to perform the specified adjustments. • The power switch is installed on the secondary side of
the power circuit, so power is always supplied unless
Refer to the appendix Exploded Diagrams (p.463) when disassembly of the power cord has been unplugged. Unless otherwise
units or components not described in this manual is required. stated, be sure to unplug the power cord from the AC
outlet to prevent electric shock and circuit damage
during servicing.

Disassembly & Assembly Introductory Information 201


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

W A R N IN G • Wear gloves while performing disassembly/ C A U T IO N


„ To prevent static electric damage when handling a
reassembly to prevent accidental cuts. circuit board, do not touch elements on board with bare
• If ink contacts the eyes, rinse eyes with clean water hands. If handling with bare hands is unavoidable,
and consult a physician. perform work by using required measures, such as
• If ink contacts the skin, wash with soap and water. wearing a grounding strap.
Consult a physician if the skin becomes inflamed. „ Carefully confirm the connection ends/directions of
• A lithium battery is installed on the MAIN Board. electric part connectors when reassembling after
Prevent damage by following the cautions below when disassembly. This printer uses several FFC (flexible flat
handling the MAIN board. cable), so use care in properly connecting connectors to
‹ Avoid putting the MAIN board on conductive prevent misalignment or other connection problems that
surface while the battery is installed. can damage PCB elements by short circuits.
‹ When the battery is removed, be sure not to mistake „ Route cables of electric components along specified
the polarity when reinstalling it. locations when reassembling after disassembly.
(Routing cables by other locations may push the cables
„ Ensure adequate work space for performing service/ against sharp edges or reduce noise resistance margins.
C A U T IO N
maintenance. „ When allowing the printer to operate with covers
„ The printer should be placed on a stable surface. removed, be careful not to get hands or clothing caught
„ Use care in handling the printer, since it is unusually in moving parts.
heavy (approx. 40kg). „ Use care to avoid injury when handling the cutter blade
„ Perform ink discharge before removing/replacing parts because it is very sharp.
of the ink routing system. „ The cutter uses a very hard blade that is unusually
Refer to "5.1.5 Adjustment Item (p371)". brittle, so do not allow it to be damaged by bumping into
„ Carefully install/connect ink routing system parts when objects such as metal printer parts.
reassembling after disassembly. (To prevent ink leaks „ When it is necessary to disassemble units or parts that
due to faulty installation/connection.) do not have written procedures because they are
„ Use only recommended tools for disassembly, controlled as service parts, carefully note installed
reassembly and adjustment. conditions before starting disassembly.
„ Use only specified lubricants and adhesives when „ When loosening screws on the outside of the printer that
applying lubrication or adhesive. have blue locking seal applied to them, apply new
locking seal to the screws when reassembling.
„ Place a protective sheet on the floor before removing ink
routing parts because there is the possibility that leaking „ When removing units or parts that are secured with
ink could get onto the product or floor where the product acetate (black) or two-sided tape, always secure the
is set up. units or parts with those tapes when reassembling.

Disassembly & Assembly Introductory Information 202


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.1.2 Tools
Top
Tools needed for disassembly/reassembly of the Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/
4880/4880C are shown below.

Table 4-1. Required Tools


Rear (back side)
Name Part Code Note
(+) Phillips screwdriver #1 Commercial Tool –
Right (+) Phillips screwdriver #2 Commercial Tool Shaft length of 250mm
or more is preferred.
Flathead screwdriver Commercial Tool –
Needle nose pliers Commercial Tool –
Tweezers Commercial Tool –
Torque wrench 1.25/1.75 1277142 For coupling screws

Left
Hex wrench Commercial Tool For roll paper feeder
Ink cartridge ICxx24* –
Front
Maintenance Tank PXMT2 –
HEAD EXCHANGE SUPPORT 1294672 Used in Print Head
TOOL replacement
CUTTER CAP 1401456 Used in Print Head
replacement
Bottom CR SUS PLATE SUPPORT TOOL 1400023 Used in Carriage Unit
and Print Head
Figure 4-1. Directional View of the Printer replacement
ASF EXCHANGE SUPPORT TOOL 1401458 Used in ASF Unit
replacement

Note "*": "xx" letters differ for each cartridge.

Disassembly & Assembly Introductory Information 203


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.1.3 Screws
Screws used on the Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C are shown below.

Table 4-2. Screws


Name Color Type
Decorative Screw White Special screw
C.B.S. 3x6 Silver (+) Bind S-tight
C.B.S. 3x6 Silver (+) Bind S-tight
C.C.P. 4x10 Silver (+) Cup P-tight
C.B.P. 3x8 Silver (+) Bind P-tight
C.B.S. (O) 3x6 Silver (+) Bind S-tight with outside toothed lock washers
C.B.S. (O) 3x6 Silver (+) Bind S-tight with outside toothed lock washers
Shaft, Installation, CR Silver Special screw
C.B.S. 3x8 Silver (+) Bind S-tight
C.B.S. 3x10 Silver (+) Bind S-tight
C.B.P. 3x6 Silver (+) Bind P-tight
C.B. 3x4 Silver (+) Bind
C.B.P. (P2) 3x8 Silver (+) Bind P-tight with plane washers 2
C.P.P. 2.6x8 Silver (+) Crosshead Pan P-tight
C.B.P. 3x12 Silver (+) Bind P-tight
Installation Plate, Silver Special screw
Shaft, CR
C.B.S. (P2) 3x6 Silver (+) Bind S-tight with plane washers 2
C.B. (P1) 3x4 Silver (+) Bind with plane washers 1
C.B.S. 3x12 Silver (+) Bind S-tight
Coupling Screw, M7 White Special screw
C.C. 3x6 Silver C.C. screw
C.B. 3x8 Silver (+) Bind
C.B.B. 2x10 Silver (+) Bind B-tight
C.B. (P2) Silver (+) Bind with plane washers 2
C.P.P. 2.6x6 Silver (+) Crosshead Pan P-tight

Disassembly & Assembly Introductory Information 204


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.1.4 Difference Between 8-color And 4-color Models In Disassembly/Assembly


The Stylus Pro 4800/4880/4880C (8-color model) and Stylus Pro 4400/4450 (4-color model) are equipped with different units or parts depending on how many
cartridges can be installed.
This chapter describes based on the 8-color model. When disassembling/assembling a 4-color model, refer to the table below to make sure the difference between
the 8-color model and 4-color model.

Table 4-3. List of Difference in Disassembly/Assembly for Stylus Pro 4400 (4-color model)
Stylus Pro 4800/4880/4880C Stylus Pro 4400/4450
Item Explanation Reference
(8-color model) (4-color model)
IH right unit not 4-color model is not equipped “ I/H Right Unit /
equipped with the I/H right unit on the right I/H Lever Sensor
side. (Right) (p305)”

The 4-color model is equipped “ Cover, Front,


with the "Cover, Front, Right 4 Right 4 Color (4-
Color" on the location where the color Model)
8-color model would be equipped (p365)”
with the "I/H Right Unit".

Routing of "Tube, While the "Tube, Supply, Ink" of “ I/H Left Unit / I/
Supply, Ink" the 8-color model is connected to H Lever Sensor
the right ink holder, That of the 4- (Left) (4-color
color model is routed to the "I/H model) (p362)”
Left Unit".
Connecting locations of The connecting locations are
"I/H Left Unit" and different between the two types
"Tube, Supply, Ink" of models because all the eight
"Tube, Supply, Ink"s of the 4-
color model are connected to the
"I/H Left Unit".
CSIC connectors on The 4-color model does not use “ Connectors/
C511_SUB-B Board not the CN39, CN42, CN43, CN45, Harnesses
used and CN36 connectors on the Connected to
C511_SUB-B Board. C511_SUB-B
Board (p236)”

Disassembly & Assembly Introductory Information 205


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2 Disassembly Procedures

C A U T IO N
„ Because this printer is assembled with precise
measurements in 1/100mm units, disassembly of the
frame and defined components is prohibited.
Disassembly/reassembly is limited to parts whose part
numbers are shown in the "Parts List" of Chapter 7.
(Disassembly of parts other than those listed could
result in problems that cannot be repaired except at the
factory.)
„ Disassembly/reassembly operations for parts/units not
listed in this "Disassembly/Reassembly" section cannot
be performed on-site.

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 206


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.1 Basic Operations


Cover, Printer
4.2.1.1 Release of the Transport Retaining Lever
1. Open "Cover, Printer". (Refer to Figure 4-2.)
2. Grasp and pull the "Transport Retaining Lever" (green) located on the left
side of the "Carriage Unit" to release the locked condition of the "Carriage
Unit". (Refer to Figure 4-3.)
3. Close "Cover, Printer".

Be sure to engage the "Transport Retaining Lever" to lock


the "Carriage Unit" and install protective equipment the next
time the printer is transported.

Figure 4-2. Open Cover, Printer

Locked Position Released Position

Transport Retaining Lever

Figure 4-3. Print Head Lock Release

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 207


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.1.2 Carriage Unit Lock Release/Lock Set Method

CARRIAGE UNIT LOCK RELEASE

1. Open "Cover, Printer".


2. Push in "Holder, Solenoid" to release carriage lock.
(Refer to Figure 4-4.) Holder, Solenoid

Figure 4-4. Carriage Unit Lock Release

CARRIAGE UNIT LOCK SET

1. Move "Carriage Unit" to the right until you hear a clicking sound to lock the
"Carriage Unit". (Refer to Figure 4-5.)

Figure 4-5. Carriage Unit Lock Set

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 208


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.2 Consumable Parts/ASF Cassette Removal IC, Lock Lever, Knob, Left

4.2.2.1 Ink Cartridges


1. Open "Cover, I/H, Left (Right)". (Refer to Figure 4-6.)
2. Lift "IC, Lock Lever, Knob, Left (Right)" to release "Ink Cartridge" lock.
(Refer to Figure 4-6.)
3. Remove the eight "Ink Cartridges" from the eight "Cartridge Slots".
(Refer to Figure 4-7.)

C A U T IO N
„ Do not touch ink cartridge PCB (IC chip). Doing so could
disrupt normal operation/printing.
Cover, I/H, Left
„ Do not touch ink filler because ink could leak from the
ink filler of the ink cartridge.
Figure 4-6. Ink Cartridge Lock Release

IC Chip

Ink Filler

Ink Cartridge

C H E C K To avoid wrong insertion, the shapes of ink cartridges of


P O IN T Stylus Pro 4400/4800 and Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C differ.
Figure 4-7. Ink Cartridge Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 209


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.2.2 Maintenance Tank (Porous Pad Assy., Ink Eject)

C A U T IO N
Do not touch the IC chip while performing the following
steps. Doing so could disrupt normal operation/printing.

1. Insert the fingers of your right hand into the hole of the "Maintenance Tank"
and pull while pressing against the lower part of the ink cartridge storage
box with your right thumb.
2. With attention not to tilt the "Maintenance Tank" in any direction, remove
the "Maintenance Tank" while supporting with your left hand.

Maintenance Tank

IC Chip

Figure 4-8. Maintenance Tank Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 210


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.2.3 Cutter Assembly


1. Enter cutter replacement mode using the panel setting with printer power
on.
2. The carriage unit moves and stops at the cutter replacement position.
Holder, Solenoid
3. Open "Cover, Printer".

C A U T IO N
When pressing the "Cutter Assembly" tab in the following
steps, press it lightly because the cutter blade could scratch
the interior of the printer if it is pushed inward.

4. Press down on the "Cutter Assembly" tab and turn the "Holder, Solenoid"
in the clockwise direction. (Refer to Figure 4-9.)
Tab
5. Remove the "Cutter Assembly" from the "Carriage Unit".
(Refer to Figure 4-10.)

Figure 4-9. Cutter Assembly Removal_1

Cutter Assembly

Figure 4-10. Cutter Assembly Removal_2

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 211


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.2.4 ASF Cassette


1. Remove the "ASF Cassette" from the printer.

C H E C K The disassembly steps described on the following pages


P O IN T require prior removal of the "ASF Cassette".

ASF Cassette

Figure 4-11. ASF Cassette Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 212


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.2.5 Spindle
Cover, Roll Paper

SPINDLE REMOVAL 1
Spindle
1. Open "Cover, Roll Paper".
2. Remove "Spindle".
2

Figure 4-12. Spindle Removal


SPINDLE DISASSEMBLY

1. Remove "Spindle" (p213).


2. Remove "Flange, Left" (black) along with "Adapter" from the "Spindle".
3. Release hooks (4 each, 8 total) securing each "Adapter" outward and Step 3-1 Step 3-1
remove the corresponding "Adapter" from "Flange, Left" and "Flange,
Right" (gray).

Align the marks of the flanges with the marks of the


adapters.
Step 3-2 Step 3-2
Step 2

Adapters

Flange, Left (black) Flange, Right (gray)

Figure 4-13. Spindle Disassembly

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 213


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.3 Panel Unit/Housing Removal


This section describes steps for removing housing parts.

4.2.3.1 Holder, Roller, Unit


1. Remove "Spindle" (p213). Holder, Roller, Unit
2. Remove the four decorative screws securing the "Holder, Roller, Unit" to Screws
the main unit. (Refer to Figure 4-14.)
„ Decorative screw: 4 pcs.
3. Slide the "Holder, Roller, Unit" upward from the printer rear surface and
remove it outward. (Refer to Figure 4-15.)

Figure 4-14. Screws Securing Holder, Roller, Unit

Figure 4-15. Holder, Roller, Unit Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 214


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.3.2 Paper Guide Assy., M, SP


1. Pull the left and right levers that secures the "Paper Guide Assy., M, SP"
inward, and then pull out the "Paper Guide Assy., M, SP".

Paper Guice Assy., M, SP

Securing Lever

Figure 4-16. Paper Guide Assy., M, SP Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 215


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.3.3 Cover, Side, Left


1. Remove "Holder, Roller, Unit" (p214).
2. Remove "Paper Guide Assy., M, SP" (p215).
3. Open "Cover, Printer".
4. Remove the four screws securing "Cover, Side, Left". C.B.S. 3x6

„ C.B.S. 3x6: 2 pcs.


„ C.B.S. 3x8: 1 pc.
„ C.C.P. 4x10: 1 pc.
5. While slightly lifting the upper part of "Cover, Side, Left", remove the
"Cover, Side, Left" toward left side of the main unit.

C H E C K Slightly lifting the upper part of "Cover, Side, Left" allows the
P O IN T cover to be removed without interfering with the upper part
Cover, Side, Left 1
of the printer.

C.B.S. 3x8 C.C.P. 4x10

Figure 4-17. Cover, Side, Left Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 216


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.3.4 Cover, Side, Right


1. Remove "Maintenance Tank (Porous Pad Assy., Ink Eject)" (p210).
2. Remove "Holder, Roller, Unit" (p214).
3. Remove "Paper Guide Assy., M, SP" (p215). Paper Lever

4. Move "Paper Lever" until two screws can be seen and hold the lever in the
place.
5. Remove the two screws securing "Paper Lever" and then remove "Paper
Lever". C.B.P. 3x8

„ C.B.P. 3x8: 2 pcs.

Figure 4-18. Paper Lever Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 217


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

6. Open "Cover, Printer".


7. Remove the four screws securing "Cover, Side, Right".
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 2 pcs.
„ C.C.P. 4x10: 2 pcs.
8. While slightly lifting the upper part of "Cover, Side, Right", remove the
C.B.S. 3x6
"Cover, Side, Right" toward right side of the main unit.

C H E C K Slightly lifting the upper part of "Cover, Side, Right" allows


P O IN T the cover to be removed without interfering with the upper
part of the printer.

C A U T IO N
When removing the “Cover, Side, Right”, ink may leak or 1
splatter. So have cleaning rags ready and prevent ink from
getting on the work area. Install the "Maintenance Tank"
beforhand when leaving the "Cover, Side, Right" being Cover, Side, Right
removed for a long time.
2

C.C.P. 4x10 C.C.P. 4x10

Figure 4-19. Cover, Side, Right Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 218


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.3.5 Panel, Front/Panel Unit


Panel Unit
1. Remove "Cover, Side, Left" (p216).
Step 3
2. Remove "Cover, Side, Right" (p217).
3. Remove "Harness, Panel" from "Panel Unit".
4. Remove following screws securing "Panel, Front". (Refer to Figure 4-21.)
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 1 pc.
„ C.B.S. (O) 3x6: 8 pcs. Harness, Panel
„ C.B.S. (O) 3x8: 1 pc.
5. Release "Panel, Front" dowel from positioning hole in frame. Dowel and Positioning hole
(Refer to Figure 4-20.)
6. Remove "Panel, Front" toward you.
Figure 4-20. Harness, Panel, Connection Status
„ Align "Panel, Front" dowel with positioning hole in
frame. (Refer to Figure 4-20.)
Panel, Front C.B.S. 3x6
„ Install "Panel, Front" to printer by tightening screws in
the order shown by number in Figure 4-21.
2
1

C.B.S. (O) 3x6

C.B.S. (O) 3x8

8 7 5 4 3

C.B.S. (O) 3x6

10 9

Figure 4-21. Panel, Front Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 219


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

7. Remove the three screws securing the "Panel Unit", and remove the
"Panel Unit" from "Panel, Front". (Refer to Figure 4-22.)
Panel Unit
„ C.B.S. (O) 3x6: 3 pcs.

C.B.S. (O) 3x6

Figure 4-22. Panel Unit Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 220


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.3.6 Cover, Printer


1. Remove "Cover, Side, Left" (p216).
Cover Printer
2. Remove the two screws securing "Plate, P Cover, Left". Then remove
"Plate, P Cover, Left" by sliding it to the left side while supporting "Cover
Printer" with your hand.
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 2 pcs.

Follow the steps below when installing "Plate, P Cover, C.B.S 3x6
Left".
1. Insert "Plate, P Cover, Left" into gap between "Cover,
Rear" and main frame.
2. Insert shaft socket hole of "Plate, P Cover, Left" to
"Cover, Printer" shaft (left). Plate, P Cover, Left
3. Align "Plate, P Cover, Left" dowel with main frame
Figure 4-23. Plate, P Cover, Left Removal
positioning hole.
4. Secure with the two screws.
• C.B.S. 3x6 : 2 pcs.

Shaft of Cover, Printer

Shaft Socket Hole

Positioning Hole

Cover, Rear
Dowel

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 221


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

3. Remove "Cover, Printer" upward by sliding to left side.


Cover, Printer

Insert the right shaft of "Cover, Printer" into the shaft hole
on "Plate, P Cover, Right".
2

Shaft Hole
Shaft of Cover, Printer

Figure 4-24. Cover, Printer Removal

Plate, P Cover, Right

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 222


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.3.7 Cover, Rear


1. Remove "Cover, Printer" (p221).
Cover, Rear
2. Remove "Cover, Side, Right" (p217).
3. Remove the three screws securing "Cover, Rear" and remove "Cover, C.B.S. 3x6
Shaft, Installation, CR
Rear" upward.
„ Shaft, Installation, CR: 2 pcs.
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 1 pc.

Align the two ribs of the "Cover, Rear" with the two
positioning holes on the"Release Unit".

Figure 4-25. Cover, Rear Removal


Ribs and Positioning Holes

Release Unit

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 223


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.3.8 P Cover Open Sensor


1. Remove "Panel, Front/Panel Unit" (p219).
2. Release the two tabs securing "P Cover Open Sensor" and then release
the "P Cover Open Sensor".
3. Disconnect the connector from the "P Cover Open Sensor".

Tabs
Connector

P Cover Open Sensor

Figure 4-26. P Cover Open Sensor Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 224


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.3.9 Rear Cover Sensor Rear Cover Sensor Connector


1. Remove "Paper Guide Assy., M, SP" (p215).
2. Remove the screw securing "Rear Cover Sensor Unit" to the printer frame.
(Refer to Figure 4-27.)
„ C.B.B. 2x10: 1 pc.
3. Release the tab securing the “Rear Cover Sensor Unit” to the printer frame
and remove "Rear Cover Sensor Unit". (Refer to Figure 4-27.)
4. Disconnect the connector from the “Rear Cover Sensor”.
(Refer to Figure 4-28.)
5. Release the two tabs securing the "Rear Cover Sensor” to the holder and
then remove the “Rear Cover Sensor“. (Refer to Figure 4-29.)

Figure 4-28. Connector Connecting Status

C.B.B. 2x10 Tabs


Rear Cover Sensor Unit

Tabs

Figure 4-27. Removing the Rear Cover Sensor Unit Figure 4-29. Tabs Securing Rear Cover Sensor

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 225


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.4 Circuit Board Removal


C H E C K The board used for Stylus 4400/4800 is "C593 MAIN Board",
P O IN T and "CA00 MAIN Board" is used for Stylus Pro 4450/4880/
4880C. The explanation in this section is based on Stylus Ribs
Pro 4400/4800.

This section describes steps for removing “C593 MAIN Board“, “Power Supply Cover, Harness
Board”, and each “C593_SUB Board“.

4.2.4.1 C593 MAIN Board

C A U T IO N
Be sure to insert and unplug FFCs vertically. (Inserting/
Unplugging at an angle can damage shorten or disrupt the
terminals inside the connector and cause damage to circuit C.B.S. 3x8
board components.)
Figure 4-30. Screws Securing the Cover, Harness
1. Remove "Holder, Roller, Unit" (p214).
2. Remove "Paper Guide Assy., M, SP" (p215).
3. Remove the two screws securing "Cover, Harness". (Refer to Figure 4-30.)
„ C.B.S. 3x8: 2 pcs.
4. Slide "Cover, Harness" outward. (Refer to Figure 4-30.)

Insert "Cover, Harness" into the two ribs of "Paper Guide,


Lower".

5. Release all harnesses through the "Cover, Harness" notch and remove the
"Cover, Harness". (Refer to Figure 4-31.)
Notch
Do not allow any harness to jut out from under the "Cover,
Harness".
Figure 4-31. Cover, Harness Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 226


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

C A U T IO N
Be careful not to pull the "PCB Unit" too hard and stretch the
harness when performing the following steps.
PCB Unit

6. Remove the four screws securing the "PCB Unit" and pull the "PCB Unit"
toward you.
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 4 pcs.

Align the left and right ribs of the "PBC Unit" with the
position locators of the frame.

Rib and Position Locator Rib and Position Locator

C.B.S. 3x6
C.B.S. 3x6

Figure 4-32. Pulling Out the PCB Unit

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 227


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

7. Disconnect all connectors/harnesses from "C593 MAIN Board".


CN54 CN51 CN19 CN1 CN48
Table 4-4. Connectors/Harnesses Connected to C593 MAIN Board
CN9 CN20
Connection Connector Number CN8
Color Connection Socket
Order No. of Pins
CN7
CN56
1 CN48 - 17 C511_SUB-B Board (CN102) CN52
2 CN51 - 30 C511_SUB-B Board (CN101) CN53
CN57
3 CN54 - 30 C511_SUB-B Board (CN100) CN16

4 CN9 - 30 C593_SUB-D Board (CN3)


5 CN7 - 31 C593_SUB-D Board (CN1)
6 CN8 - 31 C593_SUB-D Board (CN2) CN18
7 CN53 - 28 C593_SUB-C Board (CN201)
CN15 CN14 CN50
8 CN52 - 15 C593_SUB-C Board (CN200)
Figure 4-33. "C593MAIN Board" Connector Positions
9 CN18 Red 4 PG/PO Motor
10 CN16 White 4 ASF/Pump Motor
(Relay connector route)
11 CN19 Black 2 Suction Fan (Right, relay connector
route)
12 CN20 Yellow 2 Suction Fan (Left, relay connector
route)
13 CN56 Blue 2 Rear Cover Sensor
14 CN15 White 3 CR Motor
15 CN14 Black 3 PF Motor
16 CN1 White 14 Power Supply Board (CN2)
17 CN50 White 2 Heat Dissipation Plate Cooling Fan
18 CN57 White 2 Power Supply Cooling Fan

Note 1: CN3, CN10, CN55 have only the pattern set and are not mounted connectors.
2: Refer to Figure 4-33 for connector positions.
3: When connecting connectors/harnesses to the C593 MAIN Board, connect
them in the order shown in Table 4-4.

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 228


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

„ The connector number is marked on each connector on


the board. When connecting the FFCs, match the
connector numbers with the ones on the board with the
number printed side of the FFCs facing toward the
printer rear.

Connector Numbers

„ The wires should be bundled with acetate tapes in three


places as shown in the figure below to prevent them
from getting onto the guide rail for the Type-B Board. If
the wires are not bundled, they may be broken or cut off
when installing the Type B Board.

Acetate Tapes

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 229


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

8. Remove the screw securing USB connector.


(Refer to Figure 4-34.)
Step 9
„ C.P. 3x6: 1 pc. C.B.S. 3X10

9. Remove the two screws securing "Cover, Connector, Upper; B" and then
remove "Cover, Connector, Upper; B". (Refer to Figure 4-34.)
„ C.B.S. 3x10: 2 pcs.
10. Remove the two screws securing "Cover, I/F" and "Grounding Board, I/F"
and then remove "Cover, I/F" and "Grounding Board, I/F".
(Refer to Figure 4-35.)
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 1 pc. Step 8
C.P. 3X6 USB Connector Cover, Connector, Upper; B

Figure 4-34. Cover, Connector, Upper; B Removal

Cover, I/F Grounding Board, I/F

C.B.S. 3x6

Figure 4-35. Cover, I/F and Grounding Board, I/F Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 230


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

11. Release the four hooks securing the "Guide Rail" and remove the "Guide
Rail". (Refer to Figure 4-36.) Guide Rail
3

Secure the two "Guide Rail" hooks to the two "C593 MAIN
Board" installation holes.

Hooks

1 2

Figure 4-36. Guide Rail Removal


Installation Holes

12. Remove the two screws securing the "Bracket" and remove the
"Bracket".(Refer to Figure 4-37.)
„ C.B.S. 3x8: 2 pcs. Bracket

Install while aligning the two "Bracket" dowels with the two
"C593 MAIN Board" positioning holes.

Dowels

C.B.S 3x8

Figure 4-37. Bracket Removal

Positioning Holes

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 231


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

13. Remove the seven screws securing "C593 MAIN Board". IEEE1394 Connector
„ C.B.S. 3x8: 8 pcs.
14. Slide "C593 MAIN Board" forward and remove the "C593 MAIN Board" as
keeping IEEE1394 connector clear of the plate.

C.B.S. 3x8
C A U T IO N
„ Do not place the circuit board (solder side) directly on a
conductive surface.
„ Circuit boards supplied as service parts have been
equipped with lithium battery. Do not place the circuit
board (solder side) directly on a conductive surface or
let conductive material come in contact with the circuit.
C.B.S. 3x8
To do so may cause short out.

A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) and


R E Q U IR E D perform specified adjustments after replacing the "C593
MAIN Board".
Figure 4-38. C593 MAIN Board Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 232


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.4.2 Power Supply Board / Power Supply Cooling Fan

W A R N IN G When removing the "Power Supply Board", wait 5 minutes


after unplugging the AC power cord before starting work to
allow discharge of residual charge in the electrolytic C.B.S. 3x18
capacitors.
For your safety, never touch the primary smoothing
capacitor (C6). Do not place the "Power Supply Board"
(solder side) directly on a conductive surface.
1. Remove the "PCB Unit".(Refer to "4.2.4.1 C593 MAIN Board" (p226).)
2. Disconnect the following connectors/harnesses from the "Power Supply
Board".

Table 4-5. Connectors Connected to Power Supply Board


Connector Number Figure 4-39. Power Supply Cooling Fan Removal
Color Connection Socket
No. of Pins
Connectors
CN1 White 2 AC Inlet
CN2 White 14 C593 MAIN Board (CN1)

3. Disconnect the connectors of the “Power Supply Cooling Fan” from the
“C593 MAIN Board”. (Refer to "4.2.4.1 C593 MAIN Board" (p226).) C.B.S. 3x8

4. Remove the two screws that secure the "Power Supply Cooling Fan", and
remove the "Power Supply Cooling Fan".
„ C.B.S. 3x18: 2 pcs. C.B.S. 3x8
5. Remove the five screws securing the "Power Supply Board" and remove
the "Power Supply Board".
„ C.B.S. 3x8: 5 pcs.

Figure 4-40. Power Supply Board Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 233


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.4.3 C593_SUB Board


1. Open "Cover, Printer".
Slot

C A U T IO N
When performing the following steps, remove protective
equipment if it is installed and make sure to release the
Carridge Unit lock with the "Transport Retaining Lever".
Refer to "4.2.1.1 Release of the Transport Retaining Lever"
(p207).

2. Release the carriage lock and move the "Carriage Unit" to the position
Carriage Unit
shown in Figure 4-41.
(Refer to "4.2.1.2 Carriage Unit Lock Release/Lock Set Method" (p208).)
3. Remove the three screws securing the "Carriage Cover" and remove the
"Carriage Cover" upward. (Refer to Figure 4-42.)
„ C.B.P. 3x8: 3 pc. Figure 4-41. Moving the Carriage Unit

Carriage Cover

C.B.P. 3x8

C.B.P. 3x8

Figure 4-42. Carriage Cover Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 234


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4. Disconnect all connectors/harnesses on the "C593_SUB Board".


(Refer to Figure 4-43.) Harnesses

Table 4-6. Connectors/Harnesses Connected to C593_SUB Board


Connector Number
Color Connection Socket
No. of Pins
CN1 - 30 C593_SUB-D Board (CN4)
CN2 White 2 Cutter Solenoid C593_SUB Board
CN3 White 5 Multi Sensor
CN4 - 5 CR Encoder Board

5. Remove the screw securing "C593_SUB Board" and then remove


"C593_SUB Board". (Refer to Figure 4-43.) Connector
„ C.B.P. 3x8: 1 pc. Connector
C.B.S. 3x8
Be sure to fasten both the grounding plate and the
"C593_SUB Board" together with screws.

Figure 4-43. C593_SUB Board Removal

Grounding Plate

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 235


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.4.4 C511_SUB-B Board


CN22 CN55 CN39 CN42 CN103 CN102
1. Remove "Cover, Side, Right" (p217).
CN26
2. Disconnect all connectors/harnesses on the "C511_SUB-B Board".
CN36
Table 4-7. Connectors/Harnesses Connected to C511_SUB-B Board
CN34 CN101
Connection Connector Color/ Number
Connection Socket
Order No. Mark of Pins
CN31 CN25
1 CN103 - 17 Panel Unit (CN1)
2 CN46 - 7 Porous Pad Assy., Ink Eject CN29 CN100
3 CN39 LK 7 CSIC_R1 Board (Light Black)
4 CN42 LC 7 CSIC_R2 Board (Light Cyan) CN33

5 CN43 LM 7 CSIC_R3 Board (Light Magenta) CN27 CN45 CN43 CN46


6 CN45 LLK 7 CSIC_R4 Board (Light Light Black)
Figure 4-44. C511_SUB-B Board Connector Positions
7 CN22 Blue 2 P-Cover Open Sensor
8 CN36 White 2 I/H Lever Sensor (Right)
C H E C K Release the harness lock as shown in the figure below.
9 CN26 Black 2 Paper Eject Release Sensor P O IN T Be sure to lock it when reassembling.
10 CN25 Red 2 ASF Paper Sensor
11 CN27 Yellow 2 Rear Hand Insertion Sensor
12 CN29 - 3 PE Sensor
13 CN31 Yellow 3 HP Sensor
14 CN33 White 3 P_THICK Sensor (0.3)
15 CN34 Black 3 P_THICK Sensor (0.8)
16 CN55 Blue 3 Pump Phase Sensor
17 CN102 - 17 C593 MAIN Board (CN48)
18 CN100 - 30 C593 MAIN Board (CN54)
19 CN101 - 30 C593 MAIN Board (CN51)
Each "Harness, CSIC" (CN39, CN42, CN43, CN45) is marked
Note 1: CN100, CN101 have connector lock mechanisms that must be released to with its corresponding ink name. Refer to Table 4-7 and
disconnect FFC. Refer to “Check Point“ on Release the harness lock as shown connect the harnesses properly.
in the figure below. Be sure to lock it when reassembling. P.236.
Ink Names
2: Refer to Figure 4-44 for connector positions.
3: When connecting harnesses to the C511_SUB-B Board, connect them in the
order shown in Table 4-7.
4: For the 4-color model, the CN39, CN42, CN43, CN45, and CN36 connectors
are not used.

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 236


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

3. Remove the four screws securing "C511_SUB-B Board" and remove


"C511_SUB-B Board". C.B.P. 3x6

„ C.B.P. 3x6: 4 pcs.

Figure 4-45. C511_SUB-B Board Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 237


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.4.5 C593_SUB-C Board


1. Remove "Cover, Side, Left" (p216). Clamps
2. Release the FFC from the three clamps.
3. Disconnect all connectors/harnesses on the "C593_SUB-C Board".
Table 4-8. Connectors/Harnesses Connected to C593_SUB-C Board
Connection Connector Color/ Number
Connection Socket
Order No. Mark of Pins
1 CN38 MB 7 CSIC_L1 Board (Matte Black)
2 CN40 C 7 CSIC_L2 Board (Cyan)
3 CN41 M 7 CSIC_L3 Board (Magenta)
4 CN44 Y 7 CSIC_L4 Board (Yellow)
FFC
5 CN201 - 28 C593 MAIN Board (CN53)
6 CN200 - 15 C593 MAIN Board (CN52)
7 CN24 White 4 PF Linear Encoder Sensor
8 CN37 Black 2 I/H Lever Sensor (Left) Figure 4-46. Releasing FFC
9 CN30 Yellow 3 ASF Phase Sensor
10 CN28 White 2 Paper Eject Phase Sensor
11 CN32 Red 3 PG Phase Sensor
Note 1: Refer to Figure 4-47 for connector positions.The CN 45 is not used.
2: When connecting harnesses to the C593_SUB-C Board, connect them in the
order shown in Table 4-8. CN28 CN37

CN32 CN24
Each "Harness, CSIC" (CN38, CN40, CN41, CN44) is marked
with its corresponding ink name. Refer to Table 4-8 and CN30 CN45
connect the harnesses properly. CN200

Ink Names CN201

CN44 CN38

CN41 CN40

Figure 4-47. C593_SUB-C Board Connector Locations

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 238


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4. Remove the three screws securing "C593_SUB-C Board" and remove


"C593_SUB-C Board".
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 3 pcs.

C.B.S. 3x6

Figure 4-48. SUB-C Board Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 239


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.4.6 C593_SUB-D Board CN1 CN5


1. Remove "Panel, Front/Panel Unit" (p219).
2. Disconnect all the connectors/harnesses on the "C593_SUB-D Board".

Table 4-9. Connectors/Harnesses Connected to C593_SUB-D Board


CN3 CN6
Connection Connector Color/ Number
Connection Socket
Order No. Mark of Pins
1 CN1 - 31 C593 MAIN Board (CN7)
2 CN2 - 31 C593 MAIN Board (CN8)
3 CN3 - 30 C593 MAIN Board (CN9) CN2 CN4
4 CN4 - 30 C593 SUB Board (CN1)
Figure 4-49. C593_SUB-D Board Connector Positions
5 CN5 - 31 Print Head Board (CN1)
6 CN6 - 31 Print Head Board (CN2)
Note 1: Refer to Figure 4-47 for connector positions.The CN 45 is not used.
2: When connecting harnesses to the C593_SUB-D Board, connect them in the C.B.S. 3x6
order shown in Table 4-9.

Each "Harness, Head, Intermit" and "Harness, Head" is


marked with its connector No. Refer to Table 4-9 and
connect the harnesses properly.

Connector Numbers

Figure 4-50. C593_SUB-D Board Removal

3. Remove the four screws securing "C593_SUB-D Board" and remove


"C593_SUB-D Board".
„ C.B.P. 3x6: 4 pcs.

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 240


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.5 Printer Mechanism Disassembly


This section describes disassembly steps for main components of the printer
mechanism.

C A U T IO N
For the following reasons, replaceable parts are limited to
defined components. Therefore removal or replacement of
parts that cannot be supplied as components defined in this
manual or parts supplied as "Service Parts" is prohibited. (If
this is not followed, it could result in problems that cannot
be repaired except at the factory.)
1. Repair support is required on-site.
2. Components have been assembled in factory processes
using highly precise adjustments.

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 241


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.5.1 Printer Mechanism (SP) Stylus Pro 4800 Stylus Pro 4400
Table 4-10. Parts Configuration Part name Code Part name Code
Cover, fan, right 1273729 ← ←
Part name Code
Stylus Pro 4800 Printer mechanism (SP), M-AB61-100 2102788 Fan blower mounting --- ← ←
board*2
Stylus Pro 4400 Printer mechanism (SP), M-AB61-101 2102789
Release ASSY., 1300517 ← ←
This section describes replacement of “Printer Mechanism (SP)”. Follow the C593
explanation of reference place about each parts removal/installation procedure Stacker ASSY; 1402185 ← ←
and remedy after replacement. C593; B
Tray ASSY; C593; B 1403674 ← ←
1. Remove the following parts from the old printer, and attach the parts
Label, ASF set 1400868 ← ←
except consurmables to “Printer Mechanism (SP)“.
Holder, roll ASSY., 1300541 ← ←
Stylus Pro 4800 Stylus Pro 4400 C593
Label, paper jam 1249443 ← ←
Part name Code Part name Code
removal
Ink cartridge --- Ink cartridge ---
Cover, rear; C593 1305017 ← ←
Maintenance tank --- Maintenance tank ---
Spindle --- Spindle ---
Note *1: A Board Box includes all the parts attached to the box such as the Main Board
Board box*1 Board box --- Assy., MAIN and the Power Supply Unit.
Cover, I/H, left, 8- 1299011 Cover, I/H, left; C593 1305013
*2: Parts indicated with *2 include the screws that secure the parts.
color
Parts

Label, caution, 1400736 --- ---


transport
Cover, I/H, right, 8- 1299007 Cover, front, right, 4-color 1299017 C H E C K If “Printer Mechanism (SP)” is replaced because of the
color P O IN T trouble arisen from the "C593MAIN", replace the
"C593MAIN" for a new one at this time.
Label, chalk cleaning 1400729 Label, chalk cleaning; B 1400730
Cover, printer; C593 1305014 ← ←
Knob, pressure, 1305026 ← ←
lever; C593*2
Knob, I/C, lock lever: 1305019 ← ←
C593*2
Paper guide, paper 1219923 ← ←
eject, stuck*2
Sheet, paper guide, 1259969 ← ←
paper eject, stuck
Fan, Blower*2 2103408 ← ←
Pad, fan 1273728 ← ←
Cover, fan, left 1273730 ← ←

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 242


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

2. Connect the printer to the PC with USB or IEEE1394 cable, and start
“NVRAM Buckup Utility“ (nvram.exe). (Or execute the parameter backup of
the adjustment program and start the “NVRAM Buckup Utility“.)
3. Take out the CD-ROM that contains the mechanism parameter and insert it
to the PC. (The CD-ROM is bundled with the “Printer Mechanism (SP)”.)
4. Click the “Open“ button, and select the parameter file stored in the CD-
ROM to open the parameter file.
5. Enter Maintenance Mode 2. (Panel display: "SELF TESTING")
Power OFF → Press "Paper Select (<)" + "Paper Feed (Δ)" + "Paper
Feed (∇)" → Power ON

C A U T IO N
Do not enter the menu under maintenance mode 2.

6. Click the “Write” button, and the parameter writing begins.


7. End the "NVRAM Backup Utility" when the writing is completed.
8. Set a destinaton using one adjustment program.
(Refer to "5.4.3 Destination Setting" (p434).)
9. Turn the printer power off.
10. Turn the printer power on.
11. Install consumables to the printer.

C A U T IO N
Check the ink level before starting work. If the ink level is
less than 50%, replace the ink cartridge with a new one
because the printer performs initial ink charge when it is
turned on after the replacement.

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 243


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.5.2 Fan, Blower


1. Remove the four screws securing the two "Paper Guide, Eject, Stacker"s
and then remove the two "Paper Guide, Eject, Stacker"s.
(Refer to Figure 4-51.)
„ Installation Plate, Shaft, CR: 2 pcs. C.B.S. 3x8

„ C.B.S. 3x8: 2 pcs.


2. Release relay harness connected to "Fan, Blower" (right) from acetate
tapes and clamp. (Refer to Figure 4-52.)
3. Disconnect the two rellay connectors as shown in Figure 4-52.
(Refer to Figure 4-52.)

Insert the two tabs of the "Paper Guide, Eject, Stacker" into Installation Plate, Shaft, CR Paper Guide, Eject, Stacker
the two positioning holes on the "Frame, Fan, Unit".
Figure 4-51. Paper Guide, Eject, Stacker Removal

Positioning Holes Frame, Fan, Unit

Relay Connectors

Tabs

Acetate Tapes (x3)

Figure 4-52. Releasing Relay Harness

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 244


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4. Peel off the acetate tape attached to the gap between the "Frame, Fan,
Unit" and the main unit.
5. Remove the two screws securing "Frame, Fan, Unit" and remove "Frame,
Frame, Fan, Unit Acetate Tape
Fan, Unit" by pulling it toward you.
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 2 pcs.

Align the two main frame dowels with the two positioning
holes on the "Frame, Fan, Unit". (Refer to Figure 4-53.)

Dowel and Positioning Hole Dowel and Positioning Hole

C.B.S. 3X6 C.B.S. 3X6

Figure 4-53. Frame, Fan, Unit Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 245


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.6 ASF 1. Remove "Cover, Side, Left" (p216).

This section discribes the "ASF Unit" removal and the assembly and 2. Remove "Cover, Side, Right" (p217).
disassembly of the main components comprising the ASF. 3. Remove "Cover, Motor, PF" and disconnect the connector from the "ASF
phase sensor". (Refer to "4.2.6.4 ASF Phase Sensor" (p263).)
4.2.6.1 ASF Unit

C A U T IO N
This section explains the working procedure using the "ASF
EXCHANGE SUPPORT TOOL". Always prepare the tool
before performing work because performing work without
the specified tool may cause damage to the printer or result
in injury.

Stand (x2) Joint Plate

Base, Left Base, Right

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 246


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4. Insert the tab of the "Joint Plate" to the slit of the "Base, Left".
5. Insert the "Base, Left" with the "Joint Plate" set in the Step 4 under the left
bottom of the main unit until the notches hit the rubber feet of the printer.

Figure 4-54. "Joint Plate" Attachment


Figure 4-55. "Base, Left" Setting

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 247


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

6. Insert the "Base, Right" under the right bottom of the main unit until the
noches hit the rubber feet of the printer.

C H E C K After the "Base, Left", "Base, Right", and the "Joint Plate"
P O IN T are set up.

Figure 4-56. "Base, Right" Setting

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 248


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

C A U T IO N
When lifting the printer in the steps given below, pay
attention to the followings:
„ Hold the front panel section of the printer. Holding other
section could cause the malfunction of the printer.
„ This printer is heavy (approximately 40 kg). Hold the
front panel section at the front of the printer securely
and make sure that the grip is solid before lifting the
printer. Dropping the printer may cause injury or
malfunction of the printer.
„ Take care not to get your hand sandwiched when you
lower the printer.

7. Hold the front panel section at the front of the printer, lift the printer upward,
and insert the right tab of the "Joint Plate" into the slit of the "Base, Right".

Figure 4-57. "Joint Plate" Attachment

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 249


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

8. Hold the front panel section of the printer, lift the printer upward and keep it
there, and then set the "Stand" in both the rubber foot on the bottom of the Step 8-1/Step 9
printer and the "Base, Left", following the steps below.
8-1. Fit the rubber foot of the printer into the foot receiver at the upper
end of the "Stand".
8-2. Fit the lower end of the "Stand" into the protrusion of the "Base,
Left". (Be sure that the concave portion of the "Stand" matches the
convex portion of the "Base, Left".)
9. Tilt the printer upward a little (the same amount of the spring stroke of the
left stand ) as holding the front panel section of the printer, and set the
"Stand" in both the rubber foot on the right bottom of the printer and the tab
of the "Base, Right", using the same steps in Step 8.

Step 8-2/Step 9

Figure 4-58. "Stand" Setting

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 250


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

10. Remove the two screws that secure the "ASF Unit" on the right side of the
printer and the two screws that secure "Duct, Air, C, Assy".
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 4 pcs.

C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, do not keep the "Duct,
Air, C, Assy" too far from the printer because harnesses are
connected between them.

11. Remove the two screws that secure the "ASF Unit" while keeping the
"Duct, Air, C, Assy" separated.
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 2 pcs.

Step 10
C.B.S. 3x6

Step 11

C.B.S. 3x6

Figure 4-59. Screws Securing "ASF Unit"

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 251


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

12. While holding the "ASF Unit", remove the three screws that secure the
"ASF Unit" on the left side of the printer.
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 3 pcs.

C.B.S. 3x6

Figure 4-60. Screws Securing "ASF Unit"

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 252


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

13. Remove the "ASF Unit" downward from the printer.

When installing the "ASF Unit" to the printer, do not let the
connector of the "ASF Phase Sensor" located at the left side
of the "ASF Unit" contact with the cutout of the frame of the
main unit.

ASF Phase Sensor

ASF Unit

A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) and Figure 4-61. "ASF Unit" Removal
R E Q U IR E D perform specified adjustments after replacing the "ASF
Unit".

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 253


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.6.2 Roller Assy., LD, Left / Roller Assy., LD, Right


Lever, Hopper, Release
1. Remove "ASF Unit" (p246).
2. Remove the "E-ring, 6", and pull out the "Gear, 44.74" and "Lever, Hopper,
Release" from the "Shaft, Roller, LD".
Gear, 44.47
When installing the "Gear, 44.74" and "Lever, Hopper,
Release" to the "Shaft, Roller, LD", face the surfaces with the E-ring, 6
longer ribs of both the "Gear, 44.74" and the "Lever, Hopper,
Release" toward the "ASF Unit" side, and match the
respective ribs of the shaft holes with the grooves of the
"Shaft, Roller, LD".

Figure 4-62. "Gear, 44.47" and "Lever, Hopper, Release" Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 254


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

3. Remove the three screws that secure the "Frame, ASF, Right" from the
bottom of the "ASF Unit", and remove the "Frame, ASF, Right" from the Freme, ASF, Right Hopper
hole shown in Figure 4-64 as holding the "Hopper"
„ C.B.P. 3x8: 3 pcs.

When installing the "Frame, ASF, Right", make sure that both
the grooves of the "Cover, Roller, LD, Left" and the "Cover,
Roller, LD, Right" are engaged with the rail of the "Frame,
ASF, Lower".

Figure 4-64. "Frame, ASF, Right" Removal

4. Push down and release the tab that secures the "Wheel, Detector" using a
precision driver or a similar tool, and then remove the "Wheel, Detector".
(Refer to Figure 4-65.)
Wheel, Detector

C.B.P. 3x8

Figure 4-65. "Wheel, Detector" Removal


Figure 4-63. Screws Securing "Frame, ASF, Right"

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 255


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5. Rotate the "Bushing, Lock, 11.4" to the direction shown in Figure 4-66 to
match the rib with the frame hole, release the boss at the lower part from
the frame, and then remove the "Bushing, Lock, 11.4" from the "Shaft,
Roller, LD". (The "Ground Spring, ASF" will be released at the same time.)

When installing the "Ground Spring, ASF", install the


"Bushing, Lock, 11.4" first, insert the both ends of the
Rib Hole
"Ground Spring, ASF" into the right and left holes on the
bottom of the "Bushing, Lock, 11.4", and then hitch the other
side of the "Ground Spring, 11.4" to the tab located on the
bottom of the "Bushing, Lock, 11.4".

Bushing, Lock, 11.4

Tab
Bushing, Lock, 11.4

Ground Spring, ASF

1
3

Figure 4-66. "Bushing, Lock, 11.4" Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 256


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

6. Detach the resin plate that is attached on the "Holder, Edge Guide, Left",
release the tab that secures "Holder, Edge Guide, Left" to the "Cover, Holder, Edge Guide, Left
Roller, LD, Left", and then remove the "Holder, Edge Guide, Left" to the
right. (Refer to Figure 4-67.)
7. Release the tab that secures the "Roller Assy., LD, Left" to the "Cover,
Roller, LD, Left", then remove the "Roller Assy., LD, Left" sliding it
rightward. (Refer to Figure 4-68.)

Tabs

Resin Plate

Figure 4-67. Holder, Edge Guide, Left Removal

Tab

Figure 4-68. Roller Assy., LD, Left Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 257


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

8. Remove the "E-ring, 6" from the "Shaft, Roller, LD".


Roller Assy., LD, Right
9. Draw out the "Shaft, Roller, LD" to the direction shown in Figure 4-69 to
remove both the "Roller Assy., LD, Left" and the "Roller Assy., LD, Right". Compression Spring, 0.407

Holder, Edge Guide, Left


All the parts shown in Figure 4-69 are released when Roller Assy., LD, Left
drawing the "Shaft, Roller, LD". Install the parts to the
"Shaft, Roller, LD" in the correct order and direction, refering Compression Spring, 0.4
the Figure 4-69.
Shaft, Roller, LD Roller, Sub, LD, Middle

Roller, Sub, LD, Middle

Compression Spring, 0.4

Drawing Direction of Shaft

E-ring

Figure 4-69. "Roller Assy., LD, Left" and "Roller Assy., LD, Right"
Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 258


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.6.3 Mount Assy., Plate, Motor, ASF, SP


E-ring Spur Gear, 16
1. Remove "Box Assy., Flushing / Pump Unit" (p316).
2. Detach E-ring and then remove "Spur Gear, 16".(Refer to Figure 4-70.)

Screwdriver
insertion hole

Figure 4-70. Spur Gear, 16 Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 259


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

3. Insert screwdriver through hole at lower right of "Spur Gear, 16" removed
Step 4
in Step 2 and remove the screw securing "Mount Assy., Plate, Motor, ASF, C.B.S. 3x6
SP".
„ C.B. 3x8: 1 pc.
4. Remove the two screws securing "Mount Assy., Plate, Motor, ASF, SP"
and then remove "Mount Assy., Plate, Motor, ASF, SP".
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 1 pc.

Step 3
C.B. 3x8

Step 4
Mount Assy., Plate, Motor, ASF, SP C.B.S. 3x6

Figure 4-71. Mount Assy., Plate, Motor, ASF, SP Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 260


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Install "Mount Assy., Plate, Motor, ASF, SP" following the 3. Insert shaft of frame while aligning it with installation
steps below. hole of "Mount Assy., Plate, Motor, ASF, SP".
1. "Combination Gear 12, 22.4" may fall from the "Mount
Assy., Plate, Motor, ASF, SP" when removing it. If this
happens, properly install the gear as shown below.

Combination Gear 12, 22.4


Shaft

Installation Hole

4. Confirm that "Spur Gear, 19.2" and "Combination Gear


13.6, 28.8" are engaged.
2. Install "Mount Assy., Plate, Motor, ASF, SP" in a way that
avoids interference between "Combination Gear 12,
Spur Gear, 19.2
22.4" and "Spur Gear, 18".

Gear Engagement
Spur Gear, 18 Location

Location of Interference
Combination Gear 13.6, 28.8

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 261


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5. Tighten screws so that there are no gaps at the locations


listed below.
• Between frame and "Heat Dissipation Plate, Motor,
ASF".
• Between frame and "Mount Assy., Plate, Motor, ASF,
SP".

Confirm close fit of


components

Heat Dissipation
Plate, Motor, ASF

C.B.S. 3x6

A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) and


R E Q U IR E D perform specified adjustments after replacing the "Mount
Assy., Plate, Motor, ASF, SP".

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 262


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.6.4 ASF Phase Sensor


1. Remove "Cover, Side, Left" (p216).
2. Remove the four screws securing "Cover, Motor, PF" and then remove
C.B.S. 3x6
"Cover, Motor, PF" in the upward direction while avoiding the "Roller, PF". Roller, PF
(Refer to Figure 4-72.)
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 4 pcs. Cover, Motor, PF
2
3. Rotate "Lever, Hopper, Release" with hand and align the "Wheel, Detector"
notch with the "ASF Phase Sensor" detection section.
(Refer to Figure 4-73.) 1

C.B.S. 3x6

Figure 4-72. Cover, Motor, PF Removal

ASF Phase Sensor

Lever, Hopper, Release


Notch and
Detection Section
Wheel, Detector

Figure 4-73. Wheel, Detector Removal Position

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 263


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4. Use a tool such as a precision screwdriver to press down on and release


the hook securing the "Wheel, Detector", and remove the "Wheel,
Detector". (Refer to Figure 4-74.)
5. Disconnect the connector from the "ASF Phase Sensor". 2
(Refer to Figure 4-75.)
6. Release the two tabs securing the "ASF Phase Sensor" and remove the
"ASF Phase Sensor". 1
(Refer to Figure 4-75.)

Hook

Figure 4-74. Wheel, Detector Removal

Tabs

2
1

Connector

Figure 4-75. ASF Phase Sensor Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 264


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.6.5 ASF Paper Sensor


1. Remove PCB Unit. (Refer to "4.2.4.1 C593 MAIN Board" (p226).)
2. Release "ASF Paper Sensor" harness from clamp.
Clamp
3. Release the two tabs securing "ASF Paper Sensor" and then release "ASF
ASF Paper Sensor
Paper Sensor".
4. Disconnect connector from "ASF Paper Sensor".

Connector

Harness

Figure 4-76. ASF Paper Sensor Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 265


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.7 Carriage Mechanism Ink Tube Unit

4.2.7.1 Carriage Unit

C H E C K This section explains the working procedure using the "CR


P O IN T SUS PLATE SUPPORT TOOL" shown in the figure below.
The "CR SUS PLATE SUPPORT TOOL" is a tool that holds
and fixes the SUS plate which is on the CR guide shaft to
prevent it being deformed or damaged by the bearing
installed in the "Carriage Unit" when installing/removing the
"Carriage Unit" to/from the CR shaft. Use the CR SUS PLATE
SUPPORT TOOL in any way possible.

CR SUS PLATE SUPPORT


TOOL (1400023) C.B.P. 3x12

Figure 4-77. Screws Securing Ink Tube Unit

1. Remove "Scale, CR" (p281). 1

2. Remove "C593_SUB Board" (p234).


3. Remove the two screws that secure the "Ink Tube Unit".
(Refer to Figure 4-77.)
„ C.B.P. 3x12: 2 pcs.
4. Tilt the "Ink Tube Unit" backward to release the three tabs securing its
bottom ( ), and then lift and remove the "Ink Tube Unit"( ).
(Refer to Figure 4-78.)

Figure 4-78. Releasing Tabs on the Bottom of Ink Tube Unit

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 266


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

When installing the "Ink Tube Unit", be sure to check the „ Match the two positioning holes and the two dowels of
followings. the "Ink Tube Unit" and "Carriage Unit".
„ Release the "Belt, CR" tension (Refer to "4.2.7.2 Motor
Assy., CR" (p270).), and sandwich the "Belt, CR" with the
"Carriage Unit" and the "Ink Tube" at between the two
red lines marked on the reverse side of the belt. If the
belt is sandwiched at the right position, a bending will
appear between the two red lines.

Red lines

„ The "Ink Tube Unit" should be installed with its


mounting plate facing forward.

Ground Plate

„ Do not get harnesses sandwiched between the "Ink Tube


Unit" and the "Carriage Unit".
„ Securely hitch the three tabs of the "Ink Tube Unit" to the
installation holes of the "Carriage Unit".

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 267


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5. Remove the "Tension Spring, 3.81" from the hooks of both the "Head Unit"
and the "Lever, Inclination". (Refer to Figure 4-79.) When installing the "Lever, Inclination", follow the steps
below.
6. Remove the three screws and the washer that secure the "Lever,
1. Tighten the Screw A.
Inclination" to the "Carriage Unit to remove the "Lever, Inclination".
(Refer to Figure 4-79.) 2. Attach the "Extension Spring, 3.81".
3. Tighten the Screw C first and then the Screw B.
„ C.B.P. (P2) 3x12: 2 pcs.
„ C.B.P. 3x8 (+washer 3.0x0.5x8):1 pc.
C.B.P. (P2) 3x12
7. Remove the screw securing the "Head Unit" to the "Carriage Unit". Tab
(Refer to Figure 4-80.)
„ C.B.P. (P2) 3x12: 1 pc.
8. Release the harness from the tab shown in Figure 4-80, and move the
"Carriage Unit" toward you.
9. Lift the "Head Unit" together with the "Ink Tube Unit" to remove from
the"CarriageUnit". (Refer to Figure 4-81.)

Figure 4-80. Removal of Screw Securing Head Unit

Extension Spring, 3.81 C.B.P. (P2) 3x12

B
C

Head Unit
C.B.P. 3x8
+washer 3.0x0.5x8
Lever, Inclination

Figure 4-79. "Lever, Inclination" Removal

Figure 4-81. Head Unit Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 268


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

10. Set the "CR SUS PLATE SUPPORT TOOL" on the both sides of the
"Carriage Unit" as shown in Figure 4-82. Carriage Unit
Place the "CR SUS PLATE SUPPORT TOOL" with the left end of its front
tab set on the "Shaft, Front" and the right end of its rear hook set on the
"Shaft, Rear", and then install them in a twisting motion as shown in Figure 2
4-82.

C A U T IO N
Be sure to install the "CR SUS plate" as shown in Figure 4-82
or its tab may get bent.

Shaft, Rear
1

11. Remove the "Carriage Unit" by following steps below.


11-1. Pull the "Carriage Unit" toward you and compress it to the "Shaft,
Front" ( ) to make the bearings that are attached on the rear of
the "Carrigage Unit" apart from the "Shaft, Rear".
11-2. Lift the rear of the "Carriage Unit" upward to release it from the
Shaft, Front
"Shaft, Front" ( ), lift the front of the "Carriage Unit" so that it is
released from the "Shaft, Front", and then remove the "Carriage
Unit".

A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) and


R E Q U IR E D perform specified adjustments after replacing or removing
CR SUS PLATE SUPPORT TOOL
the "Carriage Unit".

Figure 4-82. Carriage Unit Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 269


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.7.2 Motor Assy., CR


1. Remove "Cover, Side, Left" (p216).
2. Remove "Cover, Side, Right" (p217).
3. Disconnect the connector from the "Motor Assy., CR".
4. Slide carriage to the center of the printer.
(Refer to "4.2.4.3 C593_SUB Board" (p234).)

C H E C K When performing the following steps, note the position set Connector
P O IN T on the scale of "Holder, Pulley". Returning to this same
position when installing the "Belt, CR" will reduce the time
needed for belt adjustment.

Figure 4-83. Disconnecting the CR Motor Connector

Belt, CR

5. While pushing up "Lever, Lock, PG", loosen the CR Tension Installation


screw and release the tension of "Belt, CR".
Lever, Lock, PG Screw
C A U T IO N
When performing the following step, be careful not to
scratch the "Motor Assy., CR" pinion gear.

Figure 4-84. Releasing Tension of Belt, CR

6. Release "Belt, CR" from the pinion gear of "Motor Assy., CR".

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 270


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

7. Remove the two screws securing the "Motor Assy., CR" and remove the
"Motor Assy., CR". (Refer to Figure 4-85.)
„ C.C. 3x6: 2 pcs.
Belt, CR C.C. 3x6

A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) and


R E Q U IR E D perform specified adjustments after installing or replacing
the "Motor Assy., CR".

Figure 4-85. Motor Assy., CR Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 271


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.7.3 Harness, CR Harness Tab


1. Remove “Release, Lever Unit”. (Refer to "4.2.9.1 Release Unit" (p343).)
2. Disconnect "Motor Assy., CR" harness (CN15: white, 2 pin) from the "C533
MAIN Board", and peel the acetate tape to release the harness. (Refer to
"4.2.4.1 C593 MAIN Board" (p226).)
3. Release the “Motor Assy., CR” harness from the “Paper Guide, Lower” tab
and the two channels. (Refer to Figure 4-86.) Channels

4. Peel two pieces of acetate tape and release “Motor Assy., CR” harness,
and then pull it out through the hole of the frame.(Refer to Figure 4-87.)
5. Cut the tying band and release the “Motor Assy., CR” harness.(Refer to
Figure 4-87.)

Figure 4-86. Releasing the Harness_1

Acetate Tape

Tying Band

Figure 4-87. Releasing the Harness_2

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 272


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

6. Release the "Motor Assy., CR" harness from the four cramps, four pieces
of acetate tape and the tab on the frame. (Refer to Figure 4-88.)
Acetate Tape (x3)
7. Disconnect the connector from “Motor Assy., CR” and remove “Harness,
CR”.(Refer to Figure 4-83.)

Clamps

Acetate Tape Tab

Motor Assy., CR Fasten tube to motor end surface

Figure 4-88. Releasing the Harness_3

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 273


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.7.4 Motor Assy., PG Sheet, Ink, Stopper, C


1. Remove "Cover, Side, Right" (p217).
2. Peel off the acetate tape and release the tab at the lower part of the
"Sheet, Ink, Stopper, C" from the U-shaped cutout of the "Frame, Base,
Side, Right". (Refer to Figure 4-89.)
3. Disconnect relay connector. (Refer to Figure 4-90.)
4. Remove the acetate tape securing the harness, and release "Harness,
CSIC" and "Motor Assy., PG" harness from "Duct, Air, C" hook.
(Refer to Figure 4-90.)
5. Release "Motor Assy., PG" harness and "Mount Assy., Plate, Motor, ASF,
SP" harness from the U-shaped cutout of the "Frame, Base, Side, Right".
(Refer to Figure 4-90.)
Frame, Base, Side, Right
6. Peel acetate tape and release "PG Motor" harness. (Refer to Figure 4-90.)

Figure 4-89. Sheet, Ink, Stopper, C Release

Step 4

Step 3

Motor Assy., PG Harness

Harness, CSIC
Duct, Air, C
Figure 4-90. Releasing the Harness

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 274


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

7. Remove the two screws securing "Motor Assy., PG".


(Refer to Figure 4-91.) Relief Hole PG Motor
„ C.C. 3x6: 2 pcs.

C A U T IO N
When performing the following steps, be careful not to
scratch the frame with "Motor Assy., PG" pinion gear. 1
Pinion Gear
2

C.C. 3x6
8. Seen from the right side of the printer, slide the "Motor Assy., PG" through
the upper right relief hole and then remove the "Motor Assy., PG" inward
while passing the pinion gear through the relief hole.
(Refer to Figure 4-91.)

Install "PG Motor" with the circuit board facing downward.

Figure 4-91. Motor Assy., PG Removal

Circuit Board

A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) and


R E Q U IR E D perform specified adjustments after replacing the "Motor
Assy., PG".

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 275


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.7.5 CR_HP Sensor


1. Remove "Cover, Side, Right" (p217).
Clamp
2. Move "Carriage Unit" to center of printer.
(Refer to "4.2.4.3 C593_SUB Board" (p234).) Wrap around

3. Release "CR_HP Sensor" harness from clamp.


4. Unfasten the two upper hooks securing "CR_HP Sensor", release the
Connectoror
lower tab and then release "CR_HP Sensor".
1
5. Disconnect the connector from "CR_HP Sensor".
1

After installing the "CR_HP Sensor", wrap the harness 2 Tabs


around the outside as shown in Figure 4-92.

CR_HP Sensor

Figure 4-92. CR_HP Sensor Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 276


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.7.6 Multi Sensor


1. Remove "Cover, Side, Left" (p216).
2. Move "Carriage Unit" to center of printer.
(Refer to "4.2.4.3 C593_SUB Board" (p234).)
3. Remove the two screws securing "Multi Sensor" to the "Carriage Unit".
(Refer to Figure 4-93.)
„ C.B. (P2) 3x6: 2 pcs.
4. While holding the "Multi Sensor" so as not to drop, and move the "Carriage
Unit" to the left end of the printer keeping clear of the platen.
5. Remove the "Multi Sensor" from the "Carriage Unit" in the downward
direction. (Refer to Figure 4-94.)
6. Disconnect the connector connected to the "Multi Sensor" and remove the
"Multi Sensor". (Refer to Figure 4-95.)

A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) and


R E Q U IR E D perform specified adjustments after replacing or installing a
"Multi Sensor". Figure 4-94. Multi Sensor Removal

C.B. (P2) 3x6

Connector

Figure 4-93. Screws Securing Multi Sensor

Figure 4-95. Connecting Status of Multi Sensor Connector

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 277


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.7.7 PG Phase Sensor


1. Remove "Cover, Side, Left" (p216).
2. Remove "Cover, Side, Right" (p217).
PG Lock Lever
C H E C K As the PG Cam (Bush, Shaft, Rear) and PG Detection Shield
P O IN T Plate operate simultaneously, the shield plate can be rotated
by rotating the PG Cam.

PG Cam
3. Rotate the PG Cam manually so that the PG Lock Lever enter the groove
at the extream end of the PG Cam as shown in Figure 4-96. Doing so
releases the shield plate from the "PG Phase Sensor".
(Refer to Figure 4-96.)

Detection Section

Shield Plate

Figure 4-96. Rotating the Shield Plate

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 278


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4. Remove "Extension Spring, 2.58" from the frame and the two tabs of the
"Installation Plate, Detector, HP". (Refer to Figure 4-97.)
Tabs
5. Disconnect the connector from the "PG Phase Sensor".
(Refer to Figure 4-98.)
6. Release the tabs securing the "PG Phase Sensor" and remove the "PG
Phase Sensor". (Refer to Figure 4-98.)
Extension Spring, 2.58

Installation Plate, Detector, HP

Figure 4-97. Extension Spring, 2.58 Removal

Connector

Hooks

Figure 4-98. PG Phase Sensor Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 279


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.7.8 CR Encoder Sensor


1. Remove "Cover, Rear" (p223).
2. Move "Carriage Unit" to center of printer and remove the "Carriage Cover". FFC
CR Encoder Sensor
(Refer to "4.2.4.3 C593_SUB Board" (p234).)
3. Disconnect the FFC from "CR Encoder Sensor".
4. Remove the screw securing "CR Encoder Sensor" to the "Carriage Unit" Scale, CR
and remove "CR Encoder Sensor".
„ C.P.P. 2.6x6: 1 pc. Shield Plate

C A U T IO N
Do not touch "Scale, CR" when removing "CR Encoder
Sensor".
C.P.P. 2.6x6

Align the two dowels on the "CR Encorder Sensor" with the
two positioning holes on the "Ink Tube Unit". Figure 4-99. CR Encoder Sensor Removal

Positioning holes

Dowels

A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) and


R E Q U IR E D perform specified adjustments after replacing or installing
the "CR Encoder Sensor".

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 280


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.7.9 Scale, CR Left side of the printer


1. Remove "Cover, Side, Left" (p216). Scale, CR Extension Spring, 3.86
2. Remove "Cover, Side, Right" (p217).
3. Move the "Carriage Unit" to the center of the printer.
(Refer to "4.2.4.3 C593_SUB Board" (p234).)
4. At the left side of the printer, remove the "Tension Spring, 3.86" hitched to
the tab on the printer frame and the "Scale, CR".
5. At the right side of the printer, remove the "Scale, CR" from the tab on the
printer frame.

C A U T IO N
A damage to the detection pattern on the surface of the
"Scale, CR" may cause malfunction of the CR encorder. Take
care not to touch the surface of the "Scale, CR" with bare
hands or contaminate it with ink or contact it to the frame,
when handling the "Scale, CR".

Right side of the printer

Scale, CR

Tab

Figure 4-100. Scale, CR Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 281


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.7.10 Pulley, Driven/Shaft, Pulley


1. Remove "Cover, Side, Left" (p216).
2. Remove the E-ring that secures the "Shaft, Pulley" on the left back of the
printer, and then remove the plain washer. (Refer to Figure 4-101.)
E-ring Plain washer
3. While pressing the "Lever, Rock, PG", loosen the CR tension attachment
screw until its tip gets behind the "Pulley, Tension, CR".
(Refer to Figure 4-102.)

Figure 4-101. E-ring and Plain Washer Removal

Pulley, Tension, CR

Lever, Rock, PG Attachment Screw

Figure 4-102. Loosening CR Tension

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 282


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4. Pull the "Holder, Pulley" toward you, and then remove the "Shaft, Pulley"
upward from the front and rear grooves on the "Holder, Pulley" together Assemble
Belt, CR
with the "Belt, CR" and the "Pulley, Driven". (Refer to Figure 4-103.)
5. Remove the "Belt, CR" from the "Pulley, Driven". Groove
6. Draw out the "Shaft, Pulley" from the "Pulley, Driven" to remove the two
polysliders. (Refer to Figure 4-104.)
7. Remove the ball bearings from the "Pulley, Driven".
(Refer to Figure 4-104.)
2

Install the "Pulley, Driven" and "Shaft, Pulley" with the


grooved end of the "Shaft, Pulley" facing the rear of the
Pulley, Driven
printer.

Shaft, Pulley

1
Holder, Pulley

Figure 4-103. "Shaft, Pulley" Removal

Polyslider Ball bearing Pulley, Driven

Ball bearing Polyslider Shaft, Pulley

Figure 4-104. Pulley, Driven and Shaft, Pulley Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 283


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.7.11 Solenoid, CR
1. Remove "Carriage Unit" (p266).
2. Attach the "CUTTER CAP" to the cutter section of the "Carriage Unit".
Tabs
(Refer to Figure 4-110.)

C H E C K The "Cutter Cover", which covers the cutter blade projecting


P O IN T upward from the bottom of the Carriage, prevents injury
during the work.

3. Release the harnesses of the "Solenoid, CR" from the tabs of the "Carriage CUTTER CAP
Unit". (Refer to Figure 4-105.)
Solenoid, CR
4. Remove the screw and the plain washer that secure the "Solenoid, CR",
and then remove the "Solenoid, CR" from the "Carriage Unit".
„ C.B.P.(P2) 3x8 (+ plain washer 4.3x0.8x8): 1 pc.

Route the harnesses of the "Solenoid, CR" on the "Carriage


Unit" properly as shown in Figure 4-105.

A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) and


R E Q U IR E D perform specified adjustments after replacing the "Solenoid,
CR".

C.B.P.(P2) 3x8 Tab


+washer 4.3x0.8.8

Figure 4-105. "Solenoid, CR" Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 284


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.8 Ink System C H E C K „ Be sure to install the "Adjust Plate" to the rear of the
P O IN T "HEAD EXCHANGE SUPPORT TOOL" before removing
4.2.8.1 Printhead
the "Printhead".
C H E C K „ Figures below shows the required tools in replacing the
P O IN T "Printhead".

CUTTER CAP
(1401456)

HEAD EXCHANGE SUPPORT


HEAD EXCHANGE SUPPORT TOOL TOOL (Adjust Plate)
(1294672) (1294672)

CR SUS PLATE SUPPORT TOOL


(1400023)

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 285


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

1. Remove "Scale, CR" (p281).


2. Move the "Carriage Unit" to match the sensor section on the rear of the
"Carridge Unit" with the cutout of the "Cover, Rear".
(Refer to Figure 4-106.)
3. Place the "CR SUS PLATE SUPPORT TOOL" on both sides of the
"Carriage Unit" as shown in Figure 4-82. (Refer to Figure 4-106.)
For the setting of the "CR SUS PLATE SUPPORT TOOL", refer to Figure
4-82 in "4.2.7.1 Carriage Unit (p266)".
4. Release the tension of the "Belt, CR" to remove the "Belt, CR" from the
pinion gear of the "Motor Assy., CR".
(Refer to "4.2.7.2 Motor Assy., CR" (p270).) (Refer to Figure 4-107.)

CR SUS PLATE SUPPORT TOOL

Figure 4-106. CR SUS PLATE SUPPORT TOOL Set Position

Pinion Gear

Belt, CR

Figure 4-107. "Belt, CR" Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 286


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5. Remove the "Carriage Unit" following the order below.


Cover, Rear
(Refer to Figure 4-108.) 2
5-1. Pull the "Carriage Unit" toward you and press it against the "Shaft,
Front" ( ) to make the bearings that are attached on the rear of
the "Carrigage Unit" apart from the "Shaft, Rear".
5-2. Lift the rear of the "Carriage Unit" upward to release it from the
"Shaft, Front" ( ), lift the front of the "Carriage Unit" so that it is
released from the "Shaft, Front", and then remove the "Carriage 1
Unit".
6. Temporarily place the "Carriage Unit" that is removed in Step 5 on both the
"Shaft, Front" and the "Shaft, Rear". (Refer to Figure 4-109.)
Be careful not to make contact

C A U T IO N
Be careful not to drop the "Carriage Unit" because it is hold
in a temporarily unstable state.

Figure 4-108. Carriage Unit Removal

7. Set the "HEAD EXCHANGE SUPPORT TOOL" on the printer at the Carriage Unit
position as shown in Figure 4-109. HEAD EXCHANGE SUPPORT TOOL
Set the "HEAD EXCHANGE SUPPORT TOOL" with its front holes
macthing with the screw positions of the printer. (Refer to Figure 4-109.)

Match the holes of the tool with the


screw positions of the printer
Figure 4-109. HEAD EXCHANGE SUPPORT TOOL Setting

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 287


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

8. Set the "Carriage Unit" on the "HEAD EXCHANGE SUPPORT TOOL".


(Refer to Figure 4-110.)

C H E C K „ When setting the "Carriage Unit" on the "HEAD CUTTER CAP


P O IN T EXCHANGE SUPPORT TOOL", take care not to bend the
"Tube, Supply, Ink". If it get bend, replace with a new
one.
„ Make sure the "Carriage Unit" is installed to the "HEAD
EXCHANGE SUPPORT TOOL" securely.
Make sure that the "Carriage Unit" is completely set into
the position with its bottom is parallel to the tool as seen
HEAD EXCHANGE
from the side of the "Carriage Unit". SUPPORT TOOL

Check Point

Carriage, C

9. Attach the "CUTTER CAP" to the cutter section of the "Carriage Unit".
(Refer to Figure 4-110.)

C H E C K The "CUTTER CAP", which covers the cutter blade projecting


P O IN T upward from the bottom of the Carriage, prevents injury
during the work.

C.P.P. 2.6x8
10. Remove the three screws that secure the "Carriage, C" from the bottom of
the "Carriage Unit".(Refer to Figure 4-110.)
„ C.C.P. 2.6 x 8: 3 pcs.

Figure 4-110. Carriage Unit Setting / Screws Securing Carriage, C

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 288


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, do not keep the
"Carriage, C" too far because harnesses are connected to
the "Carriage, C".

Carriage, C
11. Slowly draw the "Carriage, C" to the directions shown in Figure 4-111 to
separate it from the "Carriage, B". (Refer to Figure 4-112.)

Make sure that the mounting plate of the "Carriage Unit" is in


contact with the one of the "Carriage, C" after installing the
"Carriage, C".

Figure 4-111. "Carriage, C" Removal

Carriage, B Carriage, C

Headrank ID Label Printhead

Figure 4-112. Separation from Carriage, B

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 289


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

12. Remove the three screws that secure the "Printhead", and then remove the
CAUTION: Carriage, C
"Printhead" from the "Carriage, C". (Refer to Figure 4-113.) Head, Harness
„ C.P.P. 2.6x8: 3 pcs.

If the "Absorber, CR" comes off when removing the


"Printhead" form the "Carriage, C", reattach the "Absorber,
CR" to the "Carriage, C" as shown in the figure bilow.

Absorber, CR

C.P.P.
2.6x8
Figure 4-113. Printhead Removal

Print Head Harness, Head


13. Disconnect the two "harness, Head"s from the "Printhead", and then
remove the "Printhead". (Refer to Figure 4-114.)

"Harness, Head" should be connected with its circle-marked


surface facing downward (the nozzle surface).
Upper side: 2 circles
Lower side: 1 circle

A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) and


R E Q U IR E D perform specified adjustments after replacing or removing
the "Printhead". When replacing the "Printhead" with a new Circle Mark
one, be sure to write down the Head Rank ID of the new one
(21 characters in all) which is discribed on the ID Label.
(Refer to Figure 4-112.)

Figure 4-114. Harness, Head Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 290


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.8.2 Valve Assy., Head

A D J U S T M E N T When performing the following work, remove ink out of the Tube, Supply, Ink
R E Q U IR E D ink route before removing the "Valve Assy., Head". Refer to
Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) to know how to remove ink.

1. Remove the "Carriage Cover".


(Refer to "4.2.4.3 C593_SUB Board" (p234).)
Coupling Screw, M7

C A U T IO N
When performing the following steps, pay attention to the
Head Unit
followings:
„ Prepare pieces of cloth in case the ink leaks or spatters
around the printer.
„ Do not allow dust or foreign matters to get into the
"Tube, Supply, Ink".
„ Do not bend the "Tube, Supply, Ink" or damage it with
frame edges.
Figure 4-115. Tube, Supply, Ink Removal
2. Loosen the eight "Coupling Screw, M7"s that secure the "Tube, Supply,
Ink" to remove the "Tube, Supply, Ink" from the "Head Unit".

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 291


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

„ Make sure that the "O-ring, Coupling M7" is attached „ To prevent from both ink leak and damage on the joint
approximately 2mm away from the end point of the screw, be sure to tighten the "Coupling Screw, M7" with
"Tube, Supply, Ink". prescribed torgue and the tool sperified below.
• Tool: Torque Wrench 1.25/1.75 (1277142)
O-ring, coupling M7 • Tightning torque: 1.25 ( ± 0.25) kgf • cm

Approximately 2mm

„ The ink color marked on the "Tube, Supply, Ink"


indicates its own color. Make sure that the marked color
corresponds to the color of the socket before attaching
the "Tube, Supply, Ink".
„ Attach the "Tube, supply, Ink" from the left in the order
below and route it, referring to the figure below.
LK (Y) → LM (M) → LC (C) → PK (MK) → MK → C → M → Y

LK (Y) LM (M) LC (C) PK (MK)

MK C M Y

„ Insert the "Tube, Supply, Ink" all the way seated, then
tighten the "Coupling Screw, M7."

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 292


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

3. Remove the "Head Unit" from the "Carriage Unit".


(Refer to "4.2.7.1 Carriage Unit" (p266).) Plate, Damper

4. Separate the "Carriage, C" from the "Carriage, B".


(Refer to "4.2.8.1 Printhead" (p285).)
5. Draw out the "Plate, Damper" with a plier or a similar tool.
(Refer to Figure 4-116.)

C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, pay attention to the
followings:
„ Do not hold the film area of the "Valve Assy., Head".
„ Do not damage or deform the joint section on the "Valve
Assy., Head" which connects the "Tube, Supply, Ink".

Figure 4-116. "Plate, Damper" Drawing


6. Remove the "Valve Assy., Head" by following the steps below.
(Refer to Figure 4-117.)
6-1. Slide the joint section on the "Valve Assy., Head", which connects
"Tube, Supply, Ink", to remove the joint section.
6-2. Release the tab and remove the "Valve Assy., Head" in the
direction of an allow.
1

A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) and


R E Q U IR E D perform specified adjustments after replacing or removing
the "Valve Assy., Head". Joint Section

Valve Assy., Head

Tab Film Area


(both sides)

1 2

Figure 4-117. "Valve Assy., Head" Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 293


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.8.3 Gutter, Ink

C A U T IO N
When removing the "Gutter, Ink", prepare pieces of cloth in
case the waste ink leaks or splatter inside the printer. Make
sure that the ink is not ejected from the ink ejection route
during the work.

1. Remove "Fan, Blower" (p244).


2. Remove the two screws securing "Duct, Air, D" and remove "Duct, Air, D".
(Refer to Figure 4-118.)
„ C.B.S. (P2) 3x6: 2 pcs.
3. Remove the two screws securing "Duct, Air, A" and remove "Duct, Air, A". Duct, Air, D
(Refer to Figure 4-119.)
„ C.B.S. (P2) 3x6: 2 pcs.
4. Remove the screw securing "Gutter, Waste Ink". (Refer to Figure 4-119.)
Step 2
„ C.B.S. (P2) 3x6: 1 pc.
5. Slide the "Gutter, Waste Ink" to the left, move it downward and then Figure 4-118. Duct, Air, D Removal
remove it to the left side. (Refer to Figure 4-119.)

„ Insert the shaft of the "Duct, Air, D" into the bearing hole
of "Gutter, Ink" to position the "Duct, Air, D".
„ Secure with screws after confirming that "Gutter, Waste Duct, Air, A
Ink" is closely fitted to the printer frame.
Gutter, Waste Ink Step 3

Step 5
Closely Fitted Location

Step 4

Figure 4-119. Duct, Air, A and Gutter, Waste Ink Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 294


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

6. Remove the screw securing "Gutter, Ink".


(Refer to Figure 4-120.)
„ C.B. (P1) 3x4: 1 pc.
7. Remove "Gutter, Ink" by following the steps below. (Refer to Figure 4-121.)
7-1. Slide "Gutter, Ink" to left side.
7-2. Move "Gutter, Ink" right side downward.
C.B. (P1) 3x4
7-3. Pull out "Gutter, Ink" left lower side toward you.

Make sure that "Push Spring, Absorbent Pad, Gutter" is Gutter, Ink
attached to "Gutter, Ink". If it has removed, install it as
shown in the figure below.

Push Spring, Absorbent Pad, Gutter


Figure 4-120. Screw Securing Gutter, Ink

Assembly Catch Assembly Catch

3
2

Figure 4-121. Gutter, Ink Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 295


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.8.4 I/H Left Unit / I/H Lever Sensor (Left)

C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, remove ink out of the
the ink path before removing the "IH Left Unit". Refer to
Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) to know how to remove ink. Hinge Sockets

1. Remove "Panel, Front/Panel Unit" (p219).


2. Open "Cover, I/H, Left".
3. Hold both ends of "Cover, I/H, Left" and disengage each side from the
hinge sockets. (Refer to Figure 4-122.)
4. Remove the screw securing the "I/C, Lock Lever, Knob, Left" and then
remove the "I/C, Lock Lever, Knob, Left".
(Refer to Figure 4-123.)
„ C.B.P. 3x6: 1 pc.
Figure 4-122. Cover, I/H, Left Removal
The "I/C, Lock Lever, Knob, Left" has upward and downward
directions. Install it in the correct direction.
I/C, Lock Lever, Knob, Left

Release Mark: Top

C.B.P. 3x6
Set Mark: Bottom

Figure 4-123. I/C, Lock Lever, Knob, Left Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 296


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5. Remove the four screws securing "Guide, I/H, Left" and remove "Guide, I/
C.B.S. 3x6
H, Left" by pulling forward. (Refer to Figure 4-124.)
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 4 pcs.
6. Remove the screw securing "Installation Plate, I/H Guide, A" and remove
"Installation Plate, I/H Guide, A".
(Refer to Figure 4-125.)
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 1pc.
Guide, I/H, Left

C.B.S. 3x6

Figure 4-124. Guide, I/H, Left Removal

C.B.S. 3x6
Installation Plate, I/H Guide, A

Dowels and Positioning Holes

Figure 4-125. Installation Plate, I/H Guide, A Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 297


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

7. Remove the screw securing "Installation Plate, I/H Guide, C" and remove
"Installation Plate, I/H Guide, C".
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 1 pc.

„ The shapes of "Installation Plate, I/H Guide, A" and


"Installation Plate, I/H Guide, C" differ, so be careful Installation Plate, I/H Guide, C C.B.S. 3x6
when installing them.

Dowels and Positioning Holes

Installation Plate, I/H Guide, A Installation Plate, I/H Guide, C

Figure 4-126. Installation Plate, I/H Guide, C Removal


„ Align "Installation Plate, I/H Guide, A" and "Installation
Plate, I/H Guide, C" dowels (2 each) with frame
positioning holes (2 each).
(Refer to Figure 4-125 and 4-126.)

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 298


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

C A U T IO N
When performing the following step, be careful not to bend
the "Tube, Supply, Ink" or scratch it with the edge of the
frame. Notch Acetate Tape

8. Peel acetate tape and release the four "Tube, Supply, Ink" from the notch Tube, Supply, Ink
of the frame. (Refer to Figure 4-127.)

C A U T IO N
The width of the frame notch allows passage of one tube at a
time. Be sure to release each tube in order.

Slack Direction

„ When installing “Tube, Supply, Ink” to the frame, secure


it with acetate tape. Figure 4-127. Releasing the Tube, Supply, Ink
„ The "Tube, Supply, Ink" should be slackened to the
direction (center of the printer) as shown in Figure 4-127.
„ For the 4-color model, place all the eight “Tube, Supply,
Ink" in the notch on the left frame, and secure them with I/H Left Unit
acetate tape.
9. Remove the two screws securing the front side of "I/H Left Unit".
(Refer to Figure 4-128.)
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 2 pcs.

C.B.S. 3x6

Figure 4-128. I/H Left Unit Front Side_1

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 299


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

10. Remove the six screws securing the "I/H Left Unit" to the pinter.
„ C.B.S. 3x8: 6 pcs.
11. Disconnect the FFCs from the CN1 to CN3 connectors on the “C593_SUB- Step 12
Acetate Tape
D Board”, and pull out the FFCs toward the left side of the printer frame.
12. Peel off the acetate tape that secures the front side of the "I/H Left Unit".
13. Remove the four screws securing rear side of "I/H Left Unit".
(Refer to Figure 4-130.)
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 4 pcs.

Harnesses are routed through the area of screws as shown


by the arrows in Figure 4-130.
When installing the unit, install it without pinching
harnesses by the screw after removing the "Cover, Motor,
PF". Refer to "4.2.6.4 ASF Phase Sensor" (p263).

C.B.S. 3x8

Figure 4-129. I/H Left Unit Front Side_2

Cover, Motor, PF

C.B.S. 3x6

Figure 4-130. Screws Securing Rear Side of I/H Left Unit

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 300


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

14. Disconnect "Harness, CSIC"s (4 connectors: CN38, CN40, CN41, CN44)


and "I/H Lever Sensor (Left)"s harness (CN37: black, 2 pin) from
"C593_SUB-C Board".
(Refer to "4.2.4.5 C593_SUB-C Board" (p238).)
15. Peel two pieces of acetate tape and release the four "Harness, CSIC"s and
"I/H Lever Sensor (Left)"s harness. (Refer to Figure 4-131.)
I/H Lever Sensor (Left) Harness
16. Pull the "I/H Left Unit" forward from the printer while pulling the four
"Harness, CSIC" and "I/H Lever Sensor (Left)" harness from the hole of the
frame.
Harness, CSIC

Acetate Tapes

Figure 4-131. Releasing the Harnesses

Pull harness through this hole

Figure 4-132. I/H Left Unit Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 301


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

„ Make the rear side screw stop tabs stay under the
"Cover, Motor, PF".

Cover, Motor, PF

Screw Stop Tabs

„ The four grounding springs on the top of the "I/H Left


Unit" make contact with the printer frame, so install the
"I/H Left Unit" while lightly holding down the grounding
springs so as not to deform them.

Grounding Springs

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 302


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

17. Pick up and release the two tabs securing the "I/H Lever Sensor (Left)" and
remove the "I/H Lever Sensor (Left)". (Refer to Figure 4-133.)
I/H Lever Sensor (Left)
18. Disconnect connector from "I/H Lever Sensor (Left)"
(Refer to Figure 4-133.)
19. Remove the two screws securing "Cover, Holder, IC, Left" and remove
"Cover, Holder, IC, Left".
(Refer to Figure 4-134.) Tabs Connector
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 2pcs.

„ When the "Ink Lever" is installed against the angle set


location as shown in the illustration, confirm that the two
holes of "Fan Gear, 34" form a line parallel to the bottom
of "Frame, Holder, IC".

Angle Set Location Figure 4-133. I/H Lever Sensor (Left) Removal
Fan Gear, 34

Holes

Ink Lever Parallel Alignment

Cover, Holder, IC, Left


Frame, Holder, IC
Dowels and Positioning Holes

„ Align the two dowels on holder side with the two


positioning holes on the "Cover, Holder, IC".
(Refer to Figure 4-134.)
C.B.S. 3x6

Figure 4-134. Cover, Holder, IC, Left Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 303


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

C A U T IO N
When performing the following steps, be careful of the
„ To prevent from both ink leak and damage on the joint
points below.
screw, be sure to tighten the "Coupring Screw, M7" with
„ As ink may leak or splatter, have cleaning rags ready
the prescribed torque and the tool specified below.
and prevent ink from getting on the surrounding work
• Tool: Torque Wrench 1.25/1.75 (1277142)
area.
• Tightning torque: 1.25 ( ± 0.25) kgf • cm
„ Prevent dust and dirt from getting inside the "Tube,
Supply, Ink".

C H E C K The 4-color model (Stylus Pro 4400) is not equipped with "I/H
P O IN T Right Unit", so all the eight "Tube, Supply, Ink"s are
connected to "I/H Left Unit".
Refer to "4.2.11.1 I/H Left Unit / I/H Lever Sensor (Left) (4-
color model) (p362)", when disassembling the 4-color model
(Stylus Pro 4400).

20. Loosen the four "Coupling Screw, M7" securing the four "Tube, Supply,
Ink"s and then disconnect "Tube, Supply, Ink" from "I/H Left Unit".

„ Confirm that "O-Ring, Coupling M7" has been installed.

Locations where ink tubes are routed

O-Ring, Coupling M7 Coupling Screw, M7

„ The "Tube, Supply, Ink" has been marked with its color.
Install while confirming that the mark matches the
receptacle.
„ Use the following order to install the "Tube, Supply, Ink"
while routing it to the installation location.
M →C → MK → Y
„ Refer to Figure 4-135 and properly route "Tube, Supply, Tube, Supply, Ink
Ink".
„ Firmly insert "Tube, Supply, Ink" into receptacles and Figure 4-135. I/H Left Unit Removal
tighten "Coupling Screw, M7".

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 304


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.8.5 I/H Right Unit / I/H Lever Sensor (Right)

C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, remove ink out of the
ink path before removing the "IH Right Unit". Refer to
Hinge Sockets
Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) to know how to remove ink.

C H E C K The 4-color model is not equipped with this unit.


P O IN T Refer to "4.2.11.2 Cover, Front, Right 4 Color (4-color Model)
(p365)" for information on how to remove the I/H Right Unit.

1. Remove "Panel, Front/Panel Unit" (p219).


2. Open "Cover, I/H, Right".
3. Hold both ends of "Cover, I/H, Right" and disengage each side from the
hinge sockets. (Refer to Figure 4-136.)
4. Remove the screw securing the "I/C, Lock Lever, Knob, Right" and remove Figure 4-136. Cover, I/H, Right Removal
the "I/C, Lock Lever, Knob, Right".
(Refer to Figure 4-137.)
„ C.B.P. 3x6: 1 pc.

The "I/C, Lock Lever, Knob, Right" has upward and I/C, Lock Lever, Knob, Right
downward directions. Install it in the correct direction.

Release Mark: Top

C.B.P. 3x6
Set Mark: Bottom

Figure 4-137. I/C, Lock Lever, Knob, Right Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 305


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5. Remove the four screws securing "Guide, I/H, Right" and remove "Guide, I/
H, Right" by pulling forward. (Refer to Figure 4-138.)
C.B.S. 3x6
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 4 pcs.
6. Remove the screw securing "Installation Plate, I/H Guide, B" and then
remove "Installation Plate, I/H Guide, B".
(Refer to Figure 4-139.)
Guide, I/H, Right
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 2 pcs.

C.B.S. 3x6

Figure 4-138. Screws Securing Guide, I/H, Right

C.B.S. 3x6

Installation Plate, I/H


Guide, B

Dowels and Positioning Holes

Figure 4-139. Installation Plate, I/H Guide, B Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 306


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

7. Remove the screw securing "Installation Plate, I/H Guide, C" and remove
"Installation Plate, I/H Guide, C".
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 1 pc.

„ The shapes of "Installation Plate, I/H Guide, B" and


"Installation Plate, I/H Guide, C" differ, so be careful C.B.S. 3x6
when installing them.

Installation Plate,
I/H Guide, C

Dowels and Positioning Holes

Figure 4-140. Installation Plate, I/H Guide, C Removal


Installation Plate, I/H Guide, C Installation Plate, I/H Guide, B

„ Align "Installation Plate, I/H Guide, B" and "Installation


Plate, I/H Guide, C" dowels (2 each) with frame
positioning holes (2 each).
(Refer to Figure 4-139 and 4-140.)

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 307


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

C A U T IO N
When performing the following step, be careful not to bend
Acetate Tape
the "Tube, Supply, Ink" or scratch it with the edge of the
frame.

8. Peel acetate tape and release the four "Tube, Supply, Ink" from the notch
of the frame. (Refer to Figure 4-141.)
Notch
„ Secure “Tube, Supply, Ink” to the frame with acetate Tube, Supply, Ink
tape.
„ The "Tube, Supply, Ink" should be slackened to the
direction (center of the printer) as shown in Figure 4-141.

Slack Direction

Figure 4-141. Releasing the Tube, Supply, Ink

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 308


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

9. Disconnect "Harness, CSIC"s (5 connectors: CN39, CN42, CN43, CN45,


CN461) and "I/H Lever Sensor (Right)" harness (CN36: white, 2 pin) from
"C511_SUB-B Board". Step 10
Acetate Tape
(Refer to "4.2.4.4 C511_SUB-B Board" (p236).)
10. Peel off four pieces of acetate tape shown in Figure 4-142 and 4-143.

Figure 4-142. Releasing Harnesses_1

Step 10
Acetate Tape

Figure 4-143. Releasing Harnesses_2

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 309


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

11. Remove the four clamps securing the harnesses. (The "Sheet Ink Stopper"
will be released at the same time.)
Clamps

"Sheet Ink Stopper, D" should be attached to the printer


frame with the three tabs of the clamps inside the printer as
shown in Figure 4-144.

Sheet Ink Stopper, D


12. Release both the FFC and the harnesses from the tabs of the printer.
(Refer to Figure 4-145.)

Secured together with Sheet


Ink Stopper, D

Figure 4-144. Releasing Harnesses_3

Tabs

Figure 4-145. Releasing Harnesses_4

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 310


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

13. Peel off the acetate tape binding the FFC to release the FFC.
(Refer to Figure 4-146.)
14. Release the four "Harness, CSIC"s and the "I/H Lever Sensor (Left)"
harness from the two clamps and the acetate tape.
(Refer to Figure 4-147.)

Step 13
Acetate Tape

Figure 4-146. Releasing Harnesses_5

Clamps

Step 14
Acetate Tape

Figure 4-147. Releasing Harnesses_6

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 311


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

15. Move "Carriage Unit" to center of printer.


(Refer to "4.2.4.3 C593_SUB Board" (p234).)
16. Remove the two screws securing rear side of "I/H Right Unit".
(Refer to Figure 4-148.)
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 2 pcs.
17. Remove the two screws securing the front side of "I/H Right Unit."
(Refer to Figure 4-149.) I/H Right Unit

„ C.B.S. 3x12: 2pcs.

C.B.S. 3x6

Figure 4-148. Screws Securing Rear Side of I/H Right Unit

I/H Right Unit

C.B.S. 3x12

Figure 4-149. Screws Securing Front Side of I/H Right Unit

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 312


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

18. Pull the "I/H Right Unit" forward from the printer following the order below
while pulling the "Harness, CSIC" and "I/H Lever Sensor (Right)" harness
2 Paper Eject Unit Pull harness through this hole
from the hole in the frame. (Refer to Figure 4-150.)
18-1. To avoid interference of the printer frame hole and "I/H Right Unit"
shaft, shift the "I/H Right Unit" to the left.
18-2. With the right side of the "Paper Eject Unit" lifted up, pull the "I/H
Right Unit" forward from the printer.
1

The four grounding springs on the top of the "I/H Right Unit"
make contact with the printer frame, so install the "I/H Right
Unit" while lightly holding down the grounding springs so as
not to deform them. Step 18-1
Shaft and Frame interference

Figure 4-150. I/H Right Unit Removal

I/H Lever Sensor (Right)

Grounding Springs

19. Pick up and release the two hooks securing the "I/H Lever Sensor (Right)"
and then remove the "I/H Lever Sensor (Right)". (Refer to Figure 4-151.) Hooks Connector

20. Disconnect connector from "I/H Lever Sensor (Right)".


(Refer to Figure 4-151.)

Figure 4-151. I/H Lever Sensor (Right) Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 313


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

21. Remove the two screws securing "Cover, Holder, IC, Right" and remove
Cover, Holder, IC, Right
"Cover, Holder, IC, Right". (Refer to Figure 4-152.)
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 2 pcs.

„ When the "Ink Lever" is installed against the angle set


location as shown in the illustration, confirm that the two
holes of "Fan Gear, 34" form a line parallel to the bottom
of "Frame, Holder, IC".

Dowels and Positioning Holes


Angle Set Location Fan Gear, 34

Holes

Parallel Alignment

Ink Lever
C.B.S. 3x6
Frame, Holder, IC Figure 4-152. Cover, Holder, IC, Right Removal

„ Align the two dowels on holder side with the two


positioning holes on the "Cover, Holder, IC, Right".
(Refer to Figure 4-152.)

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 314


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

C A U T IO N
When performing the following steps, be careful of the
points below.
„ Ink may leak or splatter, so have cleaning rags ready and
prevent ink from getting on the surrounding work area.
„ Prevent dust and dirt from getting inside the "Tube,
Supply, Ink".

22. Loosen the four "Coupling Screw, M7" securing the four "Tube, Supply,
Ink"s and then disconnect "Tube, Supply, Ink" from "I/H Right Unit".

„ Confirm that "O-Ring, Coupling M7" has been installed.

Locations where ink tubes are routed

O-Ring, Coupling M7

„ The "Tube, Supply, Ink" has been marked with its color.
Install while confirming that the mark matches the Coupling Screw, M7
receptacle.
„ Use the following order to install the "Tube, Supply, Ink"
while routing it to the installation location.
LM (M)→ LC(C) →PK (MK) → LK (Y)
„ Refer to Figure 4-153 and properly route "Tube, Supply,
Ink".
„ Firmly insert "Tube, Supply, Ink" into receptacles and
tighten "Coupling Screw, M7". Tube, Supply, Ink
„ To prevent ink leakage and damage on the Coupling Figure 4-153. I/H Right Unit Removal
screw, be sure to tighten the "Coupling Screw, M7" with
the prescribed torque and the tool specified below.
• Tool: Torque Wrench 1.25/1.75 (1277142)
• Tightning torque: 1.25 ( ± 0.25) kgf • cm

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 315


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.8.6 Box Assy., Flushing / Pump Unit

C A U T IO N
When removing the "Box Assy., Flushing" and "Pump Unit",
ink may leak from the "Box Assy., Flushing" ink discharge
Location of interference
port or the "Pump Unit" waste ink tube. Have cleaning rags
ready and prevent ink from getting on the surrounding work Box Assy., Flushing
area.

1. Remove "Cover, Side, Right" (p217).


2. Remove "Motor Assy., PG" (p274). 3 C.B.S. 3x8
3. Move the "Carriage Unit" to center of printer.
(Refer to "4.2.4.3 C593_SUB Board" (p234).)
4. Remove the screw securing the "Box Assy., Flushing". 1
(Refer to Figure 4-154.)
„ C.B.S. 3x8: 1 pcs.
Rib Waste Ink Pipe
5. Slide the "Box Assy., Flushing" to the right and release the rib as shown in
Figure 4-154 ( ), lift the wast ink pipe upward to pull it out ( ), then
remove the "Box Assy., Flushing" while tilting it forward to avoid
interference with the printer frame ( ).
Induction Duct 2

„ Pass the "Box Assy., Flushing" waste ink pipe through


the hole in the bottom of the frame.
„ Make sure the "Box Assy., Flushing" rib is fitted into the Figure 4-154. Box Assy., Flushing Removal
"Induction Duct" positioning hole.

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 316


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

6. Remove the two screws securing the "Shaft, Transmission, PG Unit" and
then remove the "Shaft, Transmission, PG Unit" by pulling it out of the hole
in the frame. (Refer to Figure 4-155.)
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 2 pcs. Harness

C A U T IO N
Be careful not to scratch the "Shaft, Transmission, PG Unit" C.B.S. 3x6
gear by bumping it against the frame.

„ Align "Shaft, Transmission, PG Unit" positioning hole


with dowel on frame. (Refer to Figure 4-155.) Dowel and Positioning Hole
„ Make sure that the "Pump Phase Sensor" harness is
routed over the "Shaft, Transmission, PG Unit" shaft.
(Refer to Figure 4-155.)

Figure 4-155. Shaft, Transmission, PG Unit Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 317


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

C A U T IO N
When performing the following steps, be careful of the
points below. Extension Spring, 0.262

„ Do not lose "Extension Spring, 0.262". Lever, Lock, DE


„ Use care not to pull "Extension Spring, 0.262" too much,
or it may loose the spring force.
„ Do not touch the "Cleaner, Head" or allow it to contact
other parts. (This could lower print quality due to not
wiping ink normally.)
Tads
Cleaner, Head

Sheet

Figure 4-156. Extension Spring, 0.262 Removal

7. While keeping the sheet turned aside, remove "Extension Spring, 0.262"
from the tabs of "Mount Assy., Plate, Motor, ASF, SP" and "Lever, Lock,
DE". (Refer to Figure 4-156.)
8. Pull the "Lever, Lock, Planetary" toward the outside of the printer, release
the hook on top and then pull out of the "Lever, Lock, DE".
(Refer to Figure 4-157.)

After installing the "Lever, Lock, Planetary", confirm that


"Lever, Lock, DE" moves smoothly by the tension of Lever, Lock, Planetary
"Extension Spring, 0.262". (Check three times.)

Figure 4-157. Lever, Lock, Planetary Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 318


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

9. Remove the "Lever, Lock, DE" by following the steps below.


(Refer to Figure 4-158.)
9-1. Slide it to the right.
9-2. Bend it toward the center. Installation Hole

9-3. Remove the left end from the installation hole. Step 9-1
9-4. Remove "Lever, Lock, DE" while extracting the flag at the right end
from the hole in the frame.

Step 9-3
Step 9-2

Flag

Step 9-4

Figure 4-158. Lever, Lock, DE Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 319


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

10. Disconnect the connector from the "Pump Phase Sensor" from behind the
printer. (Refer to Figure 4-159.) Pump Unit C.B.S. 3x8
11. Free all the harnesses from the U-shaped notch of the "Frame, Base, Side,
Right". (Refer to Figure 4-159.)
12. Remove the four screws securing the "Pump Unit". (Refer to Figure 4-160.)
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 3 pcs.
„ C.B.S. 3x8: 1 pc.
13. Shift the "Pump Unit" to the right side and disconnect the linkage with C.B.S. 3x6
"Combination Gear, 13.6, 28.8". (Refer to Figure 4-161.)
14. Remove "Pump Unit" toward rear. (Refer to Figure 4-161.)

Connector
Figure 4-160. Screws Securing Pump Unit

Releasing Harnesses
Linkage Location

Combination Gear, 13.6, 28.8

Figure 4-159. Disconnecting the Pump Phase Sensor Connector Figure 4-161. Pump Unit Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 320


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

The "Pump Unit" must be reassembled properly. An A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) and
incorrect assembly may cause malfunction of the printer and R E Q U IR E D perform specified adjustments after replacing the "Box
lower the print quality due to poor pumping. Assy., Flushing" and the "Pump Unit".
„ Align the five ribs and front side dowel of the "Pump
Unit" with the six frame positioning holes.
„ Slip the "Pump Unit" frame under the "Guide, Waste
Ink".
„ The sheet should be on the rear side of the printer frame.

Pump Unit Frame Position

Sheet Position

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 321


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.8.7 Guide, Waste Ink


1. Remove "Pump Unit".
Forward Guide, Waste Ink Rearward
(Refer to "4.2.8.6 Box Assy., Flushing / Pump Unit" (p316).)
2. Remove the "Guide, Waste Ink" by following the steps below.
2-1. Push up the "Guide, Waste Ink" from the printer bottom surface to
free the dowel from the frame.
2-2. Release the two tabs by pulling toward the rear of printer and then
remove the "Guide, Waste Ink".

Step 2-2 Step 2-1

Tabs

Dowel

Figure 4-162. Guide, Waste Ink Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 322


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.8.8 Pump Phase Sensor


1. Remove "Pump Unit". Pump Cover
(Refer to "4.2.8.6 Box Assy., Flushing / Pump Unit" (p316).)
2. Remove the two screws securing the "Pump Cover".
(Refer to Figure 4-163.)
„ C.B.P. 3x8: 2 pcs.
3. Remove the "Pump Cover" in the direction of the arrows.
(Refer to Figure 4-164.)

C.B.P. 3x8

Figure 4-163. Screws Securing the Pump Cover

2
1

Figure 4-164. Pump Cover Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 323


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4. Peel off acetate tape.


5. Release tabs securing "Pump Phase Sensor" and then remove "Pump
Phase Sensor".

The "Shield Plate" inside the "Pump Cover" may come off
when removing the "Pump Cover". If it comes off, install it as
Acetate Tape
shown in the illustration below.

Tab
Shield Plate
Tabs

Pump Phase Sensor

Figure 4-165. Pump Phase Sensor Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 324


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.8.9 Holder, FFC


1. Move the "Carriadge Unit" depending on which "Holder, FFC" is removed E D C
with reference to both Figure 4-166 and the table below.

"Holder, FFC" to be removed "Carriage Unit" position


A~B Home position
C~E Left end B

2. Pinch the upper and lower end of the two "Harness, Head"s and the
"Harness, Head, Intermit" with your fingers to make their central parts
A
bowed, and release them from the upper and lower tabs of the "Holder,
FFC".

C A U T IO N
To prevent the "Harness, Head"s and "Harness, Head,
Intermit" from being bent, bow the "Harness, Head"s and Figure 4-166. Holder, FFC
"Harness, Head, Intermit" little by little.

Holder, FFC

Tabs

Figure 4-167. Holder, FFC Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 325


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

3. Release the top and bottom tabs of the "Holder, FFC", and open the 4. Release the top tab of the "Holder, FFC" from the "Guide Plate, Tube", and
"Holder, FFC". remove the "Holder, FFC" backward.

Figure 4-169. "Holder, FFC" Removal

Figure 4-168. Holder, FFC Tabs Release

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 326


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Check the followings after installing the "Holder, FFC".


„ Each part should be properly installed in its prescribed
space of the "Holder, FFC".

Y
M
C
MK
K (PK or MK)
LC
LM
LLK

Harness, Head (x2)


Harness, Head, Intermit

Tube, Supply, Ink


Sheet, SUS
Guide Plate, Tube
Sheet, Tube

„ Move the "Carriage Unit" with hand to make sure that the
"Harness, Head" does not come off.
„ Move the "Holder, FFC; B" from side to side to make
sure it moves smoothly. A reinstallation is needed if the
"Harness, Head" moves together with the "Holder, FFC".

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 327


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.8.10 Holder, FFC; B


1. Move the "Carriadge Unit" depending on which "Holder, FFC; B" is E D C
removed with reference to both Figure 4-170 and the table below.

"Holder, FFC; B" to be removed "Carriage Unit" position


A~B Home position
C~E Left end B

2. Pinch the upper and lower end of the two "Harness, Head"s and the
"Harness, Head, Intermit" with your fingers to make their central parts
A
bowed, and release them from the upper and lower tabs of the "Holder,
FFC; B".

C A U T IO N
Bend the "Harness, Head"s and "Harness, Head, Intermit"
slowly and carefully so as not to fold them down. Figure 4-170. Holder, FFC; B

Holder, FFC; B

Tabs

Figure 4-171. Holder, FFC; B Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 328


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

3. Release the top tab of the "Holder, FFC; B" to open the "Holder, FFC; B". 4. Release the top tab of the "Holder, FFC; B" from the "Guide Plate, Tube",
and remove the "Holder, FFC; B" backward.

Figure 4-172. Holder, FFC; B Tab Release

Figure 4-173. "Holder, FFC; B" Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 329


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Check the followings after installing the "Holder, FFC; B".


„ Each part should be properly installed in its prescribed
space of the "Holder, FFC; B".

Y
M
C
MK
K (PK or MK)
LC
LM
LLK

Harness, Head (x2)


Harness, Head, Intermit

Tube, Supply, Ink


Sheet, SUS
Guide Plate, Tube
Sheet, Tube

„ Move the "Carriage Unit" with hand to make sure that the
"Harness, Head" does not come off.
„ Move the "Holder, FFC; B" from side to side to make
sure it moves smoothly. A reinstallation is needed if the
"Harness, Head" moves together with the "Holder, FFC;
B".

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 330


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.8.11 Harness, Head, Intermit / Harness, Head


1. Remove the "Panel, Front". Cover, Tube
(Refer to "4.2.3.5 Panel, Front/Panel Unit" (p219).)
2. Disconnect the "Harness, Head, Intermit" and the three "Harness, Head"s
from the following connectors on the "C593 SUB-D Board".
(Refer to "4.2.4.6 C593_SUB-D Board" (p240).)
„ CN4: Harness, Head, C
„ CN5: Harness, Head, A
„ CN6: Harness, Head, B
3. Remove the clamp that attaches the FFC to the printer frame at the front of
the printer. (Refer to Figure 4-174.)
4. Release the FFC from the tabs of the "Cover, Tube" and draw out the FFC
from the hole on the front frame of the printer. (Refer to Figure 4-175.)
5. Release the FFC from the tabs of the "Cover, Tube".
(Refer to Figure 4-176.)

Figure 4-175. Release from Cover, Tube_1

Clamp

Figure 4-174. FFC Release

Figure 4-176. Release from Cover, Tube_2

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 331


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

6. Remove the five "Holder, FFC" ("Holder, FFC; B").


(Refer to p325 and , p328.)
2
7. Remove the "Carriage Cover". Tab
(Refer to "4.2.4.3 C593_SUB Board" (p234).)
8. While releasing the upper tab of the "Holeder, FFC, CR" ( ), slide the
"Holeder, FFC, CR" frontward to remove it ( ). (Refer to Figure 4-177.)
9. Disconnect the "Harness, Head, C" from the connector on the "C593_SUB
Board". (Refer to Figure 4-177.) 1

When reassembling the "Holder, FFC, CR", match the


dowels with the positioning holes of the "Carriage Unit" and
install the "Holder, FFC, CR", then secure it with the tab.

Dowels Figure 4-177. Holder, FFC, CR Removal

C593_SUB Board

Positioning Holes

Figure 4-178. Harness, Head, C Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 332


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

10. Peel off the three pieces of acetate tape that bundle the FFCs, then
remove the "Harness, Head, C". (Refer to Figure 4-179.) Acetate Tapes

11. Release the "Harness, Head" from the "Printhead".


(Refer to "4.2.8.1 Printhead" (p285).)
12. Draw out the "Harness, Head"s from the "Carriage Unit".
(Refer to Figure 4-180.)

Figure 4-179. FFC Release

Carriage Unit

Figure 4-180. Harness Head Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 333


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.8.12 Harness, Head, Intermit


1. Remove the "Panel, Front".
(Refer to "4.2.3.5 Panel, Front/Panel Unit" (p219).)
2. Disconnect the three "Harness, Head, Intermit"s from the following
connectors on the "C593 MAIN Board".(Refer to "4.2.4.1 C593 MAIN
Board" (p226).)
„ CN7: Harness, Head, Intermit
„ CN8: Harness, Head, Intermit A
Ferrite Core
„ CN9: Harness, Head, Intermit B
3. Disconnect the three "Harness, Head, Intermit"s from the following
connectors on the "C593_SUB-D Board".(Refer to "4.2.4.6 C593_SUB-D
Board" (p240).)
„ CN7: Harness, Head, Intermit
„ CN8: Harness, Head, Intermit B
„ CN9: Harness, Head, Intermit A Clamps

4. Remove the ten clamps shown in Figure 4-181, remove the Ferrite Core, Clamps
and then release the FFC along the left side of the printer.
Figure 4-181. FFC Release_1
5. Draw out the FFC from the hole on the left frame.(Refer to Figure 4-182.)

The Ferrite Core should be attached between the first and


second clamps from the cutout in the figure below which is
on the backside of the printer.

Cutout

Step 5

Figure 4-182. FFC Release_2

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 334


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.8.13 Tube, Supply, Ink (Y/M/C/MK) on the Left Side of the


Main Unit „ The "O-ring, Coupling M7" should be attatched 2mm
away from the end point of the "Tube, Supply, Ink".
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, remove ink out of ink
path before removing the "Tube, Supply, Ink". Refer to
Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) to know how to remove ink.
Some amount of ink remains inside the "Tube, Supply, Ink"
even after the ink removal. Prepare pieces of cloth in
advance and put a sheet of paper on the work area in case
the ink spatters inside and around the printer. In addition to Approximately 2mm
this, keep the removed "Tube, Supply, Ink" with its head
coverd with a plastic bag during the work. „ To prevent ink leakage and damage on the Coupling
screw, be sure to tighten the "Coupling Screw, M7" with
the prescribed torque and the tool specified below.
1. Remove the "I/H Left Unit", and remove the "Cover, Holder, IC, Left" on the
• Tool: Torque Wrench 1.25/1.75 (1277142)
backside of the "I/H Left Unit".
(Refer to "4.2.8.4 I/H Left Unit / I/H Lever Sensor (Left)" (p296).) • Tightning torque: 1.25 ( ± 0.25) kgf •cm

2. Loosen the "Coupling Screw, M7" that is on the side of the"Tube, Supply, 4. Release the "Tube, Supply, Ink" from both the tabs and tube holder
Ink" to remove the "Tube, Supply, Ink". (Refer to Figure 4-183.) sections of the "I/H Left Unit". (Refer to Figure 4-184.)
3. Remove the "O-ring, coupling M7" and the "Coupling Screw, M7" from the
"Tube, Supply, Ink". (Refer to Figure 4-183.)

Coupling Screws, M7

Tube Holder Sections

Tabs

O-ring, Coupling M7

Figure 4-183. Coupling Screw, M7 Removal Figure 4-184. "Tube, Supply, Ink" Release

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 335


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5. Loosen the "Coupling Screw, M7"s that secure the "Tube, Supply, Ink"s to
the "Head Unit" to draw out the "Coupling Screw, M7"s.
(Refer to Figure 4-185.)
6. Remove the "O-ring, Coupling M7"s and "Coupling Screw, M7"s from the
K C M Y
"Tube, Supply, Ink"s. (Refer to "4.2.8.2 Valve Assy., Head" (p291).)
7. Remove the five "Holder, FFC"s ("Holder, FFC; B").
(Refer to p325 and , p328.)
8. Remove "C593_SUB Board" (p234).
9. Remove the "Ink Tube Unit" from the "Carriage Unit".
(Refer to "4.2.7.1 Carriage Unit" (p266).)
10. Remove the screw that secures both the "Holder, Tube, A" and "Holder,
Tube, B", and separate the "Holder, Tube, A" from the "Holder, Tube, B".
„ C.B.P. 3x8: 1 pc.

Coupling Screws, M7
Hitch the two tabs on the "Holder, Tube, B" to the "Holder,
Tube, A" before tightening the screw.
Figure 4-185. Coupling Screw, M7 Removal
Holder, Tube, B Tabs

Holder, Tube, B

Holder, Tube, A Holder, Tube, A

C.B.P. 3x8

Figure 4-186. Separation Holder, Tube, A from Holder, Tube, B

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 336


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

11. Release the "Tube, Supply, Ink" from the tabs of the "Holder, Tube, A".
12. Remove the three screws that secures the "Cover, Tube" to the printer Tabs
frame, lift it upward, release the three upper tabs, and then remove the
"Cover, Tube".
„ C.B.P. 3x8: 3 pcs.

„ Hitch the three tabs on the "Cover, Tube" to the "Guide,


Tube, CR" before tightening the screws.
„ Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 4-188.

Figure 4-187. Tube, Supply, Ink Release

Tabs

Cover, Tube

2 1 3

C.B.P. 3x8

Figure 4-188. Cover, Tube Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 337


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

13. Draw out the "Tube, Supply, Ink" to remove it from the front side of the
printer.

Tube, Supply, Ink

Figure 4-189. Tube, Supply, Ink Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 338


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.8.14 Tube, Supply, Ink (LK/LC/LW/LLK) on the Right Side


of the Main Unit „ The "O-ring, Coupling M7" should be attatched 2mm
7
away from the head of the "Tube, Supply, Ink".
C A U T IO N
When performing the following work, remove ink out of the
ink path befoe removing the "Tube, Supply, Ink". Refer to
Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) to know how to remove ink.
Some amount of ink remains inside the "Tube, Supply, Ink"
even afetr the ink removal. Prepare a cloth in advance and
put a sheet of paper on the work area in case the ink spatters
inside and around the printer. In addition to this, keep the Approximately 2mm
removed "Tube, Supply, Ink" with its head coverd with a
„ To prevent ink leakage and damage on the Coupling
plastic bag during the work.
screw, be sure to tighten the "Coupling Screw, M7" with
the prescribed torque and the tool specified below.
1. Remove the "I/H Right Unit", and remove the "Cover, Holder, IC, Right" on • Tool: Torque Wrench 1.25/1.75 (1277142)
the backside of the "I/H Right Unit". • Tightning torque: 1.25 ( ± 0.25) kgf • cm
(Refer to "4.2.8.5 I/H Right Unit / I/H Lever Sensor (Right)" (p305).)
4. Release the "Tube, Supply, Ink" from both the tabs and tube holder
2. Loosen the "Coupling Screw, M7"s that secure the "Tube, Supply, Ink"s to
sections of the "I/H Right Unit". (Refer to Figure 4-191.)
remove the "Tube, Supply, Ink"s. (Refer to Figure 4-190.)
3. Remove the "O-ring, Coupling M7"s and the "Coupling Screw, M7"s from
the "Tube, Supply, Ink"s. (Refer to Figure 4-190.)

Coupling Screws, M7

Tube Holder Sections

O-ring, Coupling M7 Tabs

Figure 4-190. Coupling Screw, M7 Removal

Figure 4-191. "Tube, Supply, Ink" Release

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 339


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5. Loosen the "Coupling Screw, M7"s that secure the "Tube, Supply, Ink"s to
the "Head Unit" to draw out the "Coupling Screw, M7"s.
(Refer to Figure 4-192.)
LK LM LC LLK
6. Remove the "O-ring, Coupling M7"s and "Coupling Screw, M7"s from the
"Tube, Supply, Ink"s. (Refer to "4.2.8.2 Valve Assy., Head" (p291).)
7. Remove the five "Holder, FFC"s ("Holder, FFC; B").
(Refer to p325 and , p328.)
8. Remove "C593_SUB Board" (p234).
9. Remove the "Ink Tube Unit" from the "Carriage Unit".
(Refer to "4.2.7.1 Carriage Unit" (p266).)
10. Remove the screw that secures both the "Holder, Tube, A" and "Holder,
Tube, B", and separate the "Holder, Tube, A" from the "Holder, Tube, B".
„ C.B.P. 3x8: 1 pc.

Coupling Screws, M7
Hitch the two tabs on the "Holder, Tube, B" to the "Holder,
Tube, A" before tightening the screw.
Figure 4-192. Coupling Screw, M7 Removal
Holder, Tube, B Tabs
Holder, Tube, B

Holder, Tube, A Holder, Tube, A

C.B.P. 3x8

Figure 4-193. Holder, Tube, A and Holder, Tube, B Separation

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 340


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

11. Release the "Tube, Supply, Ink" from the tabs of the "Holder, Tube, A". 12. Remove the three screws that secures the "Cover, Tube" to the printer
frame, lift it upward, release the three upper tabs, and then remove the
"Cover, Tube".
„ C.B.P. 3x8: 3 pcs.

„ Hitch the three tabs on the "Cover, Tube" to the "Guide,


Tabs
Tube, CR" before tightening with the screws.
„ Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 4-195.

Tabs

Figure 4-194. Tube, Supply, Ink Release

Cover, Tube

2 1 3

C.B.P. 3x8
Figure 4-195. Cover, Tube Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 341


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

13. Draw out the "Tube, Supply, Ink" to remove it form the front side of the
printer.

Tube, Supply, Ink

Figure 4-196. Tube, Supply, Ink Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 342


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.9 Paper Feed Mechanism


4.2.9.1 Release Unit
1. Remove "Cover, Rear" (p223). C.B.S. 3x8

2. Remove the screw securing "Cover, Inner, Release".


(Refer to Figure 4-197.)
„ C.B.S. 3x8: 1 pc.
3. Slide "Cover, Inner, Release" to right side, free the two ribs and remove it
upward. (Refer to Figure 4-197.)
Ribs
4. Remove the two screws securing "Plate, P Cover, Right" and remove
"Plate, P Cover, Right". (Refer to Figure 4-198.) Cover, Inner, Release
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 2 pcs.

Figure 4-197. Cover, Inner, Release Removal


Align "Plate, P Cover, Right" dowel with main frame
positioning hole.

Plate, P Cover, Right


C.B.S. 3x6

Dowel

Positioning Hole
Figure 4-198. Plate, P Cover, Right Removal
.

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 343


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5. Remove the two screws securing "Release, Lever Unit".


(Refer to Figure 4-199.) Install the "Release, Lever Unit" and "Spur Gear, 18" by
following the steps below.
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 2 pcs.
1. Seen through the cut-out hole in the "Release, Lever
6. Lift the "Release, Lever Unit" upward to release the tab, and then remove Unit" to align the "Spur Gear, 18" positioning rib with the
the "Release, Lever Unit" rearward together with the "Spur Gear, 18". "Lever, Release, Roller, Driven" arrow and then install
(Refer to Figure 4-199.) "Spur Gear, 18" into "Release, Lever Unit".

Lever, Release, Roller, Driven


Tab Rib Release, Lever Unit

C.B.S. 3x6

2. Align "Spur Gear, 18" rib edge with "Intermittent Gear,


40" positioning rib and then install "Release, Lever Unit"
Spur Gear, 18
and "Spur Gear, 18" onto the printer body.

Figure 4-199. Release, Lever Unit and Spur Gear, 18 Removal

Position Locator
and Positioning Rib

Intermittent Gear, 40

3. Secure with screw after aligning "Release, Lever Unit" by


tab and rib. (Refer to Figure 4-199.)

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 344


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

7. Confirm that gears of "Intermittent Gear, 40" and "Release, Planetary Unit"
are not engaged. If they are engaged, release engagement by moving
"Release, Planetary Unit". (Refer to Figure 4-200.)
8. Rotate "Intermittent Gear, 40" in clockwise direction and look from the
Intermittent Gear, 40
opposite side of the frame to align the hook and cut-out.
(Refer to Figure 4-201.)
9. Remove "Intermittent Gear, 40" from printer body. (Refer to Figure 4-201.)

C H E C K If "Intermittent Gear, 40" is difficult to remove, use tweezers


Release
P O IN T or a similar tool to push and remove "Intermittent Gear, 40" engaged gears
by way of the hole on the opposite side of the frame. Be Release, Planetary Unit
careful not to scratch "Intermittent Gear, 40".
Figure 4-200. Intermittent Gear, 40 Removal_1
„ Install the "Intermittent Gear, 40" with its positioning rib
matched with the "Shaft, Release, Roller Driven" phase
position.

Shaft, Release, Roller Driven

Tab and Cutout

Step 8

Step 9
Rib Phase

„ After installing "Intermittent Gear, 40" onto "Shaft,


Release, Roller Driven", turn it clockwise so the tab
faces downward. Figure 4-201. Intermittent Gear, 40 Removal_2

Tab

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 345


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

When performing the following step, be careful not to pull Dowels and Positioning Holes
C A U T IO N
the "PT Sensor Unit" too much because a harness is
connected.

10. Remove the four screws securing the "PT Sensor Unit" and remove the
"PT Sensor Unit". (Refer to Figure 4-202.) C.B.S. 3x6 C.B.S. 3x6
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 4 pcs.

Align the two dowels of the "PT Sensor Unit" and the two PT Sensor Unit
main frame positioning holes. (Refer to Figure 4-202.) Screwdriver Insertion Holes

Figure 4-202. PT Sensor Unit Removal

C A U T IO N
When performing the following step, be careful not to pull
the "Guide, Roll Paper" too much because a harness is
connected.

11. Remove the two screws securing the "Guide, Roll Paper" and remove the
"Guide, Roll Paper" along with "Installation Plate, Detector, Rear". (Refer to
Figure 4-203.) Installation Plate, Guide, Roll Paper
Detector, Rear
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 4 pcs.

Align the four ribs of the "Guide, Roll Paper" and the four
main frame positioning holes. (Refer to Figure 4-203.)

C.B.S. 3x6 C.B.S. 3x6


Rib and Rib and
Positioning Hole Positioning Hole

Figure 4-203. Guide, Roll Paper and Installation Plate, Detector, Rear
Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 346


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

12. Remove the two screws securing "Release Unit". (Refer to Figure 4-204.)
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 2 pcs.
13. Pull right side of "Release Unit" toward you, completely remove the right
side of "Release Unit" while freeing the "Release Unit" ribs from the printer
frame cut-out, and then remove the "Release Unit" from the printer body.
(Refer to Figure 4-204.)
Step 13

Release Unit

C.B.S. 3x6 C.B.S. 3x6 Ribs Cutout

Dowel and Positioning Hole Dowel and Positioning Hole

Figure 4-204. Release Unit Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 347


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.9.2 Paper Eject Unit


1. Remove "Panel, Front/Panel Unit" (p219).
Paper Eject Unit

C A U T IO N
When performing the following steps, be careful not to take
hold of the Star Wheels of the "Paper Eject Unit".

2. Turn the "Paper Eject Unit" until the screws that secure the "Paper Eject
Unit" on both sides face forward, and remove the two screws.
(Refer to Figure 4-205.)
„ C.B.S. (P2) 3x6: 2 pcs.
3. Turn the "Paper Eject Unit" until the Star Wheel faces toward you. C.B.S. (P2) 3x6 Dowel and C.B.S. (P2) 3x6
Positioning Hole
(Refer to Figure 4-206.)
4. While avoiding interference with the "Holder, Eject Roller, Right", pull out
the "Paper Eject Unit" toward the front right side from the "Holder, Eject
Roller, Left". (Refer to Figure 4-206.)

Align the "Paper Eject Unit" dowel and "Holder, Eject Roller,
Left" positioning hole. (Refer to Figure 4-205.)
Holder, Eject Roller, Left Holder, Eject Roller, Right

Figure 4-205. Screws Securing the Paper Eject Unit

Step 3

Step 4

Figure 4-206. Paper Eject Unit Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 348


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.9.3 Motor Assy., PF


1. Remove "Cover, Side, Left" (p216).
2. Disconnect "Motor Assy., PF" harness (CN14: black, 2 pin) from "C593
MAIN Board" and peel off the acetate tape to release the harnesses.
(Refer to "4.2.4.1 C593 MAIN Board" (p226).)
3. Release "Motor Assy., PF" harness and other harnesses from the two tabs
and the three grooves on "Paper Guide, Lower". (Refer to Figure 4-207.)
Motor Assy., PF
4. Peel off the pieces of acetate tape to release "Motor Assy., PF" harness
and then pull it through the hole in the frame. (Refer to Figure 4-208.)
5. Remove the two screws securing the "Guide, FFC" and then lower the
"Guide, FFC" along with all FFCs. Acetate Tape (x3)
(Refer to Figure 4-209.)
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 1 pc. Figure 4-208. Releasing the Harness_2
„ C.B. 3x4: 1 pcs.

Guide, FFC FFC


Align the dowel of the frame with "Guide, FFC" positioning
hole. (Refer to Figure 4-209.)

C.B. 3x4
Harness Tabs Paper Guide, Lower

C.B.S 3x6

Channels Dowels and Positioning Holes

Figure 4-207. Releasing the Harness_1 Figure 4-209. Releasing Guide, FFC

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 349


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

6. Release "Motor Assy., PF" harness from clamp shown in Figure 4-210.
(Refer to Figure 4-210.)
C.B.S. (P2) 3x6
7. Release "Extension Spring, 13.05" from "Plate, Motor, PF" hook and frame
hook. (Refer to Figure 4-210.)
8. Loosen the screw securing "Plate, Motor, PF" and release tension of "Belt,
Motor, PF". (Refer to Figure 4-210.)
„ C.B.S. (P2) 3x6: 1 pc. Hooks

When performing the following steps, pay attention to the Scale, PF


C A U T IO N
followings:
„ Be careful not to scratch the pinion gear of the "Motor Belt, Motor, PF
Assy., PF"
„ Be careful not to deform or damage the "Scale, PF" Extension Spring, 13.05
attached to the "Pulley, Roller, PF". Clamp

9. Remove the two screws securing the "Motor Assy., PF". Figure 4-210. Releasing Tension of Belt, Motor, PF
(Refer to Figure 4-211.)
„ C.C. 3x6: 2 pcs.
10. Remove timing belt from pinion gear, pull pinion gear out through hole of Motor Assy., PF
frame and then remove "Motor Assy., PF". (Refer to Figure 4-211.)

A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) and


R E Q U IR E D perform specified adjustments after installing or replacing Pinion Gear
the "Motor Assy., PF".

C.C. 3x6

Figure 4-211. Motor Assy., PF Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 350


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.9.4 P_THICK Sensor (0.8) / P_THICK Sensor (0.3)


1. Remove "Cover, Rear" (p223).
2. Remove "PT Sensor Unit". (Refer to "4.2.9.1 Release Unit" (p343).)
3. Disconnect connectors from "P_THICK Sensors". Tabs
Connector Connector
4. Release the three tabs securing "P_THICK Sensor", and remove the
"P_THICK Sensors".

A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) and


R E Q U IR E D perform specified adjustments after replacing or installing a
"P_THICK Sensor".
P_THICK Sensor (0.8) P_THICK Sensor (0.3)

Figure 4-212. P_THICK Sensors Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 351


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.9.5 PE Sensor
1. Remove "Release Unit" (p343).
Hooks
2. As seen from the printer rear surface, release the two left "Extension
Spring, 8.08"s from hooks on the frame. (Refer to Figure 4-213.) Extension Spring, 8.08 Extension Spring, 8.08
3. Peel off acetate tape securing the FFC. (Refer to Figure 4-213.)

C A U T IO N
When performing the following step, be careful not to
scratch the FFC with the screwdriver.

Acetate Tape
4. Remove the screw securing "Holder, Detector, PE".
(Refer to Figure 4-213.) C.B.S. 3x6
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 1 pc. Figure 4-213. Holder, Detector, PE Removal_1
5. Slide "Holder, Detector, PE" to the rear side, release the two hooks of the
"Holder, Detector, PE" from the two frame notches and then remove
"Holder, Detector, PE" from the frame. (Refer to Figure 4-214.)

Holder, Detector, PE

Figure 4-214. Holder, Detector, PE Removal_2

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 352


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

6. Release the two tabs securing "PE Sensor" and remove "PE Sensor" from
"Holder, Detector, PE".
7. Disconnect FFC from "PE Sensor".
FFC

Checking front and back of FFC and connect properly.

PE Sensor

Tabs

Figure 4-215. PE Sensor Removal

A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) and


R E Q U IR E D perform specified adjustments after replacing the "PE
Sensor".

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 353


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.9.6 Rear Manual Insertion Sensor


1. Remove "Holder, Roller, Unit" (p214).
2. Remove "Paper Guide Assy., M, SP" (p215). Harness Installation Plate, Detector, Rear

3. Release "Rear Manual Insertion Sensor" harness from the two tabs.
(Refer to Figure 4-216.)
4. Release "Guide, Roll Paper" along with "Rear Manual Insertion Sensor".
(Refer to "4.2.9.1 Release Unit" (p343).)
5. Remove the screw securing "Installation Plate, Detector, Rear" and
remove "Installation Plate, Detector, Rear".
(Refer to Figure 4-217.)
Tabs
„ C.B.P. 3x8: 1 pc.

„ Align the two dowels of holder with the two frame


Figure 4-216. Releasing the Harness
positioning holes. (Refer to Figure 4-217.)
„ Do not let the harness slip in "Installation Plate,
Detector, Rear". (Refer to Figure 4-216.)

C.B.P. 3x8

Dowels and Installation Holes

Figure 4-217. Installation Plate, Detector, Rear Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 354


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

6. Release the two tabs securing "Rear Manual Insertion Sensor" and remove
"Rear Manual Insertion Sensor" from "Installation Plate, Detector, Rear".
(Refer to Figure 4-218.)
7. Disconnect the connector from "Rear Manual Insertion Sensor". Rear Manual
Insertion Sensor
(Refer to Figure 4-219.)

„ Route "Rear Manual Insertion Sensor" harness as shown Tabs


in Figure 4-219.
„ Release the harness tube from the "Installation Plate,
Detector, Rear".

Figure 4-218. Installation Plate, Detector, Rear Removal

Tube

Connector

Figure 4-219. Rear Manual Insertion Sensor Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 355


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.9.7 Paper Eject Phase Sensor


1. Pull out "I/H Left Unit" from printer.
(Refer to "4.2.8.4 I/H Left Unit / I/H Lever Sensor (Left)" (p296).) Tabs
Paper Eject Phase Sensor
2. Release the two tabs securing "Paper Eject Phase Sensor" and remove
"Paper Eject Phase Sensor". Connector
3. Disconnect the connector from "Paper Eject Phase Sensor".

Confirm that acetate tape securing the "Paper Eject Phase


Sensor" harness does not cover the hole of the frame.
Acetate tape should
not cover this hole

Acetate Tape
Figure 4-220. Paper Eject Phase Sensor Removal

4.2.9.8 Paper Eject Release Sensor


1. Pull out "I/H Right Unit" from printer.
(Refer to "4.2.8.5 I/H Right Unit / I/H Lever Sensor (Right)" (p305).)
2. Release the two tabs securing "Paper Eject Release Sensor" and remove
"Paper Eject Release Sensor".
3. Disconnect the connector from "Paper Eject Release Sensor".
Tabs
Paper Eject Release Sensor

Connector

Figure 4-221. Paper Eject Release Sensor Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 356


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.9.9 PF Encoder Sensor


1. Remove "Cover, Side, Left" (p216).
PF Scale

C A U T IO N
Be careful not to deform or damage the "Scale, PF" attached
to the "Pulley, Roller, PF".
C.P.P. 2.6x8

Condenser

2. Remove the two screws securing the "PF Encoder Sensor".


„ C.P.P. 2.6x8: 2 pcs. PF Encoder Sensor
3. Disconnect the connector from the "PF Encoder Sensor" and then remove
the "PF Encoder Sensor". Connector

„ Align the two dowels of the "PF Encoder Sensor" with


the two positioning holes on the "Holder,Sensor.

Figure 4-222. PF Encoder Sensor Removal


Positioning Holes Dowels

A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 5 “Adjustment” (p.366) and


R E Q U IR E D perform specified adjustments after replacing the "PF
Encorder Sensor".

„ Do not bend condenser. (Refer to Figure 4-222.)


„ After installing the "PF Encoder Sensor", confirm that
the "PF Scale" is surely inserted into the sensor slit.
„ Confirm that the "PF Scale" is not contacting the sensor.

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 357


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.10 Harness Routing CSIC / IH/ Lever Sensor • Harness


This section explains cautions and points in routing the harnesses. Referring to † Should be connected to the "C593_SUB-C Board" through under the sheet
this section, route the harnesses correctly. For the sections that is not as shown in the figure below.
described here, refer to the corresponding diassembly/assembly procedures.
† Should be secured with the parts below.
4.2.10.1 Harnesses on Left Side of Printer „ Acetate tape: 2 pcs.

PG Sensor • Harness
† Should be secured with the parts below.
Get through under the sheet
„ Clamp: 1 pc.
„ Acetate tape: 1 pc.

Clamp

Acetate tape

Acetate tapes

Figure 4-224. CSIC / I/H Lever Sensor • Harness

Figure 4-223. PG Sensor • Harness

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 358


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Harness, Head / Harness, R1 / Harness, R2 † Should be secured with the parts below.
„ Clamp: 6 pcs.
† Should be routed along the outside of the two "Harness, Head"s and the
"Harness, Head, Intermit" from the " C593_MAIN Board" until they reach
the point where the "Harness, R1" and "Harness, R2" are connected to the
"C593_SUB-C Board", and there, get the "Harness, R1" and "Harness, R2"
through under the two "Harness, Head"s and the "Harness, Head, Intermit".

Connected to C593_SUB-C

Harness, Head /
Harness, Head, Intermit

Harness, R1 / Harness, R2 Clamps

Figure 4-227. Head FFC / Intermit FFC_3


Figure 4-225. Head FFC / Intermit FFC_1
† Secure one end of the sheet to the "Guide, FFC" with two-sided tape.

Guide, FFC

Attachment site

Figure 4-226. Head FFC / Intermit FFC_2

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 359


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.10.2 Harnesses on Right Side of Printer

Routing on the right frame


† Should be secured with the parts below.
„ Clamp: 4 pcs.
„ Acetate tape: 6 pcs.

Acetate tapes

Clamps

Acetate tapes

Figure 4-228. Routing on the Right Frame

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 360


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Routing on the "Duct, Air, C" † Bundle the harnesses and secure them to the shaft shown in the figure
below with a cable tie.
† Route the harness via the tabs on the "Duct, Air, C" † Secure the harnesses with the clamp on the "Duct, Air, C".

Tabs

Cable tie

Clamp
Tabs

Figure 4-230. Routing on Duct, Air, C_2

C A U T IO N
Be careful not to damage or cut the harnesses when cutting
the cable tie off.

Figure 4-229. Routing on Duct, Air, C_1

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 361


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.11 Disassembly/Assembly Unique to 4-color „ To prevent from both ink leak and damage on the joint
Model (Stylus Pro 4000) screw, be sure to tighten the "Coupring Screw, M7" with
the prescribed torque and the tool specified below.
4.2.11.1 I/H Left Unit / I/H Lever Sensor (Left) (4-color model) • Tool: Torque Wrench 1.25/1.75 (1277142)
For this reason, route all the eight "Tube, Supply, Ink"s to the left side of the • Tightning torque: 1.25 ( ± 0.25) kgf • cm
main unit, and secure them 2 each to the "Connecting Screw, M7"s of the ink
holders for each color. Joint, Supply, Ink

1. Perform Step 1 through Step 19 in I/H Left Unit / I/H Lever Sensor
(Left)(p296).

C A U T IO N
When performing the following steps, be careful of the
points below.
„ As ink may leak or splatter, have cleaning rags ready
and prevent ink from getting on the surrounding work
area.
„ Prevent dust and dirt from getting inside the "Tube, Connecting Screw, M7
Supply, Ink".
2. Loosen the "Connecting Screw, M7" that secures the "Joint, Supply, Ink" Tube, Holder, Ink Tube, Holder, Ink
and the "Tube, Holder, Ink", and remove the "Tube, Holder, Ink" from the
"Joint, Supply, Ink".

„ Confirm that "O-Ring, Coupling M7" has been installed.


.

Figure 4-231. Joint, Supply, Ink Removal_1


O-Ring, Coupling M7

„ The "Tube, Supply, Ink" has been marked with its color.
Install while confirming that the mark matches the
receptacle.
„ Firmly insert "Tube, Supply, Ink" into receptacles and
tighten "Coupling Screw, M7"

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 362


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

3. Loosen the "Connecting Screw, M7"s that secure the eight "Tube, Supply,
Ink"s and the four "Joint, Supply, Ink"s, and remove the "Tube, Supply,
Ink"s from the "Joint, Supply, Ink"s.

„ Confirm that "O-Ring, Coupling M7" has been installed.

Tube, Supply, Ink


Joint, Supply, Ink

Connecting Screw, M7

O-Ring, Coupling M7

Joint, Supply, Ink

Figure 4-232. Joint, Supply, Ink Removal_2

„ The "Tube, Supply, Ink" has been marked with its color.
Install while confirming that the mark matches the
receptacle.
„ Firmly insert "Tube, Supply, Ink" into receptacles and
tighten "Coupling Screw, M7"
„ To prevent from both ink leak and damage on the joint
screw, be sure to tighten the "Coupring Screw, M7" with
the prescribed torque and the tool specified below.
• Tool: Torque Wrench 1.25/1.75 (1277142)
• Tightning torque: 1.25 ( ± 0.25) kgf • cm

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 363


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4. Remove the "Connecting Screw, M7" that secures the "Tube, Holder, Ink",
and remove the "Tube, Holder, Ink" from "I/H Left Unit".

„ Confirm that "O-Ring, Coupling M7" has been installed.

O-Ring, Coupling M7

„ The "Tube, Supply, Ink" has been marked with its color.
Install while confirming that the mark matches the
receptacle.
„ Use the following order to install the "Tube, Supply, Ink"
while routing it to the installation location.
Locations where ink tubes are routed
M →C → MK → Y
„ Refer to Figure 4-233 and properly route "Tube, Supply,
Ink".
„ Firmly insert "Tube, Supply, Ink" into receptacles and
tighten "Coupling Screw, M7"
„ To prevent from both ink leak and damage on the joint Coupling Screw, M7
screw, be sure to tighten the "Coupring Screw, M7" with
the prescribed torque and the tool specified below.
• Tool: Torque Wrench 1.25/1.75 (1277142)
• Tightning torque: 1.25 ( ± 0.25) kgf • cm

Tube, Holder, Ink

Figure 4-233. I/H Left Unit Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 364


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4.2.11.2 Cover, Front, Right 4 Color (4-color Model)


1. Remove "Panel, Front/Panel Unit" (p219).
Dowels and Positioning Holes
2. Remove the four screws that secure the "Cover, Front, Right 4
Color", and remove the "Cover, Front, Right 4 Color".
„ C.B.S. 3x6: 4pcs.
2
„ When installing the the "Cover, Front, Right 4 Color",
tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 4-234
4
„ Match the four dowels with the four positioning holes.

Figure 4-234. Cover, Front, Right 4 Color Removal

Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly Procedures 365


5
CHAPTER

ADJUSTMENT
EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.1 Overview 5.1.3 The Part/Unit that Requires Adjustment


Parts/units that require adjustment after being replaced or removed are shown
This section describes the adjustment procedures necessary after replacing
in the table below.
certain parts and explains how to perform those adjustment procedures.
Table 5-1. The Part/Unit that is required Adjustment
5.1.1 Cautions Repair Items (Disassembly/Reassembly Reference Page)
Before beginning the adjustment operation, be sure to confirm the following Main Circuit Board*1 (C593 MAIN Board (p226))
caution items. Power Supply Board (p.233)

C A U T IO N
„ When performing an adjustment, refer to Cleaning Unit*2 (p.316)
"5.1.4 Adjustment Items classified by Part/Unit" and Printhead (p285)
check the corresponding adjustment items and Damper (Valve Assy., Head (p.291))
execution order.
AS Mechanical Unit (Printer Mechanism (SP) (p.242))
„ When performing adjustments, thoroughly check the
cautions shown for the explanation section of each ASF Unit (p.246)
adjustment item. Product operations and functions can Motor Motor Assy., CR (p270)
be adversely effected if the adjustment operations are Motor Assy., PF (p349)
performed improperly.
Pump Motor (Mounting Plate Assy., Motor, ASF, SP (p.259))
Motor Assy., PG (p274)
5.1.2 Advance of Adjustment Sensor Paper Thickness Sensor
When replacing or removing any part/unit listed in "5.1.3 The Part/Unit that (P_THICK Sensor (0.8) / P_THICK Sensor (0.3) (p351))
Requires Adjustment", refer to "5.1.4 Adjustment Items classified by Part/Unit" Multi Sensor (p277)
and perform required operations in proper order without omitting steps.
CR Encoder Sensor (p280)

Is the replaced or removed part/ Rear Sensor (PE Sensor (p352))


NO No adjustments necessary
unit listed in "Table 5-1. The Part/ PF Encoder Sensor (p357)
Unit that is required Adjustment"?
Note"*": Adjustment items vary depending on whether NVRAM parameters
YES
“5.2 Mechanical Adjustment (p376)” can be backed up or not.
Refer to the required adjustment
items and adjustment order “5.3 Basic Adjustment (p387)”
presented in "Table 5-2. Required
Adjustment Items/Execution
Order" “5.4 Advanced Adjustment (p430)”

“5.5 Check Results (p436)”

“5.6 Reset Counters (p441)”


Update to latest firmware when necessary
“5.7 Installing Firmware (p444)”

Adjustment Overview 367


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.1.4 Adjustment Items classified by Part/Unit Table 5-2. Required Adjustment Items/Execution Order
Name Adjustment Item RP*1 RM*2 Ref.
Required adjustment items and execution order for each part/unit that has
been replaced or removed is shown in the table below. Main Board 21 Auto Bi-d Adjustment { --- P.430
<Stylus Pro 4800/ 21 Manual Bi-D { --- P.431
Note "*1": RP = Replacement with new part 4880/4880C>
22 Image Adjustment { --- P.439
"*2": RM = Removal only (Backup = NG)
23 Cutter Pressure Adjustment { --- P.392
Table 5-2. Required Adjustment Items/Execution Order 24 Writing MAC Address { --- P.447
Name Adjustment Item RP*1 RM*2 Ref. Main Board 1 Erasing Firmware { --- P.445
Main Circuit Board 1 Parameter Backup { --- P.409 <Stylus Pro 4400/ 2 Installing Firmware { --- P.445
<common to Stylus 2 4450>
RTC&USB ID&IEEE1394ID 3 Selecting “4-colors” { --- P.445
Pro 4400/4450/ (Backup = NG)
4800/4880/4880C> { --- P.387 4 Device ID setting
{ --- P.446
(Backup = O.K.) (Stylus 4450/4880/4880C only)
Main Board 1 Device ID setting 5 Initial Ink Charge Flag ON/OFF { --- P.408
{ --- P.446
<Stylus Pro 4800/ (Stylus 4450/4880/4880C only) 6 RTC&USB ID&IEEE1394ID { --- P.387
4880/4880C> 2 Initial Ink Charge Flag ON/OFF { --- P.408 7 Check Alignment { --- P.437
(Backup = NG)
3 RTC&USB ID&IEEE1394ID { --- P.387 8 1000mm Feed Adjustment { --- P.407
4 Head Rank ID { --- P.388 9 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment { --- P.393
5 Rear Sensor AD Adjustment { --- P.407 10 Printhead Slant Adjustment (PF) { --- P.394
6 Check Nozzle { --- P.436 11 PG Adjustment { --- P.383
7 Check Alignment { --- P.437 12 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment { --- P.393
8 1000mm Feed Adjustment { --- P.407 13 Printhead Slant Adjustment (PF) { --- P.394
9 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment { --- P.393 14 Printhead Slant Adjustment (CR) { --- P.397
10 Printhead Slant Adjustment (PF) { --- P.394 15 Multi Sensor Level Adjustment { --- P.389
11 PG Adjustment { --- P.383 16 T&B&S (Roll Paper) { --- P.390
12 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment { --- P.393 17 T&B&S (Cut Sheet) { --- P.391
13 Printhead Slant Adjustment (PF) { --- P.394 18 Platen Position Adjustment { --- P.405
14 Printhead Slant Adjustment (CR) { --- P.397 19 Multi Sensor Adjustment for Auto
{ --- P.402
Nozzle Check
15 Multi Sensor Level Adjustment { --- P.389
20 Auto Uni-d Adjustment { --- P.401
16 T&B&S (Roll Paper) { --- P.390
21 Auto Bi-d Adjustment { --- P.430
17 T&B&S (Cut Sheet) { --- P.391
22 Manual Bi-D { --- P.431
18 Platen Position Adjustment { --- P.405
23 Image Adjustment { --- P.439
19 Multi Sensor Adjustment for Auto
{ --- P.402 24 Cutter Pressure Adjustment { --- P.392
Nozzle Check
20 Auto Uni-d Adjustment { --- P.401 25 Writing MAC Address { --- P.447

Adjustment Overview 368


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 5-2. Required Adjustment Items/Execution Order Table 5-2. Required Adjustment Items/Execution Order
Name Adjustment Item RP*1 RM*2 Ref. Name Adjustment Item RP*1 RM*2 Ref.
Cleaning Unit 1 Reset When Cleaning Unit Change { --- P.443 Damper 1 Ink Discharge { { P.411
Print Head 1 CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment { { P.376 2 CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment { { P.376
2 CR Encoder Sensor Position 3 CR Encoder Sensor Position
{ { P.382 { { P.382
Adjustment Adjustment
3 Cleaning { --- P.412 4 Initial Ink Charge { { P.412
4 Head Rank ID { --- P.388 5 Head Rank ID { --- P.388
5 Check Nozzle { --- P.436 6 Check Nozzle { { P.436
6 Check Alignment { { P.437 7 Check Alignment { { P.437
7 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment { { P.393 8 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment { { P.393
8 Printhead Slant Adjustment (PF) { --- P.394 9 Print Head Slant Adjustment (PF) { --- P.394
9 PG Adjustment { --- P.383 10 PG Adjustment { { P.383
10 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment { { P.393 11 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment { { P.393
11 Printhead Slant Adjustment (PF) { --- P.394 12 Printhead Slant Adjustment (PF) { --- P.394
12 Printhead Slant Adjustment (CR) { --- P.397 13 Printhead Slant Adjustment (CR) { --- P.397
13 Auto Uni-d Adjustment { --- P.401 14 Auto Uni-d Adjustment { --- P.401
14 Auto Bi-d Adjustment { --- P.430 15 Auto Bi-d Adjustment { --- P.430
15 Manual Bi-D { { P.431 16 Manual Bi-D { { P.431
16 Image Adjustment { { *3 17 Image Adjustment { { *3
17 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) { --- P.414 AS Mechanical 1 NVRAM Back Up and Write { --- P.409
18 Reset When Printhead Change { --- P.442 Unit 2 Destination Setting { --- P.434
ASF Unit 1 Reset ASF Counter { --- P.442
Motor Assy., CR 1 CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment { { P.376
2 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment { { P.393
3 T&B&S (Roll Paper) { { P.390
4 T&B&S (Cut Sheet) { { P.391
5 Platen Position Adjustment { { P.405
6 Auto Uni-d Adjustment { { P.401
7 Auto Bi-d Adjustment { { P.430
8 Reset When CR Unit Change { --- P.442

Adjustment Overview 369


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 5-2. Required Adjustment Items/Execution Order


Name Adjustment Item RP*1 RM*2 Ref.
Motor Assy., PF 1 PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment { { P.378
2 T&B&S (Roll Paper) { { P.390
3 T&B&S (Cut Sheet) { --- P.391
4 Reset PF Motor Counter { --- P.441
5 Reset Paper Ejection Switching/PG
{ --- P.441
Switching Counter
6 Reset Paper Ejection Switching/Reset
{ --- P.441
PG Switching Counter
Pump Motor 1 Reset When Cleaning Unit Change { --- P.443
Motor Assy., PG 1 Reset Paper Ejection Switching/Reset
{ --- P.441
PG Switching Counter
Paper Thickness 1 Paper Thickness Sensor Adjustment
{ { P.380
Sensor
Multi Sensor 1 Multi Sensor Position Adjustment { { P.385
2 Multi Sensor Level Adjustment { { P.389
3 T&B&S (Roll Paper) { --- P.390
4 T&B&S (Cut Sheet) { --- P.391
5 Platen Position Adjustment { { P.405
6 Multi Sensor Adjustment for Auto
{ { P.402
Nozzle Check
7 Auto Uni-d Adjustment { { P.401
8 Auto Bi-d Adjustment (P.G. 1.2) { { P.430
CR Encoder 1 CR Encoder Sensor Position
{ --- P.382
Sensor Adjustment
Rear Sensor 1 Rear Sensor Adjustment { --- P.407
PF Encoder 1 1000mm Feed Adjustment { --- P.407
Sensor 2 T&B&S (Roll Paper) { --- P.390
3 T&B&S (Cut Sheet) { --- P.391
4 PF Micro Feed Adjustment Bi-D { --- P.435

Adjustment Overview 370


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.1.5 Adjustment Item


Printer adjustment items and their adjustment classification descriptions are shown in the tables below.
Note "*1": AU = Adjustment program (utility)
"*2": M2 = Maintenance Mode 2 (Refer to "1.4.6 Maintenance Mode 2 (p90)" )
"*3": AT = Adjustment tool (Not including program tools)

MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
Table 5-3. Mechanical Adjustment
Method
Adjustment Item Description Ref.
AU*1 M2*2 AT*3
CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment Adjusts the CR Timing Belt to the required tension. --- --- { P.376
PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment Adjusts the PF Timing Belt to the required tension. --- --- { P.378
Paper Thickness Sensor Adjustment Adjusts the installation position of the sensor so it can accurately detect paper thickness. --- { { P.380
CR Encoder Sensor Position Adjustment Adjusts the CR Scale position in relation to the CR Encoder Sensor. --- --- --- P.382
PG Adjustment Adjusts the interval between the print head and the platen. --- { { P.383
Multi Sensor Position Adjustment Adjusts the installation position of the Multi Sensor so the distance between the Multi Sensor and the
--- --- { P.385
platen will be acceptable.

STANDARD ADJUSTMENT
Table 5-4. Standard Adjustment
Method
Adjustment Item Description Ref.
AU*1 M2*2 AT*3
RTC&USB ID&IEEE1394 ID Initializes the RTC, and writes both the USB ID and the IEEE 1394 ID. { --- --- P.387
Head Rank ID Writes the Head Rank ID. { --- --- P.388
Multi Sensor Level Adjustment Adjust the light receiving level of the Multi Sensor. { --- --- P.389
T&B&S (Roll Paper) This adjusts the printing position in relation to the paper surface for roll paper. { --- --- P.390
T&B&S (Cut Sheet) This adjusts the printing position in relation to the paper surface for cut sheet. { --- --- P.391
Cutter Pressure Adjustment Adjusts the cut pressure of the paper cutter. { { --- P.393
Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment Adjusts matte black Bi-D to create a standard for all nozzle Bi-D adjustment. { --- --- P.393
Printhead Slant Adjustment (CR) Prints out a PF-directional slant pattern of the printhead, and adjusts the PF-directional slant. { --- --- P.394
Printhead Slant Adjustment (PF) Prints out a CR-directional slant pattern of the printhead, and adjusts the CR-directional slant. { --- --- P.397
Auto Uni-d Adjustment Performs automatic Uni-D adjustment with the Multi Sensor. { --- --- P.401

Adjustment Overview 371


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 5-4. Standard Adjustment


Method
Adjustment Item Description Ref.
AU*1 M2*2 AT*3
Multi Sensor Adjustment for Auto Nozzle Corrects read timing of primary/secondary scan directions when Multi Sensor detects dot missing.
{ --- --- P.402
Check
Rear Sensor Adjustment Determines the AD value to become the reading standard for a new rear sensor and saves it to the Main
--- { { P.407
Board.
Platen Position Adjustment Adjusts the borderless printing position. { --- --- P.405
1000mm Feed Adjustment Prints a 1000mm pattern, measures it and adjusts the band sending amount. { --- { P.407
Initial Ink charge flag ON/OFF Turns ON/OFF the initial charging flag as needed after replacement of the Main Board. { --- --- P.408
NVRAM Back Up and Write Backs up parameters from NVRAM of the old Main Board and uploads them to the NVRAM of the new
{ --- --- P.409
Main Board.
Check Platen Gap Checks whether or not the 4 step PG position is in the correct position. { --- --- P.410
Ink Discharge Discharges the ink in the internal ink route. { --- --- P.411
Initial Ink Charge Performs initial charging. { --- --- P.412
Cleaning Performs cleaning. { --- --- P.412
Rear Sensor AD Adjustment Obtains an AD value that is required as a basis for reading a new rear sensor, and saves the value on
--- { { P.413
the Main Board.
Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) Adjusts the amount of ink droplets { --- { P.414
Writing MAC Address Writes MAC address to the main board. { --- --- P.447

ADVANCED ADJUSTMENT
Table 5-5. Advanced Adjustment
Method
Adjustment Item Description Ref.
AU*1 M2*2 AT*3
Multi Sensor Auto Bi-D Adjustment Performs Auto Bi-D Adjustment by the Multi Sensor. { --- --- P.430
Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment Performs Bi-D adjustment for all nozzles. { --- --- P.431
Destination setting Sets the destination of the product. { --- --- P.434
PF Micro Feed Adjustment (Bi-D) Adjusts paper feed amount to reduce color banding. { --- --- P.435
Copy Bi-D variables Copies PG=1.2 Bi-D adjustment values to other PG setting areas. { --- --- ---
Manual Uni-D Adjustment Performs Uni-D adjustment for all nozzles. { --- --- ---
Copy Uni-D variables Copies PG=1.2 Uni-D adjustment values to other PG setting areas. { --- --- ---

Adjustment Overview 372


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

CHECK RESULTS
Table 5-6. Check Results
Method
Adjustment Item Description Ref.
AU*1 M2*2 AT*3
Check Nozzle Checks for absence of dot missing. { { --- P.436
Check Alignment Checks for absence of misalignment. { --- --- P.437
Print Adjustment Check Pattern Prints all adjustment patterns and adjustment parameters and checks content. { { --- P.438
Cut Sheet Continuous Feed Test Feeds paper from ASF and ejects it to check the ASF operation. { --- --- ---
Print Image Prints an image and performs check of image quality. { --- --- ---
Check Cutting Cuts roll paper and checks for cutter adjustment and wear. { --- --- P.440
Print Image Prints out images to verify the image quality. { --- --- P.439

RESET COUNTERS
Table 5-7. Reset Counters
Method
Adjustment Item Description Ref.
AU*1 M2*2 AT*3
Reset Paper Ejection Switching Counter/ Resets the Paper Ejection Switching Counter and the PG Switching Counter.
{ { --- P.441
Reset PG Switching Counter
Reset PF Motor Counter Resets the PF Motor distance counter. { { --- P.441
Reset ASF Counter Resets the counter that counts the number of papers transferred from the ASF. { { --- P.442
Reset When CR Unit Change Resets the CR Motor Pass number counter. { { --- P.442
Reset When Cleaning Unit Change Resets the Cleaning Unit life counter. { { --- P.443
Reset When Printhead Change Reset the Printhead Life Counter { --- --- P.443

Adjustment Overview 373


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.1.6 Adjustment Tools Note "*1": Adjustments can be performed even if this tool is not on hand, but the
adjustment operation can be more easily performed by using the tool.
The following tools are needed for Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C
adjustments. "*2": Supplied by 1 set as a tool.
"*3": Used when test prints are necessary.
Table 5-8. Adjustment Tools
"*4": Papers indicated with “*4“ are required for performing “PF Micro Feed
Type Name Part Code Note Adjustment (Bi-D)“ if users are using this type of papers.
Hardware Sonic Tension Meter U-505 1231678 --- "*5": These numbers may vary depending on destinations.
Tool Code type microphone (U-505)*1 1277074 --- "*6": Bundled with the adjustment program.
Microtrace#300 1057723 ---
Table 5-9. Ink Cartridge (110 ml)
Paper Thickness Position Tool Thickness:
1282355 Model Number
0.3/0.4/0.8/0.9*2
Multi Sensor Position Tool Thickness: Ink cartridge Stylus Pro Stylus Pro Stylus Pro Stylus Pro
1282354 4800 4880/4880C 4400 4450
2.9/3.0/3.1*2
Thickness Gauge=0.75 1400026 --- Photo Black C13T564100 C13T605100 --- ---
Thickness Gauge=0.65 1400027 --- Cyan C13T564200 C13T605200 C13T543200 C13T613200
CR Lock Tool 1284893 ---
Vivid Magenta --- C13T605300 --- ---
Tension Gauge 10N 1401952 ---
Magenta C13T564300 --- C13T543300 C13T613300
Color Banding Sample 1288094 ---
Ink cartridge (x8)*3 Refer to Table Consumable Yellow C13T564400 C13T605400 C13T543400 C13T613400
5-9. Light Cyan C13T564500 C13T605500 --- ---
Maintenance Tank*3 C12C890191 Option
Vivid Light Magenta --- C13T605600 --- ---
Proofing Paper Semimatte (Roll)*4 ---*5 Genuine Paper
Light Magenta C13T564600 --- --- ---
Premium Semimatte Photo Paper Genuine Paper
---*5
[250] (Roll)*4 Light Black C13T564700 C13T605700 --- ---
Premium Glossy Photo Paper [250] Genuine Paper
Matte Black C13T543800 C13T613800 C13T543800 C13T613800
---*5
(Roll)*4
EPSON Proofing Paper Semimatte Genuine Paper Light Light Black C13T564900 C13T605900 --- ---
---*5
(Commercial)*4
Enhanced Matte Paper (Roll)*3 ---*5 Genuine Paper
Archival Matte Paper (Sheet)*3*4 ---*5 Genuine Paper
Software Adjustment Program --- Supplies
Tool NVRAM Backup Utility --- Supplies
Paper Feed Adjuster --- Supplies*6

Adjustment Overview 374


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.1.7 Adjustment Program Basic Operation † Sequential Mode


This section describes basic methods for operating the adjustment program. This is a guide mode for executing the required adjustments in a set order
when a replaced part or unit is selected.
C A U T IO N
The adjustment program includes adjustment items to be 1. Select the replaced part or unit from the left column and click [Add].
used other than on-site. Regarding on-site repairs, do not 2. Click the [OK] button.
execute adjustments other than those described in this
manual.

† Operating Environment
„ OS: Widows 98, Me, 2000, XP
„ Port: USB port
„ Printer driver and ESM3 have to be installed.
† Start-up
1. Double-click [adjwiz2.exe] to start the adjustment program.
2. Select the following items after the startup screen appears.
z Printer name
Select the model of the printer in use.
z Adj. Mode
Select whether to execute adjustments with the sequential mode Figure 5-2. Sequential Mode Screen
(Sequence) or to execute each adjustment individually (Individual). † Individual Adjustment Mode
3. Click [Start].
This is a mode for executing each adjustment item individually.
1. Select the adjustment item to be executed and click the [OK] button.

Figure 5-1. Adjustment Program Startup Screen

Figure 5-3. Individual Adjustment Mode Screen

Adjustment Overview 375


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.2 Mechanical Adjustment 5. Bring the measurement microphone of the tension meter close to the
center of the Timing Belt.

5.2.1 CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment C H E C K Set the tension meter fixed tool in a position so the distance
P O IN T between the measurement microphone and timing belt is
This adjustment applies to all operations that have resulted in removal or
within approximately 5mm but not touching the timing belt.
replacement the CR Timing Belt or loosening of the belt, such as CR Motor
removal. This adjusts the belt tension to the correct tension after installation of
the CR Timing Belt.
† Tools (Required) 6. Press the "MEASURE" button on the tension measurement tool and
„ Sonic Tension Meter U-505 measure by plucking the timing belt with a tool such as tweezers.
„ A tool to pluck the timing belt (tweezers, etc.) „ Pluck the belt as gently as possible so it can be
C A U T IO N
† Utility Tools (Adjustment possible without these) measured by the tension measurement tool.
„ Code Type Microphone (U-505) „ Do not allow the measurement microphone and timing
belt to make contact when the belt is plucked.
† Standard Value
„ Standard: 16.6±1N
Tension Measurement Tool
† Procedure
1. Install the CR Timing Belt. At this time, set the scale of the Pulley
Holder at the same position it had before removal.
2. Manually move the Carriage Unit through a return and back 5 times.

C H E C K „ Move the whole area of the Carriage Unit moving parts


P O IN T through the returns.
„ Try to make the speed of the return motions such that it
takes 2 seconds for sending and 2 seconds for returning.

3. Set the Carriage Unit in the home position.


4. Input the following belt information into the tension measurement tool.
z Weight: 1.2 Measurement
microphone
z Width: 8.0
z Spam: 635

within 5 mm

Figure 5-4. Setting the Tension Measurement Tool

Adjustment Mechanical Adjustment 376


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

7. Turn the CR tension installation screw to adjust tension until the


measurement value reaches the standard value.
8. After adjustment is complete, check the results by repeating the
measurement 3 times.

CR Tension Installation screw

Figure 5-5. CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment

Adjustment Mechanical Adjustment 377


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.2.2 PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment 3. Press the MEASURE button on the tension measurement tool and
measure by plucking the timing belt with a tool such as tweezers.
This adjustment applies to all operations that have loosened the PF Timing
Belt, such as "Motor Assy., PF" removal. This adjusts the belt tension to the C A U T IO N
„ Pluck the belt as gently as possible so it can be
correct tension after installation of the "Motor Assy., PF" measured by the tension measurement tool.
† Tools (Required) „ Do not allow the measurement microphone and timing
belt to make contact when the belt is plucked.
„ Sonic Tension Meter U-505
„ A tool to pluck the timing belt (tweezers, etc.)
† Utility Tools (Adjustment possible without these)
„ Code Type Microphone (U-505)
† Standard Value
„ Standard: 17.6 ~ 21.6N measurement microphone

† Procedure

C A U T IO N
Pay attention not to deform or damage the "Scale, PF"
attached to the "Pulley, Roller, PF" when performing the
following work.

1. Input the following belt information into the tension measurement tool.
z Weight: 1.3
z Width: 6.0
z Spam: 47
2. Bring the measurment microphone of the tension meter close to the
center of the timing belt (between the "Motor Assy., PF" pinion gear
and the PF roller pulley).

Set the tension meter fixed tool in a position so the distance within5mm
within 5mm
C H E C K
P O IN T between the measurement microphone and timing belt is
within approximately 5mm but not touching the timing belt.

Figure 5-6. Setting the Tension Measurement Tool

Adjustment Mechanical Adjustment 378


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4. No adjustment is necessary if the measurement value is within the


(+) Bind S-tight with plane washers 2
standard value. If the value is outside the standard value, use the
following procedure to adjust the tension until it reaches the standard
value.
5. Loosen the 2 screws fixing "Plate, Motor PF" by the amount shown
below, and then adjust the timing belt tension by sliding "Plate, Motor
PF".
z (+) Bind S-tight with plane washers 2 3x8, F/Zn : 1/4~2/4 turn
z Shaft, Installation Plate, CR : 1/8 turn
6. After completing adjustment, tighten the 2 screws and measure
Plate, Motor, PF
tension again.
7. After the measurement value has reached the standard value, check
the results by repeating the measurement 3 times.

Shaft, Installation Plate, CR


Figure 5-7. PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment

Adjustment Mechanical Adjustment 379


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.2.3 Paper Thickness Sensor Adjustment 7. Raise "Paper Lever", set 0.4 adjustment tool as shown in Figure 5-8,
and then lower "Paper Lever".
When the paper thickness sensor has been replaced, it must be made to Confirm that "Sen: Paper 01" is displayed in the panel.
recognize the thickness set as the detection standard. Check installation Perform adjustment if the displayed value is other than "01".
position condition with the self testing menu and perform adjustment if the → To Adjustment Procedure
result is NG. 8. Raise "Paper Lever", set 0.8 adjustment tool as shown in Figure 5-8,
† Tools and then lower "Paper Lever".
Confirm that "Sen: Paper 01" is displayed in the panel.
„ Paper Thickness Position Tool (Gauge: 0.3/0.4/0.8/0.9)
Perform adjustment if the displayed value is other than "01".
† Check Procedure → To Adjustment Procedure
9. Raise "Paper Lever", set 0.9 adjustment tool as shown in Figure 5-8,
Be sure to start check from the condition in which [Paper and then lower "Paper Lever".
C A U T IO N
Lever] is lowered. Confirm that "Sen: Paper 11" is displayed in the panel.
Perform adjustment if the displayed value is other than "11".
→ To Adjustment Procedure
10. Raise "Paper Lever" and remove 0.9 adjustment tool, and then confirm
1. Enter Maintenance Mode 2. that "Sen: Paper 10" is displayed in the panel while the "Paper Lever"
Power off → Press "Paper Source (<)" + "Paper Feed (Δ)" + "Paper is in the raised condition.
Feed (∇)" → Power on Perform adjustment if the displayed value is other than "10".
2. Select "SELF TESTING" and enter the self testing menu. → To Adjustment Procedure
"Menu (>)" 11. After confirming/adjusting, check again with all adjustment tool. This
3. Select "SELF TESTING: Test". time confirm after repeating up/down movement of "Paper Lever" 3
"Menu (>)" times.
4. “Select "Test: Sensor".
"Paper Feed (∇)" x 2 → "Menu (>)"
Gauge
5. Confirm that "Sen: Paper 00" is displayed in the panel (with [Paper
Lever] in the lowered condition).
Perform adjustment if the displayed value is other than "00".
→ To Adjustment Procedure
6. Raise "Paper Lever", set 0.3 adjustment jig from the rear paper feed
slot as shown in Figure 5-8, and then lower [Paper Lever].
Confirm that "Sen: Paper 00" is displayed in the panel.
Perform adjustment if the displayed value is other than "00".
→ To Adjustment Procedure

FIGURE 5-8. PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR ADJUSTMENT

Adjustment Mechanical Adjustment 380


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Adjustment Procedure
Adjusts position of "Paper Thickness Sensor Holder" for when [Paper
Screws
Lever] is lowered with adjustment tool 0.3/0.4 or "Paper Lever" is lowered
with no adjustment tool and when "Paper Lever" is lowered with
adjustment jig 0.8/0.9 or "Paper Lever" is raised with no adjustment tool.
1. Loosen the screw fixing "Paper Thickness Sensor Holder".
2. Slide the "Paper Thickness Sensor Holder" up/down while checking
1 2
the panel display. Keep the "Paper Thickness Sensor Holder" at the
place just after the panel display changes.

C H E C K Adjust by raising the "Paper Thickness Sensor Holder" when


the numerical value increases and lowering the holder when Paper Thickness Sensor Holder
P O IN T
the value decreases.

Figure 5-9. Paper Thickness Sensor Adjustment


3. Tighten the screws to fix the "Paper Thickness Sensor Holder".

Adjustment Mechanical Adjustment 381


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.2.4 CR Encoder Sensor Position Adjustment


This is intended to keep the CR Encoder Sensor and CR Scale at a suitable
space.
† Procedure
1. Move the Carriage Unit and check the position of the "Scale, CR"
Holder, Sensor, HP
against the sensor at 3 places (left end, center, right end). Visually
confirm uniform distance of the arrows shown in the figure.
2. When space is NG, loosen the screw of "Holder, Linear Scale" or
"Holder, Sensor, HP" and move the "Lever, Scale, CR". Then adjust
the position of "Scale, CR" and tighten the screw.
3. After adjusting, check the 3 places again (left end, center, right end).

Lever, Scale, CR Make even


space

Figure 5-10. CR Encoder Sensor Position Adjustment_1

Lever, Scale, CR

Holder, Linear Scale

Figure 5-11. CR Encoder Sensor Position Adjustment_2

Adjustment Mechanical Adjustment 382


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.2.5 PG Adjustment
† Required Tools
Bushing, Shaft, Rear
„ Thickness Gauge T=0.75
„ Thickness Gauge T=0.65
† Procedure
1. Open the top cover and put suitable objects into the top cover sensor
area to keep the sensor turned on. Make sure that the panel display is
changed from "TOP COVER OPEN" to "READY".

C A U T IO N
Be careful not to break the sensor flag when turning the
sensor on.

2. Enter Maintenance Mode 2. Screws


Power off → Press "Paper Source(<)" + "Paper Feed(Δ)" + "Paper
Feed(∇)" → Power on Figure 5-12. Screws Securing Bush, Shaft, Rear
3. Select "SELF TESTING" to enter Self Testing menu.
"Menu(>)"
4. Select "SELF TESTING: Adjustment".
"Paper Feed(∇)" x1 → "Menu(>)"
5. Select "Adj: PG Adj.".
"Paper Feed(∇)" x1 → "Menu(>)"
6. Loosen the two screws that secure "Bushing, Shaft, Rear".
7. Press "Menu(>)" to change the panel display.
"[Enter] Start"
8. Press "Menu(>)" again to move the PG to initial position and change
the panel display.
"PG Offset *xx00"
9. Attach the Thickness Gauge (T=0.65) onto the right most "Paper
Guide Assy., Paper Eject, Front, Right".

Paper Guide Assy


Gauge

Figure 5-13. PG Adjustment

Adjustment Mechanical Adjustment 383


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

C A U T IO N
Always move the "Carriage Unit" by pulling the "Belt, CR" in
the following steps. Holding and moving the "Carriage Unit"
may cause deformation of the PG due to the downward
pressure.

10. Move the "Carriage Unit" and make sure it hits the thickness gauge.
11. Press the "Paper Feed (Δ)" to move the "Carriage Unit" upward and
widen the PG. Slowly move the "Carriage Unit" upward to the position
where the "Carriage Unit" does not hit the thickness gauge.
12. Replace the Thickness Gauge (T=0.65) by the Thickness Gauge
(T=0.75).
13. Move the "Carriage Unit" and make sure it hits the thickness gauge.
14. Add "3" to the current number displayed on the panel.
"Paper Feed (Δ)" x3
15. Press "Menu (>)".
16. Rotate the "Bushing, Shaft, Rear" so that the "Lever, Rock, PG" gets
into the extreme right notch of the "Bushing, Shaft, Rear", and tighten
the "Bushing, Shaft, Rear" with the two screws which have been
loosened in Procedure 6.
17. Turn the printer off.

Adjustment Mechanical Adjustment 384


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.2.6 Multi Sensor Position Adjustment Bushing, Shaft, Rear


Lever, Lock, PG
This adjustment sets a suitable distance between the Multi Sensor (Multi
Sensor Holder) and the platen.
† Required Tools
„ Multi Sensor Position Tool
„ CR Lock Tool
† Procedure
1. Turn the "Bushing, Shaft, Rear" so that [Lever, Lock, PG] goes into the
furthest right notch of "Bushing, Shaft, Rear".
2. Place position tool 3.0 on "Paper Guide Assy., Paper Eject, Front,
Right" at the position shown by Figure 5-15.
3. Move the Carriage Unit to the position where the "Multi Sensor Holder"
touches the position tool.

C A U T IO N
When moving the Carriage Unit, do not let the Print Head Figure 5-14. Multi Sensor Position Adjustment_1
contact the thickness gauge.

Paper Guide Assy., Paper Eject, Front, Right

Carriage Unit

Thickness gauge
Printhead

Thickness gauge

Figure 5-15. Setting the Position Tool

Adjustment Mechanical Adjustment 385


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4. Set the CR Lock Tool.


Set the CR Lock Tool into the 2 holes on the printer frame, and then fix
the tool by pinching with the bearings of the Carriage Unit.
5. Loosen the two screws securing the "Multi Sensor Holder".
6. Set the position of the "Multi Sensor Holder" in rear direction and CR Lock Tool
then downward direction. Then tighten the two screws.
7. Set the position tool 2.9 and move the Carriage Unit, confirming that
the "Multi Sensor Holder" does not contact it.
8. Set the position tool 3.1 and move the Carriage Unit, confirming that
the "Multi Sensor Holder" contacts it.

Carriage Unit fixing tool

Figure 5-17. Setting the CR Lock Tool_2

Screws Multi Sensor Holder

Figure 5-16. Setting the CR Lock Tool_1

Figure 5-18. Multi Sensor Position Adjustment_2

Adjustment Mechanical Adjustment 386


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3 Basic Adjustment IEEE 1394 ID Label

5.3.1 RTC&USB ID&IEEE1394 ID

C H E C K Writing IEEE1394 ID is Stylus Pro 4400/4800 only.


P O IN T

Writes the RTC Backup Battery Reset Time, USB ID, and IEEE 1394 ID on a
new Main Board.
† Procedure Figure 5-19. IEEE 1394 ID Label
1. Note down the 10-digit ID number (IEEE1394 ID) on the ID label that is
stuck to lower backside of the main unit right frame when replacing the
Main Board.
2. Turn the printer power on after replacing the Main Board.
3. Start up the adjustment program and select [RTC&USB ID IEEE 1394
ID].
4. Confirm or Input [Date] and [Time].
5. Enter the 17-digit serial number of the main unit. The USB ID will be
generated.
6. Enter the ID number that is taken down in Procedure 1 to the [IEEE
1394 ID].
7. Click [Write] to start writing the RTC, USB ID, and IEEE1394 ID to the
NVRAM on the Main Board.
8. Click [Next].
9. Click [Check] to display the information written to the Main Board,
confirm the contents, and click [OK].
10. Click [Finish]. Figure 5-20. RTC&USB ID&IEEE 1394 ID

C A U T IO N
If you turn the printer OFF/ON after the USB ID has been
changed, Windows recognizes the USB as another port and
creates a driver of xxxx (Copy x). If you need to continue
adjustment using this program, finish the program once and
restart it by selecting the new driver (Copy x).

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 387


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.2 Head Rank ID


Sets/Inputs the information unique to each print head as the Head Rank ID for
the best driving voltage setup after replacing the print head. (It can be read
from and written to a file.)
† Procedure for Writing
<When applying the Head Rank ID on the ID label stuck to the print head. >
1. Turn the printer power on. ID Label
2. Start up the adjusting program and select [Head Rank ID].
3. Note down the Head Rank ID on the ID label attached to the print head
to be installed.
4. Enter the Head Rank ID to the edit box on the screen in the similar
manner (21 digits in total) as the one printed on an ID label.
5. Click the [Write] button.
6. Click [Finish].
† Procedure for Writing Enter
<When applying the Head Rank ID information file (txt) of the print head to
be installed. >
1. Turn the printer power on.
2. Start up the adjusting program and select [Head Rank ID].
3. Click the [File Open] button and select the Head Rank ID information
file (txt).
4. Click the [Write] button.
5. Click [Finish].
† Procedure for saving the Head Rank ID information
1. Turn the printer power on.
2. Start up the adjusting program and select [Head Rank ID].
3. Note down the Head Rank ID on the ID label attached to the print head
to be installed.
4. Enter the Head Rank ID to the edit box on the screen in the similar
manner (21 digits in total) as the one printed on an ID label.
5. Click [File Save], name the file with a suitable one, and save the
Figure 5-21. Head Rank ID
information as a text file.
6. Click [Finish].

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 388


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.3 Multi Sensor Level Adjustment


Paper is fed into the printer, the Multi Sensor emits light onto the paper and
platen, the reflected light is received by the Multi Sensor, and detection level is
corrected automatically. Then the detection result is printed.
† Paper Used
„ Size: 17"
„ Type: Enhanced Matte Roll Paper
† Procedure
1. Start the adjustment program and select [Multi Sensor Level
Adjustment].
2. Click the [Run] button to print the adjustment values.
3. Each numerical value is described below. Confirm standard values for
B~E.
„A: Shows results of light received from either PW1 or PW2 light
receiver when PG=1.2.
Figure 5-22. Multi Sensor Level Adjustment
„B: Automatically switches to 1 or 0 according to amount of
reflected light acquired. LED light quantity control is switched
according to the numerical value.
A B C D E
„C: Shows the LED light emission level. The standard value differs
according to the light quantity control set at B. [PW1 (PG=1.2)] I/O: 1, D/A: 119, A/D: 233, A/D (2): 1,
zAt "I/O: 1" = 80 or higher [PW2 (PG=1.2)] I/O: 1, D/A: 93, A/D: 233,
zAt "I/O: 0" = 104 or lower
Figure 5-23. Multi Sensor Level Adjustment Values
„D: Shows level of reflected light received from the paper. Value is
within range of 230~236.
„E: Shows level of reflected light received from the platen. Value is
within range of 0~3.
4. Click the [Finish] button.

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 389


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.4 T&B&S (Roll Paper) C A U T IO N


„ When measuring colors, place the adjustment pattern on
This adjusts the printing position that includes the cut position on the surface of a flat surface.
the paper and corrects a bend of emission axis of the main scanning direction „ Make sure to perform the adjustment twice regardless
in the multi sensor. whether the value obtained from the first measurement
meets the specified value.
† Paper Used .

„ Size: 17"
„ Type: Enhanced Matte Roll Paper
† Specifications
„ Top margin: 10 ± 1 mm
„ Bottom margin: 114 ± 1 mm
„ Side margin: 10 ± 0.3 mm
† Procedure
1. Start adjustment program and select [T&B&S (Roll Paper)].
2. Click the [Print] button to print the adjustment pattern.
3. Refer to Figure 5-25, and measure the distance of the following three
positions;
† Top margin, bottom margin
Check the arrow direction of "T&B Position" printed on the pattern.
Then measure the distances of margins indicated with arrows in
Figure 5-25 for top and bottom.
Figure 5-24. T&B&S (Roll Paper)
† Side margin
Measure the distance as shown in Figure 5-25. Top Margin Top Margin
4. Input each of the following value into its corresponding edit boxes. (<-) (->)

† The values measured in Procedure 3


„ Top margin
„ Bottom margin
„ Side margin
Side Margin
† The values printed in the pattern lower part
„ Multi sensor left T & B Position : <--
„ Multi sensor right MS Left : XX.XXX mm
T&B Position : <-- MS Left : XX.XXX mm MS Right : XX.XXX mm
MS Right : X.XXX mm
5. Click the [Write] button and then click the [Print] button again to print
the adjustment pattern.
6. Repeat Procedure 3 and Procedure 4, and click [Write]. Bottom Margin Bottom Margin
7. If the specification values are satisfied, click [Finish]. If not satisfied, (<-) (->)
repeat Procedure 3 through Procedure 5 until they meet the standards. Figure 5-25. Adjustment Pattern

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 390


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.5 T&B&S (Cut Sheet)


This prints a special pattern and adjusts the printing position on the surface of
the paper.
† Paper Used
„ Size: A4
„ Type: Enhanced Matte Cut Sheet
† Specifications
„ Top margin: 10 ± 1 mm
„ Bottom margin:114 ± 1 mm
„ Side margin: 10 ± 0.3 mm
† Procedure
1. Start the adjustment program and select [T&B&S (Cut Sheet)].
2. Click the [Print] button to print the adjustment pattern.
3. Measure the margins of the following three parts indicated with Figure
5-27. Figure 5-26. T&B&S (Cut Sheet) Screen
† Top margin
† Bottom margin
Top Margin
† Side margin
4. Input the values measured in Procedure 3 to its corresponding edit
box.
† Top margin
† Bottom margin
† Side margin
5. Click the [Write] button and then click the [Print] button again to print
the adjustment pattern. Side Margin
6. Repeat Procedure 3 and Procedure 4, and click [Write].
7. If the specification values are satisfied, click [Finish]. If not satisfied,
repeat Procedure 3 through Procedure 5 until they meet the standards.

C A U T IO N
„ When measuring colors, place the adjustment pattern on 5 mm
a flat surface.
„ Make sure to perform the adjustment twice regardless
whether the value obtained from the first measurement
meets the specified value.
Bottom Margin
Figure 5-27. Adjustment Pattern

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 391


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.6 Cutter Pressure Adjustment 10. If the result is below standard, press "Menu(>)" to raise the cutter,
press "Paper Feed(Δ)" + "Paper Feed(∇)" to change the value (%) ,
Adjusts the pressure to cut papers after replacing the cutter solenoid. and press "Menu(>)" to lower the cutter before measuring the value
† Required Tools again.
This measurement and adjustment should be performed in three
„ Tension Gauge (10N)
places (Right end → Center → Left end of the printer).
† Specifications z If the value is within standard (Less than 85%)
„ 500-600g Move the "Carriage Unit" to the home position and turn the main
„ Pressure: Less than 85% unit power off.
z If the value is beyond standard (More than 86%)
† Procedure Perform the adjustment one more time. If the observed value still
1. Enter Maintenance Mode2. does not meet the standard, replace the "Solenoid, CR" and
Power off → Press "Paper Source(<)" + "Paper Feed(Δ)" + "Paper perform the adjustment again.
Feed(∇)"→ Power on
2. Select "SELF TESTING" to enter Self Testing menu.
"Menu(>)" Push-pull Gauge
3. Select "SELF TESTING: Adjustment".
"Paper Feed(∇)" x1 → "Menu(>)"
4. Select "Adj: Cut Adj.".
"Menu(>)"
5. Press "Menu(>)" to change the display from "Pressure: **%" to "Exec.
Adj.?".
6. Press "Menu(>)" again to display the "Please Wait" message.
7. When the "Carriage Unit" detects its original point, the message
"[Exec] Key Down" is displayed and the "Carriage Unit" is released.
8. Open the top cover, and press "Menu(>)" to display "[Exec] Key Up"
and lower the cutter.
9. With the cutter kept lowered, measure the value five times in a row as
pulling up the "Holder, Solenoid" of the Tension Gauge, and take down
the results. Average value of the three measured figures except
minimum and maximum values is considered to be the measurement Holder, Solenoid
result.
Figure 5-28. Cutter Pressure Adjustment

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 392


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.7 Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment


Performs standard adjustment of matte black nozzle columns. Adequately
adjusts matte black Bi-D before performing Bi-D adjustment for all nozzles.
† Paper Used
„ Size: 17"
„ Type: Enhanced Matte Roll Paper
† Procedure
1. Turn the printer power on.
2. Start adjustment program and select [Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment].
3. Click the [Print] button to print the nozzle check pattern.
The check pattern with the current setup values will be printed out.
4. Find the column where Bi-D is best aligned and input the number into
the edit box.

C H E C K The printed pattern is changed 2 steps. But you can input 1


P O IN T step unit. Figure 5-29. Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment Screen

Current set value

5. Click the [Write] button to print the check pattern again and check it. MK = 28 (0)

20 28 36
Figure 5-30. Nozzle Bi-D Adjustment Check Pattern

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 393


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.8 Print Head Slant Adjustment (PF) 4. Seeing the pattern in the direction shown in Figure 5-32, check the
clearance gap between the second and the third blocks from the right.
† Papers Required (See figure 5-32) Measure the two intervals between the two blocks
„ Size: 16" which are located one line lower/upper than the two continued lines
„ Type: Premium Glossy Photo Paper with a magnifying glass with a scale.
z The gap is parallel to the both blocks (Pattern 2).
† Procedure
Click [Next] and click [Finish] on the next screen to complete
1. Turn the printer power on. the adjustment.
2. Start up the adjusting program and select [Print Head Slant Adjustment z The gap is not parallel to the both blocks (Pattern 1, 3).
(PF)]. Click [Next] and perform adjustment on the next screen. → to
3. Click [Print] to print the adjustment pattern. Procedure 5.

Figure 5-31. Print Head Slant Adjustment (PF) Screen (1)

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 394


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

z If the bottom side of the gap is wider (Pattern 3):


Paper Feed Raise the "Cam, Inclination, R".
Direction 8. Tighten the four screws that are loosened in Procedure 6 in the order
below.
A→B→C→D
Move the Carriage Unit to the home position and close the top cover.
9. Click [Back] to go back to the previous screen, and perform Procedure
3 through 8 repeatedly until the adjustment is completed.
Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

Figure 5-33. Print Head Slant Adjustment (PF) Screen (2)

Figure 5-32. Adjustment pattern


5. Open the top cover and move the "Carriage Unit" to the center of the
printer.
6. Loosen the four screws (A, B, C, and D) shown in Figure 5-34 that
secure the head.
7. Move the "Cam, Inclination, R" vertically and adjust the slant of the
print head.
z If the upper side of the gap is wider (Pattern 1):
Lower the "Cam, Inclination, R".

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 395


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

B C

Head Fixing Screws

Cam, Inclination,R

Figure 5-34. Head Fixing Screws and the Cam , Inclination, R.3

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 396


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.9 Print Head Slant Adjustment (CR)


† Papers Required
„ Size: 16"
„ Type: Premium Glossy Photo Paper
† Procedure
1. Turn the printer power on.
2. Start up the adjusting program, select [Print Head Slant Adjustment (CR)] and click [Print] to print the adjustment pattern. After the printing is finished, the
Carriage Unit moves to the center of the printer (adjustment position).
3. Click [Next] (Proceed to Screen 2).
Screen 1 Screen 4

To print out the adjustment pattern

Screen 2 Screen 3

End of the
adjustment
The "Carriage Unit" moves
to the home position and
the paper is reeled off.

Figure 5-35. Screens shift for Print Head Slant Adjustment (CR)

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 397


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4. Seeing the pattern in the direction shown in Figure 5-36, check the
clearance gap between the light magenta and magenta for both right
and left columns of the third, ninth, and fifteenth blocks from the right.
z No gap on both sides:
No adjustment required → Click [Next] two times (proceed to
Screen 4), and click [Finish] to finish the adjustment.
z Gap on any of the sides:
Adjustment required → Proceed to Procedure 5.
Paper Feed
5. Click [Next] (Proceed to Screen 3). Direction

Figure 5-36. Adjustment Pattern

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 398


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

6. Open the top cover and loosen the two screws that secure the
"Stopper, Carriage" shown in Figure 5-37.
7. Loosen the four head fixing screws (A, B, C, and D) shown in Figure
Lever, Cam
5-37.
8. Move the "Lever, Cam" vertically and adjust the slant of the print head.
z Gap on the left column : Lower the "Lever, Cam".
z Gap on the right column : Raise the "Lever, Cam".

C A U T IO N
„ The position of the "Lever, Cam" can only be adjusted by
moving downward. When you need to raise the "Lever,
Cam", raise it to the upper limit first and lower the
"Lever, Cam" gradually.
„ Make sure to move the "Lever, Cam" while pressing it
rearward, or the adjustment groove may be damaged. D

9. Tighten the four screws that have been loosened in Procedure 7 in the
order A ->B ->C ->D.
10. Secure the two screws that secure the "Stopper, Carriage", and close
the top cover. (The "Carriage Unit" moves to its home position.)
11. Click [Back] twice to go back to Screen 1, and click [Print] to print the A
adjustment pattern. (Once the printing is finished, the "Carriage Unit"
moves to the center of the printer (adjustment position).)
12. Click [Next]. (Proceed to Screen 2.)
13. Seeing the pattern in the direction shown in Figure 5-36, check the
clearance gap between the light magenta and magenta for both right C
B
and left columns of the third, ninth, and fifteenth blocks from the right.
z No gap on both sides:No adjustment required ->Proceed to
Procedure 14.
z Gap on any of the sides:Adjustment required -> Proceed to
Procedure 6.

Head Fixing Screws

Stopper, Carriage Fixing Screws

Figure 5-37. Head Fixing Screws and Lever, Cam

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 399


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

14. Check if the dots of each nozzle line are positioned as shown in Figure
5-38.
15. Click [Next] twice to go back to Screen4, then click [Run]. The
"Carriage Unit" moves to its home position and the paper is reeled off.
Click [Finish] to finish the adjustment.

Paper feed
direction

Cyan
1/3
Light Cyan 1/3

1/3
Cyan

Figure 5-38. Checking the Dots Position

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 400


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.10 Auto Uni-d Adjustment D row


G row
Performs Auto Uni-D Adjustment with the Multi Sensor. When the adjustment F row
pattern is printed, the adjustment; from scanning the pattern to correcting, is VSD1 A row
executed automatically. The pattern is printed at PG=1.2, and the correction H row
value is automatically copied for other PG settings. C row
B row
† Paper Used
„ Size: 17"
„ Type: Enhanced Matte Roll Paper
† Procedure
1. Turn the printer on. VSD2
2. Start adjustment program and select [Auto Uni-d Adjustment].
3. Click the [Run] button to print the adjustment pattern.
4. As the pattern is printed, the printer automatically scans the pattern
and makes corrections. (This is not necessary when making special
adjustments manually.)
5. Click the [Finish] button.
VSD3

Figure 5-40. Auto Uni-d Adjustment Pattern

Figure 5-39. Auto Uni-d Adjustment Screen

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 401


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.11 Multi Sensor Adjustment for Auto Nozzle Check


This adjustment prints a special pattern and scans it with the Multi Sensor, and
then the difference between the position (drive pulses of the CR/PF Motors)
read by the Multi Sensor and the standard value is registered as the correction
value information.
In the beginning, the reading position for the primary scan direction and
secondary scan direction is adjusted. After that, the dot missing pattern and the
no dot missing pattern are printed and the automatic dot missing function is
checked.
† Paper Used
„ Size: 17"
„ Type: Enhanced Matte Roll Paper
† Procedure
1. Turn the printer on.
2. Start the adjustment program and select [Multi Sensor Adjustment for
Auto Nozzle Check]. Figure 5-41. Multi Sensor Adjustment for Auto Nozzle Check Screen
3. Selecting [Sensor Adjustment] and clicking the [Run] button will print
the adjustment pattern.
The printed pattern is read by the Multi Sensor, the read position is
automatically corrected, and the results are printed along with the
pattern.

Figure 5-42. Adjustment Pattern

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 402


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

4. Selecting [Print Check Pattern] and clicking the [Run] button will print
the confirmation pattern.
Two patterns are printed (dot missing/no dot missing) and read by the
Multi Sensor, and then the results are printed along with the patterns.
5. Click the [Finish] button. [PG=1.2]
[Count] MK : 8 C :7 M :6 Y :8 PK :5 Lc : 6 Lm : 6 Lk : 6
[Position] MK : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 1, 3) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 12) , ( 5, 13) ,
( 1, 21) , ( 9, 21) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
C : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 12) , ( 1, 21) , ( 9, 21) ,
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
M : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 12) , ( 5, 13) , ( 1, 21) ,
( 9, 21) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
Y : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 12) , ( 1, 21) , ( 9, 21) ,
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
Lk : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 1, 3) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 12) , ( 5, 13) ,
( 1, 21) , ( 9, 21) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
Lc : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 5, 12) , ( 1, 21) , ( 9, 21) , ( 0, 0) ,
[PG=1.2] ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
[Count] MK : 8 C :7 M :6 Y :8 PK :5 Lc : 6 Lm : 6 Lk : 6 Lm : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 5, 12) , ( 5, 13) , ( 1, 21) , ( 9, 21) ,
[Position] MK : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 1, 3) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 12) , ( 5, 13) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
( 1, 21) , ( 9, 21) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) LLK : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 5, 12) , ( 5, 13) , ( 1, 21) , ( 9, 21) ,
C : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 12) , ( 1, 21) , ( 9, 21) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
OK! Go to next work.
M : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 12) , ( 5, 13) , ( 1, 21) ,
( 9, 21) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
Figure 5-44. Check Pattern (No Dot Missing)
Y : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 12) , ( 1, 21) , ( 9, 21) ,
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
Lk : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 1, 3) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 12) , ( 5, 13) ,
( 1, 21) , ( 9, 21) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
Lc : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 5, 12) , ( 1, 21) , ( 9, 21) , ( 0, 0) ,
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
Lm : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 5, 12) , ( 5, 13) , ( 1, 21) , ( 9, 21) ,
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
LLK : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 5, 12) , ( 5, 13) , ( 1, 21) , ( 9, 21) ,
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
[Count] Y : 5 Lm : 5
Y : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 9, 3) , ( 5, 12) , ( 1, 21) , ( 9, 21) ,
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
Lm : ( 1, 2) , ( 9, 2) , ( 5, 12) , ( 5, 13) , ( 1, 21) , ( 9, 21) ,
( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0) , ( 0, 0)
OK! Go to next work.

Figure 5-43. Check Pattern (Dot Missing)

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 403


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.12 Skew Check


† Paper Used
„ Size: 17"
„ Type: Enhanced Matte Roll Paper
† Procedure
1. Turn the printer on.
2. Start the adjustment program and select [Skew Check].
3. When the [Run] button is clicked, the paper will be ejected and the
paper skew amount will be measured by the Multi Sensor.

C A U T IO N
Approximately 1m of paper will be ejected, so be aware of
the space needed for paper ejection.

Figure 5-45. Skew Check Screen


4. After the skew check value is displayed, click the [OK] button.
5. Click the [Finish] button and properly set the paper.

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 404


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.13 Platen Position Adjustment


This adjusts the printing position for the sponge position used during
borderless printing.
† Paper Used
„ Size: 17"
„ Type: Enhanced Matte Roll Paper
† Adjustment Procedure
1. Turn the printer on.
2. Start the adjustment program and select [Platen Position Adjustment].
3. Click the [Print] button to print the adjustment pattern.
4. Refer to Figure 5-47 and check the positions of the printed adjustment
line (at the right side as seen from the front of the printer) and the
platen tab. If there is no slip, click the [Next] button to check with
"Check Procedure" on the next page.
If the position has slipped, measure the distance between the
Figure 5-46. Platen Position Adjustment Screen (1)
adjustment line and the platen tab and enter the measured value (+/-)
into the edit box.
z When adjustment line is to the left of the platen tab
: + measurement value
z When adjustment line is to the right of the platen tab
: - measurement value
5. Click the [Write] button to write the adjustment value to the printer.
6. Click the [Next] button.

NG OK NG
+ Measurement Value - Measurement Value

Figure 5-47. Adjustment Pattern

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 405


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Check Procedure
1. Click the [Check] button to print the check pattern.
2. Refer to Figure 5-49 and check the positions of the printed adjustment
line and the platen tab. If there is no slip, click the [Finish] button.
If the position has slipped, click the [Back] button to perform
adjustment again.

Figure 5-48. Platen Position Adjustment Screen (2)

OK NG

Figure 5-49. Check Pattern

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 406


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.14 1000mm Feed Adjustment


† Paper Used
„ Size: 17"
„ Type: Enhanced Matte Roll Paper
† Procedure
1. Turn the printer on. Measurement
2. Start the adjustment program and select [1000mm Feed Adjustment].
3. Click the [Print] button and the adjustment pattern will be printed.
4. Use a ruler (1000mm) and scale stopper to measure the distance
shown by Figure 5-51.
5. Input the measured value into [1000mm Feed] and click the [Write]
button.
6. Click the [Finish] button.

C H E C K The ruled line in the center of the adjustment pattern is used


P O IN T as a guide when measuring with the ruler.

Figure 5-51. 1000mm Feed Adjustment Pattern

Figure 5-50. 1000mm Feed Adjustment Screen

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 407


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.15 Initial Ink charge flag ON/OFF


† Procedure
1. Enter Maintenance Mode 2.
Power off → Press "Paper Source (<)" + "Paper Feed (Δ)" + "Paper
Feed (∇)" →Power on
2. Start the adjustment program and select [Initial Ink chrge flag ON/
OFF].
3. Select "ON" or "OFF" and click the [Run] button.
4. Click the [Finish] button.

Figure 5-52. Initial Ink Chrge Flag ON/OFF Screen

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 408


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.16 NVRAM Back Up and Write 4. Enter Maintenance Mode 2.


Power off → Press "Paper Source (<)" + "Paper Feed (Δ)" + "Paper
Reads and saves each parameter stored in NVRAM on the Main Board before Feed (∇)" → Power on
replacement and writes them to the new Main Board or when replacement of 5. Start up the adjustment program, and select [NVRAM Back Up and
the "Printer Mechanism (SP)", write the parameter stored in the CD-ROM Write].
which is included in "Printer Mechanism (SP)". (Refer to Procedure for Writing 6. Click the [Run] button and "NVRAM Backup Utility" will start.
only).
7. Select the printer of which you are going to read the parameters from
† Read & Save Procedure [Printer Name].
8. Click [Open] to open either the parameter file that is saved in
When reading the parameters, start up the printer in Tiny Procedure 6 of “Read & Save Procedure“ or the parameter file of the
C A U T IO N CD-ROM that is bundled with the “Printer Mechanism (SP)“.
Mode. (Tiny Mode: Mode for reading the parameters.)
9. Click [Write] to start writing the parameter.
10. Once the writing is complete, exit [NVRAM Back Up Utility].

1. Enter Tiny Mode.


Power off → Press "Paper Source (<)" + "Paper Feed (D)" + "Paper
Feed (—)" + "Menu" →Power on
2. Start the adjustment program and select [NVRAM Back Up and Write].
3. Click the [Run] button and "NVRAM Backup Utility" will start.
4. From [Printer Name], select the printer that will be backed up
parameters.
5. Click the [Read] button and backup of parameters will start.
6. After backup is completed, click the [Save] button to save by writing
the files.
7. Turn off the printer power and replace the Main Board.

† Write Procedure

C A U T IO N
When reading the parameters, start up the printer in
Maintenance Mode 2.

1. Remove all the ink cartridges.


2. Remove the maintenance tank.
3. Pull up the Paper Lever. Figure 5-53. NVRAM Backup Utility

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 409


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.17 Check Platen Gap


This checks whether or not "Lever, Lock, PG" (used for fixing the PG position)
is fixing "Bushing, Shaft, Rear" in a suitable position.
† Procedure
1. Turn the printer power on.
After printer initialization is complete, check that "Lever, Lock, PG" is in
the second notch from the right of "Bushing, Shaft, Rear".
2. Start the adjustment program and select [Check Platen Gap].
3. Select [PG0.7] and click the [Run] button.
Check that "Lever, Lock, PG" is in the first notch from the right of
"Bushing, Shaft, Rear".
4. Select [PG1.5] and click the [Run] button.
Check that "Lever, Lock, PG" is in the third notch from the right of
"Bushing, Shaft, Rear".
5. Select [PG2.1] and click the [Run] button.
Check that "Lever, Lock, PG" is in the fourth notch from the right of Figure 5-54. Check Platen Gap
"Bushing, Shaft, Rear".
6. Select [PG2.6] and click the [Run] button.
Check that "Lever, Lock, PG" is in the fifth notch from the right of
"Bushing, Shaft, Rear".
7. Click the [Finish] button.

At power ON [PG=0.7] [PG=1.5] [PG=2.1] [PG=2.6]


[PG=1.2]

Figure 5-55. Check Platen Gap

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 410


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.18 Ink Discharge


Before removing the Damper (Valve Assy., Head), discharge the ink remaining
in the equipment by following the procedure below.
† Procedure
1. Turn the printer power on.
2. Start up the adjustment program and select [Ink Discharge].
3. Click the [Run] tab.
4. When a pop-up window appears, click [OK].
5. Confirm that the "Please Remove Ink" message is displayed on the
LCD, and pick up the ink levers on both sides to remove all the ink
cartridges.
6. Press "Menu(>)" to display "Set Lever (L/R)", and lower the ink
levers.
7. Press "Menu(>)" to change the display to "Dischg. Washfluid". The
ink discharge begins at this time.
8. The display turns to "Set Cleaning I/C" when the ink discharge is Figure 5-56. Ink Discharge
finished. Pull up the ink levers on both sides to install the ink
cartridges.
9. Press "Menu(>)" to display "Set Lever (L/R)", and lower the ink
levers.
10. Press "Menu(>)" to start the head cleaning. The display changes to
"Head Cleaning".
11. The display turns to "Please Remove CL I/C" when the head cleaning
is completed. Pull up the ink levers on both sides to remove the ink
cartridges.
12. Press "Menu(>)" to display "Set Lever (L/R)", and lower the ink
levers.
13. Press "Menu(>)" to discharge the cleaning liquid. The display changes
to "Dischg. Washfluid".
14. Click [Finish] on the Ink Discharge screen when the discharge is
finished.

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 411


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.19 Initial Ink Charge 5.3.20 Cleaning


† Procedure
C A U T IO N
Check the amount of ink remaining before starting Initial Ink 1. Turn the printer power on.
Charge. If the remaining ink is less than 50%, replace the ink
2. Start the adjustment program and select [Cleaning].
cartridge with a new one and then start the procedure.
3. Press F1~F4 key to start cleaning.

Key Cleaning Ink consumption amount Processing time


† Procedure
F1 CL1 Approx. 2.7 g/ 8 colors Approx. 1 minute and 10 seconds
1. Turn the printer power on.
F2 CL2 Approx. 3.5 g/ 8 colors Approx. 1 minute and 10 seconds
2. Start the adjustment program and select [Initial Ink Charge].
3. Press the F5 key and Initial Ink Charge will start. F3 CL3 Approx. 7.4 g/ 8 colors Approx. 1 minute and 10 seconds
4. After Initial Ink Charge is completed, click the [Finish] button. F4 CL4 Approx. 9.25 g/ 8 colors Approx. 3 minutes and 30 seconds

4. When cleaning is completed, click the [Finish] button.

Figure 5-57. Initial Ink Charge


Figure 5-58. Cleaning

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 412


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.21 Rear Sensor Adjustment Microtrace


When the rear sensor has been replaced, the AD value for setting a paper
detection standard must be acquired and stored in the Main Board.
† Required Tool
„ Microtrace #300 (A4)
† Procedure
1. Enter Maintenance Mode 2.
Power off → Press "Paper Source (<)" + "Paper Feed (Δ)" + "Paper
Feed (∇)" → Power on
2. Select "SELF TESTING" and enter the Self Testing menu.
"Menu (>)"
3. Select "SELF TESTING: Adjustment".
"Paper Feed (-)" x 1 → "Menu (>)"
4. Find "Adj: Rear AD".
"Paper Feed (-)" x 2 Figure 5-59. Setting the Microtrace
5. Raise "Paper Lever".
6. Insert Microtrace from rear paper feed slot and set it in the position
shown by Figure 5-59, and then lower the "Paper Lever".
7. Press "Menu (>)" 2 times and the panel display will change as shown
below.
"[Enter] Start" → "Exc."
8. Start acquisition of AD value by pressing "Menu (>)".
"RearAD: *** *** ***" will be shown in the display approximately 15
seconds later.

C A U T IO N
If "Retry AD Adjust" is displayed in the panel at this time, the
sensor has failed. Replace the sensor with a new part and
execute the adjustment again.

9. "Confirm that "RearAD: *** *** ***" is displayed, raise the [Paper Lever]
and take out the Microtrace.
10. Lower the "Paper Lever" and turn off the printer power.

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 413


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.22 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID)


5.3.22.1 Adjustment Overview

PURPOSE

By registering/controlling information concerning the ink droplets, this product


improves calibration accuracy and ensures stable color quality. (Difference in
color among individual products or each mode is reduced.) (Refer to 2.5
Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) Overview (p155) )

PRINCIPLE

The calibration is performed by measuring a printed correction pattern with a


calibrator. ID information that is calculated based on the acquired color values
(L*,a*,b*) is transmitted to the printer driver, and the printer driver corrects the
dot generation amount for each dot size x each color in the print data.

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 414


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.3.22.2 Adjusting Method <Entire Process Workflow> <Separate Workflow>


TOOLS REQUIRED

Table 5-10. Tools Required


At repair work site At repair work site
Tool Application/Specification
Cleaning Cleaning
Plain Paper (A4) For nozzle check and printing surface protection
Plain Paper (A3) For alignment check
EPSON Enhanced (Archival) For printing charts Nozzle check Nozzle check
Matte Paper (A4)
Computer Following drivers should be installed beforehand.
Alignment check Alignment check
† Printer driver for this product
† USB driver for the calibrator
GretagMacbeth eye-one (i1) With UV filter Print calibration chart Print calibration chart
(Calibrator)
Calibration plate (White plate) Accessory provided with the calibrator At color-mesuring site
Scanning ruler (Scale) Accessory provided with the calibrator Measure color Measure color
USB cable To connect the computer and the calibrator
Black sheet Should be larger than A4
Write the color ID Generate color ID data
Clear file Required when sending charts

Print validation chart Enter the data

ADJUSTMENT WORKFLOW At repair work site


Measure color Write the color ID
The workflow of the adjustment is explained in this section. There are two
types of the workflow; the one is for performing adjustment at a place same as
the repair (parts replacement) work site, the other is for performing adjustment Output the result Check the color ID
in a different place from the repair work site as the adjustment (color
measuring) could not be executed on site.
† Entire process workflow
Performing adjustment continuously at the same place where the
repairment is carried put.
Figure 5-60. Adjustment Workflow
† Separate process workflow
Performing adjustment (color measuring) in a different place from the
repair work site

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 415


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE (ENTIRE PROCESS WORKFLOW)

1. Turn the printer power on.


2. Start the adjustment program, and select [Colorimetric Calibration Tool].
3. Click [Run] to start the “Colorimetric Calibration Tool”.
4. Click the [Perform entire process] button.
5. Make sure that the "READY" message is displayed on the printer LCD,
and click [Next].
6. Select the connected printer from the printer list, and check if the LCD
panel backlight of the printer flashes by clicking [Confirming flashing of the
backlight].
7. Click [Next], then the message that prompt you to agitate the ink inside the
cartridges will be displayed.

C H E C K If the printer has not been used for more than two weeks, it
P O IN T is recommended to agitate the ink inside the cartridges to
get an accurate result. Remove all the ink cartridges from the
printer, and shake them gently for four or five times.

8. Click [OK] to start the cleaning.

Figure 5-61. Colorimetric Calibration ID Startup Screen

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 416


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

9. Load an A4-sized paper vertically on the paper tray, select "Automatic


Nozzle Check" from the “Types of Nozzle Check” box , and click [Next] to
start the nozzle check.
10. Load an A3-sized paper horizontally on the paper tray and click [Next] to
perform the alignment check.

C H E C K Clicking the [Skip alignment check] button will let you


P O IN T proceed to the next step without performing the alignment
check.

11. Check the alignment pattern. If there is any defect, click [Cleaning] to
execute cleaning.
If the check pattern is appropriate, click [Next].
12. Load an A4-sized Archival Matte Paper vertically on the paper tray, and
click [Next] to print the calibration chart.

C A U T IO N
Never touch the printed calibration chart.

Figure 5-62. Entire Process Screen

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 417


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

13. Make sure there is no missing dots in the nozzle check pattern at the
bottom of the calibration chart.
If there are missing dots, click [Print Calibration Chart Again]. The
calibration chart will be printed again after performing cleaning.
If there are no missing dots, let the chart stand for five minutes until it dries
out paying attention not to touch the chart.
14. When the calibration chart dries out (after five minutes), click [Next].
15. Connect a calibrator to the computer, and click [Measure].
16. Place the calibrator on the calibration base plate, and click [Calibrate]
17. Keep the calibrator remain set on the base plate, hold down the button on
the side of the calibrator until it beeps.
Once the calibration completed normally, following screen appears.

White plate

i1 calibrator

Button

Calibration plate

Figure 5-64. Entire process screen


Figure 5-63. i1Calibrator 18. Make sure that the date and time printed in the second line on the upper
left of the chart (measurable time and date) is within the range displayed
C A U T IO N
Do not contaminate the white plate of the calibration base under the heading "GMT" on the lower screen. (If the date and time is not
plate. If tainted, use alcohol to clean the plate. within the range, it is necessary to print the cart again.)
19. Refer to Figure 5-66, lay the chart on the black paper (or sheet) with the
upper part of the chart facing left side, and set the scanning ruller onto the
bottom most patch line.

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 418


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Printed date and time Main unit serial number OS type Black ink type

2005-04-11 14:44 (GMT 2005-04-11 05:44)


S/N:0000000000 OS:Win BlackInk:Matte
2005-04-18 14:39 (GMT 2005-04-18 05:39)
Printer:EPSON Stylus Pro 4800

Measurable date and time Product name

2005-04-11 14:44 (GMT 2005-04-11 05:44)


S/N:0000000000 OS:Win BlackInk:Matte
2005-04-18 14:39 (GMT 2005-04-18 05:39)
Printer:EPSON PX-6500

Calibration patch

Nozzle check
pattern

Figure 5-65. Measurable Time and Date Check


Set the scanning ruler with its guide gap matched with the patch.

Figure 5-66. Setting the Chart and the Scanning Ruller

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 419


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

20. Click [OK] and follow the instructions (following procedure) displayed on When measuring colors, pay attention to the instructions
the screen to perform color measuring. C A U T IO N
below.
1. Set the calibrator with its measuring part matched with measuring start „ Take more than 10 seconds to measure one line.
position (margin) as shown in Figure 5-68. „ Keep the scan speed constant as possible.
2. Press down the button on the side of the calibrator. „ Measure each of the lines twice. (Measure the line as
3. When it beeps, keep holding down the button and scan the patch along instructed on the program screen.)
the calibration guide to measuring end position (margin). „ Place the chart on a flat surface. The calibrator and the
4. Once the measuring is complete, release the button. ruler must be attached firmly to the chart in order to
5. Repeat Step 1 through 4 twice for the same patch line. measure the colors accurately.
6. Repeat Step 1 through 5 to measure the bottommost line to the top „ Do not scan any places other than the one shown in
line. (The line that needs to be measured is displayed on the screen.) Figure 5-68.
21. Once all the lines (8 lines) are measured, click [OK]. „ If a color-measuring error occurs or the measured values
are completely out of the standard values, a warning
mark ( ) appears. In this instance, check the
instructions mentioned above and retry the color
measuring again.
„ If an error mark ( ) appears, check the instructions
mentioned above and retry the color measuring again.

Unmeasured lines

Currently
measured line

Measured lines

Figure 5-67. Color Measuring Screen

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 420


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

BlackInk:Matte
OS:Win
Printer:EPSON PX-6500
S/N:0000000000
2005-04-18 14:39 (GMT 2005-04-18 05:39)
2005-04-11 14:44 (GMT 2005-04-11 05:44)
Start position in the color measuring End position in the color measuring

Figure 5-68. Setting the Calibrator/Measuring Position Figure 5-70. Color Measuring Order

Figure 5-69. Color Measuring Screen

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 421


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

22. Make sure that the "READY" message is displayed on the printer LCD
panel, and click [Next] to write the Color ID to the printer main unit.
23. When the writing is complete, click the [Next] button.

Figure 5-71. Entire Process Screen

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 422


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

24. Load an A4-sized Archival Matte Paper vertically on the paper tray, and
click [Next] to print the first page (Sheet1) of the verify chart.

C A U T IO N
Never touch the printed calibration chart.

25. When the first page of the verify chart is printed to the last, load an A4-
sized Archival Matte Paper vertically on the paper tray, and click [Next] to
print the second page (Sheet2) of the verify chart.
26. Make sure that there is no missing dot in the verify chart.
If there is any defect, click [Print Verify Chart Again]. The verify chart will be
printed again after performing cleaning.
If there are no missing dots, let the chart stand for five minutes until it dries
out paying attention not to touch the chart
27. When the verify chart dries out (after five minutes), click [Next].
28. Connect the calibrator to the computer, and click [Measure].
29. Place the calibrator on the calibration base plate, and click [Calibrate].
30. Keep the calibrator remain set on the base plate, hold down the button on
the side of the calibrator until it beeps.
Once the calibration completed normally, following screen appears.

Figure 5-72. Entire Process Screen

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 423


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

31. Make sure that the date and time printed in the second line on the upper
left of the chart(measurable time and date) is within the range displayed Sheet number Main unit serial number
under the heading "GMT" on the lower screen.(If the date and time is not
within the range, it is necessary to print the chart again.)
Sheet2
32. Refer to Figure 5-73, lay the chart on the black paper (or sheet) with the S/N : 0000000000
upper part of the chart facing left side, and set the scanning ruller onto the 2005-04-07 12:38 Printed date and time
bottommost patch line. (GMT 2005-04-07 03:38)
2005-04-14 12:33 Measurable date and time
(GMT 2005-04-14 03:33)


Sheet2
S/N : 0000000000
2005-04-07 12:38
(GMT 2005-04-07 03:38)
2005-04-14 12:33
(GMT 2005-04-14 03:33)

Calibration
patch

Figure 5-73. Setting the Chart and the Scanning Ruler

Figure 5-74. Measurable Date and Time Check

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 424


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

33. Click [OK] and follow the instructions (following procedure) displayed on
the screen to perform color measuring.
1. Set the calibrator with its measuring part matched with measuring start
position (gray part) as shown in Figure 5-68.
2. Press the button on the side of the calibrator.
3. When it beeps, keep holding down the button and scan the patch along
the scanning ruller to measuring end position (gray part).
4. Once the measuring is complete, release the button.
Start position in the color measuring End position in the color measuring
5. Repeat Step 1 through 4 twice for the same patch line.
6. Repeat Step 1 through 5 to measure the bottommost line to the top
Figure 5-76. Setting the Calobrator/Color Measuring Position
line. (The line which needs to be measured is displayed on the
screen.)
34. Once all the lines (5 lines) are measured, click [OK].
35. Measure Sheet 2 by following Step 31 through 34.

Figure 5-75. Color Measuring Order

Figure 5-77. Color Measuring Screen

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 425


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

36. Click [Save] to save the result under a new file name (txt file).
37. Click the [End] button.

Figure 5-78. Entire Process Screen

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 426


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE (SEPARATE WORKFLOW)


† Printing Calibration Chart (at repair work site)
1. Turn the printer power on.
2. Start the adjustment program and select [Colorimetric Calibration Tool].
3. Click [Run] to start “Colorimetric Calibration Tool”.
4. Click [Print Calibration Chart].

5. Perform Step 5 through 12 of "Adjustment Procedure (Entire Process Figure 5-79. Printing Calibration Chart
Workflow)" to print the Calibration chart.
6. Lay one plain paper on the print surface of the Calibration chart, put them
in a clear file together with the alignment check pattern, and send them to
a place where the color measuring is carried out.

C A U T IO N
The printed calibration charts should be sent to a color-
measuring site immediately, as the color of the patch may be
discolored in a week.

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 427


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Creating Color ID Data (at color measuring site)


1. Start the adjustment program, and select [Colorimetric Calibration Tool].
2. Click [Run] to start “Colorimetric Calibration Tool”.
3. Click [Color ID]. Perform the color
4. Select the type of the currently used black ink from the ”BlackInk" pull- measurement
down menu, and click [Next].
5. Perform Step 5 through 12 of "Adjustment Procedure (Entire Process
Workflow)" to print the calibration chart.
6. Enter the 10-digit serial numbers that are printed on the calibration chart,
and click [Next]
7. Click [Save], make sure that the file name is equilvalent to the main unit
serial number, and save the color ID data (dat format).
8. Click [End].
9. Send the color ID data acquired in the procedure to the repair work site.

Figure 5-80. Generating Colorimetric Calibration ID Data

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 428


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Writing Color ID (at repair work site)


1. Start the adjustment program and select [Colorimetric Calibration ID].
2. Click [Run] to start “Colorimetric Calibration Tool”.
3. Click [Write Color ID].
4. Perform Step 5 to 6 of "Adjustment Procedure (Entire Process Workflow)"
to check the connection status to the printer.
5. Select [File] from “Input Method”.
6. Click [Specify the file], select the color ID data file (dat format), and click
[Next].
7. Make sure that the S/N shown in the input data is the same as that of the
connected printer and that it should be the same as the product number of
the printer. Click [Next].
8. When the writing is complete, click [End]

Figure 5-81. Writing Colorimetric Calibration ID

Adjustment Basic Adjustment 429


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.4 Advanced Adjustment VSD1 E row


D row
G row
5.4.1 Auto Bi-d Adjustment F row
A row
Performs Auto Bi-D Adjustment with the Multi Sensor. When the adjustment H row
C row
pattern is printed, this is automatically executed from scanning of the pattern to B row
correction. The pattern is printed at PG=0.7/1.2, and the correction value is
automatically copied for other PG settings. VSD2

† Paper Used
„ Size: 17"
„ Type: Enhanced Matte Roll Paper
† Procedure
1. Turn the printer on. VSD3
2. Start adjustment program and select [Auto Bi-d Adjustment].
3. Click the [Run] button to print the adjustment pattern.
4. As the pattern is printed, the printer automatically scans the pattern
and makes corrections. (This is not necessary when making special
adjustments manually.)
[PG=0.7]
5. Click the [Finish] button. [VSD1] Rough =
[VSD1] Fine = E :
4
0[ 0, 0, 0] D : 0 [ 0, 0, 0] G : 0 [ 0, 0, 0]
F: 0[ 0, 0, 0] A : 0 [ 0, 0, 0] H : 0 [ 0, 0, 0]
C: 0[ 0, 0, 0] B : 0 [ 0, 0, 0]
[VSD2] Rough = 4
[VSD2] Fine = E : 0[ 0, 0, 0] D : 0 [ 0, 0, 0] G : 0 [ 0, 0, 0]
F: 0[ 0, 0, 0] A : 0 [ 0, 0, 0] H : 0 [ 0, 0, 0]
C: 0[ 0, 0, 0] B : 0 [ 0, 0, 0]
[VSD3] Rough = 4
[VSD3] Fine = E : 0[ 0, 0, 0] D : 0 [ 0, 0, 0] G : 0 [ 0, 0, 0]
F: 0[ 0, 0, 0] A : 0 [ 0, 0, 0] H : 0 [ 0, 0, 0]
C: 0[ 0, 0, 0] B : 0 [ 0, 0, 0]
[Average] VSD1 = 25, VSD2 = 24, VSD3 = 25, ECO = 26

Figure 5-83. Adjustment Pattern

Figure 5-82. Auto Bi-D Adjustment Screen

Adjustment Advanced Adjustment 430


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.4.2 Manual Bi-D Adjustment 8. Click [Next]. ( )

Adjusts Bi-D by inspecting visually.


† Papers required
„ Size: 17"
3
„ Type: Enhanced Matte Roll Paper
† Procedure 1 4
1. Turn the printer power on.
2. Start up the adjustment program and select [Manual Bi-D Adjustment]. 5
3. Select the PG that requires adjustment. ( )
2 7
4. Click [Next]. ( )
5. Click [Print] to print the MK adjustment patterns consist of three rows
(VSD1, VSD2, and VSD3). ( )
6. Examine the printout patterns for each of the three modes, select the
value for the group of most closely aligned vertical lines for each mode, 6
and calculate the average values. Input the average values of each
mode in the edit boxes. ( )
Figure 5-84. Manual Bi-D Adjustment (1)
Most closely aligned lines
# 1 [ Bi-D VSD 1 PG=1.2 ] (Step = 2)
PK/MK = 8 (0) PK/MK = 6 (0)

10 4

Input "7"

C H E C K The printed pattern is numbered on every other line,


P O IN T however, you can enter the undisplayed number in between.

7. After clicking [Write] ( ), make sure that the writing to the printer is
finished normally, and then click [OK]. ( )

Adjustment Advanced Adjustment 431


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Print Mode Indicates the value of the center pattern

# 1 [ Bi-D VSD 1 PG=1.2 ] (Step = 2)


PK/MK = 8 (0) PK/MK = 8 (0)

Center Pattern
(+) direction <- ->(-) direction

# 1 [ Bi-D VSD 1 PG=1.2 ] (Step = 2)


PK/MK = 8 (0) PK/MK = 8 (0)

VSD 1

# 2 [ Bi-D VSD 1 PG=1.2 ] (Step = 2)


PK/MK = 8 (0) PK/MK = 6 (0)

VSD 2

# 3 [ Bi-D VSD 1 PG=1.2 ] (Step = 2)


PK/MK = 8 (0) PK/MK = 8 (0)

VSD 3

Figure 5-85. MK Adjustment Pattern

Adjustment Advanced Adjustment 432


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

9. Click [Print] to print the color adjustment patterns consist of three rows
(VSD1, VSD2, and VSD3 mode). ( ) Indicates the value of the center pattern
10. Examine the printout patterns (except MK colored patterns) for each of
the three modes, and select the value for the group of most closely Lc = 7 (7)
aligned blocks for each mode. Input the selected value in the edit
boxes. ( )

C H E C K The printed pattern is numbered on every other line,


P O IN T however, you can enter the undisplayed number in between.

11. After clicking [Write] ( ), make sure that the writing to the printer is
finished normally, and then click [OK]. ( )
12. Click [Finish].( )

8
9

10
12
Figure 5-87. Color Adjustment Pattern

11

Figure 5-86. Manual Bi-D Adjustment Screen (2)

Adjustment Advanced Adjustment 433


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.4.3 Destination Setting


† Procedure
1. Turn the printer on.
2. Start the adjustment program and select [Change Model Name].
3. Select the "Others" and click the [Run] button to set the destination to
the NVRAM.
4. Click the [Next] button.
5. Click the [Check] button and current setting model name will be
displayed. Click the [OK] button after confirming the set model name.
6. Click the [Finish] button.

Figure 5-89. Destination Setting

Figure 5-90. Confirming Model Name

Figure 5-88. Destination Setting Screen (1)

Adjustment Advanced Adjustment 434


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.4.4 PF Micro Feed Adjustment (Bi-D) (TBD)


By using the "Paper Feed Adjuster" tool, it is possible to adjust print quality for
papers which are frequently used by users.
“Paper Feed Adjuster“ tool works as follows:
† Adjustment:
Adjusts “Paper Feed Amount“ and “Microweave“.
† Printing the set values:
Prints the calibration values that are currently applied to “Paper Feed
Amount“ and “Microweave“.
† Initialization of the set values:
Resets the calibration values applied to “Paper Feed Amount“ and
“Microweave“ to the factory default.

C H E C K Refer to the help function for use of the “Paper Feed


P O IN T Adjuster”. Figure 5-91. PF Micro Feed Adjustment (Bi-D)

† Procedure
1. Turn the printer power on.
2. Start the adjustment program, and select [PF Micro Feed Adjustment
(Bi-D)].
3. Click [Run] to start the "Paper Feed Adjuster".
4. Using the "Paper Feed Adjuster" tool, adjust [Paper feeding amount]
and [Microweave].

Adjustment Advanced Adjustment 435


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.5 Check Results


5.5.1 Check Nozzle
This checks whether or not each of the head nozzles is jetting ink normally. If
nozzle ink jetting is abnormal, execute cleaning and check the nozzles again.
† Paper Used
„ Size: 17"
„ Type: Enhanced Matte Roll Paper
† Procedure
1. Turn the printer on.
2. Start the adjustment program and select [Check Nozzle].
3. Click the [Run] button and print the nozzle check pattern.
4. Check that there is no dot missing on the pattern.
5. If there is no dot missing, click the [Finish] button to finish the check
nozzle. Figure 5-92. Check Nozzle Screen
If there is dot missing, execute cleaning and then print the check
pattern and check it again.

Figure 5-93. Nozzle Check Pattern

Adjustment Check Results 436


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.5.2 Check Alignment


This checks for presence/absence of alignment slip. Check all of the printing
modes VSD1, VSD2, and VSD3. If alignment is slipped, execute cleaning and
check the alignment again.
† Paper Used
„ Size: 17"
„ Type: Enhanced Matte Rool Paper
† Procedure
1. Turn the printer on.
2. Start the adjustment program and select [Check Alignment].
3. Select the printing mode and click [Print] button to print the nozzle
check pattern.
4. Check that there is no alignment slip.
5. If there is no alignment slip, click the [Finish] button to finish the check
alignment.
Figure 5-94. Check Alignment Screen
If there is alignment slip, execute cleaning and then print the check
pattern and check it again.

Figure 5-95. Horizontal Alignment Check Pattern

Figure 5-96. Vertical Alignment Check Pattern

Adjustment Check Results 437


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.5.3 Print Adjustment Check Pattern


This prints all of the adjustment patterns and the adjustment parameters stored
in the printer.
† Paper Used
„ Size: 17"
„ Type: Enhanced Matte Rool Paper
† Procedure
1. Turn the printer on.
2. Start the adjustment program and select [Print Adjustment Check
Pattern].
3. Select [Print All Pattern] or [Print Variables] and then click the [Print]
button, and the following patterns will be printed.
z Print All Pattern
All the adjustment patterns and the adjustment parameters will be
printed.
Figure 5-97. Print Adjustment Check Pattern Screen
z Print Variables
The adjustment parameters stored in the printer will be printed.

C A U T IO N
Approximately 3.6m of roll paper will be needed when
printing all patterns. Be careful about the amount of
remaining paper and also about the eject space needed
since the paper will be continuously printed without being
cut.
4. Check the printed patterns and click the [Finish] button.

Adjustment Check Results 438


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.5.4 Image Printing


C A U T IO N
„ When performing printing in the following procedure,
specify the paper size from the printer print setting.
„ "Single Weight Matte Paper" should be used when
printing with Stylus Pro 4400/4450.

† Procedure
1. Turn the printer power on.
2. Click [Browse], and select any image file (bmp) in “tanzaku“ folder,
which is inside the folder (adjwiz2) that stores adjustment program
data.
3. Select the media from the [Media type] pull-down menu.
4. Click [Print] to print the image.
5. Check the image quality, and click [End].
Figure 5-98. Image Printing Screen

Adjustment Check Results 439


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.5.5 Check Cutting


This cuts the paper and checks for cutter adjustment and cutter wear.
† Paper Used
„ Size: 17"
„ Type: Enhanced Matte Roll Paper
† Procedure
1. Turn the printer on.
2. Start the adjustment program and select [Cut Check].
3. Input the number of times to execute the test cut into the edit box, and
then click the [Run] button.
4. Check the cut area of the ejected paper and click the [Finish] button.

Figure 5-99. Check Cutting Screen

Adjustment Check Results 440


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.6 Reset Counters 5.6.2 Reset PF Motor Counter


† Procedure
5.6.1 Reset Paper Ejection Switching/PG Switching 1. Turn the printer power on.
Counter 2. Start the adjustment program and select [Reset PF Motor Counter].
3. Click the [Run] button to clear the PF Motor life counter.
† Procedure
4. Click the [Finish] button.
1. Turn the printer power on.
2. Start up the adjustment program and select [Reset Paper Ejection
Switching/PG Switching Counter].
3. Click [Run] to clear the Paper Ejection Switching/PG Switching
Counter.
4. Click [Finish].

Figure 5-101. Reset PF Motor Counter Screen

Figure 5-100. Reset Paper Ejection Switching/PG Switching Counter


Screen

Adjustment Reset Counters 441


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.6.3 Reset ASF Counter 5.6.4 Reset When CR Unit Change


† Procedure † Procedure
1. Turn the printer power on. 1. Turn the printer power on.
2. Start up the adjustment program and select [Reset ASF Counter]. 2. Start the adjustment program and select [Reset When CR Unit
3. Click [Run] to clear the ASF Counter. Change].
4. Click [Finish]. 3. Click the [Run] button to clear the"Motor Assy., CR" life counter.
4. Click the [Finish] button.

Figure 5-102. Reset ASF Counter Screen


Figure 5-103. Reset When CR Unit Change Screen

Adjustment Reset Counters 442


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.6.5 Reset When Cleaning Unit Change 5.6.6 Reset When Printhead Change
† Procedure † Procedure
1. Turn the printer power on. 1. Turn the printer power on.
2. Start the adjustment program and select [Reset When Cleaning Unit 2. Start the adjustment program and select [Reset When Printhead
Change]. Change].
3. Click the [Run] button to clear the Cleaning Unit change counter. 3. Click the [Run] button to clear the Printhead change counter.
4. Click the [Finish] button. 4. Click the [Finish] button.

Figure 5-104. Reset When Cleaning Unit Change Figure 5-105. Reset When Printhead Change

Adjustment Reset Counters 443


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.7 Installing Firmware


Firmware for the printer is written to the Flash ROM on the Main Board. Use
the following procedure to write the firmware to the Flash ROM when the Main
Board is replaced or the firmware needs to be updated.

C A U T IO N
Turning on the printer immediately after uploading firmware
to a new Main Board with no parameters in place will start
initial ink charging. When initial charging is not needed, be
sure to execute "5.3.15 Initial Ink charge flag ON/OFF"
(p.408)
† Tool required
Firmware Update Tool
„ Supported OS: Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP
„ Port: USB
Figure 5-106. Firmware Update Tool Screen
† Procedure
1. Turn off both the printer and the computer, and connect the printer to
the computer with a USB cable.
2. Turn the computer power on and then turn the printer on.
3. Start the Firmware Update Tool.
4. Select the port (Choose a port) and the firmware data (Choose a FW
data file) (UPG format).
5. Click [Send] to transmit the firmware data.
6. The “Complete” message is displayed in a pop-up window when the
data transmission is finished, then click [OK].
7. Upon completion of the update, the printer automatically reboots.
Figure 5-107. Firmware Update Tool Screen

Adjustment Installing Firmware 444


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.8 Installing Firmware for SP 4400 (4-color


model) after replacing Main Board with
New one
The firmware preinstalled on the main board provided as ASP is for 8-color
model. If you have replaced the main board of 4-color model with a new one, 11. When the following confirmation message appears, press the [Paper
you need to delete the preinstalled firmware and install firmware for 4-color (<)] button.
model.

C A U T IO N
As for the main board of Stylus Pro 4450 supplied as ASP,
the firmware for 4-color is preintalled on it.

12. “F/W UPDATING” appears and the firmware update begins.


† Tool required 13. When the “NVRAM CLEAR OK” appears on the control panel, press
Firmware Update Tool the [Menu (>)] button to restart the printer.
14. Perform the other required operations/adjustments listed in “5.1.4
„ Supported OS: Windows 98, Me, 2000, XP Adjustment Items classified by Part/Unit (p.368)” .
„ Port: USB
† Procedure
1. Turn off both the printer and the computer, and connect the printer to
the computer with a USB cable.
2. Turn on the printer.
3. Start the Firmware Update Tool.
4. Transmit the “ErasePro.upg”.
5. When “Pro Area Erase ?” appears on the control panel, press the
[Menu(>)] button.
"Flash ROM ERASE" appears and the data in the Flash ROM is
deleted.
6. Turn off the printer after “End [Success]” appears on the control panel.
7. Turn on the printer.
(The printer turns on in firmware update mode.)
8. Start the Firmware Update Tool.
9. Transmit the firmware data.
10. When the following message appears, press the [Paper (<)] button to
select 4-color.

Adjustment Installing Firmware for SP 4400 (4-color model) after replacing Main Board with New one 445
EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.9 Device ID Setting


C H E C K Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C only.
P O IN T

† Procedure
1. Turn the printer ON, and start the Adjustment Program.
2. Select the printer name.
3. Click the icon on the top left of the window.
4. Select [Port Check on Connected Printer].
5. The pop up screen to confirm the port is displayed. Click [Yes].
6. Click [Start].

C H E C K If a connection error occurs, verify the connection between


P O IN T the computer and the printer one more time, and make sure
to perform the adjustment again.

Figure 5-109. [Port Check on Connected Printer] Screen

Figure 5-108. [Select Printer Name] Screen

Adjustment Device ID Setting 446


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

5.10 Writing MAC Address


The MAC address of this printer is recorded on the Flash ROM of the main
board. When replacing the main board, make sure to write the MAC address to
the new board as follows.
† Procedure
1. Turn on the power of the printer.
2. Start the adjustment program, and select [Set MAC address].

C H E C K The label on which the MAC address is printed is attached


P O IN T on the rear of the printer as shown in figure 5-110.

3. Key in the MAC address and press [Enter].


4. Press [Next].
5. Press [Confirm], and check that the same MAC address is displayed Figure 5-111. [Set MAC address] Window
as the one you just keyed in.
6. Press [Finish].

Rear of the printer

MAC address label

Figure 5-112. Confirmation Window of [Set MAC address]


Figure 5-110. Location of the Label with MAC Address

Adjustment Writing MAC Address 447


6
CHAPTER

MAINTENANCE
EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

6.1 Overview C A U T IO N
„ Ensure adequate work space for performing service/
maintenance.
This chapter describes maintenance operations that are required during „ The printer should be set in a place where there is no
servicing. vibration, and where it is level and stable.
Most servicing/maintenance of this printer will need to be done by visiting the „ The weight of this printer is approximately 40.2kg. When
site where the printer will actually be used by the customer (on-site service). moving or lifting the printer, be sure that at least two
Carefully observe the following cautions and perform the servicing/ people are lifting by supporting the locations shown in
maintenance in such a way that no damage is done to the product or the figure below.
customer's work environment.

W A R N IN G
„ The power switch is installed on the secondary side of
the power circuit, so power is always supplied unless the
power code has been unplugged. Unless there are
specific instructions otherwise, be sure to unplug the
power code from the AC outlet to prevent electric shock
and circuit damage during servicing.
„ The cover open sensor for detecting the open/close
condition of the front cover has an interlock switch that
functions as a safety device. Therefore, it is prohibited to
turn off this switch. „ Place a protective sheet on the floor before removing ink
„ A lithium battery is installed on the MAIN Board of this routing parts because there is the possibility that leaking
printer. Be sure to observe the following instructions ink could get onto the product or floor where the product
when servicing the battery: is set up.
• Keep the battery away from any metal. „ To prevent static electric damage when handling a
circuit board, do not touch elements on board with bare
• Do not install the battery in the wrong direction. (This
hands. If handling with bare hands is unavoidable,
may cause burning or explosion.)
perform work by using required measures, such as
• Do not heat the battery or put it into fire.
wearing a grounding strap.
• Do not set the C593 MAIN board directly on top of any
„ When allowing the printer to operate with covers
object which is conductive.
removed, be careful not to get injured with high-speed
„ Be careful not to let ink get into your eyes or your skin. If operating parts such as fans.
ink gets in your eye, rinse them immediately with water
„ Use care to avoid injury when handling the cutter blade
and see a doctor if any trouble.
because it is very sharp.

Maintenance Overview 449


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

„ The cutter uses a very hard blade that is unusually 6.1.2 Important Maintenance Items During Service
C A U T IO N
brittle, so do not allow it to be damaged by bumping into Operations
objects such as metal printer parts.
Check the following items during printer maintenance/service and perform any
„ If the printer that has already been installed needs to be necessary operations.
packed and transported again, first make certain that the
print head has been capped properly with the power to Table 6-1. Items to be Checked During Maintenance/Service
the printer turned off. Then remove all the ink cartridges
Items Check Points Remedy
and install all the packing materials as referred to in the
Start-Up Guide or Assembly and Setup Guide supplied Surface of the Platen and Make sure no paper, Cleaning (If there is an
Sub-platen dust, or foreign objects ink stain, wipe with dry,
with the printer.
are attached or have clean cloth after cleaning
accumulated. the ink stain with damp
6.1.1 Product Life Information cloth.)
† Work Life Preservation Items CR scale Is there any Cleaning
This printer does not have periodic replacement parts that require periodic (Slit plate for CR encoder accumulation or If there is any damage,
replacement before reaching the end of the product work life. detection) adhesion of paper dust replace the part.
However, if this printer continues to be used after the product work life, or foreign matter?
service call errors will be displayed before part failures occur and Rail on the CR guide frame Make sure there are no Cleaning
messages will be presented to advise part replacement. (This excludes the foreign objects attached.
Maintenance Tank and Cutter consumable parts.) Sensors in paper feed path Make sure there are no Cleaning
Corresponding parts are shown below. • Multi sensor foreign objects attached.
• PE sensor, etc.
Name Maintenance Request Service Request
Cleaning Unit 0040 0001002D † Cleaning on the Platen and Subpaten
CR Motor 0002 00000101 Brush away dust and paper dust, and wipe the whole surface with a OA
RTC backup battery 0008 00010023 cleaner. If the paper absorption holes are clogged, push the paper dust
into the inside of the printer using a precision driver or a similar tool.
Paper feed roller 0200 N/A
† Work Life Information C A U T IO N
Take care not to touch the porous pads for print with white
Work life information can be checked from the "Printer Status Menu" of the borders.
panel settings. The display will show the remaining percentage in relation
to the specified control value (displays "F*****E"). These values saved in
the counters can be cleared using "Maintenance Mode 2".
Porous pads for print with hite borders
W A R N IN G
Do not clear counters that do not correspond to a part
replacement or inspection. Clearing of the waste ink count
value for the "MAINT TANK" counter is especially prohibited, Paper absorption
because it can affect printer operation and lead to ink
leakage.

Maintenance Overview 450


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

6.2 Lubrication • Lubrication Point


Springs located on upper part of Each
Lubricate as needed during servicing. Use lubricants specified below. "Flame Holder, IC" of "Flame Assy.,
IC" (4 places)
Table 6-2. Grease Application • Lubrication Type
Name Amount Company Part No. G-74
• Remarks
G-26 40 g EPSON 1080614 Use a brush or cotton swab for
G-74 40 g EPSON 1409257 application.

C A U T IO N
„ When lubricating printer mechanisms, never apply
lubricants other than those specified because they can
damage or reduce work life of components or cause
poor printer operation. Figure 6-1. Flame Assy., IC (left / right)
„ Note that the Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C and
the Stylus Pro 4000 have the same points to be
lubricated but is specified to use different types of • Lubrication Point
lubricants. Cam parts on "Cam, Valve" (4 places)
• Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C: G-74 • Lubrication Type
• Stylus Pro 4000: G-46 G-74
• Remarks
C H E C K „ As G-74 is quick-drying lubricant, it is only necessary for Use a brush or cotton swab for
P O IN T the lubricated points to be slightly coated with application.
lubrication.
„ To prevent G-74 from being coagulated, shake it well
before using it.

Figure 6-2. Cam, Valve (left / right)

Maintenance Lubrication 451


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

• Lubrication Point • Lubrication Point


Applies on the ribs on the front and Ribs on the front and back sides of
back sides of "Slider, CR Lock". Applies along the part indicated in "Slider, CR Lock" (4 places)
Applies along the part (4 places in total) red.(4places)
• Lubrication Type
indicated in red.
• Lubrication Type G-74
G-74 • Remarks
• Remarks Use a brush or cotton swab for
Use a brush or cotton swab for application.
application.
Applies along the rim
indicated in yellow.

Figure 6-3. Slider, CR Lock(No.1) Figure 6-5. Slider, CR Lock(No.3)j

• Lubrication Point • Lubrication Point


Head rib of "Slider, CR Lock" Ribs on front and back sides of "Slider,
Applies on the part
CR Lock" (2 places)
• Lubrication Type
indicated in red. G-74 Applies along the part indicated in • Lubrication Type
red.(2places) G-74
• Remarks
Use a brush or cotton swab for • Remarks
application. Use a brush or cotton swab for
application.

Figure 6-6. Slider, CR Lock(No.4)


Figure 6-4. Slider, CR Lock(No.2)

Maintenance Lubrication 452


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

• Lubrication Point • Lubrication Point


Cam part of "INTERMITTENT GEAR, E shaft E shaft of "Frame, Sub, Right" and
40" pinion gear part of "Motor Assy., PG"
• Lubrication Type • Lubrication Type
G-26 G-26
• Lubrication Amount • Lubrication Amount
Φ1mm x approximately 7mm 2 1. Φ1mm x 5mm (approximately 1mm
• Remarks Frame, Sub, inside from groove for E shaft-ring)
Right
Use a syringe/needle (JIS 17# or 2. Φ1mm x half circumference or
equivalent) for application. 1 Φ2mm x quarter circumference
• Remarks
Use a syringe/needle (JIS 17# or
equivalent) for application.

Figure 6-7. INTERMITTENT GEAR Figure 6-9. Combination Gear, 36.8.8

• Lubrication Point • Lubrication Point


Cam part and gear parts (3 teeth) of Shaft of "Combination Gear, 12.22.4"
"Intermittent Gear, Release, Transmit" • Lubrication Type
and inner surface of bush (1 place) G-26
3 • Lubrication Type • Lubrication Amount
G-26 Φ1mm x 15mm
• Lubrication Amount
1. Φ1mm x approximately 5mm • Remarks
2. Φ1mm x approximately 7mm Use a syringe/needle (JIS 17# or
3. Φ1mm x approximately 1mm equivalent) for application.
(Applies from the outside of the
frame.)
2 • Remarks
1 Use a syringe/needle (JIS 17# or
equivalent) for application.
Figure 6-8. Intermittent Gear, Release, Transmit Figure 6-10. Combination Gear, 12.22.4

Maintenance Lubrication 453


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

• Lubrication Point • Lubrication Point


Spur Gear 25.6 "Spur Gear 44.74", "Spur Gear 25.6", Shaft part of "LEVER, CHANGE
Combination Gear small gear of "Combination Gear PAPER EJECT, R"
12.8.36 12.8.36", and large gear of • Lubrication Type
"Combination Gear 16.74.24" G-26
Combination Gear • Lubrication Type
16.74.24 • Lubrication Amount
G-26 Φ1mm x approximately 3mm
• Lubrication Amount
F1mm x quarter circumference (4 • Remarks
places) Use a syringe/needle (JIS 17# or
• Remarks equivalent) for application.
Use a syringe/needle (JIS 17# or
Spur Gear 44.74 equivalent) for application.

Figure 6-11. Spur Gear 44.74 Figure 6-13. Shaft part of "LEVER, CHANGE PAPER EJECT, R"(No.2)

• Lubrication Point
• Lubrication Point
"LEVER, CHANGE PAPER EJECT,
Upper part of Ribs of "Shaft,
R;B", and contact sits and back of
Connection"
"LEVER, CHANGE PAPER EJECT,
R" • Lubrication Type
G-26
• Lubrication Type
G-26 • Lubrication Amount
Contact sites Φ1mm
(2 places)
• Lubrication Amount
Φ1mm x 10mm (3 places)
• Remarks
• Remarks
Use a syringe/needle (JIS 17# or
Back of dot-line Use a syringe/needle (JIS 17# or
equivalent) for application.
part equivalent) for application.

Figure 6-12. Shaft part of "LEVER, CHANGE PAPER EJECT, R"(No.1)


Figure 6-14. Ribs of "Shaft, Connection

Maintenance Lubrication 454


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Applys on both side • Lubrication Point • Lubrication Point


surfaces of the holder Both side surfaces of "Shaft, Upper part of Ribs of "Carriage" (4
Connection" (2 places) and "Carriage, places, lubrication point:
1 A;B Right Side" (5 places) approximately 12mm)
2
4 • Lubrication Type • Lubrication Type
5 G-26 G-74
3
• Lubrication Amount • Remarks
1. Φ1mm x 1mm(2 places) Use a brush or cotton swab for
2. Φ1mm x 2mm(2 places) application.
3. Φ1mm x 2mm
4. Φ1mm
5. Φ1mm
• Remarks
Use a syringe/needle (JIS 17# or
equivalent) for application.
Figure 6-17. Carriage
Figure 6-15. Carriage, A;B Right Side

• Lubrication Point
Rising surfaces of "CAM,
Applys on both side • Lubrication Point INCLINATION, R" and "CAM,
surfaces of the holder Both side surfaces of "Shaft, INCLINATION, L"
Connection" (2 places) and "Carriage, • Lubrication Type
1 A;B Right Side" (5 places) G-74
• Lubrication Type • Remarks
G-26 Use a brush or cotton swab for
2
5 3 • Lubrication Amount application.
4
1. Φ1mm x 1mm(2places)
2. Φ1mm x 2mm(2places)
3. Φ1mm x 2mm
4. Φ1mm
5. Φ1mm Figure 6-18. "CAM, INCLINATION, R" and "CAM, INCLINATION, L"
• Remarks
Use a syringe/needle (JIS 17# or
equivalent) for application.

Figure 6-16. Carriage, A;B Right Side

Maintenance Lubrication 455


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

• Lubrication Point
End part of "Lever, lock, PG"
• Lubrication Type
G-26
• Lubrication Amount
Φ1mm x approximately 3mm
• Remarks
Use a syringe/needle (JIS 17# or
equivalent) for application.
Wipe out lubricant with a dry cloth to
make the end part slightly coated with
lubricant.

Figure 6-19. Lever, lock, PG

• Lubrication Point
3 1
Lever, hole, and shaft parts of "Mount
Plate, Motor, ASF Unit"
2 • Lubrication Type
G-26
• Lubrication Amount
1. Φ1mm x 2mm
2. Φ1mm x 1perimeter
3. Φ1mm x 15mm
• Remarks
Use a syringe/needle (JIS 17# or
equivalent) for application.

Figure 6-20. Mount Plate, Motor, ASF Unit

Maintenance Lubrication 456


7
CHAPTER

APPENDIX
EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

7.1 Connectors
† C593 Main Board † CA00 Main Board
Table 7-1. C593 Main Board Connectors List Table 7-2. C699 Main Board Connectors List
CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks
CN1 14 White P/S board — CN1 14 White P/S board —
CN7 31 — C593_SUB-D Board (CN1) — CN7 31 — C593_SUB-D Board (CN1) —
CN8 31 — C593_SUB-D Board (CN2) FFC CN8 31 — C593_SUB-D Board (CN2) FFC
CN9 30 — C593_SUB-D Board (CN3) FFC CN9 30 — C593_SUB-D Board (CN3) FFC
CN11 8 — IEEE1394 FFC CN12 4 — USB 2.0 —
CN12 4 — USB 2.0 — CN13 36 — Optin card (TYPE_B) —
CN13 36 — Optin card (TYPE_B) — CN14 3 Black PF_MOT —
CN14 3 Black PF_MOT — CN15 3 White CR_MOT —
CN15 3 White CR_MOT — CN16 4 White ASF/Pump_MOT With relay connector
CN16 4 White ASF/Pump_MOT With relay connector CN18 4 Red PG/PO_MOT —
CN18 4 Red PG/PO_MOT — CN19 2 Black FAN1 (Right) With relay connector
CN19 2 Black FAN1 (Right) With relay connector CN20 2 Yellow FAN2 (Left) With relay connector
CN20 2 Yellow FAN2 (Left) With relay connector CN48 17 — C511_SUB-B Board (CN102) FFC
CN48 17 — C511_SUB-B Board (CN102) FFC CN50 2 White Radiator Plate cooling fan —
CN50 2 White Radiator Plate cooling fan — CN51 30 — C511_SUB-B Board (CN101) FFC
CN51 30 — C511_SUB-B Board (CN101) FFC CN52 15 — C593_SUB-C Board (CN200) FFC
CN52 15 — C593_SUB-C Board (CN200) FFC CN53 28 — C593_SUB-C Board (CN201) FFC
CN53 28 — C593_SUB-C Board (CN201) FFC CN54 30 — C511_SUB-B Board (CN100) FFC
CN54 30 — C511_SUB-B Board (CN100) FFC CN56 2 Blue Rear Cover Sensor —
CN56 2 Blue Rear Cover Sensor — CN57 2 White Power Supply cooling fan —
CN57 2 White Power Supply cooling fan — CN62 2 — Network I/F —

Appendix Connectors 458


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Power Supply Board † C511_SUB-B Board(Relay Board2)


Table 7-3. Power Supply Board Connector List Table 7-6. C511_SUB-B Board Connectors List
CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks
CN1 2 White AC Inlet CN22 2 Blue P_COVER_SW
CN2 14 White Board Assy Main (CN1) CN25 2 Red ASF Paper Sensor
CN26 2 Blue Paper Eject Cancel Sensor
CN27 2 Yellow R_INSERT
† Panel Unit CN29 4 — PE_DET
CN31 3 Yellow PE_DET
Table 7-4. Panel Unit Connectors List
CN33 3 White P_THICK_0.3
CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks CN34 3 Black P_THICK_0.8
CN1 17 — C511_SUB-B Board (CN103) FCC CN36 2 White IH_LEVER_R
CN39 7 — CSIC_R1 Board (Photo Black) FFC
CN42 7 CSIC_R2 Board (Light Cyan) FFC
† C511_SUB Board(Relay Board1) CN43 7 — CSIC_R2 Board (Light Magenta) FFC

Table 7-5. C593 Board Connectors List CN45 7 CSIC_R4 Board (Light Black) FFC
CN46 7 — M_TNK
CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks
CN55 3 Blue PUMP_PHASE
CN1 24 — C511_SUB-D Board (CN4) FFC
CN100 30 — Board Assy Main (CN54) FFC, lock type
CN2 2 White C_SOL
CN101 30 — Board Assy Main (CN51) FFC, lock type
CN3 5 White MULTI_SENSE
CN102 17 — Board Assy Main (CN48)
CN4 5 — CR_ENC
CN103 17 — Panel Board (CN1)

Appendix Connectors 459


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† C593_SUB-C Board(Relay Board3) † C593_SUB-D Board


Table 7-7. C593_SUB-C Board Connectors List Table 7-8. C593_SUB-D Board Connectors List
CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks CN.No. Pins Color Connected to Remarks
CN24 4 White PF_ENC CN1 31 — Board Assy Main (CN7) FFC
CN28 2 White Paper Eject phase Sensor CN2 31 — Board Assy Main (CN8) FFC
CN30 3 Yellow ASF phase Sensor CN3 31 — Board Assy Main (CN9) FFC
CN32 3 Red PG_PHASE CN4 31 — Board Assy Main (CN1) FFC
CN37 2 Black IH_LEVER_L CN5 31 — Head Board(CN1) FFC
CN38 7 — CSIC_L1 Board (Matte Black) FFC CN6 31 — Head Board(CN1 FFC
CN40 7 — CSIC_L2 Board (Cyan) FFC
CN41 7 — CSIC_L2 Board (Magenta) FFC
CN44 7 — CSIC_L4 Board (Yellow) FFC
CN200 30 — Board Assy Main (CN52) FFC
CN201 30 — Board Assy Main (CN53) FFC

Appendix Connectors 460


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Panel Board

C593_SUB-C Board
Paper eject phase I/H Lever Sensor (Left) Pump Phase Sensor C511_SUB-B Board C593_SUB-D Board
Sensor Paper Eject Cancel C593_SUB Board
PG Phase Sensor PF Encoder Sensor
I/H Lever Sensor (Right) P Cover CR Encoder Multi

CN3 Relay FFC

CN2 Relay FFC

CN1 Relay FFC

CN6 Head FFC


CN5 Head FFC
ASF Phase Sensor Not used Open Sensor Photo Black Sensor
Paper Thickness
Sensor (0.8) Light Cyan
ASF Paper
CR_HP Sensor Sensor
Rear Hand Light Magenta Cutter Solenoid
Insertion
Matte Black

PE Sensor Sensor
Magenta
Yellow

Cyan

Light Black Maintenance


Paper Thickness
Tank
Sensor (0.3)

Suction Fan
(Right)
CN9 Relay FFC CN54 Relay FFC Suction Fan P/S CN48 Relay FFC
(Left)
CN8 Relay FFC CN51 Relay FFC
CN13
Option
CN7 Relay FFC CN52 Relay FFC
Rear Cover Type-B
Sensor
CN53 Relay FFC

Power Supply Power


cooling fan
Supply
C593 MAIN Board Board
ASF/
Pump Motor

AC Inlet
CR Motor PF Motor
PG/PO
Motor
Heat Dissipation
Plate Cooing Fan

Figure 7-1. Stylus Pro 4800/4400 Connectors

Appendix Connectors 461


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Panel Board

C593_SUB-C Board
Paper eject phase I/H Lever Sensor (Left) Pump Phase Sensor C511_SUB-B Board C593_SUB-D Board
Sensor Paper Eject Cancel C593_SUB Board
PG Phase Sensor PF Encoder Sensor
I/H Lever Sensor (Right) P Cover CR Encoder Multi

CN3 Relay FFC

CN2 Relay FFC

CN1 Relay FFC

CN6 Head FFC


CN5 Head FFC
ASF Phase Sensor Not used Open Sensor Photo Black Sensor
Paper Thickness
Sensor (0.8) Light Cyan
ASF Paper
CR_HP Sensor Sensor
Rear Hand Light Magenta Cutter Solenoid
Insertion
Matte Black

PE Sensor Sensor
Magenta
Yellow

Cyan

Light Black Maintenance


Paper Thickness
Tank
Sensor (0.3)

Suction Fan
CN9 Relay FFC CN54 Relay FFC (Right) CN48 Relay FFC
Suction Fan P/S
(Left)
CN8 Relay FFC CN51 Relay FFC

CN7 Relay FFC CN52 Relay FFC


Rear Cover
Sensor
CN53 Relay FFC

PG/PO ASF/
Motor Pump Motor
Power Supply Power
cooling fan
Supply
CA00 MAIN Board Board

AC Inlet
CR Motor PF Motor

Heat Dissipation CN62


Plate Cooing Fan
Network I/F

Figure 7-2. Stylus Pro 4450/4880/4880C Connectors

Appendix Connectors 462


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

7.2 Exploded Diagrams

Appendix Exploded Diagrams 463


105
100 103
112
108
108
106
118 107
111

111

110
111 104

101
102
109 103

108
108
117

120
127
126
129

113
116 for J P N
128 125 124
123 119

131
121 122
114
115
130

P X-6200S / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 4400 No.1 R ev.01 C 593-C AS E -011C 4


105
100 103
112
108
108
106
107
118
111

111

110
111 104

101
102
109 103

108

108
117

120
127
126
129

113
116 for J P N
128 124
131 119

123
133
121 122
134

130 132
114
115
130

P X-6500 / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 4800 No.1 R ev.01 C 593-C AS E -011C 8


161

152

162
163
153
162
163
154
155

150

166
G

151
156

165

165

165

165

164

164
157

157
158

159
160

159

P X-6200S ,6500 / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 4400,4800 No.2 R ev.01 C 593-C AS E -021


P
G

302 AH1 AG 1
D
N R
I

300 AD1

Q2
Q1

AF 1
AE 1
AL2
AK 2
AJ 2

301

200

P X-6200S / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 4400 No.3 R ev.01 C 593-E LE C -011


501

507
505

508

511
520
500

A2 519
518
512

514

517

513

516

P X-6200S / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 4400 No.4 R ev.01 C 593-ME C H-011C 4


501

507
505

508

500
511
520

A2 519
518
512

514

517

513

P X-6500 / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 4800 No.4 R ev.01 C 593-ME C H-011C 8


Y4 585
577x3
578x3 Y2 589
X1
586 577x3
Y3 578x3
X3
590
577x3
578x3 587
X2 588
559
581 X1
X8 577 591
578 Y1
558 577x3
573
578 578x3
X4 592
557 566 577 582
579

554 568 X2
569 577
X7 578
551
574 583
578
568 577 X3
579
554 577
X6 578
552 557 569
575 584 571
565 578
580 577
568
554 X5
552 569 X4
553 557
577
565 578
576
578
554 568 577
552 557 569 579
553

565 572

550 552 561


553 561 AB
564
556 567
563

553
555 560

P X-6200S / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 4400 No.5 R ev.01 C 593-ME C H-021C 4


585 591
557 568 Y5
558
569
550 554 559
577 587
551 578

557 578 Y6 592


577
579 568 566
552 554 577 588
559 569
565 578 593 571
578 Y7
558 581 577
557 579 568
552 554 577 589
569 578
557 566 X8 553 565 594
554 569 578
577 582 577 Y8
568 578 557 580
551 552 554 568
573 569 577 590
578 X7 553 565 578
577
579 578
568 577
554 578 577
557 579 595
552 569 574 583 552
578 561
565 577 586 553 561 AC
579 563
554 568 577 X6 584 567
557 578 571 556
552 569
553 575
565 578 X5 553
580 577 555
560
554 577
552 557 568 578
569 576
553 578
565 577
579
572
552 561
553 561
564 556 AB
567
563

553
555
560

P X-6500 / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 4800 No.5 R ev.01 C 593-ME C H-021C 8


AG 2 AH2

636

633 AD2
632 AD1 610
AH1 612
AG 1
635
634
611 616 614 618
AF 2 AE 2

AE 1 619
AF 1
620
608 AC 613
609

638
638 617

638

607

623

621 624
625
622

627

639
626
606

Z2
628
630
629

631

P X-6200S ,6500 / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 4400,4800 No.6 R ev.01 C 593-ME C H-031


654 C2
AD2
655 AB AK 1
A2
652 W AJ 1 AC AE 2
AL1 AI2
650 651 M
T
653 AH2 O
X5 B2
AG 2 X6 L AF 2
R X7
X8 S Z2
687 688
689 690 J
691 V4 K H
U4 V 2

694
671 673

672
656

694

O 674 675

665

676

Q2 666 N
695
Q1 677
694 679
663 669 678 652
680

694
662 AI2 682 681
AI1 693

AL2 683
661x17 670
AL1 AK 2 652
AI1
697 685 684
AJ 2
AJ 1AK 1
696

P X-6200S / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 4400 No.7 R ev.01 C 593-ME C H-041


Y4
708x4
Y2
707x4
709x4 Y3
708x4 Y1 711
707x4 713 U1
708x4
707x4 712
710x4 729
708x4 745
730
707x4
714
723
731 746
742 722
722 746
701 743 715 723
716 717
723
702 736 746
722
718 722
703 746
703 723 735
703 737 736
721 732
703 720 734
703 703 719 725
723
703 703 V2 746 721
700 V1 720 719
746 723
723 746 U2
738
746 741
V1 723
740
V3 V4
704 V3
705
705 739 727
U3 728
706 726
U4

747

744 744
744

P X-6200S ,6500 / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 4400,4800 No.8 R ev.01 C 593-ME C H-051


750
752 758
751
792
753 761
792
757 762 759 791
S
T
760
763
773
756

774
790-A 790-B 790-C
790-D 790-E

770

784 778
783
790-A 790-B 790-C
790-D 790-E
779
782 790-A 790-B 790-C
790-D 790-E
U2
781 780
785 U1 U3

786
789
789 772
787

789 788
789
789

P X-6200S ,6500 / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 4400,4800 No.9 R ev.01 C 593-ME C H-061


800 806
801
D
808
C2 809

802
843
807
803 805
810
841
842

816
819 843 815
814
844 815
823 822 842 817
818
811A
822
824 815 817
820
818
B2 821
800 816
830 825
838 815
827 828 814
829
826
832
817
833 818 831
834 839
835
810
847
836 840
803 837 845
846
817
848
849

P X-6200S ,6500 / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 4400,4800 No.10 R ev.01 C 593-ME C H-071


865
L 865
861
865
865 866 867
865
863 862 863
865
871 862 864
K
850

852

851 873 895


M 890
I

888
893
892
J

854 855

856
857 858
859
570

860

P X-6200S ,6500 / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 4400,4800 No.11 R ev.01 C 593-ME C H-081


924 911
912 913
924 914
915
916
920
926
925 918 919
927
928 924
923 924
923 917
929 923
921
923 923
923 924
W 923
923 924
909
908
900 923
923 923

922
905
902 904

903

910

907
906x16
930

P X-6200S ,6500 / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 4400,4800 No.12 R ev.01 C 593-ME C H-091


962
963

964
950
963

962

965

966
952
954
953 967
971
970 968
955
956 952 975
974
976 971
977 973
957 978
979 982
985
987 977 975 974
958 983
986
960 991 987 979
990 992
961 960

961
988
989

P X-6200S ,6500 / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 4400,4800 No.13 R ev.01 C 593-ME C H-101


08 07

08
08

02
08

18
16
16
17
17
06
15

14 05

11

04

12

10 04

12 04
04
03 13

13
13
13
13

13
13
01

13

09

P X-6200S ,6500 / E P S ON S T Y LUS P R O 4400,4800 No.14 R ev.01 C 593-P AC K -11


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

7.3 Parts List Table 7-9. Stylus Pro 4400


Figure Part Name
† Stylus Pro 4400 150 “FAN MOTOR,FRAME,SHIELD”
Table 7-9. Stylus Pro 4400 151 “COVER,HARNESS;B”
Figure Part Name 152 “FILTER,FAN ASSY.”
100 “HOLDER,ROLL ASSY.,C593” 153 “COVER,CONECTER,UPPER;B”
101 “HOLDER ASSY.,ROLL,L,SP” 154 “COVER,I/F”
102 “HOLDER ASSY.,ROLL,R,SP” 155 “GROUND PLATE,IF”
103 ADAPTER 156 “PAD,AIR SEAL,D”
104 “FLANGE,RIGHT” 157 “FAN,BLOWER,C593”
105 “FLANGE,LEFT” 158 “COVER,FAN,LEFT”
106 “SCROLLER,SAB ASSY.” 159 “PAD,FAN”
107 “SHAFT,STOPPER,L” 160 “COVER,FAN,RIGHT”
108 MAKEUP SCREW 161 “PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP”
109 STACKER ASSEMBLY;C593;B 162 “COMPRESSION SPRING,3.47”
110 STACKER;C;C593 163 “LEVER,LOCK,PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE;C593”
111 “GUIDE,STACKER;C593” 164 “PAPER GUIDE,PAPER EJECT,STACK”
112 “STACKER,SUPPORT;C593” 165 “SHEET,PAPER GUIDE,PAPER EJECT,STACK”
113 TRAY ASSEMBLY;C593;B 200 “BOARD ASSY.,MAIN”
114 “LABEL,MODEL NAME;B” IC12 FLASH MEMORY
115 “LABEL,ULTRA CHROME INK;K3” IC15 MICROCONTROLLER
117 “LABEL,ASF SET” IC2 SDRAM
118 “LABEL,ROLLPAPER SET,2/3 INCH” 300 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
119 “LABEL,INK COLOR,LEFT;B” 301 HARNESS
121 “COVER,I/H,LEFT,8C” 302 HARNESS
122 “GUIDE,I/H,LEFT,8C” 120 “COVER,PRINTER;593”
123 “LABEL,CHOKE CLEANING” 500 “PRINTER MECHANISM(SP),M-AB61-100”
124 “LABEL,PAPER LEVER SET UP” 501 “COVER ASSY.,SIDE,L,SP,C593”
126 “LABEL,ROLL PAPER SET;B” 505 “PANEL,FRONT,8C”
127 “LABEL,PAPER JAMMING REMOVAL” 507 “STOPPER,COVER PRINTER,LEFT”
128 “COVER,REAR;C593” 508 “STOPPER,COVER PRINTER,RIGHT”
129 “KNOB,RELEASE,LEVER;C593” 511 “COVER,INSIDE,RELEASE,LEVER;C593”
130 “KNOB,I/C,LOCK LEVER;C593” 512 “COVER ASSY.,SIDE,R,SP,C593”
131 “LABEL,CAUTION,TRANSPORT” 513 “POROUS PAD,HOLDER,INK EJECT”
132 “GUIDE,I/H,RIGHT,8C” 514 “POROUS PAD,INK EJECT,SUB”
133 “LABEL,INK COLOR,RIGHT” 517 “FRAME,PANEL,UNDER,RIGHT”
134 “COVER,I/H,RIGHT,8C” 518 “CONTROL,PANEL”

Appendix Parts List 481


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-9. Stylus Pro 4400 Table 7-9. Stylus Pro 4400
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
519 “HARNESS,PANEL” 586 “MOUNT PLATE,BASE,IH,RIGHT”
520 “LOGO PLATE,13X54;G” 587 “TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,LLK”
550 “FRAME ASSY.,IC,LEFT” 588 “TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,LC”
551 “MOUNTING PLATE,HOLDER,IC,L” 589 “TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,LM”
552 “FRAME,HOLDER,IC,UPPER” 590 “TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,ALK”
553 “FRAME,HOLDER,IC,LOWER” 591 “HARNESS,CSIC,BK”
554 “PRESSING PLATE,IC” 592 “HARNESS,CSIC,LC”
555 “TORSION SPRING,158.6” 593 “HARNESS,CSIC,LM”
556 “FAN GEAR,34” 594 “HARNESS,CSIC,LK”
557 “CAM,IC,FIXING” 595 “HARNESS,I/S,R”
558 “SHAFT,LOCK,IC” 607 “GUTTER ASSY.,INK EJECT”
559 “FRAME,I/S,TOP” 608 “SPACER,FRAME,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT”
560 “LEVER,IC,OPERATE” 609 INDUCTION DUCT
561 “SPUR GEAR,22” 610 “POROUS PAD,BOX,FL,UPPER”
563 “MOUNTING PLATE ASSY.,HOLDER,IC,R” 611 “POROUS PAD,BOX,FL,LOWER”
565 “MOUNTING PLATE,HOLDER,IC,R” 612 “BOX ASSY.,FLUSHING”
566 “GROUND PLATE,IH” 613 “HARNESS,PUMP,PHASE DETECTION”
567 “DETECTOR,LEAF,B2” 614 “CLEANER,HEAD,A,ASP”
568 “BOARD ASSY.,IC” 616 “JOINT,BOX,FLUSHING”
569 “CONNECTOR,CARTRIDGE,PR” 617 PUMP CAP ASSY.
571 “CAM,VALVE” 618 “SHEET,INK,STOPPER,C”
572 “HARNESS,I/S,L” 619 “TAPE,INK,STOPPER,C”
573 “TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,MB” 620 “POROUS PAD,INK,STOPPER,C”
574 “TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,C” 621 “LEAF SPRING,LOCK”
575 “TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,M” 622 “GUIDE RAIL,INK EJECT BOX,UPPER”
576 “TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,Y” 623 “POROUS PAD,GUIDE,INK EJECT,B”
577 “ORING,CONECTOR M7” 624 “GUIDE,INK EJECT,B”
578 “CONNECTING SCREW,M7” 625 “POROUS PAD,GUIDE,INK EJECT,A”
579 “JOINT,3” 626 “GUIDE,INK EJECT,A”
580 “JOINT,3,L” 627 “BRACKET,INK EJECT BOX”
581 “HARNESS,CSIC,MB” 628 “GUIDE RAIL,INK EJEXT BOX,LEFT”
582 “HARNESS,CSIC,C” 629 “HOLDER ASSY.,BOARD,INK EJECT”
583 “HARNESS,CSIC,M” 630 “HARNESS,CSIC,MT”
584 “HARNESS,CSIC,Y” 631 “POROUS PAD ASSY.,INK EJECT”
585 “HOLDER ASSY.,IC,RIGHT” 632 “HARNESS,R1,C593”

Appendix Parts List 482


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-9. Stylus Pro 4400 Table 7-9. Stylus Pro 4400
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
633 “HARNESS,R2,C593” 689 “DETECTOR,LEAF,B2”
634 “HARNESS,L1,C593” 690 “COVER,DETECTOR,PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE”
635 “HARNESS,L2,C593” 691 “HARNESS,DETECTOR,PAPER GUIDE CENTER,C593”
636 “HARNESS,PANEL,INTERMIT,C593” 693 “POROUS PAD,FRAME,SUB,RIGHT”
638 RECYCL CLAMP 694 “CASE FEET,CP-30-FF-4A,BLACK”
639 “GUTTER,INK ASSY.C593,ESL,ASP” 695 “BOARD ASSY.,SUB”
650 “BOARD ASSY.,SUB” 696 “HARNESS,HEAD,INTERMIT,A”
651 “DUCT,AIR,E” 697 “HARNESS,HEAD,INTERMIT,B”
652 “EXTENSION SPRING,2.55” 700 PRINT HEAD
653 “GUIDE,FFC” 701 “CARRIAGE,B;B”
654 “EXTENSION SPRING,13.05” 702 “PLATE,DAMPER”
655 “MOTOR ASSY.,PF,C593” 703 “VALVE ASSY.,HEAD;C”
656 “DUCT,AIR,D” 704 “GROUND PLATE,A;B”
661 “ROLLER,PAPER GUIDE” 705 “POROUS PAD,CR”
662 “DETECTOR,LEAF,B2” 706 “CARRIAGE,C,C593”
663 “LABEL,CUTTER CHANGE” 707 “ORING,CONECTOR M7”
665 “HARNESS,FAN,A,C593” 708 “CONNECTING SCREW,M7”
666 “HARNESS,FAN,B,C593” 709 “JOINT,3”
669 “DUCT,AIR,A” 710 “JOINT,3,L”
670 “HARNESS,COVER OPEN” 711 “COVER,CR;C593”
671 “LEVER,ROLLER,SUB” 712 “BOARD ASSY.,MULTISENSOR”
672 “COVER,DUCT,C” 713 “HARNESS,MULTISENSOR”
673 “PAD,DUCT,RIGHT LOWER” 714 “LABEL,CUT POSITION”
674 “DUCT,AIR,C” 715 “HOLDER,MULTISENSOR”
675 “BOARD ASSY.,SUB-B” 716 “PLATE,BEARING,R;B”
678 “MOTOR ASSY.,PG” 717 “CAM,INCLINATION,R”
679 “SPUR GEAR,36” 718 “LEVER,FASTEN,FOR TRANSFER;B”
680 “EXTENSION SPRING,11.4” 719 “SHAFT,CONNECTION”
681 “COMBINATION GEAR,13.6,20.8” 720 “HOLDER,BEARING”
682 “SPUR GEAR,16” 721 “COMPRESSION SPRING,27.8”
683 “COMBINATION GEAR,40,20” 722 “POLY SLIDER,STW-FT40,t=0.25”
684 “COMBINATION GEAR,56,8.8” 723 “SHAFT,BEARING”
685 “DUCT,AIR,B” 725 “CAM,INCLINATION,L”
687 “PAD,DUCT,E” 726 “COMPRESSION SPRING,0.191”
688 “GROUND SPRING,PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE,LEFT” 727 “SLIDER,CR LOCK”

Appendix Parts List 483


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-9. Stylus Pro 4400 Table 7-9. Stylus Pro 4400
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
728 “COMPRESSION SPRING,0.52” 778 “BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER”
729 “GROUND PLATE,B;B” 779 “HOLDER,TUBE,B,C593”
730 “LEVER,INCLINATION” 780 “PAD,TUBE”
731 “EXTENSION SPRING,3.81” 781 “HOLDER,TUBE,A,C593”
732 “CARRIAGE,A;B” 782 “BOARD ASSY.,SUB”
734 “PLATE,BEARING,L,C593” 783 “HARNESS,ENCODER”
735 “LEVER,CAM,C593” 784 “COVER,TUBE,C593”
736 “STOPPER,CARRIAGE” 785 “GUIDE,TUBE,CR,C593”
737 “SHAFT,INCLINATION CAM” 786 “SHEET,TUBE”
738 “HARNESS,HEAD,A” 787 “GUIDE PLATE,TUBE”
739 “HARNESS,HEAD,C” 788 “SHEET,SUS”
740 “SHEET,FFC” 789 “HOLDER,FFC,C593”
741 “SOLENOID ASSY.,CR,C593,ESL,ASP” 790-A “SPACER,MIDDLE,0.05”
742 “ADJUST PLATE,CR,UPPER” 790-B “SPACER,MIDDLE,0.1”
743 “ADJUST PLATE,CR,LOWER” 790-C “SPACER,MIDDLE,0.2”
744 “C.P.P-TITE SCREW,2.6X8,F/ZN-3C” 790-D “SPACER,MIDDLE,0.5”
745 “SPACER,CARREAGE A” 790-E “SPACER,MIDDLE,0.08”
746 BALL BEARING(B210151490) 791 “HARNESS,DETECTOR,HP”
747 “HARNESS,HEAD,B” 792 BALL BEARING(B210151490)
750 “EXTENSION SPRING,11.4” 800 “DETECTOR,LEAF,B2”
751 “EXTENSION SPRING,2.55” 801 “HARNESS,PAPER EJECT PHASE,LEFT”
752 “LEVER,LOCK,PG” 802 “LEVER,CHANGE PAPER EJECT,L”
753 “BUSHING,LOCK;B” 803 “EXTENSION SPRING,6.99”
756 “EXTENSION SPRING,2.58” 805 “MOUNT PLATE,MOTOR,ASF ASSY.,C593”
757 “LEVER,SCALE,CR” 806 “COMBINATION GEAR,12,22.4”
758 “EXTENSION SPRING,3.86” 807 “SPUR GEAR,25.6”
759 “SCALE,CR” 808 “COMBINATION GEAR,12.8,36”
760 “BELT,CR” 809 “COMBINATION GEAR,13.6,28.8”
761 “PULLEY,DRIVEN” 810 “SPUR GEAR,20”
762 “SHAFT,PULLEY” 811A “PG TRANSMIT ASSY.,C593”
763 “COMPRESSION SPRING,29.4” 814 “HOLDER,PLANET,RELEASE;B”
770 “DETECTOR,HP;E” 815 “SPUR GEAR,16,RELEASE”
772 “BELT,PG” 816 “SPUR GEAR,22,RELEASE”
773 “HARNESS,DETECTOR,PG” 817 “POLY SLIDER,STW-FT70,t=0.25”
774 “DETECTOR,HP;E” 818 “COMPRESSION SPRING,0.98”

Appendix Parts List 484


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-9. Stylus Pro 4400 Table 7-9. Stylus Pro 4400
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
819 “SHEET,FRAME,RIGHT” 855 “EXTENSION SPRING,15.98”
820 “EXTENSION SPRING,2.41” 856 “INTERMITTENT GEAR,40”
821 “LEVER,LOCK,DE” 857 “SPUR GEAR,18”
822 “SPUR GEAR,38” 858 “LEVER,RELEASE,ROLLER,DRIVEN”
823 “INTERMITTENT GEAR,RELEASE,TRANSMIT” 859 “TORSION SPRING,615”
824 “COMBINATION GEAR,22,16.8” 860 “FRAME ASSY.,LEVER,RELEASE”
825 “COMBINATION GEAR,16.74,24” 861 “HARNESS,PAPER THICKNESS,1”
826 “SPUR GEAR,28” 862 “HOLDER,DETECTOR,PAPER THICKNESS”
827 “SPUR GEAR,33.6,B” 863 “DETECTOR,HP;E”
828 “SPUR GEAR,33.6” 864 “HARNESS,PAPER THICKNESS,2”
829 “COMBINATION GEAR,24,36” 865 “EXTENSION SPRING,8.08”
830 “COMBINATION GEAR,19.2,33.6” 866 “LEVER,DETECTOR,PAPER THICKNESS,A”
831 “HOLDER,PLANET,CHANGE PAPER EJECT” 867 “LEVER,DETECTOR,PAPER THICKNESS,B”
832 “SPUR GEAR,17.6,PLANET” 870 “RELEASE ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP”
833 “SPUR GEAR,32.8,A” 871 “EXTENSION SPRING,0.22”
834 “SPUR GEAR,44,PAPER EJECT” 873 “MOTOR ASSY.,CR”
835 “LEVER,CHANGE PAPER EJECT,R” 876 “SHAFT,RELEASE,ROLLER,DRIVEN”
836 “LEVER,LOCK,CHANGE PAPER EJECT,R;B” 888 “RELEASE ASSY.,C593”
837 “EXTENSION SPRING,6.71” 890 “HOLDER,DETECTOR,PE”
838 “HARNESS,PAPER EJECT PHASE,RIGHT” 892 “BOARD ASSY.,PW”
839 “LEVER,LOCK,PLANET” 893 “HARNESS,DETECTOR,PE”
840 “COMBINATION GEAR,36,8.8” 895 “HARNESS,MOTOR,CR”
841 “PLATE ASSY.,ROLLER,BRAKE,UPPER” 900 “ROLLER ASSY.,PAPER EJECT”
842 “ROLLER ASSY.,BRAKE” 902 “PULLEY,PAPER EJECT ROLLER”
843 “EXTENSION SPRING,1.38” 903 “EXTENSION SPRING,0.871”
844 “PLATE ASSY.,ROLLER,BRAKE,LOWER” 904 “WHEEL,DETECTION”
845 “SPUR GEAR,20,PLANET” 907 “SPUR GEAR,15.2”
846 “SPUR GEAR,16,PLANET” 908 “SCALLOP SPRING PIN-AW,2X10,F/B”
847 “COMPRESSION SPRING,3.38” 909 “HARNESS,LOAD PHASE”
848 “COMPRESSION SPRING,0.78” 910 “HOLDER,PAPER EJECT ROLLER”
849 “HOLDER,PLANET” 911 “PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,LEFT,ASSY.ESL,ASP”
850 “BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER” 912 “POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,I”
851 “HARNESS,ENCODER,PF” 913 “POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,H”
852 “HOLDER,SENSOR” 914 “POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,G”
854 “PULLEY,BELT TENSION” 915 “POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,F”

Appendix Parts List 485


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-9. Stylus Pro 4400 Table 7-9. Stylus Pro 4400
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
916 “POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,E” 973 “LEVER,PAD,RELEASE,RIGHT”
917 “PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,RIGHT,ASSY.ESL,ASP” 974 “EXTENSION SPRING,0.62”
918 “POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,C” 975 “COMPRESSION SPRING,1.47”
919 “POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,B” 976 “LEVER,PAPER RETURN,LEFT”
920 “PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,MIDDLE,ASSY.ESL,ASP” 977 “EXTENSION SPRING,0.294”
921 “POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,D” 978 “HOLDER,ROLLER,LD,SUPPORT,LEFT”
922 “PAD,AIRSEAL,E” 979 “ROLLER,LD,SUPPORT”
923 “BUSHING,SPACER,PLATEN” 982 “LEVER,PAPER RETURN,RIGHT”
924 “SPACER,PAPER EJECT” 983 “HOLDER,ROLLER,LD,SUPPORT,RIGHT”
925 “PAPER GUIDE,REAR ASSY.,C593” 985 “BUSHING,LOCK,11.4”
926 “SPACER,PLATE,CUTTER,D” 986 “GROUND SPRING,ASF”
927 “SPACER,PLATE,CUTTER,C” 987 “LEVER,HOPPER,RELEASE”
928 “SPACER,PLATE,CUTTER,B” 988 “LEVER,LOCK,EDGE GUIDE”
929 “SPACER,PLATE,CUTTER,A” 989 “EXTENSION SPRING,0.33”
930 “STAR WHEEL ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP” 990 “FRAME ASSY.,ASF,LOWER”
905 “DETECTOR,HP;E” 991 “FRAME,ASF,RIGHT;C593”
950 “ASF UNIT,C593” 992 “GEAR,44.74”
952 “CORK,PAPER FEED” 1 “OUTER CARTON BOX,SP”
953 “LEVER,LOCK,EDGE GUIDE” 2 “INDIVIDUAL CARTON BOX,UPPER,SP”
954 “COVER,EDGE GUIDE;C593” 3 “INDIVIDUAL CARTON BOX,BOTTOM,SP”
955 “LEVER,EDGE GUIDE;C593” 4 “SUPPORT POST,ANGLE,SP”
956 “COMPRESSION SPRING,0.46” 5 “SUPPORT POST,FRONT,SP”
957 “COMPRESSION SPRING,3.23” 6 “PAD,SET,SP”
958 “SLIDER,EDGE GUIDE” 8 “HANDLE,SP”
960 “GUIDE,LOWER;C593” 9 “PE SHEET,2200X2500X0.4T”
961 “EXTENSION SPRING,1.11” 10 “PAD,TRAY”
962 “COMPRESSION SPRING,0.40” 11 “PAD,COVER REAR”
963 “ROLLER,SUB,LD,MIDDLE” 12 “PAPER,PROTECT IH”
964 “COMPRESSION SPRING,0.407” 13 “PAD,CORNER,SP”
965 “ROLLER ASSY.,LD,LEFT” 14 “PAD,FIXED PLATE,CR,SET”
966 “COVER,ROLLER,LD,LEFT” 15 “FIXED PLATE ASSY.,CR”
967 “COVER,ROLLER,LD,RIGHT” 16 “PINCH SCREW,4X25,F/ZN-3C”
968 “ROLLER ASSY.,LD,RIGHT” 17 “SPACER,PINCH SCREW”
970 “LEVER,PAD,RELEASE,LEFT” 18 “COLOR TIE,230”
971 “ROD SPRING,HOLDER,PAD” NON FIG GREASE G-26 (40GR)(B702600001)

Appendix Parts List 486


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-9. Stylus Pro 4400 Table 7-9. Stylus Pro 4400
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
NON FIG CODE TYPE MICROPHONE(U-505) NON FIG TENSION GAUGE(5N;STD)
NON FIG MULTI SENSOR POSITION TOOL NON FIG TENSION GAUGE(10N)
NON FIG PAPER THICKNESS POSITION TOOL NON FIG THICKNESS GAUGE t=0.1mm
NON FIG CR LOCK TOOL NON FIG TORQUE SCREWDRIVER(4~12KG)
NON FIG Banding Standard Sample NON FIG GREASE G74
NON FIG HEAD EXCHANGE SUPPORT TOOL
NON FIG CR SHAFT PARALLELISM PRSS TOOL
NON FIG CR SUS PLATE SUPPORT TOOL
NON FIG FFC CHECKING TOOL
NON FIG P-COVER OPEN SENSOR CLOSE TOOL
NON FIG THICKNESS GAUGE T=0.75
NON FIG THICKNESS GAUGE T=0.65
NON FIG KEEP STAND CR SHAFT HEIGHT TOOL
NON FIG PG BELT TENSION SUPPORT TOOL
NON FIG PG GUAR POSITION ADJ.TOOL
NON FIG PG BELT TENSION WEIGHT
NON FIG CR SHAFT PARALLELISM ADG.TOOL
NON FIG CR SHAFT PASS/UN-PASS TOOL
NON FIG CR SHAFT PARALLELISM WEIGHT
NON FIG CUTTER HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT TOOL
NON FIG CUTTER PRESS DOWN TOOL
NON FIG PLATEN HEIGHT ADGUSTMENT TOOL
NON FIG CR SHAFT HEIGHT ADGUSTMENT TOOL
NON FIG CR SHAFT HEIGHT CHECK TOOL
NON FIG PF ROLLER HEIGHT ADJ.TOOL
NON FIG PLATEN RUBBER SETTING TOOL
NON FIG ALLEN WRENCH(3mm)
NON FIG CR ASSY HOLD TOOL
NON FIG CUTTER CAP
NON FIG PRESS TOOL FOR CUTTER PLATE
NON FIG ASF EXCHANGE SUPPORT TOOL
NON FIG BOXWRENCH(SPECIAL PROCESSING)
NON FIG CUTTER PLATE DITCH POSITION TOOL
NON FIG KEEP STAND FOR CUTTER PLATE&PLATEN
NON FIG CALIBRATE BLOCK&TOOL STAND

Appendix Parts List 487


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Stylus Pro 4800 Table 7-10. Stylus Pro 4800


Table 7-10. Stylus Pro 4800 Figure Part Name
Figure Part Name 152 “FILTER,FAN ASSY.”
100 “HOLDER,ROLL ASSY.,C593” 153 “COVER,CONECTER,UPPER;B”
101 “HOLDER ASSY.,ROLL,L,SP” 154 “COVER,I/F”
102 “HOLDER ASSY.,ROLL,R,SP” 155 “GROUND PLATE,IF”
103 ADAPTER 156 “PAD,AIR SEAL,D”
104 “FLANGE,RIGHT” 157 “FAN,BLOWER,C593”
105 “FLANGE,LEFT” 158 “COVER,FAN,LEFT”
106 “SCROLLER,SAB ASSY.” 159 “PAD,FAN”
107 “SHAFT,STOPPER,L” 160 “COVER,FAN,RIGHT”
108 MAKEUP SCREW 161 “PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP”
109 STACKER ASSEMBLY;C593;B 162 “COMPRESSION SPRING,3.47”
110 STACKER;C;C593 163 “LEVER,LOCK,PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE;C593”
111 “GUIDE,STACKER;C593” 164 “PAPER GUIDE,PAPER EJECT,STACK”
112 “STACKER,SUPPORT;C593” 165 “SHEET,PAPER GUIDE,PAPER EJECT,STACK”
113 TRAY ASSEMBLY;C593;B 200 “BOARD ASSY.,MAIN”
114 “LABEL,MODEL NAME;B” IC12 FLASH MEMORY
115 “LABEL,ULTRA CHROME INK;K3” IC15 MICROCONTROLLER
117 “LABEL,ASF SET” IC2 SDRAM
118 “LABEL,ROLLPAPER SET,2/3 INCH” 300 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
119 “LABEL,INK COLOR,LEFT;B” 301 HARNESS
121 “COVER,I/H,LEFT,8C” 302 HARNESS
122 “GUIDE,I/H,LEFT,8C” 120 “COVER,PRINTER;593”
123 “LABEL,CHOKE CLEANING” 500 “PRINTER MECHANISM(SP),M-AB61-100”
124 “LABEL,PAPER LEVER SET UP” 501 “COVER ASSY.,SIDE,L,SP,C593”
126 “LABEL,ROLL PAPER SET;B” 505 “PANEL,FRONT,8C”
127 “LABEL,PAPER JAMMING REMOVAL” 507 “STOPPER,COVER PRINTER,LEFT”
128 “COVER,REAR;C593” 508 “STOPPER,COVER PRINTER,RIGHT”
129 “KNOB,RELEASE,LEVER;C593” 511 “COVER,INSIDE,RELEASE,LEVER;C593”
130 “KNOB,I/C,LOCK LEVER;C593” 512 “COVER ASSY.,SIDE,R,SP,C593”
131 “LABEL,CAUTION,TRANSPORT” 513 “POROUS PAD,HOLDER,INK EJECT”
132 “GUIDE,I/H,RIGHT,8C” 514 “POROUS PAD,INK EJECT,SUB”
133 “LABEL,INK COLOR,RIGHT” 517 “FRAME,PANEL,UNDER,RIGHT”
134 “COVER,I/H,RIGHT,8C” 518 “CONTROL,PANEL”
150 “FAN MOTOR,FRAME,SHIELD” 519 “HARNESS,PANEL”
151 “COVER,HARNESS;B” 520 “LOGO PLATE,13X54;G”

Appendix Parts List 488


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-10. Stylus Pro 4800 Table 7-10. Stylus Pro 4800
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
550 “FRAME ASSY.,IC,LEFT” 588 “TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,LC”
551 “MOUNTING PLATE,HOLDER,IC,L” 589 “TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,LM”
552 “FRAME,HOLDER,IC,UPPER” 590 “TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,ALK”
553 “FRAME,HOLDER,IC,LOWER” 591 “HARNESS,CSIC,BK”
554 “PRESSING PLATE,IC” 592 “HARNESS,CSIC,LC”
555 “TORSION SPRING,158.6” 593 “HARNESS,CSIC,LM”
556 “FAN GEAR,34” 594 “HARNESS,CSIC,LK”
557 “CAM,IC,FIXING” 595 “HARNESS,I/S,R”
558 “SHAFT,LOCK,IC” 607 “GUTTER ASSY.,INK EJECT”
559 “FRAME,I/S,TOP” 608 “SPACER,FRAME,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT”
560 “LEVER,IC,OPERATE” 609 INDUCTION DUCT
561 “SPUR GEAR,22” 610 “POROUS PAD,BOX,FL,UPPER”
563 “MOUNTING PLATE ASSY.,HOLDER,IC,R” 611 “POROUS PAD,BOX,FL,LOWER”
565 “MOUNTING PLATE,HOLDER,IC,R” 612 “BOX ASSY.,FLUSHING”
566 “GROUND PLATE,IH” 613 “HARNESS,PUMP,PHASE DETECTION”
567 “DETECTOR,LEAF,B2” 614 “CLEANER,HEAD,A,ASP”
568 “BOARD ASSY.,IC” 616 “JOINT,BOX,FLUSHING”
569 “CONNECTOR,CARTRIDGE,PR” 617 PUMP CAP ASSY.
571 “CAM,VALVE” 618 “SHEET,INK,STOPPER,C”
572 “HARNESS,I/S,L” 619 “TAPE,INK,STOPPER,C”
573 “TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,MB” 620 “POROUS PAD,INK,STOPPER,C”
574 “TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,C” 621 “LEAF SPRING,LOCK”
575 “TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,M” 622 “GUIDE RAIL,INK EJECT BOX,UPPER”
576 “TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,Y” 623 “POROUS PAD,GUIDE,INK EJECT,B”
577 “ORING,CONECTOR M7” 624 “GUIDE,INK EJECT,B”
578 “CONNECTING SCREW,M7” 625 “POROUS PAD,GUIDE,INK EJECT,A”
579 “JOINT,3” 626 “GUIDE,INK EJECT,A”
580 “JOINT,3,L” 627 “BRACKET,INK EJECT BOX”
581 “HARNESS,CSIC,MB” 628 “GUIDE RAIL,INK EJEXT BOX,LEFT”
582 “HARNESS,CSIC,C” 629 “HOLDER ASSY.,BOARD,INK EJECT”
583 “HARNESS,CSIC,M” 630 “HARNESS,CSIC,MT”
584 “HARNESS,CSIC,Y” 631 “POROUS PAD ASSY.,INK EJECT”
585 “HOLDER ASSY.,IC,RIGHT” 632 “HARNESS,R1,C593”
586 “MOUNT PLATE,BASE,IH,RIGHT” 633 “HARNESS,R2,C593”
587 “TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,LLK” 634 “HARNESS,L1,C593”

Appendix Parts List 489


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-10. Stylus Pro 4800 Table 7-10. Stylus Pro 4800
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
635 “HARNESS,L2,C593” 691 “HARNESS,DETECTOR,PAPER GUIDE CENTER,C593”
636 “HARNESS,PANEL,INTERMIT,C593” 693 “POROUS PAD,FRAME,SUB,RIGHT”
638 RECYCL CLAMP 694 “CASE FEET,CP-30-FF-4A,BLACK”
639 “GUTTER,INK ASSY.C593,ESL,ASP” 695 “BOARD ASSY.,SUB”
650 “BOARD ASSY.,SUB” 696 “HARNESS,HEAD,INTERMIT,A”
651 “DUCT,AIR,E” 697 “HARNESS,HEAD,INTERMIT,B”
652 “EXTENSION SPRING,2.55” 700 PRINT HEAD
653 “GUIDE,FFC” 701 “CARRIAGE,B;B”
654 “EXTENSION SPRING,13.05” 702 “PLATE,DAMPER”
655 “MOTOR ASSY.,PF,C593” 703 “VALVE ASSY.,HEAD;C”
656 “DUCT,AIR,D” 704 “GROUND PLATE,A;B”
661 “ROLLER,PAPER GUIDE” 705 “POROUS PAD,CR”
662 “DETECTOR,LEAF,B2” 706 “CARRIAGE,C,C593”
663 “LABEL,CUTTER CHANGE” 707 “ORING,CONECTOR M7”
665 “HARNESS,FAN,A,C593” 708 “CONNECTING SCREW,M7”
666 “HARNESS,FAN,B,C593” 709 “JOINT,3”
669 “DUCT,AIR,A” 710 “JOINT,3,L”
670 “HARNESS,COVER OPEN” 711 “COVER,CR;C593”
671 “LEVER,ROLLER,SUB” 712 “BOARD ASSY.,MULTISENSOR”
672 “COVER,DUCT,C” 713 “HARNESS,MULTISENSOR”
673 “PAD,DUCT,RIGHT LOWER” 714 “LABEL,CUT POSITION”
674 “DUCT,AIR,C” 715 “HOLDER,MULTISENSOR”
675 “BOARD ASSY.,SUB-B” 716 “PLATE,BEARING,R;B”
678 “MOTOR ASSY.,PG” 717 “CAM,INCLINATION,R”
679 “SPUR GEAR,36” 718 “LEVER,FASTEN,FOR TRANSFER;B”
680 “EXTENSION SPRING,11.4” 719 “SHAFT,CONNECTION”
681 “COMBINATION GEAR,13.6,20.8” 720 “HOLDER,BEARING”
682 “SPUR GEAR,16” 721 “COMPRESSION SPRING,27.8”
683 “COMBINATION GEAR,40,20” 722 “POLY SLIDER,STW-FT40,t=0.25”
684 “COMBINATION GEAR,56,8.8” 723 “SHAFT,BEARING”
685 “DUCT,AIR,B” 725 “CAM,INCLINATION,L”
687 “PAD,DUCT,E” 726 “COMPRESSION SPRING,0.191”
688 “GROUND SPRING,PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE,LEFT” 727 “SLIDER,CR LOCK”
689 “DETECTOR,LEAF,B2” 728 “COMPRESSION SPRING,0.52”
690 “COVER,DETECTOR,PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE” 729 “GROUND PLATE,B;B”

Appendix Parts List 490


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-10. Stylus Pro 4800 Table 7-10. Stylus Pro 4800
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
730 “LEVER,INCLINATION” 780 “PAD,TUBE”
731 “EXTENSION SPRING,3.81” 781 “HOLDER,TUBE,A,C593”
732 “CARRIAGE,A;B” 782 “BOARD ASSY.,SUB”
734 “PLATE,BEARING,L,C593” 783 “HARNESS,ENCODER”
735 “LEVER,CAM,C593” 784 “COVER,TUBE,C593”
736 “STOPPER,CARRIAGE” 785 “GUIDE,TUBE,CR,C593”
737 “SHAFT,INCLINATION CAM” 786 “SHEET,TUBE”
738 “HARNESS,HEAD,A” 787 “GUIDE PLATE,TUBE”
739 “HARNESS,HEAD,C” 788 “SHEET,SUS”
740 “SHEET,FFC” 789 “HOLDER,FFC,C593”
741 “SOLENOID ASSY.,CR,C593,ESL,ASP” 790-A “SPACER,MIDDLE,0.05”
742 “ADJUST PLATE,CR,UPPER” 790-B “SPACER,MIDDLE,0.1”
743 “ADJUST PLATE,CR,LOWER” 790-C “SPACER,MIDDLE,0.2”
744 “C.P.P-TITE SCREW,2.6X8,F/ZN-3C” 790-D “SPACER,MIDDLE,0.5”
745 “SPACER,CARREAGE A” 790-E “SPACER,MIDDLE,0.08”
746 BALL BEARING(B210151490) 791 “HARNESS,DETECTOR,HP”
747 “HARNESS,HEAD,B” 792 BALL BEARING(B210151490)
750 “EXTENSION SPRING,11.4” 800 “DETECTOR,LEAF,B2”
751 “EXTENSION SPRING,2.55” 801 “HARNESS,PAPER EJECT PHASE,LEFT”
752 “LEVER,LOCK,PG” 802 “LEVER,CHANGE PAPER EJECT,L”
753 “BUSHING,LOCK;B” 803 “EXTENSION SPRING,6.99”
756 “EXTENSION SPRING,2.58” 805 “MOUNT PLATE,MOTOR,ASF ASSY.,C593”
757 “LEVER,SCALE,CR” 806 “COMBINATION GEAR,12,22.4”
758 “EXTENSION SPRING,3.86” 807 “SPUR GEAR,25.6”
759 “SCALE,CR” 808 “COMBINATION GEAR,12.8,36”
760 “BELT,CR” 809 “COMBINATION GEAR,13.6,28.8”
761 “PULLEY,DRIVEN” 810 “SPUR GEAR,20”
762 “SHAFT,PULLEY” 811A “PG TRANSMIT ASSY.,C593”
763 “COMPRESSION SPRING,29.4” 814 “HOLDER,PLANET,RELEASE;B”
770 “DETECTOR,HP;E” 815 “SPUR GEAR,16,RELEASE”
772 “BELT,PG” 816 “SPUR GEAR,22,RELEASE”
773 “HARNESS,DETECTOR,PG” 817 “POLY SLIDER,STW-FT70,t=0.25”
774 “DETECTOR,HP;E” 818 “COMPRESSION SPRING,0.98”
778 “BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER” 819 “SHEET,FRAME,RIGHT”
779 “HOLDER,TUBE,B,C593” 820 “EXTENSION SPRING,2.41”

Appendix Parts List 491


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-10. Stylus Pro 4800 Table 7-10. Stylus Pro 4800
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
821 “LEVER,LOCK,DE” 857 “SPUR GEAR,18”
822 “SPUR GEAR,38” 858 “LEVER,RELEASE,ROLLER,DRIVEN”
823 “INTERMITTENT GEAR,RELEASE,TRANSMIT” 859 “TORSION SPRING,615”
824 “COMBINATION GEAR,22,16.8” 860 “FRAME ASSY.,LEVER,RELEASE”
825 “COMBINATION GEAR,16.74,24” 861 “HARNESS,PAPER THICKNESS,1”
826 “SPUR GEAR,28” 862 “HOLDER,DETECTOR,PAPER THICKNESS”
827 “SPUR GEAR,33.6,B” 863 “DETECTOR,HP;E”
828 “SPUR GEAR,33.6” 864 “HARNESS,PAPER THICKNESS,2”
829 “COMBINATION GEAR,24,36” 865 “EXTENSION SPRING,8.08”
830 “COMBINATION GEAR,19.2,33.6” 866 “LEVER,DETECTOR,PAPER THICKNESS,A”
831 “HOLDER,PLANET,CHANGE PAPER EJECT” 867 “LEVER,DETECTOR,PAPER THICKNESS,B”
832 “SPUR GEAR,17.6,PLANET” 870 “RELEASE ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP”
833 “SPUR GEAR,32.8,A” 871 “EXTENSION SPRING,0.22”
834 “SPUR GEAR,44,PAPER EJECT” 873 “MOTOR ASSY.,CR”
835 “LEVER,CHANGE PAPER EJECT,R” 876 “SHAFT,RELEASE,ROLLER,DRIVEN”
836 “LEVER,LOCK,CHANGE PAPER EJECT,R;B” 888 “RELEASE ASSY.,C593”
837 “EXTENSION SPRING,6.71” 890 “HOLDER,DETECTOR,PE”
838 “HARNESS,PAPER EJECT PHASE,RIGHT” 892 “BOARD ASSY.,PW”
839 “LEVER,LOCK,PLANET” 893 “HARNESS,DETECTOR,PE”
840 “COMBINATION GEAR,36,8.8” 895 “HARNESS,MOTOR,CR”
841 “PLATE ASSY.,ROLLER,BRAKE,UPPER” 900 “ROLLER ASSY.,PAPER EJECT”
842 “ROLLER ASSY.,BRAKE” 902 “PULLEY,PAPER EJECT ROLLER”
843 “EXTENSION SPRING,1.38” 903 “EXTENSION SPRING,0.871”
844 “PLATE ASSY.,ROLLER,BRAKE,LOWER” 904 “WHEEL,DETECTION”
845 “SPUR GEAR,20,PLANET” 907 “SPUR GEAR,15.2”
846 “SPUR GEAR,16,PLANET” 908 “SCALLOP SPRING PIN-AW,2X10,F/B”
847 “COMPRESSION SPRING,3.38” 909 “HARNESS,LOAD PHASE”
848 “COMPRESSION SPRING,0.78” 910 “HOLDER,PAPER EJECT ROLLER”
849 “HOLDER,PLANET” 911 “PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,LEFT,ASSY.ESL,ASP”
850 “BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER” 912 “POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,I”
851 “HARNESS,ENCODER,PF” 913 “POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,H”
852 “HOLDER,SENSOR” 914 “POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,G”
854 “PULLEY,BELT TENSION” 915 “POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,F”
855 “EXTENSION SPRING,15.98” 916 “POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,E”
856 “INTERMITTENT GEAR,40” 917 “PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,RIGHT,ASSY.ESL,ASP”

Appendix Parts List 492


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-10. Stylus Pro 4800 Table 7-10. Stylus Pro 4800
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
918 “POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,C” 975 “COMPRESSION SPRING,1.47”
919 “POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,B” 976 “LEVER,PAPER RETURN,LEFT”
920 “PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,MIDDLE,ASSY.ESL,ASP” 977 “EXTENSION SPRING,0.294”
921 “POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,D” 978 “HOLDER,ROLLER,LD,SUPPORT,LEFT”
922 “PAD,AIRSEAL,E” 979 “ROLLER,LD,SUPPORT”
923 “BUSHING,SPACER,PLATEN” 982 “LEVER,PAPER RETURN,RIGHT”
924 “SPACER,PAPER EJECT” 983 “HOLDER,ROLLER,LD,SUPPORT,RIGHT”
925 “PAPER GUIDE,REAR ASSY.,C593” 985 “BUSHING,LOCK,11.4”
926 “SPACER,PLATE,CUTTER,D” 986 “GROUND SPRING,ASF”
927 “SPACER,PLATE,CUTTER,C” 987 “LEVER,HOPPER,RELEASE”
928 “SPACER,PLATE,CUTTER,B” 988 “LEVER,LOCK,EDGE GUIDE”
929 “SPACER,PLATE,CUTTER,A” 989 “EXTENSION SPRING,0.33”
930 “STAR WHEEL ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP” 990 “FRAME ASSY.,ASF,LOWER”
905 “DETECTOR,HP;E” 991 “FRAME,ASF,RIGHT;C593”
950 “ASF UNIT,C593” 992 “GEAR,44.74”
952 “CORK,PAPER FEED” 1 “OUTER CARTON BOX,SP”
953 “LEVER,LOCK,EDGE GUIDE” 2 “INDIVIDUAL CARTON BOX,UPPER,SP”
954 “COVER,EDGE GUIDE;C593” 3 “INDIVIDUAL CARTON BOX,BOTTOM,SP”
955 “LEVER,EDGE GUIDE;C593” 4 “SUPPORT POST,ANGLE,SP”
956 “COMPRESSION SPRING,0.46” 5 “SUPPORT POST,FRONT,SP”
957 “COMPRESSION SPRING,3.23” 6 “PAD,SET,SP”
958 “SLIDER,EDGE GUIDE” 8 “HANDLE,SP”
960 “GUIDE,LOWER;C593” 9 “PE SHEET,2200X2500X0.4T”
961 “EXTENSION SPRING,1.11” 10 “PAD,TRAY”
962 “COMPRESSION SPRING,0.40” 11 “PAD,COVER REAR”
963 “ROLLER,SUB,LD,MIDDLE” 12 “PAPER,PROTECT IH”
964 “COMPRESSION SPRING,0.407” 13 “PAD,CORNER,SP”
965 “ROLLER ASSY.,LD,LEFT” 14 “PAD,FIXED PLATE,CR,SET”
966 “COVER,ROLLER,LD,LEFT” 15 “FIXED PLATE ASSY.,CR”
967 “COVER,ROLLER,LD,RIGHT” 16 “PINCH SCREW,4X25,F/ZN-3C”
968 “ROLLER ASSY.,LD,RIGHT” 17 “SPACER,PINCH SCREW”
970 “LEVER,PAD,RELEASE,LEFT” 18 “COLOR TIE,230”
971 “ROD SPRING,HOLDER,PAD” NON FIG GREASE G-26 (40GR)(B702600001)
973 “LEVER,PAD,RELEASE,RIGHT” NON FIG CODE TYPE MICROPHONE(U-505)
974 “EXTENSION SPRING,0.62” NON FIG MULTI SENSOR POSITION TOOL

Appendix Parts List 493


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-10. Stylus Pro 4800 Table 7-10. Stylus Pro 4800
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
NON FIG PAPER THICKNESS POSITION TOOL NON FIG THICKNESS GAUGE t=0.1mm
NON FIG CR LOCK TOOL NON FIG TORQUE SCREWDRIVER(4~12KG)
NON FIG Banding Standard Sample NON FIG GREASE G74
NON FIG HEAD EXCHANGE SUPPORT TOOL
NON FIG CR SHAFT PARALLELISM PRSS TOOL
NON FIG CR SUS PLATE SUPPORT TOOL
NON FIG FFC CHECKING TOOL
NON FIG P-COVER OPEN SENSOR CLOSE TOOL
NON FIG THICKNESS GAUGE T=0.75
NON FIG THICKNESS GAUGE T=0.65
NON FIG KEEP STAND CR SHAFT HEIGHT TOOL
NON FIG PG BELT TENSION SUPPORT TOOL
NON FIG PG GUAR POSITION ADJ.TOOL
NON FIG PG BELT TENSION WEIGHT
NON FIG CR SHAFT PARALLELISM ADG.TOOL
NON FIG CR SHAFT PASS/UN-PASS TOOL
NON FIG CR SHAFT PARALLELISM WEIGHT
NON FIG CUTTER HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT TOOL
NON FIG CUTTER PRESS DOWN TOOL
NON FIG PLATEN HEIGHT ADGUSTMENT TOOL
NON FIG CR SHAFT HEIGHT ADGUSTMENT TOOL
NON FIG CR SHAFT HEIGHT CHECK TOOL
NON FIG PF ROLLER HEIGHT ADJ.TOOL
NON FIG PLATEN RUBBER SETTING TOOL
NON FIG ALLEN WRENCH(3mm)
NON FIG CR ASSY HOLD TOOL
NON FIG CUTTER CAP
NON FIG PRESS TOOL FOR CUTTER PLATE
NON FIG ASF EXCHANGE SUPPORT TOOL
NON FIG BOXWRENCH(SPECIAL PROCESSING)
NON FIG CUTTER PLATE DITCH POSITION TOOL
NON FIG KEEP STAND FOR CUTTER PLATE&PLATEN
NON FIG CALIBRATE BLOCK&TOOL STAND
NON FIG TENSION GAUGE(5N;STD)
NON FIG TENSION GAUGE(10N)

Appendix Parts List 494


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Stylus Pro 4450 Table 7-11. Stylus Pro 4450

Table 7-11. Stylus Pro 4450 Figure Part Name


154 COVER,IF,CA00
Figure Part Name
156 PAD,AIR SEAL,D
01 FIXED CR,SET,ASP
157 FAN,BLOWER,C593
100 HOLDER,ROLL ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP
158 COVER,FAN,LEFT
103 ADAPTER
159 PAD,FAN
104 FLANGE,RIGHT
160 COVER,FAN,RIGHT
105 FLANGE,LEFT
161 PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP
106 SCROLLER,SAB ASSY.
162 COMPRESSION SPRING,3.47
107 SHAFT,STOPPER,L
163 LEVER,LOCK,PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE;C593
108 MAKEUP SCREW
164 PAPER GUIDE,PAPER EJECT,STACK
109 STACKER ASSEMBLY;C593;B,ESL,ASP
165 SHEET,PAPER GUIDE,PAPER EJECT,STACK
110 STACKER;C;C593
166 GROUND SPRING,PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE
111 GUIDE,STACKER;C593
168 GROUND PLATE,IF,CA00
112 STACKER,SUPPORT;C593
200 BOARD ASSY.,MAIN
113 TRAY ASSEMBLY;C593;B,ESL,ASP
300 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
114 LABEL,MODEL NAME;I
301 HARNESS
115 LABEL,ULTRA CHROME INK
302 HARNESS
117 LABEL,ASF SET
500 PRINTER MECHANISM,M-AB62-101,ESL,ASP
118 LABEL,ROLLPAPER SET,2/3 INCH
501 COVER ASSY.,SIDE,L,C593,ESL,ASP
119 LABEL,INK COLOR,LEFT;B
505 PANEL,FRONT,4C
120 COVER,PRINTER;593
507 STOPPER,COVER PRINTER,LEFT
121 COVER,I/H,LEFT;C593
508 STOPPER,COVER PRINTER,RIGHT
122 GUIDE,I/H,LEFT
511 COVER,INSIDE,RELEASE,LEVER;C593
123 LABEL,CHOKE CLEANING;B
512 COVER ASSY.,SIDE,R.C593,ESL,ASP
124 LABEL,PAPER LEVER SET UP
513 POROUS PAD,HOLDER,INK EJECT
125 LABEL,ACCESSORY
514 POROUS PAD,INK EJECT,SUB
126 LABEL,ROLL PAPER SET;B
516 COVER,FRONT,RIGHT,4C
127 LABEL,PAPER JAMMING REMOVAL
517 FRAME,PANEL,UNDER,RIGHT
128 COVER,REAR;C593
518 CONTROL,PANEL
129 KNOB,RELEASE,LEVER;C593
519 HARNESS,PANEL
130 KNOB,I/C,LOCK LEVER;C593
520 LOGO PLATE,13X54;G
139 LATCH,COVER I/C
550 HOLDER ASSY.,IC,LEFT,CA00,ESL ASP
150 FAN MOTOR,FRAME,SHIELD
552 FRAME,HOLDER,IC,UPPER
151 COVER,HARNESS;B
553 FRAME,HOLDER,IC,LOWER
152 FILTER,FAN ASSY.
554 PRESSING PLATE,IC

Appendix Parts List 495


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-11. Stylus Pro 4450 Table 7-11. Stylus Pro 4450
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
555 TORSION SPRING,158.6 611 POROUS PAD,BOX,FL,LOWER
556 FAN GEAR,34 612A BOX ASSY.,FLUSHING ASSY.;ESL ASP
557 CAM,IC,FIXING 613 HARNESS,PUMP,PHASE DETECTION
558 SHAFT,LOCK,IC 614 CLEANER,HEAD,A,ASP
559 FRAME,I/S,TOP 616 JOINT,BOX,FLUSHING
560 LEVER,IC,OPERATE 617 PUMP CAP ASSY. ESL,ASP
561 SPUR GEAR,22 618 SHEET,INK,STOPPER,C
562 FRAME ASSY.,NEEDLE,CA00,ESL ASP 619 TAPE,INK,STOPPER,C
563 MOUNTING PLATE ASSY.,HOLDER,IC,R 620 POROUS PAD,INK,STOPPER,C
566 GROUND PLATE,IH 621 LEAF SPRING,LOCK
567 DETECTOR,LEAF,B2 622 GUIDE RAIL,INK EJECT BOX,UPPER
568 BOARD ASSY.,IC 623 POROUS PAD,GUIDE,INK EJECT,B
569 CONNECTOR,CARTRIDGE,A 624 GUIDE,INK EJECT,B
571 CAM,VALVE 625 POROUS PAD,GUIDE,INK EJECT,A
572 HARNESS,I/S,L 626 GUIDE,INK EJECT,A
577 ORING,CONECTOR M7 627 BRACKET,INK EJECT BOX
578 CONNECTING SCREW,M7 628 GUIDE RAIL,INK EJEXT BOX,LEFT
579 JOINT,3 629 HOLDER ASSY.,BOARD,INK EJECT;ESL ASP
580 JOINT,3,L 630 HARNESS,CSIC,MT
581 HARNESS,CSIC,MB 631 POROUS PAD ASSY.,INK EJECT
582 HARNESS,CSIC,C 632 HARNESS,R1,C593
583 HARNESS,CSIC,M 633 HARNESS,R2,C593
584 HARNESS,CSIC,Y 634 HARNESS,L1,C593
585 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,K1 635 HARNESS,L2,C593
586 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,K2 636 HARNESS,PANEL,INTERMIT,C593
587 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,C1 638 RECYCL CLAMP
588 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,C2 639 GUTTER,INK ASSY.C593,ESL,ASP
589 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,M1 650 BOARD ASSY.,SUB
590 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,M2 651 DUCT,AIR,E
591 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,Y1 652 EXTENSION SPRING,2.55
592 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,Y2 653 GUIDE,FFC
607 GUTTER ASSY.,INK EJECT,ESL,ASP 654 EXTENSION SPRING,13.05
608 SPACER,FRAME,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT 655 MOTOR ASSY.,PF,C593
609 INDUCTION DUCT 656 DUCT,AIR,D
610 POROUS PAD,BOX,FL,UPPER 661 ROLLER,PAPER GUIDE

Appendix Parts List 496


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-11. Stylus Pro 4450 Table 7-11. Stylus Pro 4450
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
662 DETECTOR,LEAF,B2 706 CARRIAGE,C,C593
663 LABEL,CUTTER CHANGE 707 ORING,CONECTOR M7
665 HARNESS,FAN,A,C593 708 CONNECTING SCREW,M7
666 HARNESS,FAN,B,C593 709 JOINT,3
669 DUCT,AIR,A 710 JOINT,3,L
670 HARNESS,COVER OPEN 711 COVER,CR;C593
671 LEVER,ROLLER,SUB 712 BOARD ASSY.,MULTISENSOR
672 COVER,DUCT,C 713 HARNESS,MULTISENSOR
673 PAD,DUCT,RIGHT LOWER 714 LABEL,CUT POSITION
674 DUCT,AIR,C 715 HOLDER,MULTISENSOR
675 BOARD ASSY.,SUB-B 716 PLATE,BEARING,R;B
678 MOTOR ASSY.,PG 717 CAM,INCLINATION,R
679 SPUR GEAR,36 718 LEVER,FASTEN,FOR TRANSFER;B
680 EXTENSION SPRING,11.4 719 SHAFT,CONNECTION
681 COMBINATION GEAR,13.6,20.8 720 HOLDER,BEARING
682 SPUR GEAR,16 721 COMPRESSION SPRING,27.8
683 COMBINATION GEAR,40,20 722 POLY SLIDER,STW-FT40,t=0.25
684 COMBINATION GEAR,56,8.8 723 SHAFT,BEARING
685 DUCT,AIR,B 725 CAM,INCLINATION,L
687 PAD,DUCT,E 726 COMPRESSION SPRING,0.191
688 GROUND SPRING,PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE,LEFT 727 SLIDER,CR LOCK
689 DETECTOR,LEAF,B2 728 COMPRESSION SPRING,0.52
690 COVER,DETECTOR,PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE 729 GROUND PLATE,B;B
691 HARNESS,DETECTOR,PAPER GUIDE CENTER,C593 730 LEVER,INCLINATION
693 POROUS PAD,FRAME,SUB,RIGHT 731 EXTENSION SPRING,3.81
694 CASE FEET,CP-30-FF-4A,BLACK 732 CARRIAGE,A;B
695 BOARD ASSY.,SUB 734 PLATE,BEARING,L,C593
696 HARNESS,HEAD,INTERMIT,A 735 LEVER,CAM,C593
697 HARNESS,HEAD,INTERMIT,B 736 STOPPER,CARRIAGE
700 PRINT HEAD 737 SHAFT,INCLINATION CAM
701 CARRIAGE,B;B 738 HARNESS,HEAD,A
702 PLATE,DAMPER 739 HARNESS,HEAD,C
703 VALVE ASSY.,HEAD;C,ESL,ASP 740 SHEET,FFC
704 GROUND PLATE,A;B 741 SOLENOID ASSY.,CR,C593,ESL,ASP
705 POROUS PAD,CR 742 ADJUST PLATE,CR,UPPER

Appendix Parts List 497


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-11. Stylus Pro 4450 Table 7-11. Stylus Pro 4450
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
743 ADJUST PLATE,CR,LOWER 790-A SPACER,MIDDLE,0.05
744 C.P.P-TITE SCREW,2.6X8,F/ZN-3C 790-B SPACER,MIDDLE,0.1
745 SPACER,CARREAGE A 790-C SPACER,MIDDLE,0.2
746 BALL BEARING(B210151490) 790-D SPACER,MIDDLE,0.5
747 HARNESS,HEAD,B 790-E SPACER,MIDDLE,0.08
750 EXTENSION SPRING,11.4 791 HARNESS,DETECTOR,HP
751 EXTENSION SPRING,2.55 792 BALL BEARING(B210151490)
752 LEVER,LOCK,PG 793 WEIGHT,SCALE,CR
753 BUSHING,LOCK;B 795 PLATE,LINEAR,FRONT,B
756 EXTENSION SPRING,2.58 796 PLATE,LINEAR,REAR,A
757 LEVER,SCALE,CR 797 PLATE,LINEAR,FRONT,A
758 EXTENSION SPRING,3.86 798 PULLEY,SHAFT,CR
759 SCALE,CR 800 DETECTOR,LEAF,B2
760 BELT,CR 801 HARNESS,PAPER EJECT PHASE,LEFT
761 PULLEY,DRIVEN 802 LEVER,CHANGE PAPER EJECT,L
762 SHAFT,PULLEY 803 EXTENSION SPRING,6.99
763 COMPRESSION SPRING,29.4 805 MOUNT PLATE,MOTOR,ASF ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP
765 HOLDER SOLENOID UNIT ASP 806 COMBINATION GEAR,12,22.4
766 SOLENOID,CR,C593 807 SPUR GEAR,25.6
770 DETECTOR,HP;E 808 COMBINATION GEAR,12.8,36
772 BELT,PG 809 COMBINATION GEAR,13.6,28.8
773 HARNESS,DETECTOR,PG 810 SPUR GEAR,20
774 DETECTOR,HP;E 814 HOLDER,PLANET,RELEASE;B
778 BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER,CA00 815 SPUR GEAR,16,RELEASE
779 HOLDER,TUBE,B,C593 816 SPUR GEAR,22,RELEASE
780 PAD,TUBE 817 POLY SLIDER,STW-FT70,t=0.25
781 HOLDER,TUBE,A,C593 818 COMPRESSION SPRING,0.98
782 BOARD ASSY.,SUB 819 SHEET,FRAME,RIGHT
783 HARNESS,ENCODER 820 EXTENSION SPRING,2.41
784 COVER,TUBE,C593 821 LEVER,LOCK,DE
785 GUIDE,TUBE,CR,C593 822 SPUR GEAR,38
786 SHEET,TUBE 823 INTERMITTENT GEAR,RELEASE,TRANSMIT
787 GUIDE PLATE TUBE B,ASP,ESL 824 COMBINATION GEAR,22,16.8
788 SHEET,SUS 825 COMBINATION GEAR,16.74,24
789 HOLDER,FFC,C593 826 SPUR GEAR,28

Appendix Parts List 498


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-11. Stylus Pro 4450 Table 7-11. Stylus Pro 4450
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
827 SPUR GEAR,33.6,B 866 LEVER,DETECTOR,PAPER THICKNESS,A
828 SPUR GEAR,33.6 867 LEVER,DETECTOR,PAPER THICKNESS,B
829 COMBINATION GEAR,24,36 871 EXTENSION SPRING,0.22
830 COMBINATION GEAR,19.2,33.6 873 MOTOR ASSY.,CR
831 HOLDER,PLANET,CHANGE PAPER EJECT 876 SHAFT,RELEASE,ROLLER,DRIVEN
832 SPUR GEAR,17.6,PLANET 881 HARNESS,HAND INSERTION,REAR
833 SPUR GEAR,32.8,A 882 DETECTOR,PE
834 SPUR GEAR,44,PAPER EJECT 888 RELEASE ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP
835 LEVER,CHANGE PAPER EJECT,R 890 HOLDER,DETECTOR,PE
836 LEVER,LOCK,CHANGE PAPER EJECT,R;B 892 BOARD ASSY.,PW
837 EXTENSION SPRING,6.71 893 HARNESS,DETECTOR,PE
838 HARNESS,PAPER EJECT PHASE,RIGHT 895 HARNESS,MOTOR,CR
839 LEVER,LOCK,PLANET 900 ROLLER ASSY.,PAPER EJECT
840 COMBINATION GEAR,36,8.8 902 PULLEY,PAPER EJECT ROLLER
842 ROLLER ASSY.,BRAKE 903 EXTENSION SPRING,0.871
843 EXTENSION SPRING,1.38 904 WHEEL,DETECTION
845 SPUR GEAR,20,PLANET 905 DETECTOR,HP;E
846 SPUR GEAR,16,PLANET 907 SPUR GEAR,15.2
847 COMPRESSION SPRING,3.38 908 SCALLOP SPRING PIN-AW,2X10,F/B
848 COMPRESSION SPRING,0.78 909 HARNESS,LOAD PHASE
849 HOLDER,PLANET 910 HOLDER,PAPER EJECT ROLLER
850 BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER 911 PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,LEFT,ASSY.ESL,ASP
851 HARNESS,ENCODER,PF 912 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,I
852 HOLDER,SENSOR 913 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,H
854 PULLEY,BELT TENSION 914 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,G
855 EXTENSION SPRING,15.98 915 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,F
856 INTERMITTENT GEAR,40 916 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,E
857 SPUR GEAR,18 917 PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,RIGHT,ASSY.ESL,ASP
858 LEVER,RELEASE,ROLLER,DRIVEN 918 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,C
859 TORSION SPRING,615 919 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,B
861 HARNESS,PAPER THICKNESS,1 920 PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,MIDDLE,ASSY.ESL,ASP
862 HOLDER,DETECTOR,PAPER THICKNESS 921 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,D
863 DETECTOR,HP;E 922 PAD,AIRSEAL,E
864 HARNESS,PAPER THICKNESS,2 923 BUSHING,SPACER,PLATEN
865 EXTENSION SPRING,8.08 924 SPACER,PAPER EJECT

Appendix Parts List 499


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-11. Stylus Pro 4450 Table 7-11. Stylus Pro 4450
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
925 PAPER GUIDE,REAR ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP 986 GROUND SPRING,ASF
926 SPACER,PLATE,CUTTER,D 987 LEVER,HOPPER,RELEASE
927 SPACER,PLATE,CUTTER,C 988 LEVER,LOCK,EDGE GUIDE
928 SPACER,PLATE,CUTTER,B 989 EXTENSION SPRING,0.33
929 SPACER,PLATE,CUTTER,A 991 FRAME,ASF,RIGHT;C593
930 STAR WHEEL ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP 992 GEAR,44.74
950 ASF UNIT,C593,ESL,ASP 995 HOLDER,EDGE GUIDE,LEFT;B
952 CORK,PAPER FEED 998 COMPRESSION SPRING,9.80
953 LEVER,LOCK,EDGE GUIDE 999 HOLDER,EDGE GUIDE,RIGHT;B
954 COVER,EDGE GUIDE;C593 NON FIG INK CART.BOXED C,PIGT;7C110AS
955 LEVER,EDGE GUIDE;C593 NON FIG INK CART.BOXED M,PIGT;7C110AS
956 COMPRESSION SPRING,0.46 NON FIG INK CART.BOXED Y,PIGT;7C110AS
957 COMPRESSION SPRING,3.23 NON FIG INK CART.BOXED MBK,PIGT;7C110AS
958 SLIDER,EDGE GUIDE NON FIG SOFTWARE CD,E
960 GUIDE,LOWER;C593 NON FIG SETTING UP MANUAL
961 EXTENSION SPRING,1.11 NON FIG JETRAS JP-D300S
962 COMPRESSION SPRING,0.40
963 ROLLER,SUB,LD,MIDDLE
964 COMPRESSION SPRING,0.407
965 ROLLER ASSY.,LD,LEFT
966 COVER,ROLLER,LD,LEFT
967 COVER,ROLLER,LD,RIGHT
968 ROLLER ASSY.,LD,RIGHT
970 LEVER,PAD,RELEASE,LEFT
971 ROD SPRING,HOLDER,PAD
973 LEVER,PAD,RELEASE,RIGHT
974 EXTENSION SPRING,0.62
975 COMPRESSION SPRING,1.47
976 LEVER,PAPER RETURN,LEFT
977 EXTENSION SPRING,0.294
978 HOLDER,ROLLER,LD,SUPPORT,LEFT
979 ROLLER,LD,SUPPORT
982 LEVER,PAPER RETURN,RIGHT
983 HOLDER,ROLLER,LD,SUPPORT,RIGHT
985 BUSHING,LOCK,11.4

Appendix Parts List 500


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

† Stylus Pro 4480/4480C Table 7-12. Stylus Pro 4480/4480C

Table 7-12. Stylus Pro 4480/4480C Figure Part Name


150 FAN MOTOR,FRAME,SHIELD
Figure Part Name
151 COVER,HARNESS;B
01 FIXED CR,SET,ASP
152 FILTER,FAN ASSY.
100 HOLDER,ROLL ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP
154 COVER,IF,CA00
103 ADAPTER
156 PAD,AIR SEAL,D
104 FLANGE,RIGHT
157 FAN,BLOWER,C593
105 FLANGE,LEFT
158 COVER,FAN,LEFT
106 SCROLLER,SAB ASSY.
159 PAD,FAN
107 SHAFT,STOPPER,L
160 COVER,FAN,RIGHT
108 MAKEUP SCREW
161 PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP
109 STACKER ASSEMBLY;C593;B,ESL,ASP
162 COMPRESSION SPRING,3.47
110 STACKER;C;C593
163 LEVER,LOCK,PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE;C593
111 GUIDE,STACKER;C593
164 PAPER GUIDE,PAPER EJECT,STACK
112 STACKER,SUPPORT;C593
165 SHEET,PAPER GUIDE,PAPER EJECT,STACK
113 TRAY ASSEMBLY;C593;B,ESL,ASP
166 GROUND SPRING,PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE
114 LABEL,MODEL NAME;F
168 GROUND PLATE,IF,CA00
115 LABEL,ULTRA CHROME INK,K3VM
200 BOARD ASSY.,MAIN
117 LABEL,ASF SET
300 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
118 LABEL,ROLLPAPER SET,2/3 INCH
301 HARNESS
119 LABEL,INK COLOR,LEFT
302 HARNESS
120 COVER,PRINTER;593
500 PRINTER MECHANISM,M-AB62-100,ESL,ASP
121 COVER,I/H,LEFT,8C
501 COVER ASSY.,SIDE,L,C593,ESL,ASP
122 GUIDE,I/H,LEFT,8C
505 PANEL,FRONT,8C
123 LABEL,CHOKE CLEANING
507 STOPPER,COVER PRINTER,LEFT
124 LABEL,PAPER LEVER SET UP
508 STOPPER,COVER PRINTER,RIGHT
126 LABEL,ROLL PAPER SET;B
511 COVER,INSIDE,RELEASE,LEVER;C593
127 LABEL,PAPER JAMMING REMOVAL
512 COVER ASSY.,SIDE,R.C593,ESL,ASP
128 COVER,REAR;C593
513 POROUS PAD,HOLDER,INK EJECT
129 KNOB,RELEASE,LEVER;C593
514 POROUS PAD,INK EJECT,SUB
130 KNOB,I/C,LOCK LEVER;C593
517 FRAME,PANEL,UNDER,RIGHT
131 LABEL,CAUTION,TRANSPORT
518 CONTROL,PANEL
132 GUIDE,I/H,RIGHT,8C
519 HARNESS,PANEL
133 LABEL,INK COLOR,RIGHT
520 LOGO PLATE,13X54;G
134 COVER,I/H,RIGHT,8C
550 HOLDER ASSY.,IC,LEFT,CA00,ESL ASP
136 MIN SIDE LOCK#091Y
552 FRAME,HOLDER,IC,UPPER

Appendix Parts List 501


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-12. Stylus Pro 4480/4480C Table 7-12. Stylus Pro 4480/4480C
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
553 FRAME,HOLDER,IC,LOWER 593 HARNESS,CSIC,LM
554 PRESSING PLATE,IC 594 HARNESS,CSIC,LK
555 TORSION SPRING,158.6 595 HARNESS,I/S,R
556 FAN GEAR,34 596 HOLDER ASSY.,IC,RIGHT,CA00,ESL ASP
557 CAM,IC,FIXING 607 GUTTER ASSY.,INK EJECT,ESL,ASP
558 SHAFT,LOCK,IC 608 SPACER,FRAME,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT
559 FRAME,I/S,TOP 609 INDUCTION DUCT
560 LEVER,IC,OPERATE 610 POROUS PAD,BOX,FL,UPPER
561 SPUR GEAR,22 611 POROUS PAD,BOX,FL,LOWER
562 FRAME ASSY.,NEEDLE,CA00,ESL ASP 612A BOX ASSY.,FLUSHING ASSY.;ESL ASP
563 MOUNTING PLATE ASSY.,HOLDER,IC,R 613 HARNESS,PUMP,PHASE DETECTION
566 GROUND PLATE,IH 614 CLEANER,HEAD,A,ASP
567 DETECTOR,LEAF,B2 616 JOINT,BOX,FLUSHING
568 BOARD ASSY.,IC 617 PUMP CAP ASSY. ESL,ASP
569 CONNECTOR,CARTRIDGE,A 618 SHEET,INK,STOPPER,C
571 CAM,VALVE 619 TAPE,INK,STOPPER,C
572 HARNESS,I/S,L 620 POROUS PAD,INK,STOPPER,C
573 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,MB 621 LEAF SPRING,LOCK
574 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,C 622 GUIDE RAIL,INK EJECT BOX,UPPER
575 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,M 623 POROUS PAD,GUIDE,INK EJECT,B
576 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,Y 624 GUIDE,INK EJECT,B
577 ORING,CONECTOR M7 625 POROUS PAD,GUIDE,INK EJECT,A
578 CONNECTING SCREW,M7 626 GUIDE,INK EJECT,A
579 JOINT,3 627 BRACKET,INK EJECT BOX
580 JOINT,3,L 628 GUIDE RAIL,INK EJEXT BOX,LEFT
581 HARNESS,CSIC,MB 629 HOLDER ASSY.,BOARD,INK EJECT;ESL ASP
582 HARNESS,CSIC,C 630 HARNESS,CSIC,MT
583 HARNESS,CSIC,M 631 POROUS PAD ASSY.,INK EJECT
584 HARNESS,CSIC,Y 632 HARNESS,R1,C593
587 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,LLK 633 HARNESS,R2,C593
588 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,LC 634 HARNESS,L1,C593
589 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,LM 635 HARNESS,L2,C593
590 TUBE,SUPPLY,INK,ALK 636 HARNESS,PANEL,INTERMIT,C593
591 HARNESS,CSIC,BK 638 RECYCL CLAMP
592 HARNESS,CSIC,LC 639 GUTTER,INK ASSY.C593,ESL,ASP

Appendix Parts List 502


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-12. Stylus Pro 4480/4480C Table 7-12. Stylus Pro 4480/4480C
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
650 BOARD ASSY.,SUB 696 HARNESS,HEAD,INTERMIT,A
651 DUCT,AIR,E 697 HARNESS,HEAD,INTERMIT,B
652 EXTENSION SPRING,2.55 700 PRINT HEAD
653 GUIDE,FFC 701 CARRIAGE,B;B
654 EXTENSION SPRING,13.05 702 PLATE,DAMPER
655 MOTOR ASSY.,PF,C593 703 VALVE ASSY.,HEAD;C,ESL,ASP
656 DUCT,AIR,D 704 GROUND PLATE,A;B
661 ROLLER,PAPER GUIDE 705 POROUS PAD,CR
662 DETECTOR,LEAF,B2 706 CARRIAGE,C,C593
663 LABEL,CUTTER CHANGE 707 ORING,CONECTOR M7
665 HARNESS,FAN,A,C593 708 CONNECTING SCREW,M7
666 HARNESS,FAN,B,C593 709 JOINT,3
669 DUCT,AIR,A 710 JOINT,3,L
670 HARNESS,COVER OPEN 711 COVER,CR;C593
671 LEVER,ROLLER,SUB 712 BOARD ASSY.,MULTISENSOR
672 COVER,DUCT,C 713 HARNESS,MULTISENSOR
673 PAD,DUCT,RIGHT LOWER 714 LABEL,CUT POSITION
674 DUCT,AIR,C 715 HOLDER,MULTISENSOR
675 BOARD ASSY.,SUB-B 716 PLATE,BEARING,R;B
678 MOTOR ASSY.,PG 717 CAM,INCLINATION,R
679 SPUR GEAR,36 718 LEVER,FASTEN,FOR TRANSFER;B
680 EXTENSION SPRING,11.4 719 SHAFT,CONNECTION
681 COMBINATION GEAR,13.6,20.8 720 HOLDER,BEARING
682 SPUR GEAR,16 721 COMPRESSION SPRING,27.8
683 COMBINATION GEAR,40,20 722 POLY SLIDER,STW-FT40,t=0.25
684 COMBINATION GEAR,56,8.8 723 SHAFT,BEARING
685 DUCT,AIR,B 725 CAM,INCLINATION,L
687 PAD,DUCT,E 726 COMPRESSION SPRING,0.191
688 GROUND SPRING,PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE,LEFT 727 SLIDER,CR LOCK
689 DETECTOR,LEAF,B2 728 COMPRESSION SPRING,0.52
690 COVER,DETECTOR,PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE 729 GROUND PLATE,B;B
691 HARNESS,DETECTOR,PAPER GUIDE CENTER,C593 730 LEVER,INCLINATION
693 POROUS PAD,FRAME,SUB,RIGHT 731 EXTENSION SPRING,3.81
694 CASE FEET,CP-30-FF-4A,BLACK 732 CARRIAGE,A;B
695 BOARD ASSY.,SUB 734 PLATE,BEARING,L,C593

Appendix Parts List 503


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-12. Stylus Pro 4480/4480C Table 7-12. Stylus Pro 4480/4480C
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
735 LEVER,CAM,C593 782 BOARD ASSY.,SUB
736 STOPPER,CARRIAGE 783 HARNESS,ENCODER
737 SHAFT,INCLINATION CAM 784 COVER,TUBE,C593
738 HARNESS,HEAD,A 785 GUIDE,TUBE,CR,C593
739 HARNESS,HEAD,C 786 SHEET,TUBE
740 SHEET,FFC 787 GUIDE PLATE TUBE B,ASP,ESL
741 SOLENOID ASSY.,CR,C593,ESL,ASP 788 SHEET,SUS
742 ADJUST PLATE,CR,UPPER 789 HOLDER,FFC,C593
743 ADJUST PLATE,CR,LOWER 790-A SPACER,MIDDLE,0.05
744 C.P.P-TITE SCREW,2.6X8,F/ZN-3C 790-B SPACER,MIDDLE,0.1
745 SPACER,CARREAGE A 790-C SPACER,MIDDLE,0.2
746 BALL BEARING(B210151490) 790-D SPACER,MIDDLE,0.5
747 HARNESS,HEAD,B 790-E SPACER,MIDDLE,0.08
750 EXTENSION SPRING,11.4 791 HARNESS,DETECTOR,HP
751 EXTENSION SPRING,2.55 792 BALL BEARING(B210151490)
752 LEVER,LOCK,PG 793 WEIGHT,SCALE,CR
753 BUSHING,LOCK;B 795 PLATE,LINEAR,FRONT,B
756 EXTENSION SPRING,2.58 796 PLATE,LINEAR,REAR,A
757 LEVER,SCALE,CR 797 PLATE,LINEAR,FRONT,A
758 EXTENSION SPRING,3.86 798 PULLEY,SHAFT,CR
759 SCALE,CR 800 DETECTOR,LEAF,B2
760 BELT,CR 801 HARNESS,PAPER EJECT PHASE,LEFT
761 PULLEY,DRIVEN 802 LEVER,CHANGE PAPER EJECT,L
762 SHAFT,PULLEY 803 EXTENSION SPRING,6.99
763 COMPRESSION SPRING,29.4 805 MOUNT PLATE,MOTOR,ASF ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP
765 HOLDER SOLENOID UNIT ASP 806 COMBINATION GEAR,12,22.4
766 SOLENOID,CR,C593 807 SPUR GEAR,25.6
770 DETECTOR,HP;E 808 COMBINATION GEAR,12.8,36
772 BELT,PG 809 COMBINATION GEAR,13.6,28.8
773 HARNESS,DETECTOR,PG 810 SPUR GEAR,20
774 DETECTOR,HP;E 814 HOLDER,PLANET,RELEASE;B
778 BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER,CA00 815 SPUR GEAR,16,RELEASE
779 HOLDER,TUBE,B,C593 816 SPUR GEAR,22,RELEASE
780 PAD,TUBE 817 POLY SLIDER,STW-FT70,t=0.25
781 HOLDER,TUBE,A,C593 818 COMPRESSION SPRING,0.98

Appendix Parts List 504


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-12. Stylus Pro 4480/4480C Table 7-12. Stylus Pro 4480/4480C
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
819 SHEET,FRAME,RIGHT 857 SPUR GEAR,18
820 EXTENSION SPRING,2.41 858 LEVER,RELEASE,ROLLER,DRIVEN
821 LEVER,LOCK,DE 859 TORSION SPRING,615
822 SPUR GEAR,38 861 HARNESS,PAPER THICKNESS,1
823 INTERMITTENT GEAR,RELEASE,TRANSMIT 862 HOLDER,DETECTOR,PAPER THICKNESS
824 COMBINATION GEAR,22,16.8 863 DETECTOR,HP;E
825 COMBINATION GEAR,16.74,24 864 HARNESS,PAPER THICKNESS,2
826 SPUR GEAR,28 865 EXTENSION SPRING,8.08
827 SPUR GEAR,33.6,B 866 LEVER,DETECTOR,PAPER THICKNESS,A
828 SPUR GEAR,33.6 867 LEVER,DETECTOR,PAPER THICKNESS,B
829 COMBINATION GEAR,24,36 871 EXTENSION SPRING,0.22
830 COMBINATION GEAR,19.2,33.6 873 MOTOR ASSY.,CR
831 HOLDER,PLANET,CHANGE PAPER EJECT 876 SHAFT,RELEASE,ROLLER,DRIVEN
832 SPUR GEAR,17.6,PLANET 881 HARNESS,HAND INSERTION,REAR
833 SPUR GEAR,32.8,A 882 DETECTOR,PE
834 SPUR GEAR,44,PAPER EJECT 888 RELEASE ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP
835 LEVER,CHANGE PAPER EJECT,R 890 HOLDER,DETECTOR,PE
836 LEVER,LOCK,CHANGE PAPER EJECT,R;B 892 BOARD ASSY.,PW
837 EXTENSION SPRING,6.71 893 HARNESS,DETECTOR,PE
838 HARNESS,PAPER EJECT PHASE,RIGHT 895 HARNESS,MOTOR,CR
839 LEVER,LOCK,PLANET 900 ROLLER ASSY.,PAPER EJECT
840 COMBINATION GEAR,36,8.8 902 PULLEY,PAPER EJECT ROLLER
842 ROLLER ASSY.,BRAKE 903 EXTENSION SPRING,0.871
843 EXTENSION SPRING,1.38 904 WHEEL,DETECTION
845 SPUR GEAR,20,PLANET 905 DETECTOR,HP;E
846 SPUR GEAR,16,PLANET 907 SPUR GEAR,15.2
847 COMPRESSION SPRING,3.38 908 SCALLOP SPRING PIN-AW,2X10,F/B
848 COMPRESSION SPRING,0.78 909 HARNESS,LOAD PHASE
849 HOLDER,PLANET 910 HOLDER,PAPER EJECT ROLLER
850 BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER 911 PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,LEFT,ASSY.ESL,ASP
851 HARNESS,ENCODER,PF 912 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,I
852 HOLDER,SENSOR 913 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,H
854 PULLEY,BELT TENSION 914 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,G
855 EXTENSION SPRING,15.98 915 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,F
856 INTERMITTENT GEAR,40 916 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,E

Appendix Parts List 505


EPSON Stylus Pro 4400/4450/4800/4880/4880C Revision C

Table 7-12. Stylus Pro 4480/4480C Table 7-12. Stylus Pro 4480/4480C
Figure Part Name Figure Part Name
917 PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,RIGHT,ASSY.ESL,ASP 975 COMPRESSION SPRING,1.47
918 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,C 976 LEVER,PAPER RETURN,LEFT
919 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,B 977 EXTENSION SPRING,0.294
920 PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,MIDDLE,ASSY.ESL,ASP 978 HOLDER,ROLLER,LD,SUPPORT,LEFT
921 POROUS PAD,PAPER GUIDE,FRONT,D 979 ROLLER,LD,SUPPORT
922 PAD,AIRSEAL,E 982 LEVER,PAPER RETURN,RIGHT
923 BUSHING,SPACER,PLATEN 983 HOLDER,ROLLER,LD,SUPPORT,RIGHT
924 SPACER,PAPER EJECT 985 BUSHING,LOCK,11.4
925 PAPER GUIDE,REAR ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP 986 GROUND SPRING,ASF
926 SPACER,PLATE,CUTTER,D 987 LEVER,HOPPER,RELEASE
927 SPACER,PLATE,CUTTER,C 988 LEVER,LOCK,EDGE GUIDE
928 SPACER,PLATE,CUTTER,B 989 EXTENSION SPRING,0.33
929 SPACER,PLATE,CUTTER,A 991 FRAME,ASF,RIGHT;C593
930 STAR WHEEL ASSY.,C593,ESL,ASP 992 GEAR,44.74
950 ASF UNIT,C593,ESL,ASP 995 HOLDER,EDGE GUIDE,LEFT;B
952 CORK,PAPER FEED 998 COMPRESSION SPRING,9.80
953 LEVER,LOCK,EDGE GUIDE 999 HOLDER,EDGE GUIDE,RIGHT;B
954 COVER,EDGE GUIDE;C593 NON FIG INK CART.BOXED PBK,PIGT;6C110AS
955 LEVER,EDGE GUIDE;C593 NON FIG INK CART.BOXED C,PIGT;6C110AS
956 COMPRESSION SPRING,0.46 NON FIG INK CART.BOXED VM,PIGT;6C110AS
957 COMPRESSION SPRING,3.23 NON FIG INK CART.BOXED Y,PIGT;6C110AS
958 SLIDER,EDGE GUIDE NON FIG INK CART.BOXED LC,PIGT;6C110AS
960 GUIDE,LOWER;C593 NON FIG INK CART.BOXED VLM,PIGT;6C110AS
961 EXTENSION SPRING,1.11 NON FIG INK CART.BOXED LBK,PIGT;6C110AS
962 COMPRESSION SPRING,0.40 NON FIG INK CART.BOXED LLBK,PIGT;6C110AS
963 ROLLER,SUB,LD,MIDDLE NON FIG BLACK CONVERSION KIT BOXED;AS,6C
964 COMPRESSION SPRING,0.407 NON FIG SOFTWARE CD,E
965 ROLLER ASSY.,LD,LEFT NON FIG SETTING UP MANUAL
966 COVER,ROLLER,LD,LEFT NON FIG JETRAS JP-D300S
967 COVER,ROLLER,LD,RIGHT NON FIG BLACK CONVERSION KIT BOXED;AS,6C
968 ROLLER ASSY.,LD,RIGHT NON FIG SOFTWARE CD,E
970 LEVER,PAD,RELEASE,LEFT NON FIG SETTING UP MANUAL
971 ROD SPRING,HOLDER,PAD NON FIG JETRAS JP-D300S
973 LEVER,PAD,RELEASE,RIGHT
974 EXTENSION SPRING,0.62

Appendix Parts List 506

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen